Home

BM SPSS Statistics 20 Core System user manual

1. Chapter 3 Data Files Data files come in a wide variety of formats and this software is designed to handle many of them including Spreadsheets created with Excel and Lotus Database tables from many database sources including Oracle SQLServer Access dBASE and others Tab delimited and other types of simple text files Data files in IBMO SPSS Statistics format created on other operating systems SYSTAT data files SAS data files Stata data files Opening Data Files In addition to files saved in IBM SPSS Statistics format you can open Excel SAS Stata tab delimited and other files without converting the files to an intermediate format or entering data definition information Opening a data file makes it the active dataset If you already have one or more open data files they remain open and available for subsequent use in the session Clicking anywhere in the Data Editor window for an open data file will make 1t the active dataset For more information see the topic Working with Multiple Data Sources in Chapter 6 on p 91 In distributed analysis mode using a remote server to process commands and run procedures the available data files folders and drives are dependent on what is available on or from the remote server The current server name is indicated at the top of the dialog box You will not have access to data files on your local computer unless you specify the drive as a shared device and the folders c
2. 18 Chapter 3 Figure 3 4 Database Wizard selecting data E Database Wizard E Select Data Select the fields you want to retrieve Then click the arrow button or drag the fields to the Retrieve Fields list Tip Selecting a table selects all of its fields Available Tables rieve Fields in this Order iD At ale oreo D sD ae ale ate ICI E IA IA io pl INTERNET CALLID D aD A af A af fe ee L ee ee lo E Sort field names show M Tables views E Synonyms E System tables lt Beck ue gt rion cence ta Displaying field names To list the fields in a table click the plus sign to the left of a table name To hide the fields click the minus sign to the left of a table name To add a field Double click any field in the Available Tables list or drag it to the Retrieve Fields In This Order list Fields can be reordered by dragging and dropping them within the fields list To remove a field Double click any field in the Retrieve Fields In This Order list or drag it to the Available Tables list Sort field names If this check box is selected the Database Wizard will display your available fields in alphabetical order By default the list of available tables displays only standard database tables You can control the type of items that are displayed in the list m Tables Standard database tables 19 Data Files m Views Vi
3. MN amp Process End Date EndD Times y Month Time2 L BirthMonth irthH A 5 our Day of Month BirthDateTime inutes dina Seconds pb E Day of year Result Variable Type Date cera etia 00 conos ro Select the variables that represent the different parts of the date time m Some combinations of selections are not allowed For instance creating a date time variable from Year and Day of Month is invalid because once Year is chosen a full date is required m You cannot use an existing date time variable as one of the parts of the final date time variable you re creating Variables that make up the parts of the new date time variable must be integers The exception is the allowed use of an existing date time variable as the Seconds part of the new variable Since fractional seconds are allowed the variable used for Seconds is not required to be an integer m Values for any part of the new variable that are not within the allowed range result in a value of system missing for the new variable For instance if you inadvertently use a variable representing day of month for Month any cases with day of month values in the range 14 31 will be assigned the system missing value for the new variable since the valid range for months in IBM SPSS Statistics is 1 13 149 Data Transformations Specify Date Time Variable Created by Merging Variables Figure 8 20 Create date tim
4. Note The Make Cutpoints dialog box is not available if you scanned zero cases Equal Width Intervals Generates binned categories of equal width for example 1 10 11 20 and 21 30 based on any two of the following three criteria m First Cutpoint Location The value that defines the upper end of the lowest binned category for example a value of 10 indicates a range that includes all values up to 10 Number of Cutpoints The number of binned categories is the number of cutpoints plus one For example 9 cutpoints generate 10 binned categories m Width The width of each interval For example a value of 10 would bin age in years into 10 year intervals 122 Chapter 7 Equal Percentiles Based on Scanned Cases Generates binned categories with an equal number of cases in each bin using the aempirical algorithm for percentiles based on either of the following criteria Number of Cutpoints The number of binned categories is the number of cutpoints plus one For example three cutpoints generate four percentile bins quartiles each containing 25 of the cases m Width Width of each interval expressed as a percentage of the total number of cases For example a value of 33 3 would produce three binned categories two cutpoints each containing 33 3 of the cases If the source variable contains a relatively small number of distinct values or a large number of cases with the same value you may get fewer bin
5. Optionally you can m Create identification variables which allow you to trace a value in the new file back to a value in the original file Sort the data prior to restructuring Define options for the new file Paste the command syntax into a syntax window Restructure Data Wizard Select Type Use the Restructure Data Wizard to restructure your data In the first dialog box select the type of restructuring that you want to do 185 File Handling and File Transformations Figure 9 17 Restructure Data Wizard ad Restructure Data Wizard E Welcome to the Restructure Data Wizard This wizard helps you to restructure your data from multiple variables columns in a single case to groups of related cases rows or vice versa or you can choose to transpose your data The wizard replaces the current data set with the restructured data Note that data restructuring cannot be undone what do you want to do Restructure selected variables into cases Use this when each case in your current data has some variables that you would like to rearrange into groups of related cases in the new data set Restructure selected cases into variables Use this when you have groups of related cases that you want to rearrange so that data from each group are represented as a single case in the new data set O Transpose all data All cases will become variables and selected variables will become cases in the new data set Choosing
6. m Each command and or subtype identifier is enclosed in quotation marks when pasted because OMS command syntax requires these quotation marks m Identifier lists for the COMMANDS and SUBTYPES keywords must be enclosed in brackets as in IF COMMANDS Crosstabs Descriptives SUBTYPES Crosstabulation Descriptive Statistics Copying OMS identifiers from the viewer outline You can copy and paste OMS command and subtype identifiers from the Viewer outline pane gt In the outline pane right click the outline entry for the item gt Choose Copy OMS Command Identifier or Copy OMS Table Subtype This method differs from the OMS Identifiers dialog box method in one respect The copied identifier is not automatically pasted into a command syntax window The identifier is simply copied to the clipboard and you can then paste it anywhere you want Because command and subtype identifier values are identical to the corresponding command and subtype attribute values in Output XML format OXML you might find this copy paste method useful if you write XSLT transformations Copying OMS labels Instead of identifiers you can copy labels for use with the LABELS keyword Labels can be used to differentiate between multiple graphs or multiple tables of the same type in which the outline text reflects some attribute of the particular output object such as the variable names or labels There are however a number of factors that can affec
7. As you run analyses the commands for your dialog box selections are recorded in the log gt Open a previously saved syntax file or create a new one To create a new syntax file from the menus choose File gt New gt Syntax gt In the Viewer double click a log item to activate it Select the text that you want to copy gt From the Viewer menus choose Edit gt Copy gt Ina syntax window from the menus choose Edit gt Paste 269 Working with Command Syntax Using the Syntax Editor The Syntax Editor provides an environment specifically designed for creating editing and running command syntax The Syntax Editor features m Auto Completion As you type you can select commands subcommands keywords and keyword values from a context sensitive list You can choose to be prompted automatically with the list or display the list on demand m Color Coding Recognized elements of command syntax commands subcommands keywords and keyword values are color coded so at a glance you can spot unrecognized terms Also a number of common syntactical errors such as unmatched quotes are color coded for quick identification Breakpoints You can stop execution of command syntax at specified points allowing you to inspect the data or output before proceeding Bookmarks You can set bookmarks that allow you to quickly navigate large command syntax files m Auto Indentation You can automatically format
8. Custom Attribute Populate the list items with the union of the attribute values associated with variables in the target list control that contain the specified custom attribute m Syntax Displays the Syntax property of the associated combo box or list box control allowing you to make changes to the property For more information see the topic Combo Box and List Box Controls on p 356 358 Chapter 19 Text Control The Text control is a simple text box that can accept arbitrary input and has the following properties Identifier The unique identifier for the control This is the identifier to use when referencing the control in the syntax template Title An optional title that appears above the control For multi line titles use n to specify line breaks ToolTip Optional ToolTip text that appears when the user hovers over the control Mnemonic Key An optional character in the title to use as a keyboard shortcut to the control The character appears underlined in the title The shortcut is activated by pressing Alt mnemonic key The Mnemonic Key property is not supported on Mac Text Content Specifies whether the contents are arbitrary or whether the text box must contain a string that adheres to rules for IBM SPSSO Statistics variable names Default Value The default contents of the text box Required for execution Specifies whether a value is required in this control in order for execution to proceed If True
9. Data Element Markers Specify the order in which symbols should be used for the marker data elements in your new chart Marker styles are used whenever your chart includes marker data elements and you select a choice that includes patterns in the Style Cycle Preference group in the main Chart Options dialog box For example if you create a scatterplot chart with two groups and you select Cycle through patterns only in the main Chart Options dialog box the first two symbols in the Grouped Charts list are used as the markers on the new chart To Change the Order in Which Marker Styles Are Used Select Simple Charts and then select a marker symbol that is used for charts without categories gt Select Grouped Charts to change the pattern cycle for charts with categories To change a category s marker symbol select a category and then select a symbol for that category from the palette Optionally you can Insert a new category above the selected category m Move a selected category m Remove a selected category m Reset the sequence to the default sequence Data Element Fills Specify the order in which fill styles should be used for the bar and area data elements in your new chart Fill styles are used whenever your chart includes bar or area data elements and you select a choice that includes patterns in the Style Cycle Preference group in the main Chart Options dialog box For example if you create a clustered bar chart with
10. Hiding rows and columns in a table Click the category label for the row or column you want to hide then click the label again to select the entire row or column Note For legacy tables you select an entire row or column by right clicking the associated category label and choosing Select gt Data and Label Cells from the context menu gt Right click the category label and from the context menu choose Hide Category or gt From the View menu choose Hide Showing hidden rows and columns in a table gt From the menus choose View gt Show All Categories This displays all hidden rows and columns in the table If Hide empty rows and columns is selected in Table Properties for this table a completely empty row or column remains hidden Hiding and showing dimension labels Select the dimension label or any category label within the dimension gt From the View menu or the context menu choose Hide Dimension Label or Show Dimension Label Hiding and showing table titles To hide a title Select the title gt From the View menu choose Hide To show hidden titles gt From the View menu choose Show All 232 Chapter 11 TableLooks A TableLook is a set of properties that define the appearance of a table You can select a previously defined TableLook or create your own TableLook m Before or after a TableLook is applied you can change cell formats for individual cells or groups of cells by using cell p
11. N hol pol pol ni Restructure Data Wizard Variables to Cases Create One Index Variable Note The wizard presents this step if you choose to restructure variable groups into rows and create one index variable In this step decide what values you want for the index variable The values can be sequential numbers or the names of the variables in an original variable group You can also specify a name and a label for the new index variable 194 Chapter 9 Figure 9 29 Restructure Data Wizard Create One Index Variable Step 5 EH Restructure Data Wizard Step 5 of 7 Variables to Cases Create One Index Variable You have chosen to create one index variable The variable s values can be sequential numbers or the names of variables in a group Inthe table you can specify the name and label for the index variable What kind of index values Sequential numbers Index Values 1 2 3 O Variable names Edit the Index Variable Name and Label Levels Index Values 11 2 3 6 5 Gn For more information see the topic Example of One Index for Variables to Cases on p 192 Sequential numbers The wizard will automatically assign sequential numbers as index values m Variable names The wizard will use the names of the selected variable group as index values Choose a variable group from the list m Names and labels Click a cell to change the default
12. Select the script you want gt Click Run Python scripts can be run in a number of ways other than from Utilities gt Run Script For more information see the topic Scripting with the Python Programming Language on p 405 To Edit a Script gt From the menus choose File gt Open gt Script Select the script you want Click Open The script is opened in the editor associated with the language in which the script is written Autoscripts Autoscripts are scripts that run automatically when triggered by the creation of specific pieces of output from selected procedures For example you can use an autoscript to automatically remove the upper diagonal and highlight correlation coefficients below a certain significance whenever a Correlations table is produced by the Bivariate Correlations procedure Autoscripts can be specific to a given procedure and output type or apply to specific output types from different procedures For example you might have an autoscript that formats the ANOVA tables produced by One Way ANOVA as well as ANOVA tables produced by other statistical procedures On the other hand Frequencies produces both a frequency table and a table of statistics and you might choose to have a different autoscript for each Each output type for a given procedure can only be associated with a single autoscript You can however create a base autoscript that is applied to all new Viewer items prior to the application of
13. To paste complete GET DATA syntax into a syntax window select Paste it into the syntax editor for further modification Copying and pasting the Select statement from the Results window will not paste the necessary command syntax Note The pasted syntax contains a blank space before the closing quote on each line of SQL that is generated by the wizard These blanks are not superfluous When the command is processed all lines of the SQL statement are merged together in a very literal fashion Without the space there would be no space between the last character on one line and first character on the next line 27 Data Files Figure 3 12 Database Wizard results panel Results Your selection has resulted in the following SQL query SELECT ID AGE MARITAL ADDRESS INCOME INCCAT CAR CARCAT ED EMPLOY RETIRE EMPCAT GENDER RESIDE WIRELESS MULTLINE YOICE PAGER INTERNET CALLID CALLYVAIT CANTY OVWNVCR OVWNCD OVWNPDA OVWNPC OVWNFAX NEWS RESPONSE FROM demo What would you like to do with this query Retrieve the data have selected O Paste it into the syntax editor for further modification Save query to file O EE e ju Text Wizard The Text Wizard can read text data files formatted in a variety of ways Tab delimited files Space delimited files Comma delimited files Fixed field format files For delimited files you can also specify other characters as delimiters between va
14. gt From the menus choose Tools gt Toggle Comment Selection You can comment out a single command by positioning the cursor anywhere within the command and choosing Tools gt Toggle Comment Selection To uncomment text gt Select the text to uncomment Note that a command will be uncommented if any part of it is selected gt From the menus choose Tools gt Toggle Comment Selection 276 Chapter 13 You can uncomment a single command by positioning the cursor anywhere within the command and choosing Tools gt Toggle Comment Selection Note that this feature will not remove comments within a command text set off by and or comments created with the COMMENT keyword Formatting Syntax You can indent or outdent selected lines of syntax and you can automatically indent selections so that the syntax is formatted in a manner similar to syntax pasted from a dialog box The default indent is four spaces and applies to indenting selected lines of syntax as well as to automatic indentation You can change the indent size from the Syntax Editor tab in the Options dialog box Note that using the Tab key in the Syntax Editor does not insert a tab character It inserts a space To indent text Select the desired text or position the cursor on a single line that you want to indent gt From the menus choose Tools gt Indent Syntax gt Indent You can also indent a selection or line by pressing the Tab key T
15. 1 000 J 087 805 Months since Hire 067 085 Beginning Salary 087 075 Date of Birth 605 Covariances Previous Experience months Months since Hire 12 940 1205 248 019 4 635E 06 Beginning Salary 022 019 002 5 236E 09 Date of Birth 7 096E 06 4 635E 06 5 236E 09 2 485E 12 31 307 12 940 022 7 096E 06 List of dimension names As an alternative to positional arguments you can use dimension element names which are the text labels that appear in the table For example a simple two dimensional crosstabulation contains a single row dimension element and a single column dimension element 387 Output Management System each with labels based on the variables in those dimensions plus a single layer dimension element labeled Statistics if English is the output language m Dimension element names may vary based on the output language and or settings that affect the display of variable names and or labels in tables m Each dimension element name must be enclosed in single or double quotation marks To specify multiple dimension element names include a space between each quoted name The labels that are associated with the dimension elements may not always be obvious To see all dimension elements and their labels for a pivot table Activate double click the table in the Viewer From the menus choose View gt Show All and or If the pivoting trays aren t displayed from the menus choose Pivot gt P
16. Click OK to apply the value labels and other variable properties Defining Value Labels and Other Variable Properties Figure 7 2 Define Variable Properties main dialog box his Define Variable Properties E Scanned Variable List Current Variable Label Owns fax machine Un Me Role Variable Measurement Levet suggest ae rem pa ownty im owncd N ownpda N ownpe ONo 1 Yes 99 No answer Eee 3 Copy Properties Unlabeled Values Cases scanned Value list limit Erom Another Variable To Other Variables automatic Labels 98 Chapter 7 The Define Variable Properties main dialog box provides the following information for the scanned variables Scanned Variable List For each scanned variable a check mark in the Unlabeled U column indicates that the variable contains values without assigned value labels To sort the variable list to display all variables with unlabeled values at the top of the list Click the Unlabeled column heading under Scanned Variable List You can also sort by variable name or measurement level by clicking the corresponding column heading under Scanned Variable List Value Label Grid m Label Displays any value labels that have already been defined You can add or change labels in this column m Value Unique values for each selected variable This list of unique values is base
17. Date A numeric variable whose values are displayed in one of several calendar date or clock time formats Select a format from the list You can enter dates with slashes hyphens periods commas or blank spaces as delimiters The century range for two digit year values is determined by your Options settings from the Edit menu choose Options and then click the Data tab Dollar A numeric variable displayed with a leading dollar sign commas delimiting every three places and a period as the decimal delimiter You can enter data values with or without the leading dollar sign Custom currency A numeric variable whose values are displayed in one of the custom currency formats that you have defined on the Currency tab of the Options dialog box Defined custom currency characters cannot be used in data entry but are displayed in the Data Editor String A variable whose values are not numeric and therefore are not used in calculations The values can contain any characters up to the defined length Uppercase and lowercase letters are considered distinct This type is also known as an alphanumeric variable Restricted numeric A variable whose values are restricted to non negative integers Values are displayed with leading zeros padded to the maximum width of the variable Values can be entered in scientific notation To define variable type gt gt gt Click the button in the Type cell for the variable that you want to define
18. Enter one or more values For example you might enter extension_command spss and python Look at the downloads on the SPSS community for typical keywords to use Required Plug ins Check the boxes for any Plug ins Python or R that are required in order to run the custom components associated with the extension bundle Users will be alerted at install time if they don t have the required Plug ins 306 Chapter 16 Required R Packages Enter the names of any R packages from the CRAN package repository that are required for the extension bundle Names are case sensitive To add the first package click anywhere in the Required R Packages control to highlight the entry field Pressing Enter with the cursor in a given row will create a new row You delete a row by selecting it and pressing Delete When the extension bundle is installed IBM SPSS Statistics will check if the required R packages exist on the end user s machine and attempt to download and install any that are missing Required Python Modules Enter the names of any Python modules other than those added to the extension bundle that are required for the extension bundle Any such modules should be posted to the SPSS community http www ibm com developerworks spssdevcentral To add the first module click anywhere in the Required Python Modules control to highlight the entry field Pressing Enter with the cursor in a given row will create a new row You delete a row
19. F ail Years with curren IM Job satisfaction j E A Gender gender 2 YH Number of people Y g Wireless service Variable Information marital Label Marital status Type F4 Missing Values none Measurement Level Scale Walue Labels Visible The Visible column in the variable list indicates if the variable is currently visible in the Data Editor and in dialog box variable lists Visibility is controlled by variable sets For more information see the topic Variable sets on p 301 Go To Goes to the selected variable in the Data Editor window O Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 300 301 Utilities Paste Pastes the selected variables into the designated syntax window at the cursor location To modify variable definitions use the Variable view in the Data Editor To Obtain Variable Information gt From the menus choose Utilities gt Variables Select the variable for which you want to display variable definition information Data file comments You can include descriptive comments with a data file For IBM SPSS Statistics data files these comments are saved with the data file To add modify delete or display data file comments gt From the menus choose Utilities gt Data File Comments gt To display the comments in the Viewer select Display comments in output Comments can be any length but are limited to 80 bytes typically 80 characters in singl
20. IBM SPSS Statistics 20 Core System User s Guide E Note Before using this information and the product it supports read the general information under Notices on p 416 This edition applies to IBMO SPSS Statistics 20 and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions Adobe product screenshot s reprinted with permission from Adobe Systems Incorporated Microsoft product screenshot s reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation Licensed Materials Property of IBM Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 U S Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Preface IBM SPSS Statistics IBM SPSS Statistics is a comprehensive system for analyzing data SPSS Statistics can take data from almost any type of file and use them to generate tabulated reports charts and plots of distributions and trends descriptive statistics and complex statistical analyses This manual the JBM SPSS Statistics 20 Core System User Guide documents the graphical user interface of SPSS Statistics Examples using the statistical procedures found in add on options are provided in the Help system installed with the software In addition beneath the menus and dialog boxes SPSS Statistics uses a command language Some extended features of the system can be accessed only via command syntax Those features are not avai
21. In addition to defining variable properties in Variable View there are two other methods for defining variable properties The Copy Data Properties Wizard provides the ability to use an external IBM SPSS Statistics data file or another dataset that is available in the current session as a template for defining file and variable properties in the active dataset You can also use variables in the active dataset as templates for other variables in the active dataset Copy Data Properties is avallable on the Data menu in the Data Editor window Define Variable Properties also available on the Data menu in the Data Editor window scans your data and lists all unique data values for any selected variables identifies unlabeled values and provides an auto label feature This method is particularly useful for categorical variables that use numeric codes to represent categories for example 0 Male 1 Female To display or define variable attributes gt gt gt gt Make the Data Editor the active window Double click a variable name at the top of the column in Data View or click the Variable View tab To define new variables enter a variable name in any blank row Select the attribute s that you want to define or modify Variable names The following rules apply to variable names Each variable name must be unique duplication is not allowed Variable names can be up to 64 bytes long and the first character must be a l
22. Select the data type in the Variable Type dialog box Click OK 73 Data Editor Input versus display formats Depending on the format the display of values in Data View may differ from the actual value as entered and stored internally Following are some general guidelines m For numeric comma and dot formats you can enter values with any number of decimal positions up to 16 and the entire value is stored internally The Data View displays only the defined number of decimal places and rounds values with more decimals However the complete value is used in all computations m For string variables all values are right padded to the maximum width For a string variable with a maximum width of three a value of No is stored internally as No and is not equivalent to No m For date formats you can use slashes dashes spaces commas or periods as delimiters between day month and year values and you can enter numbers three letter abbreviations or complete names for month values Dates of the general format dd mmm yy are displayed with dashes as delimiters and three letter abbreviations for the month Dates of the general format dd mm yy and mm dd yy are displayed with slashes for delimiters and numbers for the month Internally dates are stored as the number of seconds from October 14 1582 The century range for dates with two digit years is determined by your Options settings from the Edit menu choose Options and th
23. These settings apply only to dialog boxes for opening and saving files and the last folder used is determined by the last dialog box used to open or save a file Files opened or saved via command syntax have no effect on and are not affected by these settings These settings are only available in local analysis mode In distributed analysis mode connected to a remote server requires IBM SPSS Statistics Server you cannot control the startup folder locations 329 Options Session Journal You can use the session journal to automatically record commands run in a session This includes commands entered and run in syntax windows and commands generated by dialog box choices You can edit the journal file and use the commands again in other sessions You can turn journaling off and on append or overwrite the journal file and select the journal filename and location You can copy command syntax from the journal file and save it in a syntax file Temporary Folder This specifies the location of temporary files created during a session In distributed mode available with the server version this does not affect the location of temporary data files In distributed mode the location of temporary data files is controlled by the environment variable SPSSTMPDIR which can be set only on the computer running the server version of the software If you need to change the location of the temporary directory contact your system administr
24. Working with the Model Viewer The Model Viewer is an interactive tool for displaying the available model views and editing the look of the model views For information about displaying the Model Viewer see Interacting with a model on p 251 There are two different styles of Model Viewer m Split into main auxiliary views In this style the main view appears in the left part of the Model Viewer The main view displays some general visualization for example a network graph for the model The main view itself may have more than one model view The drop down list below the main view allows you to choose from the available main views The auxiliary view appears in the right part ofthe Model Viewer The auxiliary view typically displays a more detailed visualization including tables of the model compared to the general visualization in the main view Like the main view the auxiliary view may have more than one model view The drop down list below the auxiliary view allows you to choose from the available main views The auxiliary can also display specific visualizations for elements that are selected in the main view For example depending on the type of model you may be able to select a variable node in the main view to display a table for that variable in the auxiliary view One view at a time with thumbnails In this style there is only one view visible and other views are accessed via thumbnails on the left of the Model Viewer Each v
25. di Years with current E Job satisfaction job PA Number of people in hd Set Name Set names can be up to 64 bytes Any characters including blanks can be used Variables in Set Any combination of numeric and string variables can be included in a set The order of variables in the set has no effect on the display order of the variables in the Data Editor or in dialog box variable lists A variable can belong to multiple sets To define variable sets gt From the menus choose Utilities gt Define Variable Sets Select the variables that you want to include in the set Enter a name for the set up to 64 bytes gt Click Add Set Using variable sets to show and hide variables Use Variable Sets restricts the variables displayed in the Data Editor and in dialog box variable lists to the variables in the selected checked sets 303 gt Utilities Figure 16 3 Use Variable Sets dialog box H Use Variable Sets Select variable sets to apply E ALLVARIABLES IM NEWVARIABLES 4 Demographics I Phone Services Computer Accessories creon uncneck an Only variables in the selected sets will appear in the Data Editor and in the dialogs C canoa ner m The set of variables displayed in the Data Editor and in dialog box variable lists is the union of all selected sets A variable can be included in multiple selected sets m The order of variables in the sel
26. fE Frequencies Title Define Variable Sets Notes Use Variable Sets Active Dataset 3 E ow All Variables L Statistics L Employment Category Sh Associate AutoScript al po a i Run Script E a Tb fl FF Production uov Create Edit AutoScript SPSS Processor is ready H 131 W 551 pt signate Vinde If the selected object does not have an associated autoscript an Open dialog prompts you for the location and name of a new script Browse to the location where the new script will be stored enter a file name and click Open The editor for the default script language opens You can change the default script language from the Scripts tab on the Options dialog For more information see the topic Script options in Chapter 17 on p 329 Type the code For help with converting custom Sax Basic autoscripts used in pre 16 0 versions see Compatibility with Versions Prior to 16 0 on p 408 Note By default the executable associated with the default script language will be used to run the autoscript You can change the executable from the Scripts tab in the Options dialog If the selected object is already associated with an autoscript the script is opened in the script editor associated with the language in which the script is written 405 Scripting Facility Associating Existing Scripts with Viewer Objects
27. gt Pivot tables To change footnote markers Select a footnote From the Format menu choose Footnote Marker Note that special markers are limited to two characters In addition footnotes with special markers precede those with sequential letters or numbers in the footnote area of the table so changing to a special marker may reorder the footnote list Renumbering footnotes gt When you have pivoted a table by switching rows columns and layers the footnotes may be out of order To renumber the footnotes From the Format menu choose Renumber Footnotes Editing footnotes in legacy tables gt For legacy tables you can use the Edit Footnotes dialog to enter and modify footnote text and font settings change footnote markers and selectively hide or delete footnotes When you insert a new footnote in a legacy table the Edit Footnotes dialog automatically opens To use the Edit Footnotes dialog to edit existing footnotes without creating a new footnote Double click the footnote area of the table or from the menus choose Format gt Edit Footnote Marker By default standard footnote markers are sequential letters or numbers depending on the table properties settings To assign a special marker simply enter the new marker value in the Marker column Special markers are not affected when you renumber footnotes or switch between numbers and letters for standard markers The display of numbers or letters for standard
28. lt category gt lt category gt lt cell text number decimals gt lt category gt lt dimension gt lt dimension gt lt pivotTable gt The preceding example is a simplified representation of the structure that shows the descendant ancestor relationships of these elements However the example does not necessarily show the parent child relationships because there are typically intervening nested element levels The following figure shows a simple frequency table and the complete output XML representation of that table Figure 21 15 Simple frequency table Gender Cumulative Percent 45 6 100 0 Valid Percent 45 6 54 4 100 0 Percent 45 6 54 4 100 0 Frequency 216 258 474 Female Male Total 397 Output Management System Figure 21 16 Output XML for the simple frequency table lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt outputTreeoutputTree xmins http xml spss com spss oms xmins xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xsi schemaLocation http xml spss com spss oms http xml spss com spss oms spss output 1 0 xsd gt lt command text Frequencies command Frequencies displayTableValues label displayOutlineValues label displayTableVariables label displayOutlineVariables label gt lt pivotTable text Gender label Gender subType Frequencies varName gender variable true gt lt dimension axis row text Gender label Gender varNa
29. target_list3 FORMAT NOTABLE 349 Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs BARCHART m target_list is the value of the Identifier property for the target list control At run time it will be replaced by the current value of the Syntax property of the control m Defining the Syntax property of the target list control to be ThisValue specifies that at run time the current value of the property will be the value of the control which is the set of variables in the target list Example Including Command Syntax from Container Controls Building on the previous example consider adding a Statistics sub dialog that contains a single group of check boxes that allow a user to specify mean standard deviation minimum and maximum Assume the check boxes are contained in an item group control as shown in the following figure Custom Dialog Builder statistics_subdialog File Edit View Window Help Ha YA A ET RM Statistics Mean Std deviation Minimum C Maximum Item Group Properties Property Value Identifier stats_group Title Statistics Required for execution False ISTATISTICS ThisValue An example of the generated command syntax would be FREQUENCIES VARIABLES varl var2 FORMAT NOTABLE STATISTICS MEAN STDDEV BARCHART 350 Chapter 19 The syntax template to generate this might look like FRI EQUENCIES VARIABLI FORMAT NOTABL
30. 2 for odd span values For example if the span is 5 the number of cases with the system missing value at the beginning and at the end of the series is 2 Prior moving average Average of the span of series values preceding the current value The span is the number of preceding series values used to compute the average The number of cases with the system missing value at the beginning of the series is equal to the span value Running medians Median of a span of series values surrounding and including the current value The span is the number of series values used to compute the median If the span is even the median is computed by averaging each pair of uncentered medians The number of cases with the system missing value at the beginning and at the end of the series for a span of n is equal to n 2 for even span values and n 1 2 for odd span values For example if the span is 5 the number of cases with the system missing value at the beginning and at the end of the series is 2 Cumulative sum Cumulative sum of series values up to and including the current value 163 Data Transformations Lag Value of a previous case based on the specified lag order The order is the number of cases prior to the current case from which the value is obtained The number of cases with the system missing value at the beginning of the series is equal to the order value Lead Value of a subsequent case based on the specified lead order The or
31. Choose a category from the drop down list of layers in the pivot table itself not the pivoting tray 230 Chapter 11 Figure 11 5 Selecting layers from drop down lists Cuna we No ce MA ee Total Owns No Count 1897 1962 3859 Expected Count 1903 4 1955 6 3859 0 within Owns PDA 49 2 50 8 100 0 Yes Count 327 323 650 Expected Count 320 6 329 4 650 0 within Owns PDA 50 3 49 7 100 0 Total Count 2224 2285 4509 Expected Count 2224 0 2285 0 4509 0 within Owns PDA 49 3 50 7 100 0 Go to layer category Go to Layer Category allows you to change layers in a pivot table This dialog box is particularly useful when there are many layers or the selected layer has many categories gt From the menus choose Pivot gt Go to Layers Figure 11 6 Go to Layer Category dialog box KE Go to Layer Category Visible Category for Each Dimension in Layer Categories for Internet Yes Inthe Visible Category list select a layer dimension The Categories list will display all categories for the selected dimension gt In the Categories list select the category that you want and then click OK or Apply 231 Pivot tables Showing and hiding items Many types of cells can be hidden including m Dimension labels m Categories including the label cell and data cells in a row or column m Category labels without hiding the data cells m Footnotes titles and captions
32. Data View or below Variable View the position where you want to insert the new variable gt From the menus choose Edit gt Insert Variable A new variable is inserted with the system missing value for all cases To move variables gt To select the variable click the variable name in Data View or the row number for the variable in Variable View gt Drag and drop the variable to the new location 86 Chapter 5 gt If you want to place the variable between two existing variables In Data View drop the variable on the variable column to the right of where you want to place the variable or in Variable View drop the variable on the variable row below where you want to place the variable To change data type You can change the data type for a variable at any time by using the Variable Type dialog box in Variable View The Data Editor will attempt to convert existing values to the new type If no conversion is possible the system missing value is assigned The conversion rules are the same as the rules for pasting data values to a variable with a different format type If the change in data format may result in the loss of missing value specifications or value labels the Data Editor displays an alert box and asks whether you want to proceed with the change or cancel it Finding cases variables or imputations The Go To dialog box finds the specified case row number or variable name in the Data Editor Cases
33. Embedding fonts ensures that the PDF document will look the same on all computers Otherwise if some fonts used in the document are not available on the computer being used to view or print the PDF document font substitution may yield suboptimal results Text options Table Options Pivot tables can be exported in tab separated or space separated format For space separated format you can also control m Column Width Autofit does not wrap any column contents and each column is as wide as the widest label or value in that column Custom sets a maximum column width that is applied to all columns in the table and values that exceed that width wrap onto the next line in that column m Row Column Border Character Controls the characters used to create row and column borders To suppress display of row and column borders enter blank spaces for the values Image Options The available image types are EPS JPEG TIFF PNG and BMP On Windows operating systems EMF enhanced metafile format is also available You can also scale the image size from 1 to 200 Production jobs with OUTPUT commands Production jobs honor OUTPUT commands such as OUTPUT SAVE OUTPUT ACTIVATE and OUTPUT NEW OUTPUT SAVE commands executed during the course of a production job will write the contents of the specified output documents to the specified locations This is in addition to the output file created by the production job When using OUTPUT NEW to create
34. Figure 5 8 Customize Variable View bs Customize Variable View E Reorder and select attributes to display in the Variable View Type Width Decimals Label Values Missing Columns Align Measure Role AnswerFormat DerivedFrom Formula FS aa Once the attributes are displayed in Variable View you can edit them directly in the Data Editor Variable Attribute Arrays The text Array displayed in a cell for a custom variable attribute in Variable View or in the Custom Variable Properties dialog box in Define Variable Properties indicates that this is an attribute array an attribute that contains multiple values For example you could have an attribute array that identifies all of the source variables used to compute a derived variable Click the button in the cell to display and edit the list of values Figure 5 9 Custom Attribute Array dialog box H Custom Attribute Array E Array DerivedFrom 2 Income2 3 Income3 81 Data Editor Customizing Variable View You can use Customize Variable View to control which attributes are displayed in Variable View for example name type label and the order in which they are displayed m Any custom variable attributes associated with the dataset are enclosed in square brackets For more information see the topic Creating Custom Variable Attributes on p 78 Customized display settings are saved with IBM SPSS Statistics data files You
35. From the menus choose Tools gt Toggle Bookmark The new bookmark is assigned the next available number from 1 to 9 It is represented as a square enclosing the assigned number and displayed in the gutter to the left of the command text Clearing Bookmarks To clear a single bookmark Position the cursor on the line containing the bookmark From the menus choose Tools gt Toggle Bookmark To clear all bookmarks From the menus choose Tools gt Clear All Bookmarks 275 Working with Command Syntax Renaming a Bookmark You can associate a name with a bookmark This is in addition to the number 1 9 assigned to the bookmark when it was created gt From the menus choose Tools gt Rename Bookmark gt Enter a name for the bookmark and click OK The specified name replaces any existing name for the bookmark Navigating with Bookmarks To navigate to the next or previous bookmark gt From the menus choose Tools gt Next Bookmark or Tools gt Previous Bookmark To navigate to a specific bookmark gt From the menus choose Tools gt Go To Bookmark Select the desired bookmark Commenting or Uncommenting Text You can comment out entire commands as well as text that is not recognized as command syntax and you can uncomment text that has previously been commented out To comment out text gt Select the desired text Note that a command will be commented out if any part of it is selected
36. In the Select a table or view panel select the database table gt Match variables in the active dataset to table fields by dragging and dropping variables to the Source of values column 54 Chapter 3 Figure 3 29 Export to Database Wizard adding records cases to a table E Export to Database Wizard gt Select variables to store in new records EERE EEA To store the values of a variable in new records place the variable in the cell next to the field name Use the arrow buttons or drag and drop SPSS Statistics SurveySubset Table SurveySubset E Wireless Recoded Recode Source of values Table fields 4 lo ID 4 Wireless Wireless 4 Muttine Muilline 4 Voice voice 4 Pager Pager 4d Internet Internet double 4 CalleriD CallerlD integer 4 SurveyDate datetime TEED p Right click on a variable for more information User Missing Values Export as valid values O Export numeric user missing values as nulls and export string user missing values as blank spaces pee ert gt rien Ceanes rte The Export to Database Wizard will automatically select all variables that match existing fields based on information about the original database table stored in the active dataset if available and or variable names that are the same as field names This initial automatic matching is intended only
37. Internet internet Caller ID callid E Call waiting callwait L Newspaper subscri SH Response response al Limit number of cases scanned to E Limit number of values displayed to 200 i e e Select the numeric or string variables for which you want to create value labels or define or change other variable properties such as missing values or descriptive variable labels gt Specify the number of cases to scan to generate the list of unique values This is particularly useful for data files with a large number of cases for which a scan of the complete data file might take a significant amount of time 97 Data preparation gt Specify an upper limit for the number of unique values to display This is primarily useful to prevent listing hundreds thousands or even millions of values for scale continuous interval ratio variables gt Click Continue to open the main Define Variable Properties dialog box gt Select a variable for which you want to create value labels or define or change other variable properties Enter the label text for any unlabeled values that are displayed in the Value Label grid gt Ifthere are values for which you want to create value labels but those values are not displayed you can enter values in the Value column below the last scanned value gt Repeat this process for each listed variable for which you want to create value labels
38. Select Change my environment variables Click New enter the name of the environment variable for instance SPSS_EXTENSIONS PATH in the Variable name field and the desired path s in the Variable value field To view the current locations for extension bundles the same locations as for extension commands and custom dialogs run the following command syntax SHOW EXTPATHS 308 Chapter 16 Required R packages The extension bundle installer attempts to download and install any R packages that are required by the extension bundle and not found on your machine If you do not have internet access you will need to obtain the necessary packages from someone who does Packages can be downloaded from http www r project org and then installed from within R For details see the R Installation and Administration guide distributed with R If installation of the packages fails you will be alerted with the list of required packages You can also view the list from the Extension Bundle Details dialog box once the bundle is installed For more information see the topic Viewing installed extension bundles on p 309 Note For UNIX including Linux users packages are downloaded in source form and then compiled This requires that you have the appropriate tools installed on your machine See the R Installation and Administration guide for details In particular Debian users should install the r base dev package from apt get install r base
39. an individual or an institution The wizard needs to know which variables in the current file identify the case groups so that it can consolidate each group into a single row in the new file Move variables that identify case groups in the current file into the Identifier Variable s list Variables that are used to split the current data file are automatically used to identify case groups Each time a new combination of identification values is encountered the wizard will create a new row so cases in the current file should be sorted by values of the identification variables in the same order that variables are listed in the Identifier Variable s list If the current data file isn t already sorted you can sort it in the next step How should the new variable groups be created in the new file In the original data a variable appears in a single column In the new data file that variable will appear in multiple new columns Index variables are variables in the current data that the wizard should use to create the new columns The restructured data will contain one new variable for each unique value in these columns Move the variables that should be used to form the new variable groups to the Index Variable s list When the wizard presents options you can also choose to order the new columns by index What happens to the other columns The wizard automatically decides what to do with the variables that remain in the Current File list It checks
40. and CCE You cannot change the format names or add new ones To modify a custom currency format select the format name from the source list and make the changes that you want 320 Chapter 17 Figure 17 5 Options dialog box Currency tab Positive value 1 234 56 Negative value 1 234 56 All Values Decimal Separator ee rua O Comma Negative Values Prefixes suffixes and decimal indicators defined for custom currency formats are for display purposes only You cannot enter values in the Data Editor using custom currency characters To create custom currency formats gt Click the Currency tab Select one of the currency formats from the list CCA CCB CCC CCD and CCE gt Enter the prefix suffix and decimal indicator values Click OK or Apply 321 Options Output label options Output label options control the display of variable and data value information in the outline and pivot tables You can display variable names defined variable labels and actual data values defined value labels or a combination Descriptive variable and value labels Variable view in the Data Editor Label and Values columns often make it easier to interpret your results However long labels can be awkward in some tables Figure 17 6 Options dialog box Output Labels tab 9 ee ee E l Outline Labeling Variables in item labels shown as babes O Variable values in item labels shown as
41. any autoscripts for specific output types For more information see the topic Script options in Chapter 17 on p 329 The Scripts tab in the Options dialog box accessed from the Edit menu displays the autoscripts that have been configured on your system and allows you to set up new autoscripts or modify the settings for existing ones Optionally you can create and configure autoscripts for output items directly from the Viewer Events that Trigger Autoscripts The following events can trigger autoscripts Creation of a pivot table m Creation of a Notes object m Creation of a Warnings object 404 Chapter 22 You can also use a script to trigger an autoscript indirectly For example you could write a script that invokes the Correlations procedure which in turn triggers an autoscript registered to the resulting Correlations table Creating Autoscripts You can create an autoscript by starting with the output object that you want to serve as the trigger for instance a frequency table gt In the Viewer select the object that will trigger the autoscript gt From the menus choose Utilities gt Create Edit AutoScript Figure 22 1 Creating a new autoscript Output2 Document2 Viewer File Edit View Data Transform Insert Format Analyze Graphs Add ons Window casal B E 60 Bhs Q0 ER Variables E OMS Control Panel 5 OMS Identifiers E Output S Log FE Data File Comments
42. breakpoint positions The navigation pane is to the left of the gutter and editor pane and displays a list of all commands in the Syntax Editor window and provides single click navigation to any command The error pane is below the editor pane and displays runtime errors Gutter Contents Line numbers breakpoints bookmarks command spans and a progress indicator are displayed in the gutter to the left of the editor pane in the syntax window Line numbers do not account for any external files referenced in INSERT and INCLUDE commands You can show or hide line numbers by choosing View gt Show Line Numbers from the menus Breakpoints stop execution at specified points and are represented as a red circle adjacent to the command on which the breakpoint is set Bookmarks mark specific lines in a command syntax file and are represented as a square enclosing the number 1 9 assigned to the bookmark Hovering over the icon for a bookmark displays the number of the bookmark and the name if any assigned to the bookmark Command spans are icons that provide visual indicators of the start and end of a command You can show or hide command spans by choosing View gt Show Command Spans from the menus The progress of a given syntax run is indicated with a downward pointing arrow in the gutter stretching from the first command run to the last command run This is most useful when running command syntax containing breakpoints and when stepping
43. ed Level of ed employ Years with retire Retired 10 FF FF FF Selected 29 of 29 variables i re The Save Data As Variables dialog box allows you to select the variables that you want saved in the new data file By default all variables will be saved Deselect the variables that you don t want to save or click Drop All and then select the variables that you want to save Visible Only Selects only variables in variable sets currently in use For more information see the topic Using variable sets to show and hide variables in Chapter 16 on p 302 To Save a Subset of Variables gt Make the Data Editor the active window click anywhere in the window to make it active gt From the menus choose File gt Save As gt Click Variables Select the variables that you want to save 45 Data Files Exporting to a Database You can use the Export to Database Wizard to m Replace values in existing database table fields columns or add new fields to a table m Append new records rows to a database table m Completely replace a database table or create a new table To export data to a database gt From the menus in the Data Editor window for the dataset that contains the data you want to export choose File gt Export to Database Select the database source gt Follow the instructions in the export wizard to export the data Creating Database Fields from IBM SPSS Statistics Varia
44. m Predicted value The predicted value of the target outcome of interest This is available for all models except those that do not have a target m Probability of predicted value The probability of the predicted value being the correct value expressed as a proportion This is available for most models with a categorical target m Probability of selected value The probability of the selected value being the correct value expressed as a proportion Select a value from the drop down list in the Value column The available values are defined by the model This is available for most models with a categorical target m Confidence A probability measure associated with the predicted value of a categorical target For Binary Logistic Regression Multinomial Logistic Regression and Naive Bayes models the result is identical to the probability of the predicted value For Tree and Ruleset models the confidence can be interpreted as an adjusted probability of the predicted category and is always less than the probability of the predicted value For these models the confidence value is more reliable than the probability of the predicted value Node number The predicted terminal node number for Tree models Standard error The standard error of the predicted value Available for Linear Regression models General Linear models and Generalized Linear models with a scale target This is available only if the covariance matrix is saved in the model f
45. ncome category in thousands Value Labels Name Fi Display frequency tables Basic steps in data analysis Analyzing data with IBM SPSS Statistics is easy All you have to do is Get your data into SPSS Statistics You can open a previously saved SPSS Statistics data file you can read a spreadsheet database or text data file or you can enter your data directly in the Data Editor Select a procedure Select a procedure from the menus to calculate statistics or to create a chart Select the variables for the analysis The variables in the data file are displayed in a dialog box for the procedure Run the procedure and look at the results Results are displayed in the Viewer Statistics Coach If you are unfamiliar with IBM SPSS Statistics or with the available statistical procedures the Statistics Coach can help you get started by prompting you with simple questions nontechnical language and visual examples that help you select the basic statistical and charting features that are best suited for your data To use the Statistics Coach from the menus in any SPSS Statistics window choose Help gt Statistics Coach The Statistics Coach covers only a selected subset of procedures It is designed to provide general assistance for many of the basic commonly used statistical techniques 7 Overview Finding out more For a comprehensive overview of the basics see the online tutorial From any IB
46. of the OK and Paste buttons The default is True Variable Filter Allows you to constrain the types of variables that can be transferred to the control You can constrain by variable type and measurement level and you can specify whether multiple response sets can be transferred to the control Click the ellipsis button to open the Filter dialog You can also open the Filter dialog by double clicking the Target List control on the canvas For more information see the topic Filtering Variable Lists on p 355 Syntax Specifies command syntax that is generated by this control at run time and can be inserted in the syntax template m You can specify any valid command syntax and you can use n for line breaks m The value 3 ThisValue specifies the run time value of the control which is the list of variables transferred to the control This is the default Note The Target List control cannot be added to a sub dialog Filtering Variable Lists Figure 19 3 Filter dialog box Filter rType String T Numeric excluding Date Time Date Time rMeasurement Level V Nominal Y Ordinal M Scale rSpecial Multiple Response Sets e xa The Filter dialog box associated with source and target variable lists allows you to filter the types of variables from the active dataset that can appear in the lists You can also specify whether multiple response sets associated with the active d
47. xIs Microsoft Excel 97 workbook The maximum number of variables is 256 any additional variables beyond the first 256 are dropped If the dataset contains more than 65 356 cases multiple sheets are created in the workbook Excel 2 1 xls Microsoft Excel 2 1 spreadsheet file The maximum number of variables is 256 and the maximum number of rows is 16 384 1 2 3 Release 3 0 wk3 Lotus 1 2 3 spreadsheet file release 3 0 The maximum number of variables that you can save is 256 1 2 3 Release 2 0 wk1 Lotus 1 2 3 spreadsheet file release 2 0 The maximum number of variables that you can save is 256 1 2 3 Release 1 0 wks Lotus 1 2 3 spreadsheet file release 1A The maximum number of variables that you can save is 256 41 Data Files SYLK sIk Symbolic link format for Microsoft Excel and Multiplan spreadsheet files The maximum number of variables that you can save is 256 dBASE IV dbf dBASE IV format dBASE Ill dbf dBASE III format dBASE Il dbf dBASE II format SAS v9 Windows sas7bdat SAS versions 9 for Windows SAS v9 UNIX sas7bdat SAS versions 9 for UNIX SAS v7 8 Windows short extension sd7 SAS versions 7 8 for Windows short filename format SAS v7 8 Windows long extension sas7bdat SAS versions 7 8 for Windows long filename format SAS v7 8 for UNIX sas7bdat SAS v8 for UNIX SAS v6 for Windows sd2 SAS v6 file format for Windows OS2 SAS v6 for U
48. you must first ungroup the items that are currently in the group Then you can create a new group that includes the additional items Ungrouping rows or columns gt gt Click anywhere in the group label for the rows or columns that you want to ungroup From the menus choose Edit gt Ungroup Ungrouping automatically deletes the group label Rotating row or column labels gt You can rotate labels between horizontal and vertical display for the innermost column labels and the outermost row labels in a table From the menus choose Format gt Rotate Inner Column Labels or Format gt Rotate Outer Row Labels Figure 11 2 Rotated column labels Cumulative Frequency Percent Valid Percent Percent Did not complete high school 1390 217 217 217 High school degree 1936 30 3 30 3 52 0 Some college College degree E ot z Post undergraduate dec 8 238138 F 5 gt 0 ED Total 2 a a 30 ral o Did not complete high school 1390 21 7 AE 217 High school degree 1936 30 3 30 3 52 0 Some college 1360 213 213 732 College degree 1355 21 2 21 2 94 4 Post undergraduate degree 359 5 6 5 6 100 0 Total 6400 100 0 100 0 228 Chapter 11 Only the innermost column labels and the outermost row labels can be rotated Undoing changes You can undo the most recent change or all changes to an activated pivot table Both actions only apply to changes made since the most recent activat
49. 00 c cece eee eens 136 Automatic Recode n annann ccc ec eee nent ene e nee nees 138 Rank Gassias a la e Gk oa bit be Gs Hee thoes dais oe dee ee 141 Rank Cases TypeS 0 0 0 0 aaea cen eee E ee aE a 142 Rank Gases Tes rai ai ann cach Rodos a Baraca oe areal Sedona tees 143 Date and Time Wizard 0 ce et da tai dad teen nee eens 143 Dates and Times in IBM SPSS Statistics 0 0 00 ce eee eens 145 Create a Date Time Variable from a String 0 00 cece eee 146 Create a Date Time Variable from a Set of Variables ooooooooooooo o 147 Add or Subtract Values from Date Time Variables 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eee 149 Extract Part of a Date Time Variable 0 0 0 00 c cece eee eee 157 Time Series Data Transformations 0 00 00 cece ee tt teen ene eens 159 Define Dates ss cs scd con cae oh whee deh rr radar 160 Create Time Series 161 Replace Missing Values 0 000 cece eee 163 9 File Handling and File Transformations 165 SOM CASES sik wis dace halo a A ea dey don ad 165 Sort Variables 166 Than POS y 32 95 prist iaia AA hehe aor Mien wheel Ae Ge Neda eee 167 Merging Data FIGS piat etae ed aiad aa senda he eana CAE EM OE EE OE EES eed Hes 168 Add Cass oxida Da ind aa aids Fae dave ia aaa cs 168 Add Cases Rename o 171 Add Cases Dictionary Information 0 00 ce cece eee ee 171 Merging More Than Two Data Sources o oooccoccccco cece eee eens 1
50. 1 Server Login dialog box EN Server Login Local Computer Default Server Name Description Y NetworkServer Network Server Checkmark indicates start up connection O Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 61 62 Chapter 4 You can add modify or delete remote servers in the list Remote servers usually require a user ID and password and a domain name may also be necessary Contact your system administrator for information about available servers a user ID and password domain names and other connection information You can select a default server and save the user ID domain name and password that are associated with any server You are automatically connected to the default server when you start a new session If you are licensed to use the Statistics Adapter and your site is running IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services 3 5 or later you can click Search to view a list of servers that are available on your network If you are not logged on to a IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository you will be prompted to enter connection information before you can view the list of servers Adding and Editing Server Login Settings Use the Server Login Settings dialog box to add or edit connection information for remote servers for use in distributed analysis mode Contact your system administrator for a list of available servers port numbers for the servers and additional connect
51. 10 10 72 68 Server on windows 32 bit 3016 10 11 10 42 Server on HP UX 3353 E Cancel Help 64 Chapter 4 Select one or more servers and click OK to add them to the Server Login dialog box Although you can manually add servers in the Server Login dialog box searching for available servers lets you connect to servers without requiring that you know the correct server name and port number This information is automatically provided However you still need the correct logon information such as user name domain and password Opening Data Files from a Remote Server In distributed analysis mode the Open Remote File dialog box replaces the standard Open File dialog box m The contents of the list of available files folders and drives depends on what is available on or from the remote server The current server name is indicated at the top of the dialog box m n distributed analysis mode you will not have access to files on your local computer unless you specify the drive as a shared device or specify the folders containing your data files as shared folders Consult the documentation for your operating system for information on how to share folders on your local computer with the server network m Ifthe server is running a different operating system for example you are running Windows and the server is running UNIX you probably won t have access to local data files in distributed analysis mode
52. 2 and COMPUTE lagvar LAG varl EXECUTE COMPUTE varl var1 2 279 Working with Command Syntax yield very different results for the value of lagvar since the former uses the transformed value of varl while the latter uses the original value Chapter 14 Overview of the chart facility High resolution charts and plots are created by the procedures on the Graphs menu and by many of the procedures on the Analyze menu This chapter provides an overview of the chart facility Building and editing a chart Before you can create a chart you need to have your data in the Data Editor You can enter the data directly into the Data Editor open a previously saved data file or read a spreadsheet tab delimited data file or database file The Tutorial selection on the Help menu has online examples of creating and modifying a chart and the online Help system provides information about creating and modifying all chart types Building Charts The Chart Builder allows you to build charts from predefined gallery charts or from the individual parts for example axes and bars You build a chart by dragging and dropping the gallery charts or basic elements onto the canvas which is the large area to the right of the Variables list in the Chart Builder dialog box As you are building the chart the canvas displays a preview of the chart Although the preview uses defined variable labels and measurement levels it does not display
53. 2 1 2 007 1 1 2 004 af 002 No use the data as currently sorted Eao eh Set How are the rows ordered in the current file Consider how the current data are sorted and which variables you are using to identify case groups specified in the previous step m Yes The wizard will automatically sort the current data by the identification variables in the same order that variables are listed in the Identifier Variable s list in the previous step Choose this when the data aren t sorted by the identification variables or when you aren t sure This choice requires a separate pass of the data but it guarantees that the rows are correctly ordered for restructuring m No The wizard will not sort the current data Choose this when you are sure that the current data are sorted by the variables that identify case groups 199 File Handling and File Transformations Restructure Data Wizard Cases to Variables Options Note The wizard presents this step if you choose to restructure case groups into columns In this step specify options for the new restructured file Figure 9 34 Restructure Data Wizard Options Step 4 E Restructure Data Wizard Step 4 of 5 Cases to Variables Options Inthis step you can set options that will be applied to the restructured data file Order of New Variable Groups o Group by original variable for example w1 w2 w3 h1
54. 20 columns will be displayed in blocks of 500 rows The Widow orphan tolerance setting can cause fewer or more rows to be displayed than the value specified for Rows to display 327 Options Table Rendering Render tables as legacy tables Legacy tables may render slowly and are only recommended if you require compatibility with SPSS Statistics releases prior to 20 For release 20 and higher all tables have full support for pivoting and editing m Tables other than legacy tables created in SPSS Statistics release 20 or later and lightweight tables in output documents that are modified in release 20 or later but created in release 19 cannot be viewed in releases prior to 19 0 0 2 Such tables are viewable in release 19 0 0 2 where they are rendered as lightweight tables however they may not render the same as in release 20 or later m Lightweight tables created in SPSS Statistics release 19 automatically have full support for pivoting and editing in release 20 or later Default Editing Mode Controls activation of pivot tables in the Viewer window or in a separate window By default double clicking a pivot table activates all but very large tables in the Viewer window You can choose to activate pivot tables in a separate window or select a size setting that will open smaller pivot tables in the Viewer window and larger pivot tables in a separate window Copying wide tables to the clipboard in rich text format When pivot tabl
55. 40 marital address income inccat Married 72 00 50 74 Unmarried 153 00 75 Married 28 00 25 49 Married 26 00 25 49 Unmarried 23 00 Under 25 Married 76 00 75 Unmarried 40 00 25 49 Unmarried 57 00 50 74 Unmarried 24 00 Under 25 Married 89 00 75 Married 72 00 50 74 Many of the features of Data View are similar to the features that are found in spreadsheet applications There are however several important distinctions m Rows are cases Each row represents a case or an observation For example each individual respondent to a questionnaire is a case m Columns are variables Each column represents a variable or characteristic that is being measured For example each item on a questionnaire is a variable m Cells contain values Each cell contains a single value of a variable for a case The cell is where the case and the variable intersect Cells contain only data values Unlike spreadsheet programs cells in the Data Editor cannot contain formulas m The data file is rectangular The dimensions of the data file are determined by the number of cases and variables You can enter data in any cell If you enter data in a cell outside the boundaries of the defined data file the data rectangle is extended to include any rows Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 67 68 Chapter 5 and or columns between that cell and the file boundaries There are no empty cells within the boun
56. 5 Missing Values dialog box Es Missing Values No missing values Discrete missing values 999 Range plus one optional discrete missing value Esc conca uso m You can enter up to three discrete individual missing values a range of missing values or a range plus one discrete value Ranges can be specified only for numeric variables All string values including null or blank values are considered to be valid unless you explicitly define them as missing m Missing values for string variables cannot exceed eight bytes There is no limit on the defined width of the string variable but defined missing values cannot exceed eight bytes m To define null or blank values as missing for a string variable enter a single space in one of the fields under the Discrete missing values selection To define missing values Roles Click the button in the Missing cell for the variable that you want to define Enter the values or range of values that represent missing data Some dialogs support predefined roles that can be used to pre select variables for analysis When you open one of these dialogs variables that meet the role requirements will be automatically displayed in the destination list s Available roles are Input The variable will be used as an input e g predictor independent variable Target The variable will be used as an output or target e g dependent vari
57. 69 variable pairs 184 creating 184 variable sets 301 302 defining 301 using 302 Variable View 68 customizing 81 318 variables 5 69 85 184 300 301 312 defining 69 defining variable sets 301 definition information 300 display order in dialog boxes 312 finding in Data Editor 86 in dialog boxes 3 inserting new variables 85 moving 85 recoding 133 134 136 138 renaming for merged data files 171 restructuring into cases 184 selecting in dialog boxes 5 sorting 166 variable information in dialog boxes 5 vertical label text 227 Viewer 202 205 223 224 314 321 changing outline font 205 changing outline levels 205 changing outline sizes 205 collapsing outline 204 deleting output 203 display options 314 displaying data values 321 displaying value labels 321 displaying variable labels 321 displaying variable names 321 excluding output types with OMS 388 expanding outline 204 find and replace information 206 hiding results 203 moving output 203 outline 204 outline pane 202 results pane 202 saving document 224 search and replace information 206 space between output items 223 virtual active file 58 Visual Bander 117 weighted data 200 and restructured data files 200 weighting cases 182 fractional weights in Crosstabs 182 wide tables pasting into Microsoft Word 208 window splitter Data Editor 89 syntax editor 270 windows 1 active window 2 designated window 2
58. 864 00 1014 00 2 2 636 00 684 00 When you run the paired samples test you can now use bef and aft as the variable pair Restructure Data Wizard Variables to Cases Number of Variable Groups Note The wizard presents this step if you choose to restructure variable groups into rows In this step decide how many variable groups in the current file that you want to restructure in the new file How many variable groups are in the current file Think about how many variable groups exist in the current data A group of related columns called a variable group records repeated measures of the same variable in separate columns For example if you have three columns in the current data w1 w2 and w3 that record width you have one variable group If you have an additional three columns A h2 and h3 that record height you have two variable groups How many variable groups should be in the new file Consider how many variable groups you want to have represented in the new data file You do not have to restructure all variable groups into the new file 189 File Handling and File Transformations Figure 9 22 Restructure Data Wizard Number of Variable Groups Step 2 EN Restructure Data Wizard Step 2 of 7 Variables to Cases Number of Variable Groups You have chosen to restructure selected variables into groups of related cases in the new file A group of related variables called a variable group represents m
59. Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help 12 id 12 id wrkstat marital childs age educ_ a fan 1 1 1 3 2 60 2 2 2 2 5 D 27 7 3 3 1 1 2 36 2 4 4 1 5 D 21 3 5 5 1 5 0 35 6 6 6 1 3 1 33 6 7 7 1 4 0 43 2 8 8 1 5 D 29 3 y lt Data View Variable View lt a Tol By default each data source that you open is displayed in a new Data Editor window See General options for information on changing the default behavior to only display one dataset at a time in a single Data Editor window m Any previously open data sources remain open and available for further use m When you first open a data source it automatically becomes the active dataset m You can change the active dataset simply by clicking anywhere in the Data Editor window of the data source that you want to use or by selecting the Data Editor window for that data source from the Window menu O Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 91 92 Chapter 6 m Only the variables in the active dataset are available for analysis Figure 6 2 Variable list containing variables in the active dataset EX demo sav DataSet1 Data Editor ag Ee File Edit View Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help 110 pager 0 0 marital address income 55 1 12 72 00 3 00 36 20 y Pal a an ari nn AON aca survey_sample sav DataSet2 Data Editor alba Ei le Edit View Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add o
60. Click a cell to change the default variable name and provide a descriptive variable label for the count variable Restructure Data Wizard Cases to Variables Select Variables Note The wizard presents this step if you choose to restructure case groups into columns In this step provide information about how the variables in the current file should be used in the new file 197 File Handling and File Transformations Figure 9 32 Restructure Data Wizard Select Variables Step 2 EH Restructure Data Wizard Step 2 of 5 Cases to Variables Select Variables Data from case groups in the current file will be restructured into single cases in the new file Choose variables that identify case groups by moving those variables into the Identifier Variable list Optionally you can also choose Index Variables 5 The variables that remain in the list of Variables in the Current File either contain data that vary within a case group or data that do not vary A variable with data that vary will become a group of new variables in the restructured file A variable with data that do not vary will be copied into the new file Variables in the Current File Identifier Variables da id 2 Index Variable s da time 2 ae Ges a What identifies case groups in the current data A case group is a group of rows that are related because they measure the same observational unit for example
61. Custom Variable Attributes in Chapter 5 on p 77 111 Data preparation m Replace deletes any custom attributes for the target variable and replaces them with the defined attributes from the source variable m Merge merges the defined attributes from the source variable with any existing defined attributes for the target variable Missing Values Missing values are values identified as representing missing data for example 98 for Do not know and 99 for Not applicable Typically these values also have defined value labels that describe what the missing value codes stand for Any existing defined missing values for the target variable are deleted and replaced with the defined missing values from the source variable Variable Label Descriptive variable labels can contain spaces and reserved characters not allowed in variable names If you re copying variable properties from a single source variable to multiple target variables you might want to think twice before selecting this option Measurement Level The measurement level can be nominal ordinal or scale Role Some dialogs support the ability to pre select variables for analysis based on defined roles For more information see the topic Roles in Chapter 5 on p 75 Formats For numeric variables this controls numeric type such as numeric date or currency width total number of displayed characters including leading and trailing characters and decimal indicator an
62. DRS Case data in a Quancept drs drz or dru file m Quanvert Database Case data in a Quanvert database 37 Data Files m Data Collection Database MS SQL Server Case data in a relational database in SQL Server m Data Collection XML Data File Case data in an XML file Case Data Location The file that contains the case data The format of this file must be consistent with the selected case data type Note The extent to which other settings on the Connection tab or any settings on the other Data Link Properties tabs may or may not affect reading Data Collection data into IBM SPSS Statistics is not known so we recommend that you do not change any of them Select Variables tab You can select a subset of variables to read By default all standard variables in the data source are displayed and selected m Show System variables Displays any system variables including variables that indicate interview status in progress completed finish date and so on You can then select any system variables that you want to include By default all system variables are excluded m Show Codes variables Displays any variables that represent codes that are used for open ended Other responses for categorical variables You can then select any Codes variables that you want to include By default all Codes variables are excluded m Show SourceFile variables Displays any variables that contain filenames of images of sca
63. Database Wizard Select a table or view y Connected to Database dm_demo mdb EE Tables and Views CombinedTable Demographicinformation SurveyResponses SurveySubset Value Labels Show Y Tables E Views Y Synonyms E System tables ES e By default the list displays only standard database tables You can control the type of items that are displayed in the list m Tables Standard database tables m Views Views are virtual or dynamic tables defined by queries These can include joins of multiple tables and or fields derived from calculations based on the values of other fields You can append records or replace values of existing fields in views but the fields that you can modify may be restricted depending on how the view is structured For example you cannot modify a derived field add fields to a view or replace a view m Synonyms A synonym is an alias for a table or view typically defined in a query m System tables System tables define database properties In some cases standard database tables may be classified as system tables and will be displayed only 1f you select this option Access to real system tables is often restricted to database administrators Selecting Cases to Export Case selection in the Export to Database Wizard is limited either to all cases or to cases selected using a previously defined filter condition If no case filtering is in effect this panel will not
64. E Proportion estimates Normal scores Rank Cases Ties Data Transformations This dialog box controls the method for assigning rankings to cases with the same value on the original variable Figure 8 15 Rank Cases Ties dialog box ii Rank Cases Ties Rank Assigned to Ties O Mean O Low O High Sequential ranks to unique values 55 e e The following table shows how the different methods assign ranks to tied values Value Mean 10 15 15 15 16 20 Date and Time Wizard 1 3 3 3 5 6 Low DD ui DN DN DN High 1 Duo hh fA Sequential 1 BRWNN NY The Date and Time Wizard simplifies a number of common tasks associated with date and time variables 144 Chapter 8 To Use the Date and Time Wizard gt From the menus choose Transform gt Date and Time Wizard Select the task you wish to accomplish and follow the steps to define the task Figure 8 16 Date and Time Wizard introduction screen Es Date and Time Wizard Welcome to the date and time wizard What would you like to do Learn how dates and times are represented O Create a datetime variable from variables holding parts of dates or times Calculate with dates and times O Extracta part of a date or time variable Assign periodicity to a dataset for time series data This ends the wizard and opens the Define Dates dialog box Learn how
65. E Years at current ad Household income i Function group dl income category in All E Price of primary ve Arithmetic al Primary vehicle pric CDF amp Noncentral CDF E Level of education Conversion E Years with current Current Date Time E Retired retire Date Arithmetic dl Years with current Job setistaction job A Gender gender E Number of people in E Wireless service E Multiple lines multline E Voice mail voice E Paging service pag Internet internet Caller ID callid Call waiting callwait Functions and Special Variables m Ifthe result of a conditional expression is true the case is included in the selected subset 181 File Handling and File Transformations m Ifthe result of a conditional expression is false or missing the case is not included in the selected subset Most conditional expressions use one or more of the six relational operators lt gt lt gt and on the calculator pad m Conditional expressions can include variable names constants arithmetic operators numeric and other functions logical variables and relational operators Select Cases Random Sample This dialog box allows you to select a random sample based on an approximate percentage or an exact number of cases Sampling is performed without replacement so the same case cannot be selected more than once Figure 9 13 Se
66. Figure 7 5 Apply Labels and Level dialog box oy Apply Labels and Level to 4 Select the variables that the current variable s value labels measurement level role missing value definition and format will be copied to Value labels and missing values are merged Variables Owns TW owntv Owns YCR ownver Owns stereo CD player owncd Owns PDA ownpda Owns fax machine owntax E gt Select a single variable from which to copy value labels and other variable properties except variable label or gt Select one or more variables to which to copy value labels and other variable properties Click Copy to copy the value labels and the measurement level m Existing value labels and missing value categories for target variable s are not replaced m Value labels and missing value categories for values not already defined for the target variable s are added to the set of value labels and missing value categories for the target variable s The measurement level for the target variable is always replaced The role for the target variable is always replaced If either the source or target variable has a defined range of missing values missing values definitions are not copied Setting measurement level for variables with unknown measurement level For some procedures measurement level can affect the results or determine which features are available and you cannot access the dialogs f
67. Gender varName gender gt lt category text Female label Female string f varName gender gt For a numeric variable there would be a number attribute instead of a string attribute The label attribute is present only if the variable or values have defined labels The lt cell gt elements that contain cell values for numbers will contain the text attribute and one or more additional attribute values An example is as follows lt cell text 45 6 number 45 569620253165 decimals 1 gt 399 Output Management System The number attribute is the actual unrounded numeric value and the decimals attribute indicates the number of decimal positions that are displayed in the table m Because columns are nested within rows the category element that identifies each column is repeated for each row For example because the statistics are displayed in the columns the element lt category text Frequency gt appears three times in the XML once for the male row once for the female row and once for the total row OMS identifiers The OMS Identifiers dialog box is designed to assist you in writing OMS command syntax You can use this dialog box to paste selected command and subtype identifiers into a command syntax window Figure 21 17 OMS Identifiers dialog box E OMS Identifiers This dialog displays the OMS identifiers for commands and output table subtypes that are used in creating OMS syntax Command Identifiers Ta
68. ID which can be useful if you have multiple active requests that you want to identify easily ID values that you assign cannot start with a dollar sign The following tips are for selecting multiple items in a list m Press Ctrl A to select all items in a list Use Shift click to select multiple contiguous items m Use Ctrl click to select multiple noncontiguous items To end and delete OMS requests Active and new OMS requests are displayed in the Requests list with the most recent request at the top You can change the widths of the information columns by clicking and dragging the borders and you can scroll the list horizontally to see more information about a particular request An asterisk after the word Active in the Status column indicates an OMS request that was created with command syntax that includes features that are not available in the Control Panel To end a specific active OMS request gt Inthe Requests list click any cell in the row for the request Click End To end all active OMS requests Click End All To delete a new request a request that has been added but is not yet active gt Inthe Requests list click any cell in the row for the request Click Delete Note Active OMS requests are not ended until you click OK Output object types There are different types of output objects Charts This includes charts created with the Chart Builder charting procedures and charts created by
69. In for R both of which are freely available m R packages Lists any R packages required by the extension bundle During installation of the extension bundle the installer attempts to download and install the necessary packages on your machine If this process fails you will be alerted and will need to manually install the packages For more information see the topic Required R packages on p 308 m Python modules Lists any Python modules required by the extension bundle Any such modules should be available from the SPSS community at http www ibm com developerworks spssdevcentral For Windows and Linux the modules should be copied to the extensions directory under the SPSS Statistics installation directory For Mac the modules should be copied to the Library Application Support IBM SPSS Statistics 20 extensions directory If you have specified alternate locations for extension bundles with the SPSS EXTENSIONS PATH environment variable then copy the Python modules to one of those locations For more information see the topic Installation 310 Chapter 16 locations for extension bundles on p 307 Alternatively you can copy the modules to a location on the Python search path such as the Python site packages directory Options Options control a wide variety of settings including Session journal which keeps a record of all commands run in every session Display order for variables in dialog box source lists Items display
70. Properties Dialog Name one_way_anova Menu Location Analyze Compare Means Simple One Way ANOVA Title Simple One Way ANOVA Help File Web Deployment Properties Modeless True Canvas The canvas is the area of the Custom Dialog Builder where you design the layout of your dialog Properties Pane The properties pane is the area of the Custom Dialog Builder where you specify properties of the controls that make up the dialog as well as properties of the dialog itself such as the menu location Tools Palette The tools palette provides the set of controls that can be included in a custom dialog You can show or hide the Tools Palette by choosing Tools Palette from the View menu 344 Chapter 19 Building a Custom Dialog Dialog The basic steps involved in building a custom dialog are Specify the properties of the dialog itself such as the title that appears when the dialog is launched and the location of the new menu item for the dialog within the IBM SPSSO Statistics menus For more information see the topic Dialog Properties on p 344 Specify the controls such as source and target variable lists that make up the dialog and any sub dialogs For more information see the topic Control Types on p 353 Create the syntax template that specifies the command syntax to be generated by the dialog For more information see the topic Building the Syntax Template on p 348 Install the dialog to SPSS Statistics and o
71. To print Data Editor contents 00 0 c ce eee 90 6 Working with Multiple Data Sources 91 Basic Handling of Multiple Data Sources ooococococococo 91 Working with Multiple Datasets in Command Syntax 000000 e eee eee 92 Copying and Pasting Information between Datasets 2000 cece cece eeaee 93 Renaming Datasets 00 0 o 93 Suppressing Multiple Datasets nuanua anaana 93 7 Data preparation 95 Variable properties n nnana nnan 95 Defining Variable Properties 0 00 cece tte teen eee 96 To Define Variable Properties 06 0 c eee eee 96 Defining Value Labels and Other Variable Properties 22020 eee eeeeaee 97 Assigning the Measurement Level 0000 ce cee c eee eee eee eee 99 Custom Variable Attributes ooococococcococ oo 100 Copying Variable Properties 0 00 0 cece ete eee 101 Setting measurement level for variables with unknown measurement level 102 Multiple Response Sets 00 00 o 104 Defining Multiple Response SetS ooococccccccc eee eens 104 viii Copying Data PropertieS ooococcccccc tte eet eens 107 To Copy Data Properties 0 2c ccc ene 107 Selecting Source and Target Variables 2 2 0 0 cece eee eee eee 108 Choosing Variable Properties to Copy 02 0 0 cece tees 110 Copying Dataset File PropertieS 0ooooooooooororr
72. Unselected cases are not included in the analysis but remain in the dataset You can use the unselected cases later in the session if you turn filtering off If you select a random sample or if you select cases based on a conditional expression this generates a variable named filter_ with a value of 1 for selected cases and a value of 0 for unselected cases 180 Chapter 9 Copy selected cases to a new dataset Selected cases are copied to a new dataset leaving the original dataset unaffected Unselected cases are not included in the new dataset and are left in their original state in the original dataset Delete unselected cases Unselected cases are deleted from the dataset Deleted cases can be recovered only by exiting from the file without saving any changes and then reopening the file The deletion of cases is permanent if you save the changes to the data file Note If you delete unselected cases and save the file the cases cannot be recovered To Select a Subset of Cases gt From the menus choose Data gt Select Cases Select one of the methods for selecting cases gt Specify the criteria for selecting cases Select Cases If This dialog box allows you to select subsets of cases using conditional expressions A conditional expression returns a value of true false or missing for each case Figure 9 12 Select Cases If dialog box it Select Cases If E Age m e Marital status marital gt
73. Word format exporting output 209 212 383 wide tables 209 wrapping 233 controlling column width for wrapped text 233 variable and value labels 74 XML OXML output from OMS 400 routing output to XML 383 saving output as XML 377 table structure in OXML 395 XSLT using with OXML 400 years 316 two digit values 316 z scores in Rank Cases 142
74. a Text for footnote a b Text for footnote b T Reset all cell formats to the TableLook Save Lock Save as Est Look Cox _ canes Crie Select a TableLook from the list of files To select a file from another directory click Browse Click OK to apply the TableLook to the selected pivot table 233 Pivot tables To edit or create a TableLook gt In the TableLooks dialog box select a TableLook from the list of files gt Click Edit Look gt Adjust the table properties for the attributes that you want and then click OK gt Click Save Look to save the edited TableLook or click Save As to save it as a new TableLook Editing a TableLook affects only the selected pivot table An edited TableLook is not applied to any other tables that uses that TableLook unless you select those tables and reapply the TableLook m Only table properties defined in the Table Properties dialog are saved in TableLooks TableLooks do not include individual cell modifications Table properties Table Properties allows you to set general properties of a table set cell styles for various parts of a table and save a set of those properties as a TableLook You can Control general properties such as hiding empty rows or columns and adjusting printing properties Control the format and position of footnote markers Determine specific formats for cells in the data area for row and column la
75. a marker position gt Click OK or Apply Table properties cell formats For formatting a table is divided into areas title layers corner labels row labels column labels data caption and footnotes For each area of a table you can modify the associated cell formats Cell formats include text characteristics such as font size color and style horizontal and vertical alignment background colors and inner cell margins Figure 11 13 Areas of a table Title Layers Corner labels Column labels Row labels Caption Footnotes Cell formats are applied to areas categories of information They are not characteristics of individual cells This distinction is an important consideration when pivoting a table For example m Ifyou specify a bold font as a cell format of column labels the column labels will appear bold no matter what information is currently displayed in the column dimension If you move an item from the column dimension to another dimension it does not retain the bold characteristic of the column labels m Ifyou make column labels bold simply by highlighting the cells in an activated pivot table and clicking the Bold button on the toolbar the contents of those cells will remain bold no matter what dimension you move them to and the column labels will not retain the bold characteristic for other items moved into the column dimension 238 Chapter 11 Figure 11 14 Table Properties dialog box Ce
76. a new output document it is recommended that you explicitly save it with the OUTPUT SAVE command A production job output file consists of the contents of the active output document as of the end of the job For jobs containing OUTPUT commands the output file may not contain all output created in the session For example suppose the production job consists of a number of procedures followed by an OUTPUT NEW command followed by more procedures but no more OUTPUT commands The OUTPUT NEW command defines a new active output document At the end of the production job it will contain output from only the procedures executed after the OUTPUT NEW command 372 Chapter 20 Runtime values Runtime values defined in a production job file and used in a command syntax file simplify tasks such as running the same analysis for different data files or running the same set of commands for different sets of variables For example you could define the runtime value datafile to prompt you for a data filename each time you run a production job that uses the string datafile in place of a filename in the command syntax file Symbol The string in the command syntax file that triggers the production job to prompt the user for a value The symbol name must begin with an sign and must conform to variable naming rules For more information see the topic Variable names in Chapter 5 on p 69 Default Value The value that the production job supplies by defaul
77. and columns 247 showing and hiding cells 231 transposing rows and columns 226 undoing changes 228 ungrouping rows or columns 227 using icons 225 pivoting controlling with OMS for exported output 393 PNG files 209 219 exporting charts 209 219 port numbers 62 373 portable files variable names 39 PostScript files encapsulated 209 219 exporting charts 209 219 PowerPoint 214 exporting output as PowerPoint 214 PowerPoint format exporting output 209 printing 90 220 221 223 233 239 248 chart size 223 charts 220 controlling table breaks 248 data 90 headers and footers 221 layers 220 233 239 models 253 page numbers 223 pivot tables 220 print preview 220 scaling tables 233 239 space between output items 223 text output 220 prior moving average function 162 Production Facility 312 converting files to production jobs 375 using command syntax from journal file 312 Production jobs 368 373 374 command line switches 374 converting Production Facility files 375 exporting charts 368 output files 368 running multiple production jobs 374 scheduling production jobs 374 syntax rules 368 programming with command language 265 properties 233 pivot tables 233 tables 233 proportion estimates in Rank Cases 142 Python scripts 405 Quancept 36 Quanvert 36 Index random number seed 129 random sample 20 databases 20 random number seed 129 selecting 181 ranking cases 141 f
78. any of the available tools including tools for all menu actions They can also contain custom tools that launch other applications run command syntax files or run script files Show Toolbars Use Show Toolbars to show or hide toolbars customize toolbars and create new toolbars Toolbars can contain any of the available tools including tools for all menu actions They can also contain custom tools that launch other applications run command syntax files or run script files 338 Chapter 18 Figure 18 2 Show Toolbars dialog box ES Show Toolbars Toolbars V Data Editor Show ToolTips E Large Buttons CoC conca veto To Customize Toolbars gt From the menus choose View gt Toolbars gt Customize gt Select the toolbar you want to customize and click Edit or click New to create a new toolbar For new toolbars enter a name for the toolbar select the windows in which you want the toolbar to appear and click Edit Select an item in the Categories list to display available tools in that category gt Drag and drop the tools you want onto the toolbar displayed in the dialog box To remove a tool from the toolbar drag it anywhere off the toolbar displayed in the dialog box To create a custom tool to open a file to run a command syntax file or to run a script Click New Tool in the Edit Toolbar dialog box Enter a descriptive label for the tool gt Select t
79. aren t exactly the same with statistics in the columns Variable names in OMS generated data files OMS constructs valid unique variable names from column labels m Row and layer elements are assigned generic variable names the prefix Var followed by a sequential number m Characters that aren t allowed in variable names spaces parentheses etc are removed For example This Column Label would become a variable named ThisColumnLabel m If the label begins with a character that is allowed in variable names but not allowed as the first character for example a number is inserted as a prefix For example 2nd would become a variable named 2nd m Underscores or periods at the end of labels are removed from the resulting variable names The underscores at the end of the automatically generated variables Command _ Subtype_ and Label_ are not removed m If more than one element is in the column dimension variable names are constructed by combining category labels with underscores between category labels Group labels are not included For example if VarB is nested under VarA in the columns you would get variables like CatA1_CatBl not VarA_CatAl_VarB_CatB1 Figure 21 14 Variable names constructed from table elements Column Variable In Layer Variable Row Variable Yes 1 0 Total 1 1 1 No Low Row Variable Yes No Total 2 Layer Variable Het ae Column Variable Colum
80. as a guide and does not prevent you from changing the way in which variables are matched with database fields When adding new records to an existing table the following basic rules limitations apply m All cases or all selected cases in the active dataset are added to the table If any of these cases duplicate existing records in the database an error may result if a duplicate key value is encountered For information on exporting only selected cases see Selecting Cases to Export on p 49 m You can use the values of new variables created in the session as the values for existing fields but you cannot add new fields or change the names of existing fields To add new fields to a database table see Adding New Fields on p 52 m Any excluded database fields or fields not matched to a variable will have no values for the added records in the database table If the Source of values cell is empty there is no variable matched to the field 55 Data Files Creating a New Table or Replacing a Table To create a new database table or replace an existing database table gt In the Choose how to export the data panel of the export wizard select Drop an existing table and create a new table of the same name or select Create a new table and enter a name for the new table If the table name contains any characters other than letters numbers or an underscore the name must be enclosed in double quotes gt Ifyou are replacing an exist
81. at any time without notice Any references in this information to non IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling 1 the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs including this one and 11 the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged should contact IBM Software Group Attention Licensing 233 S Wacker Dr Chicago IL 60606 USA Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 416 417 Notices Such information may be available subject to appropriate terms and conditions including in some cases payment of a fee The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement IBM International Program License Agreement or any equivalent agreement between us Information concerning non IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources IBM has not tested those products and cannot confir
82. available with IBM SPSS Statistics Server this button is not available To add data sources in distributed analysis mode see your system administrator An ODBC data source consists of two essential pieces of information the driver that will be used to access the data and the location of the database you want to access To specify data sources you must have the appropriate drivers installed Drivers for a variety of database formats are included with the installation media 15 Data Files Figure 3 1 Database Wizard i Database Wizard E Welcome to the Database Wizard This wizard will help you get data from a non PASVY Statistics data source You can choose the data source specify which cases are retrieved aggregate and sort the data before retrieval and specify variable names and properties here Some features are available only when connected to PASVY Statistics Server From which data source would you like to retrieve data ODBC Data Sources EN dBASE Files E Excel Files OLE DB Data Sources To access OLE DB data sources available only on Microsoft Windows operating systems you must have the following items installed m NET framework To obtain the most recent version of the NET framework go to http www microsoft com net m IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter Developer Kit For information on obtaining a compatible version of SPSS Survey Reporter Developer Kit go to www ibm com
83. be declared as spsswinLib Application16 For example Dim objSpssApp As spsswinLib Application16 Set objSpssApp CreateObject SPSS Application16 To connect to a running instance of the SPSS Statistics client from an external COM client use Dim objSpssApp As spsswinLib Application16 Set objSpssApp GetObject SPSS Application16 If more than one client is running GetObject will connect to the most recently launched one Note For post 16 0 versions the identifier is still Application16 The scriptContext Object Detecting When a Script is Run as an Autoscript Using the scriptContext object you can detect when a script is being run as an autoscript This allows you to code a script so that it functions in either context autoscript or not This trivial script illustrates the approach Sub Main If scriptContext Is Nothing Then MsgBox I m not an autoscript Else MsgBox I m an autoscript End If End Sub m When a script is not run as an autoscript the scriptContext object will have a value of Nothing m Given the If Else logic in this example you would include your autoscript specific code in the Else clause Any code that is not to be run in the context of an autoscript would be included in the If clause Of course you can also include code that is to be run in either context Getting Values Required by Autoscripts The scriptContext object provides access to values required by an autoscript such as the
84. box text static text number combo box list box and file browser Default Specifies whether the radio button is the default selection Syntax Specifies the command syntax that is generated when the radio button is selected m You can specify any valid command syntax and you can use n for line breaks m For radio buttons containing nested controls the value ThisValue generates a blank separated list of the syntax generated by each nested control in the order in which they appear under the radio button top to bottom You can add a new radio button in the blank line at the bottom of the existing list Entering any of the properties other than the identifier will generate a unique identifier which you can keep or modify You can delete a radio button by clicking on the Identifier cell for the button and pressing delete Check Box Group The Check Box Group control is a container for a set of controls that are enabled or disabled as a group by a single check box The following types of controls can be contained in a Check Box Group check box combo box text control number control static text radio group and file browser The Check Box Group control has the following properties Identifier The unique identifier for the control This is the identifier to use when referencing the control in the syntax template Title An optional title for the group If omitted the group border is not displayed For multi line titles use
85. but not including the end date File Information A data file contains much more than raw data It also contains any variable definition information including m Variable names m Variable formats m Descriptive variable and value labels This information is stored in the dictionary portion of the data file The Data Editor provides one way to view the variable definition information You can also display complete dictionary information for the active dataset or any other data file To Display Data File Information gt From the menus in the Data Editor window choose File gt Display Data File Information For the currently open data file choose Working File gt For other data files choose External File and then select the data file The data file information is displayed in the Viewer Saving Data Files In addition to saving data files in IBM SPSS Statistics format you can save data in a wide variety of external formats including m Excel and other spreadsheet formats Tab delimited and CSV text files SAS Stata Database tables To Save Modified Data Files gt Make the Data Editor the active window click anywhere in the window to make it active gt From the menus choose File gt Save The modified data file is saved overwriting the previous version of the file 39 Data Files Note A data file saved in Unicode mode cannot be read by versions of IBM SPSSO Statistics prior to 16 0
86. can change the default variable names here but you must return to the previous step to change the number of variable groups to restructure m You must define variable groups by selecting variables in the source list for all available target variables before you can proceed to the next step What should be copied into the new file Variables that aren t restructured can be copied into the new file Their values will be propagated in the new rows Move variables that you want to copy into the new file into the Fixed Variable s list Restructure Data Wizard Variables to Cases Create Index Variables Note The wizard presents this step if you choose to restructure variable groups into rows In this step decide whether to create index variables An index is a new variable that sequentially identifies a row group based on the original variable from which the new row was created 192 Chapter 9 Figure 9 24 Restructure Data Wizard Create Index Variables Step 4 Restructure Data Wizard Step 4 of 7 i E Variables to Cases Create Index Variables Inthe current data values for a variable group appear in a single case in multiple variables For example a single case contains the values for w1 w2 and w3 Inthe new data values for a variable group will appear in multiple cases in a single variable For example there will be three cases one each for w1 w2 and w3 An index is a new variable that identifies the group
87. choose Insert gt Text File gt Select a text file To edit the text double click it Pasting Objects into the Viewer Objects from other applications can be pasted into the Viewer You can use either Paste After or Paste Special Either type of pasting puts the new object after the currently selected object in the Viewer Use Paste Special when you want to choose the format of the pasted object Finding and Replacing Information in the Viewer gt To find or replace information in the Viewer from the menus choose Edit gt Find or Edit gt Replace 207 Working with Output Figure 10 2 Find and Replace dialog box amp Find and Replace Output1 M Replace Replace wt lt tta options rSearch Area Items to Search Direction Viewer Panes O al Down Both panes O sel Up Contents pane Outline pane E Include hidden items Charts and trees will not be searched E Match case E Match whole cells in tables CC Cr Ji You can use Find and Replace to Search the entire document or just the selected items Search down or up from the current location Search both panes or restrict the search to the contents or outline pane Search for hidden items These include any items hidden in the contents pane for example Notes tables which are hidden by default and hidden rows and columns in pivot tables Restrict the search criteria to case sensit
88. complete data Note By default the Database Wizard automatically creates a data cache but 1f you use the GET DATA command in command syntax to read a database a data cache is not automatically created Command syntax is not available with the Student Version To Create a Data Cache gt From the menus choose File gt Cache Data Click OK or Cache Now OK creates a data cache the next time the program reads the data for example the next time you run a Statistical procedure which is usually what you want because it doesn t require an extra data pass Cache Now creates a data cache immediately which shouldn t be necessary under most circumstances Cache Now is useful primarily for two reasons m A data source is locked and can t be updated by anyone until you end your session open a different data source or cache the data m For large data sources scrolling through the contents of the Data View tab in the Data Editor will be much faster if you cache the data To Cache Data Automatically You can use the SET command to automatically create a data cache after a specified number of changes in the active data file By default the active data file is automatically cached after 20 changes in the active data file From the menus choose File gt New gt Syntax In the syntax window type SET CACHE n where n represents the number of changes in the active data file before the data file is cached From th
89. data are exported to the database For example if you export a string variable to a database field with a numeric data type an error will result if any values of the string variable contain non numeric characters Width You can change the defined width for string char varchar field types Numeric field widths are defined by the data type By default SPSS Statistics variable formats are mapped to database field types based on the following general scheme Actual database field types may vary depending on the database SPSS Statistics Variable Format Database Field Type Numeric Float or Double Comma Float or Double 46 Chapter 3 SPSS Statistics Variable Format Dot Scientific Notation Date Datetime Time DTime Wkday Month Dollar Custom Currency String User Missing Values Database Field Type Float or Double Float or Double Date or Datetime or Timestamp Datetime or Timestamp Float or Double number of seconds Integer 1 7 Integer 1 12 Float or Double Float or Double Char or Varchar There are two options for the treatment of user missing values when data from variables are exported to database fields m Export as valid values User missing values are treated as regular valid nonmissing values m Export numeric user missing as nulls and export string user missing values as blank spaces Numeric user missing values are treated the same as system missing values String user missing values ar
90. define For each value enter the value and a label Click Add to enter the value label Click OK Inserting line breaks in labels gt gt gt Variable labels and value labels automatically wrap to multiple lines in pivot tables and charts if the cell or area isn t wide enough to display the entire label on one line and you can edit results to insert manual line breaks if you want the label to wrap at a different point You can also create variable labels and value labels that will always wrap at specified points and be displayed on multiple lines For variable labels select the Label cell for the variable in Variable View in the Data Editor For value labels select the Values cell for the variable in Variable View in the Data Editor click the button in the cell and select the label that you want to modify in the Value Labels dialog box At the place in the label where you want the label to wrap type n The n is not displayed in pivot tables or charts it is interpreted as a line break character Missing values Missing Values defines specified data values as user missing For example you might want to distinguish between data that are missing because a respondent refused to answer and data that are missing because the question didn t apply to that respondent Data values that are specified as user missing are flagged for special treatment and are excluded from most calculations 75 Data Editor Figure 5
91. deletes all multiple response sets in the active dataset and replaces them with the multiple response sets from the source data file m Merge adds multiple response sets from the source data file to the collection of multiple response sets in the active dataset Ifa set with the same name exists in both files the existing set in the active dataset is unchanged Variable Sets Variable sets are used to control the list of variables that are displayed in dialog boxes Variable sets are defined by selecting Define Variable Sets from the Utilities menu Sets in the source data file that contain variables that do not exist in the active dataset are ignored unless those variables will be created based on specifications in step 2 Selecting Source and Target Variables in the Copy Data Properties Wizard 113 Data preparation Replace deletes any existing variable sets in the active dataset replacing them with variable sets from the source data file Merge adds variable sets from the source data file to the collection of variable sets in the active dataset If a set with the same name exists in both files the existing set in the active dataset is unchanged Documents Notes appended to the data file via the DOCUMENT command Replace deletes any existing documents in the active dataset replacing them with the documents from the source data file Merge combines documents from the source and active dataset Unique documents in the source
92. dev Permissions By default required R packages are installed to the library folder under the location where R is installed for example C Program Files R R 2 12 1 library on Windows If you do not have write permission to this location or would like to store R packages installed for extension bundles elsewhere you can specify one or more alternate locations by defining the SPSS _RPACKAGES_PATH environment variable When present the paths specified in SPSS _RPACKAGES PATH are added to the R library search path and take precedence over the default location R packages will be installed to the first writable location For multiple locations separate each with a semicolon on Windows and a colon on Linux and Mac The specified locations must exist on the target machine After setting SPSS_RPACKAGES PATH you will need to restart IBM SPSS Statistics for the changes to take effect For information on how to set an environment variable on Windows see Installation locations for extension bundles on p 307 Batch installation of extension bundles You can install multiple extension bundles at once using the batch utility installextbundles bat installextbundles sh for Mac and UNIX systems located in the IBM SPSS Statistics installation directory For Windows and Mac the utility is located at the root of the installation directory For Linux and SPSS Statistics Server for UNIX the utility is located in the bin subdirectory of the inst
93. dialog is hidden if there is no associated help file Any supporting files such as image files and style sheets must be stored along with the main help file once the custom dialog has been installed By default the specifications for an installed custom dialog are stored in the ext lib lt Dialog Name gt folder of the installation directory for Windows and Linux For Mac specifications are stored under the Library Application Support IBM SPSS Statistics lt version gt CustomDialogs lt Dialog Name gt folder where lt version gt is the two digit IBM SPSS Statistics version for example 20 Supporting files should be located at the root of the folder and not in sub folders They must be manually added to any custom dialog package files you create for the dialog 345 Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs If you have specified alternate locations for installed dialogs using the SPSS_CDIALOGS_PATH environment variable then store any supporting files under the lt Dialog Name gt folder at the appropriate alternate location For more information see the topic Managing Custom Dialogs on p 351 Note When working with a dialog opened from a custom dialog package spd file the Help File property points to a temporary folder associated with the spd file Any modifications to the help file should be made to the copy in the temporary folder Web Deployment Properties Allows you to associate a properties file with this dialog f
94. example when truncating a value between 1 0 and 2 0 to the nearest integer this setting specifies how much the value can fall short of 2 0 and be rounded up to 2 0 Customize Variable View Controls the default display and order of attributes in Variable View For more information see the topic Changing the default variable view on p 318 Change Dictionary Controls the language version of the dictionary used for checking the spelling of items in Variable View For more information see the topic Spell checking in Chapter 5 on p 81 Changing the default variable view You can use Customize Variable View to control which attributes are displayed by default in Variable View for example name type label and the order in which they are displayed Click Customize Variable View 319 Options Figure 17 4 Customize Variable View default Es Customize Variable View Reorder and select attributes to display in the Variable View 114 a UE Py 3 o Width Decimals Label Values Missing Columns Align Measure Role RRR RRR Select check the variable attributes you want to display gt Use the up and down arrow buttons to change the display order of the attributes Currency options You can create up to five custom currency display formats that can include special prefix and suffix characters and special treatment for negative values The five custom currency format names are CCA CCB CCC CCD
95. for variables to cases score_a 1014 00 864 00 684 00 636 00 810 00 638 00 You want to do an independent samples test You have a column group consisting of score_a and score_b but you don t have the grouping variable that the procedure requires Select Restructure selected variables into cases in the Restructure Data Wizard restructure one variable group into a new variable named score and create an index named group The new data file is shown in the following figure Figure 9 19 New restructured data for variables to cases 1 SCORE_A 1014 00 2 35CORE_B 864 00 3 SCORE_A 684 00 4 SCORE_B 636 00 5 SCORE_A 610 00 6 SCORE_B 638 00 When you run the independent samples test you can now use group as the grouping variable Example of Cases to Variables In this example test scores are recorded twice for each subject before and after a treatment Figure 9 20 Current data for cases to variables 188 Chapter 9 You want to do a paired samples test Your data structure is case groups but you don t have the repeated measures for the paired variables that the procedure requires Select Restructure selected cases into variables in the Restructure Data Wizard use id to identify the row groups in the current data and use time to create the variable group in the new file Figure 9 21 New restructured data for cases to variables id aft bef 1
96. from interne Sets defined here are not available in the Multiple Response Frequencies and Crosstabs procedure dl confidence in educ Get news from radio Mult Response Sets all Confidence in pres Get news from televisi ethmult Al Confidence in medi gt Get news from news mitcars al Confidence in televi amp Get news from newsp al Age category agec all Number of children Car maker most re Car maker second amp Car maker third car Variable Coding 9 Dichotomies Counted Value 1 LA O Categories change Category Labels Source Variable labels Labels of counted value Set Name mitnews Set Label News sources Co 2 eseti cone Crees gt Select two or more variables If your variables are coded as dichotomies indicate which value you want to have counted Enter a unique name for each multiple response set The name can be up to 63 bytes long A dollar sign is automatically added to the beginning of the set name gt Enter a descriptive label for the set This is optional Click Add to add the multiple response set to the list of defined sets Dichotomies A multiple dichotomy set typically consists of multiple dichotomous variables variables with only two possible values of a yes no present absent checked not checked nature Although the variables may not be strictly dichot
97. grouped together in the variable list click the first variable and then Shift click the last variable in the group m To select multiple variables that are not grouped together in the variable list click the first variable then Ctrl click the next variable and so on Macintosh Command click Data type measurement level and variable list icons The icons that are displayed next to variables in dialog box lists provide information about the variable type and measurement level Numeric String Date Time Scale Continuous E n a E i Ordinal il de dl i Nominal 2 A P e m For more information on measurement level see Variable measurement level on p 70 m For more information on numeric string date and time data types see Variable type on p 71 Getting information about variables in dialog boxes Many dialogs provide the ability to find out more about the variables displayed in the variable lists gt Right click a variable in the source or target variable list gt Choose Variable Information 6 Chapter 1 Figure 1 3 Variable information a x Wariable s E Age in years age E Marital status marital 8 Years at current addr E Household income in t dl Income category in th 8 Price of primary vehicl dl Primary vehicle price Variable Information E Level of education ed E Years with current e 4 Retired Iretirel inccat Label
98. gt From the menus choose Format gt Breakpoints gt Keep Together Note For legacy tables choose Format gt Keep Together To view breakpoints and keep together groups You can toggle whether breakpoints and keep together groups are displayed gt From the menus choose Format gt Breakpoints gt Display Breakpoints Breakpoints are shown as vertical or horizontal lines Keep together groups appear as greyed out rectangular regions enclosed by a darker border Note Displaying breakpoints and keep together groups is not supported for legacy tables To clear breakpoints and keep together groups To clear a breakpoint Click any cell in the column to the left of a vertical breakpoint or click any cell in the row above a horizontal breakpoint Note For legacy tables you must click a column label or row label cell gt From the menus choose Format gt Breakpoints gt Clear Breakpoint or Group Note For legacy tables choose Format gt Remove Break Here To clear a keep together group Select the column or row labels that specify the group gt From the menus choose Format gt Breakpoints gt Clear Breakpoint or Group Note For legacy tables choose Format gt Remove Keep Together All breakpoints and keep together groups are automatically cleared when you pivot or reorder any row or column This behavior does not apply to legacy tables Creating a chart from a pivot table gt Double click the pi
99. h2 h3 O Group by index for example w1 h1 w2 h2 w3 h3 rCase Count Variable E Count the number of cases in the current data used to create a new case rindicator Variables E Create indicator variables 0 re Set How should the new variable groups be ordered in the new file m By variable The wizard groups the new variables created from an original variable together m By index The wizard groups the variables according to the values of the index variables Example The variables to be restructured are w and A and the index is month w h month Grouping by variable results in w jan w feb h jan Grouping by index results in w jan h jan w feb Create a count variable The wizard can create a count variable in the new file It contains the number of rows in the current data that were used to create a row in the new data file 200 Chapter 9 Create indicator variables The wizard can use the index variables to create indicator variables in the new data file It creates one new variable for each unique value of the index variable The indicator variables signal the presence or absence of a value for a case An indicator variable has the value of 1 if the case has a value otherwise it is 0 Example The index variable is product It records the products that a customer purchased The original data are customer product 1 chick 1 eggs 2 eggs 3 chick Creating an indicato
100. hidden each time you run a procedure and how items are initially aligned You can control the display of the following items log warnings notes titles pivot tables charts tree diagrams and text output You can also turn the display of commands in the log on or off You can copy command syntax from the log and save it in a syntax file Note All output items are displayed left aligned in the Viewer Only the alignment of printed output is affected by the justification settings Centered and right aligned items are identified by a small symbol above and to the left of the item Title Controls the font style size and color for new output titles Page Title Controls the font style size and color for new page titles and page titles generated by TITLE and SUBTITLE command syntax or created by New Page Title on the Insert menu Text Output Font used for text output Text output is designed for use with a monospaced fixed pitch font If you select a proportional font tabular output will not align properly 316 Chapter 17 Data Options Figure 17 3 Options dialog box Data tab Transformation and Merge Options Set Century Range for 2 Digit Years 9 Calculate values immediately Automatic Begin year 1940 End year 2039 O Calculate values before used Custom Begin year 1940 Heie Essie iss End year 2039 Example 12345 67 Display Format for New Numeric Variables Random Number Generator
101. in the grid and the specified treatment of upper endpoints included or excluded Reverse scale By default values of the new binned variable are ascending sequential integers from 1 to n Reversing the scale makes the values descending sequential integers from n to 1 Copy Bins You can copy the binning specifications from another variable to the currently selected variable or from the selected variable to multiple other variables For more information see the topic Copying Binned Categories on p 122 Automatically Generating Binned Categories The Make Cutpoints dialog box allows you to auto generate binned categories based on selected criteria To Use the Make Cutpoints Dialog Box Select click a variable in the Scanned Variable List gt Click Make Cutpoints 121 Data preparation gt Select the criteria for generating cutpoints that will define the binned categories gt Click Apply Figure 7 17 Make Cutpoints dialog box E Make Cutpoints Equal Width Intervals rIntervals fill in at least two fields First Cutpoint Location Number of Cutpoints Width Last Cutpoint Location 75 00 Equal Percentiles Based on Scanned Cases Cutpoints at Mean and Selected Standard Deviations Based on Scanned Cases A 4 Apply will replace the current cutpoint definitions with this specification A final interval will include all remaining values N cutpoints produce N 1 intervals T ce Cu
102. is specified the OK and Paste buttons will be disabled until a value is specified for this control If False is specified the absence of a value in this control has no effect on the state of the OK and Paste buttons The default is False Syntax Specifies command syntax that is generated by this control at run time and can be inserted in the syntax template m You can specify any valid command syntax and you can use n for line breaks m The value 3 ThisValue specifies the run time value of the control which is the content of the text box This is the default m Ifthe Syntax property includes 3ThisValue and the run time value of the text box is empty then the text box control does not generate any command syntax Number Control The Number control is a text box for entering a numeric value and has the following properties Identifier The unique identifier for the control This is the identifier to use when referencing the control in the syntax template Title An optional title that appears above the control For multi line titles use n to specify line breaks ToolTip Optional ToolTip text that appears when the user hovers over the control Mnemonic Key An optional character in the title to use as a keyboard shortcut to the control The character appears underlined in the title The shortcut is activated by pressing Alt mnemonic key The Mnemonic Key property is not supported on Mac 359 Creating and Managing Cust
103. markers and the subscript or superscript position of footnote markers are controlled by the Footnotes tab of the Table Properties dialog For more information see the topic Table properties footnotes on p 236 To change a special marker back to a standard marker right click on the marker in the Edit Footnotes dialog select Footnote Marker from the context menu and select Standard marker in the Footnote Marker dialog box Footnote The content of the footnote The display reflects the current font and background settings The font settings can be changed for individual footnotes using the Format subdialog For more information see the topic Footnote font and color settings on p 246 A single background color is applied to all footnotes and can be changed in the Font and Background tab of the Cell Properties dialog For more information see the topic Font and background on p 241 Visible All footnotes are visible by default Deselect uncheck the Visible checkbox to hide a footnote 246 Chapter 11 Footnote font and color settings For legacy tables you can use the Format dialog to change the font family style size and color for one or more selected footnotes gt In the Edit Footnotes dialog select click one or more footnotes in the Footnotes grid gt Click the Format button The selected font family style size and colors are applied to all the selected footnotes Background color alignment and margins can be s
104. minimum and the maximum are based on the scanned values If you do not include all cases in the scan the true distribution may not be accurately reflected particularly if the data file has been sorted by the selected variable If you scan zero cases no information about the distribution of values is available Grid Displays the values that define the upper endpoints of each bin and optional value labels for each bin m Value The values that define the upper endpoints of each bin You can enter values or use Make Cutpoints to automatically create bins based on selected criteria By default a cutpoint with a value of HIGH is automatically included This bin will contain any nonmissing values above the other cutpoints The bin defined by the lowest cutpoint will include all nonmissing values lower than or equal to that value or simply lower than that value depending on how you define upper endpoints m Label Optional descriptive labels for the values of the new binned variable Since the values of the new variable will simply be sequential integers from 1 to n labels that describe what the values represent can be very useful You can enter labels or use Make Labels to automatically create value labels 120 Chapter 7 To Delete a Bin from the Grid gt Right click on the either the Value or Label cell for the bin gt From the pop up context menu select Delete Row Note If you delete the HIGH bin any cases with values highe
105. of EDITOR_PATH to point to the executable for the desired editor gt In that same section change the value of EDITOR_ARGS to handle any arguments that need to be passed to the editor If no arguments are required remove any existing values Scripting in Basic Scripting in Basic is available on Windows only and is installed with the Core system Extensive online help for scripting in Basic is available from the IBM SPSSO Statistics Basic Script Editor The editor can be accessed from File gt New gt Script when the default script language set from the Scripts tab on the Options dialog is set to Basic the system default on Windows It is also accessed from File gt Open gt Script by choosing Basic wwd sbs in the Files of type list Compatibility with Versions Prior to 16 0 Obsolete Methods and Properties A number of automation methods and properties are obsolete for version 16 0 and above In terms of general features this includes all objects associated with interactive graphs the Draft Document object and methods and properties associated with maps For additional information see Release Notes for Version 16 0 in the help system provided with the IBM SPSS Statistics Basic Script Editor The SPSS Statistics specific help is accessed from Help gt SPSS Statistics Objects Help in the script editor Global Procedures Prior to version 16 0 the scripting facility included a global procedures file For version 16 0 and a
106. of random numbers Active Generator Two different random number generators are available m Version 12 Compatible The random number generator used in version 12 and previous releases If you need to reproduce randomized results generated in previous releases based on a specified seed value use this random number generator m Mersenne Twister A newer random number generator that is more reliable for simulation purposes If reproducing randomized results from version 12 or earlier is not an issue use this random number generator Active Generator Initialization The random number seed changes each time a random number is generated for use in transformations such as random distribution functions random sampling or case weighting To replicate a sequence of random numbers set the initialization starting point value prior to each analysis that uses the random numbers The value must be a positive integer Figure 8 4 Random Number Generators dialog box wy Random Number Generators Active Generator E Set Active Generator e Active E Initialization 47 Set Starting Point Random 9 Fixed Value Value 9191972 Current Active Generator sessions SPSS 12 Compatible a The active generator setting applies immediately and to future Some procedures have internal random number generators See the help for a complete list i ees ls Some procedures have internal random number generators includi
107. of the procedures that generate the output Limitations For Output XML format the specification for the Headings output type has no effect If any output from a procedure is included the procedure title output is included m Ifthe OMS specification results in nothing other than Headings objects or a Notes tables being included for a procedure then nothing is included for that procedure Adding new OMS requests Select the output types tables charts etc that you want to include For more information see the topic Output object types on p 379 Select the commands to include If you want to include all output select all items in the list For more information see the topic Command identifiers and table subtypes on p 381 For commands that produce pivot table output select the specific table types to include The list displays only the tables that are available in the selected commands any table type that is available in one or more of the selected commands is displayed in the list If no commands are selected all table types are displayed For more information see the topic Command identifiers and table subtypes on p 381 To select tables based on text labels instead of subtypes click Labels For more information see the topic Labels on p 382 Click Options to specify the output format for example SPSS Statistics data file XML or HTML By default Output XML format is used For more information see the topic OM
108. output item that triggered the current autoscript m The scriptContext GetOutputItem method returns the output item an ISpssItem object that triggered the current autoscript m The scriptContext GetOutputDoc method returns the output document an ISpssOutputDoc object associated with the current autoscript m The scriptContext GetOutputItemIndex method returns the index in the associated output document of the output item that triggered the current autoscript 412 Chapter 22 Note The object returned by scriptContext GetOutputItem is not activated If your script requires an activated object you 1l need to activate it for instance with the ActivateTable method When you re finished with any manipulations call the Deactivate method Startup Scripts You can create a script that runs at the start of each session and a separate script that runs each time you switch servers For Windows you can have versions of these scripts in both Python and Basic For all other platforms the scripts can only be in Python m The startup script must be named StartClient_ py for Python or StartClient_ wwd for Basic m The script that runs when switching servers must be named StartServer_ py for Python or StartServer_ wwd for Basic m The scripts must be located in the scripts directory of the installation directory located at the root of the installation directory for Windows and Linux and under the Contents directory in the applica
109. patent applications covering subject matter described in this document The furnishing of this document does not grant you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A For license inquiries regarding double byte character set DBCS information contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries in writing to Intellectual Property Licensing Legal and Intellectual Property Law IBM Japan Ltd 1623 14 Shimotsuruma Yamato shi Kanagawa 242 8502 Japan The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this publication
110. percentile groups with each group containing approximately the same number of cases For example 4 Ntiles would assign a rank of 1 to cases below the 25th percentile 2 to cases between the 25th and 50th percentile 3 to cases between the 50th and 75th percentile and 4 to cases above the 75th percentile Proportion estimates Estimates of the cumulative proportion of the distribution corresponding to a particular rank Normal scores The z scores corresponding to the estimated cumulative proportion Proportion Estimation Formula For proportion estimates and normal scores you can select the proportion estimation formula Blom Tukey Rankit or Van der Waerden Blom Creates new ranking variable based on proportion estimates that uses the formula 1 3 8 w 1 4 where w is the sum of the case weights and r is the rank m Tukey Uses the formula 1 1 3 w 1 3 where r is the rank and w is the sum of the case weights m Rankit Uses the formula 1 1 2 w where w is the number of observations and r is the rank ranging from to w m Van der Waerden Van der Waerden s transformation defined by the formula r w 1 where w is the sum of the case weights and r is the rank ranging from to w 143 Figure 8 14 Rank Cases Types dialog box E Rank Cases Types 7 Fractional rank 7 Ntiles Proportion Estimation Formula Rank E Fractional rank as E Savage score E Sum of case weights
111. specified using the general form t hh mm ss m Date time literals timestamps should be specified using the general form ts yyyy mm dd hh mm ss m The entire date and or time value must be enclosed in single quotes Years must be expressed in four digit form and dates and times must contain two digits for each portion of the value For example January 1 2005 1 05 AM would be expressed as ts 2005 01 01 01 05 00 Functions A selection of built in arithmetic logical string date and time SQL functions is provided You can drag a function from the list into the expression or you can enter any valid SQL function See your database documentation for valid SQL functions A list of standard functions is available at http msdn2 microsoft com en us library ms711813 aspx Use Random Sampling This option selects a random sample of cases from the data source For large data sources you may want to limit the number of cases to a small representative sample which can significantly reduce the time that it takes to run procedures Native random sampling if available for the data source is faster than IBM SPSS Statistics random sampling because SPSS Statistics random sampling must still read the entire data source to extract a random sample m Approximately Generates a random sample of approximately the specified percentage of cases Since this routine makes an independent pseudorandom decision for each case the percentage
112. statistical procedures for example a bar chart created by the Frequencies procedure Headings Text objects that are labeled Title in the outline pane of the Viewer 380 Chapter 21 Logs Log text objects Log objects contain certain types of error and warning messages Depending on your Options settings Edit menu Options Viewer tab log objects may also contain the command syntax that is executed during the session Log objects are labeled Log in the outline pane of the Viewer Models Output objects displayed in the Model Viewer A single model object can contain multiple views of the model including both tables and charts Tables Output objects that are pivot tables in the Viewer includes Notes tables Tables are the only output objects that can be routed to IBM SPSS Statistics data file sav format Texts Text objects that aren t logs or headings includes objects labeled Text Output in the outline pane of the Viewer Trees Tree model diagrams that are produced by the Decision Tree option Warnings Warning objects contain certain types of error and warning messages 381 Output Management System Figure 21 2 Output object types File Edit View Data Transform Insert Format Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help El Output E Frequencies Heading Frequencies Title LE Employmer Employment Category Li Bar Chart Cumulative Log Frequency Percent Valid Percen
113. such as occur within BEGIN PROGRAM END PROGRAM BEGIN DATA END DATA and BEGIN GPL END GPL blocks Breakpoints are not saved with the command syntax file and are not included in copied text By default breakpoints are honored during execution You can toggle whether breakpoints are honored or not from Tools gt Honor Breakpoints To Insert a Breakpoint Click anywhere in the gutter to the left of the command text or Position the cursor within the desired command From the menus choose Tools gt Toggle Breakpoint The breakpoint is represented as a red circle in the gutter to the left of the command text and on the same line as the command name 274 Chapter 13 Clearing Breakpoints To clear a single breakpoint Click on the icon representing the breakpoint in the gutter to the left of the command text or Position the cursor within the desired command From the menus choose Tools gt Toggle Breakpoint To clear all breakpoints From the menus choose Tools gt Clear All Breakpoints See Running Command Syntax on p 277 for information about the run time behavior in the presence of breakpoints Bookmarks Bookmarks allow you to quickly navigate to specified positions in a command syntax file You can have up to 9 bookmarks in a given file Bookmarks are saved with the file but are not included when copying text To Insert a Bookmark Position the cursor on the line where you want to insert the bookmark
114. support http www ibm com support The following limitations apply to OLE DB data sources m Table joins are not available for OLE DB data sources You can read only one table at a time 16 Chapter 3 m You can add OLE DB data sources only in local analysis mode To add OLE DB data sources in distributed analysis mode on a Windows server consult your system administrator m n distributed analysis mode available with SPSS Statistics Server OLE DB data sources are available only on Windows servers and both NET and SPSS Survey Reporter Developer Kit must be installed on the server Figure 3 2 Database Wizard with access to OLE DB data sources E Database Wizard Welcome to the Database Wizard This wizard will help you get data from a non PASYV Statistics data source You can choose the data source specify which cases are retrieved aggregate and sort the data before retrieval and specify variable names and properties here Some features are available only when connected to PASVY Statistics Server From which data source would you like to retrieve data OLE DB Data Sources ODBC Data Sources ES OLAP Services 83 dBASE Files amp Excel Files E MS Access Database To add an OLE DB data source gt Click Add OLE DB Data Source gt In Data Link Properties click the Provider tab and select the OLE DB provider gt Click Next or click the Connection tab 17 Data Files Sel
115. switches 374 Production jobs 374 command syntax 265 277 336 340 368 accessing Command Syntax Reference 8 adding to menus 336 journal file 278 output log 267 pasting 266 Production jobs rules 368 419 420 Index running 277 running with toolbar buttons 340 syntax rules 265 command syntax editor 269 auto completion 272 bookmarks 270 274 breakpoints 270 273 277 color coding 272 command spans 270 commenting or uncommenting text 275 formatting syntax 276 indenting syntax 276 line numbers 270 multiple views panes 270 options 332 command syntax files 278 computing variables 125 computing new string variables 127 conditional transformations 127 continuation text 239 for pivot tables 239 controlling number of rows to display 233 copy special 208 copying and pasting output into other applications 208 counting occurrences 130 Crosstabs fractional weights 182 CSV format reading data 27 saving data 39 CTABLES converting TABLES command syntax to CTABLES 413 cumulative sum function 162 currency formats 319 custom attributes 77 custom currency formats 71 319 Custom Dialog Builder 342 check box 356 check box group 361 combo box 356 combo box list items 357 custom dialog package spd files 351 custom dialogs for extension commands 364 dialog properties 344 file browser 362 file type filter 363 filtering variable lists 355 help file 344 installing dialogs 351 i
116. the Data View tab of the Data Editor gt Optionally select one or more variables columns to check To select a variable click the variable name at the top of the column gt From the menus choose Utilities gt Spelling m If there are no selected variables in Data View all string variables will be checked m If there are no string variables in the dataset or the none of the selected variables is a string variable the Spelling option on the Utilities menu is disabled Entering data In Data View you can enter data directly in the Data Editor You can enter data in any order You can enter data by case or by variable for selected areas or for individual cells m The active cell is highlighted m The variable name and row number of the active cell are displayed in the top left corner of the Data Editor m When you select a cell and enter a data value the value is displayed in the cell editor at the top of the Data Editor m Data values are not recorded until you press Enter or select another cell m To enter anything other than simple numeric data you must define the variable type first If you enter a value in an empty column the Data Editor automatically creates a new variable and assigns a variable name To enter numeric data gt Select a cell in Data View 83 Data Editor Enter the data value The value is displayed in the cell editor at the top of the Data Editor gt To record the value pres
117. the PDF document that correspond to the Viewer outline entries Like the Viewer outline pane bookmarks can make 1t much easier to navigate documents with a large number of output objects Embed fonts Embedding fonts ensures that the PDF document will look the same on all computers Otherwise if some fonts used in the document are not available on the computer being used to view or print the PDF document font substitution may yield suboptimal results Layers in pivot tables By default inclusion or exclusion of pivot table layers is controlled by the table properties for each pivot table You can override this setting and include all layers or exclude all but the currently visible layer For more information see the topic Table properties printing in Chapter 11 on p 239 Views of Models By default inclusion or exclusion of model views is controlled by the model properties for each model You can override this setting and include all views or exclude all but the currently visible view For more information see the topic Model properties in Chapter 12 on p 252 Note all model views including tables are exported as graphics To Set PDF Export Options Select Portable Document Format as the export format gt Click Change Options Figure 10 8 PDF Options dialog box R Export Output PDF Options F Embed bookmarks Bookmarks correspond to Viewer Outline entries Embedding them may help users to navigate a large docum
118. the database you want to access To specify data sources you must have the appropriate drivers installed Drivers for a variety of database formats are included with the installation media Some data sources may require a login ID and password before you can proceed to the next step Choosing How to Export the Data After you select the data source you indicate the manner in which you want to export the data 48 Chapter 3 Figure 3 23 Export to Database Wizard choosing how to export EH Export to Database Wizard Choose how to export the data Connected to Database dm_demo mdb Export Methods Replace values in existing fields To use this option you may need to know which variables are the primary keys O Add new fields to an existing table s To use this option you may need to know which variables are the primary keys O Append new records to an existing table gt Drop an existing table and create a new table of the same name Create a new table gt EEEB The following choices are available for exporting data to a database Replace values in existing fields Replaces values of selected fields in an existing table with values from the selected variables in the active dataset For more information see the topic Replacing Values in Existing Fields on p 51 Add new fields to an existing table Creates new fields in an existing table that contain the values of selected var
119. the footnote area of the table and select Hide from the context menu Note For legacy tables select the footnote area of the table select Edit Footnote from the context menu and then deselect uncheck the Visible property for any footnotes you want to hide If a cell contains multiple footnotes use the latter method to selectively hide footnotes To hide all footnotes in the table Select all of the footnotes in the footnote area of the table use click and drag or Shift click to select the footnotes and select Hide from the View menu Note For legacy tables select the footnote area of the table and select Hide from the View menu To show hidden footnotes Select Show All Footnotes from the View menu Footnote marker Footnote Marker changes the character s that can be used to mark a footnote By default standard footnote markers are sequential letters or numbers depending on the table properties settings You can also assign a special marker Special markers are not affected when you renumber footnotes or switch between numbers and letters for standard markers The display of numbers or letters for standard markers and the subscript or superscript position of footnote markers are controlled by the Footnotes tab of the Table Properties dialog For more information see the topic Table properties footnotes on p 236 Note For changing footnote markers in legacy tables see Editing footnotes in legacy tables 245 gt
120. their existing names and dictionary information The break variable if specified can be either numeric or string Aggregated Variables Source variables are used with aggregate functions to create new aggregate variables The aggregate variable name is followed by an optional variable label the name of the aggregate function and the source variable name in parentheses You can override the default aggregate variable names with new variable names provide descriptive variable labels and change the functions used to compute the aggregated data values You can also create a variable that contains the number of cases in each break group 175 File Handling and File Transformations To Aggregate a Data File From the menus choose Data gt Aggregate Optionally select break variables that define how cases are grouped to create aggregated data If no break variables are specified then the entire dataset is a single break group Select one or more aggregate variables Select an aggregate function for each aggregate variable Saving Aggregated Results You can add aggregate variables to the active dataset or create a new aggregated data file m Add aggregated variables to active dataset New variables based on aggregate functions are added to the active dataset The data file itself is not aggregated Each case with the same value s of the break variable s receives the same values for the new aggregate variabl
121. through command syntax For more information see the topic Running Command Syntax on p 277 Navigation Pane The navigation pane contains a list of all recognized commands in the syntax window displayed in the order in which they occur in the window Clicking on a command in the navigation pane positions the cursor at the start of the command You can use the Up and Down arrow keys to move through the list of commands or click on a command to navigate to it A double click will select the command Command names for commands containing certain types of syntactical errors such as unmatched quotes are colored red and in bold text by default For more information see the topic Color Coding on p 272 The first word of each line of unrecognized text is shown in gray You can show or hide the navigation pane by choosing View gt Show Navigation Pane from the menus 271 Working with Command Syntax Error Pane The error pane displays runtime errors from the most previous run m The information for each error contains the starting line number of the command containing the error You can use the Up and Down arrow keys to move through the list of errors Clicking on an entry in the list will position the cursor on the first line of the command that generated the error m You can show or hide the error pane by choosing View gt Show Error Pane from the menus Using Multiple Views You can split the editor pane into two p
122. to either set of rules If you generate command syntax by pasting dialog box choices into a syntax window the format of the commands is suitable for any mode of operation See the Command Syntax Reference available in PDF format from the Help menu for more information Pasting Syntax from Dialog Boxes The easiest way to build a command syntax file is to make selections in dialog boxes and paste the syntax for the selections into a syntax window By pasting the syntax at each step of a lengthy analysis you can build a job file that allows you to repeat the analysis at a later date or run an automated job with the Production Facility In the syntax window you can run the pasted syntax edit it and save it in a syntax file 267 Working with Command Syntax To Paste Syntax from Dialog Boxes gt Open the dialog box and make the selections that you want gt Click Paste The command syntax is pasted to the designated syntax window If you do not have an open syntax window a new syntax window opens automatically and the syntax is pasted there By default the syntax is pasted after the last command You can choose to have syntax pasted at the position of the cursor or to overwrite selected syntax The setting is specified from the Syntax Editor tab in the Options dialog box Figure 13 1 Command syntax pasted from a dialog box il Frequencies Wariable s AA A File Edit View Data Transform Analyze Grap
123. to integer The result is rounded to the closest integer For example subtracting 10 28 2006 from 10 21 2007 returns a result of 1 for years and 12 for months m Retain fractional part The complete value is retained no rounding or truncation is applied For example subtracting 10 28 2006 from 10 21 2007 returns a result of 0 98 for years and 11 76 for months For rounding and fractional retention the result for years is based on average number of days in a year 365 25 and the result for months is based on the average number of days in a month 30 4375 For example subtracting 2 1 2007 from 3 1 2007 m d y format returns a fractional result of 0 92 months whereas subtracting 3 1 2007 from 2 1 2007 returns a fractional difference 154 Chapter 8 of 1 02 months This also affects values calculated on time spans that include leap years For example subtracting 2 1 2008 from 3 1 2008 returns a fractional difference of 0 95 months compared to 0 92 for the same time span in a non leap year Table 8 1 Date difference for years Date 1 Date 2 Truncate Round Fraction 10 21 2006 10 28 2007 1 1 1 02 10 28 2006 10 21 2007 0 1 98 2 1 2007 3 1 2007 0 0 08 2 1 2008 3 1 2008 0 0 08 3 1 2007 4 1 2007 0 0 08 4 1 2007 5 1 2007 0 0 08 Table 8 2 Date difference for months Date 1 Date 2 Truncate Round Fraction 10 21 2006 10 28 2007 12 12 12 22 10 28 2006 10 21 2007 11 12 11 76 2 1 2
124. topic Variable names in Chapter 5 on p 69 Suppressing Multiple Datasets If you prefer to have only one dataset available at a time and want to suppress the multiple dataset feature gt From the menus choose Edit gt Options 94 Chapter 6 gt Click the General tab Select check Open only one dataset at a time For more information see the topic General options in Chapter 17 on p 312 Chapter 7 Data preparation Once you ve opened a data file or entered data in the Data Editor you can start creating reports charts and analyses without any additional preliminary work However there are some additional data preparation features that you may find useful including the ability to m Assign variable properties that describe the data and determine how certain values should be treated m Identify cases that may contain duplicate information and exclude those cases from analyses or delete them from the data file m Create new variables with a few distinct categories that represent ranges of values from variables with a large number of possible values Variable properties Data entered in the Data Editor in Data View or read from an external file format such as an Excel spreadsheet or a text data file lack certain variable properties that you may find very useful including m Definition of descriptive value labels for numeric codes for example 0 Male and Female Identification of missing v
125. value of that custom attribute you can restore the original variable order Transpose Transpose creates a new data file in which the rows and columns in the original data file are transposed so that cases rows become variables and variables columns become cases Transpose automatically creates new variable names and displays a list of the new variable names A new string variable that contains the original variable name case_ bl is automatically created If the active dataset contains an ID or name variable with unique values you can use it as the name variable and its values will be used as variable names in the transposed data file If it is a numeric variable the variable names start with the letter V followed by the numeric value User missing values are converted to the system missing value in the transposed data file To retain any of these values change the definition of missing values in the Variable View in the Data Editor 168 Chapter 9 To Transpose Variables and Cases gt From the menus choose Data gt Transpose Select one or more variables to transpose into cases Merging Data Files You can merge data from two files in two different ways You can m Merge the active dataset with another open dataset or IBM SPSS Statistics data file containing the same variables but different cases m Merge the active dataset with another open dataset or SPSS Statistics data file containing the same c
126. will be copied from the source data file the number of new variables that will be created and the number of dataset file properties that will be copied You can also choose to paste the generated command syntax into a syntax window and save the syntax for later use Identifying Duplicate Cases Duplicate cases may occur in your data for many reasons including m Data entry errors in which the same case is accidentally entered more than once Multiple cases share a common primary ID value but have different secondary ID values such as family members who all live in the same house E Multiple cases represent the same case but with different values for variables other than those that identify the case such as multiple purchases made by the same person or company for different products or at different times Identify Duplicate Cases allows you to define duplicate almost any way that you want and provides some control over the automatic determination of primary versus duplicate cases 115 Data preparation To Identify and Flag Duplicate Cases From the menus choose Data gt Identify Duplicate Cases Select one or more variables that identify matching cases Select one or more of the options in the Variables to Create group Optionally you can Select one or more variables to sort cases within groups defined by the selected matching cases variables The sort order defined by these variables determines the f
127. x 16 pixels Laying Out Controls on the Canvas You add controls to a custom dialog by dragging them from the tools palette onto the canvas To ensure consistency with built in dialogs the canvas is divided into three functional columns in which you can place controls Figure 19 2 Canvas structure Yariable1 Variable s Rank Types di Variable2 Variable Ties amp Variables a gt j By amp Variable gt j Assign Rank 1 to 2 Smallest value Display summary tables Largest value Left Column The left column is primarily intended for a source list control All controls other than target lists and sub dialog buttons can be placed in the left column Center Column The center column can contain any control other than source lists and sub dialog buttons Right Column The right column can only contain sub dialog buttons Although not shown on the canvas each custom dialog contains OK Paste Cancel and Help buttons positioned across the bottom of the dialog The presence and locations of these buttons is automatic however the Help button is hidden if there is no help file associated with the dialog as specified by the Help File property in Dialog Properties You can change the vertical order of the controls within a column by dragging them up or down but the exact position of the controls will be determined automatically for you At run time controls will resize in app
128. 0 Figure 10 12 Page Attributes dialog box Header Footer tab la Page Attributes pHeader amp PageTitle BOmMEBSHeey Footer Page amp Page m Make Default uses the settings specified here as the default settings for new Viewer documents Note this makes the current settings on both the Header Footer tab and the Options tab the default settings m Outline heading labels indicate the first second third and or fourth level outline heading for the first item on each page m Page titles and subtitles print the current page titles and subtitles These can be created with New Page Title on the Viewer Insert menu or with the TITLE and SUBTITLE commands If you have not specified any page titles or subtitles this setting is ignored Note Font characteristics for new page titles and subtitles are controlled on the Viewer tab of the Options dialog box accessed by choosing Options on the Edit menu Font characteristics for existing page titles and subtitles can be changed by editing the titles in the Viewer To see how your headers and footers will look on the printed page choose Print Preview from the File menu To Insert Page Headers and Footers gt Make the Viewer the active window click anywhere in the window gt From the menus choose File gt Page Attributes gt Click the Header Footer tab 223 Working with Output Enter the header and or foote
129. 0 0 Data Editor display options The View menu provides several display options for the Data Editor Fonts This option controls the font characteristics of the data display Grid Lines This option toggles the display of grid lines Value Labels This option toggles between the display of actual data values and user defined descriptive value labels This option is available only in Data View Using Multiple Views In Data View you can create multiple views panes by using the splitters that are located below the horizontal scroll bar and to the right of the vertical scroll bar You can also use the Window menu to insert and remove pane splitters To insert splitters gt In Data View from the menus choose Window gt Split Splitters are inserted above and to the left of the selected cell m Ifthe top left cell is selected splitters are inserted to divide the current view approximately in half both horizontally and vertically m If any cell other than the top cell in the first column is selected a horizontal pane splitter is inserted above the selected cell m Ifany cell other than the first cell in the top row is selected a vertical pane splitter is inserted to the left of the selected cell 90 Chapter 5 Data Editor printing A data file is printed as 1t appears on the screen m The information in the currently displayed view is printed In Data View the data are printed In Variable View data definit
130. 0000 Widow Orphan Tolerance 4 326 Chapter 17 TableLook Select a TableLook from the list of files and click OK or Apply You can use one of the TableLooks provided with IBM SPSS Statistics or you can create your own in the Pivot Table Editor choose TableLooks from the Format menu m Browse Allows you to select a TableLook from another directory Set TableLook Directory Allows you to change the default TableLook directory Use Browse to navigate to the directory you want to use select a TableLook in that directory and then select Set TableLook Directory Note TableLooks created in earlier versions of SPSS Statistics cannot be used in version 16 0 or later Column Widths Controls the automatic adjustment of column widths in pivot tables m Adjust for labels and data except for extremely large tables For tables that don t exceed 10 000 cells adjusts column width to whichever is larger the column label or the largest data value For tables with more than 10 000 cells adjusts column width to the width of the column label Note This option is only available if you select the option to render as legacy tables m Adjust for labels only Adjusts column width to the width of the column label This produces more compact tables but data values wider than the label may be truncated Adjust for labels and data for all tables Adjusts column width to whichever is larger the column label or the largest data
131. 007 3 1 2007 1 1 92 2 1 2008 3 1 2008 1 1 95 3 1 2007 4 1 2007 1 1 1 02 4 1 2007 5 1 2007 1 1 99 155 Data Transformations Specify Result of Subtracting Two Date Format Variables Figure 8 25 Subtract dates step 3 A Date and Time Wizard Step 3 of 3 E Calculation NextRel LastUp Result Variable Units YearsLastUp Years Variable Label Years since last upgrade lees Create the variable now Paste the syntax into the syntax window gt Enter a name for Result Variable This cannot be the name of an existing variable Optionally you can m Assign a descriptive variable label to the new variable Subtract Duration Variables To subtract two duration variables gt Select Subtract two durations on the screen of the Date and Time Wizard labeled Do Calculations on Dates 156 Chapter 8 Select Duration Variables to Subtract Figure 8 26 Subtract two durations step 2 Calculate the difference between two duration variables The result will be a duration variable Only duration variables are shown in the variables list below Variables Duration minus Duration2 aa Ga Gap gt Select the variables to subtract 157 Data Transformations Specify Result of Subtracting Two Duration Variables Figure 8 27 Subtract two durations step 3 Date and Time Wizard Step 3 of 3 Ey Calculation Time2 Time Result Variable Output F
132. 09 219 time series data creating new time series variables 161 data transformations 159 defining date variables 160 replacing missing values 163 transformation functions 162 titles 205 adding to Viewer 205 charts 287 toolbars 337 339 340 creating 337 339 creating new tools 340 customizing 337 339 displaying in different windows 339 showing and hiding 337 trademarks 417 transposing rows and columns 226 transposing variables and cases 167 trigger events 403 autoscripts 403 Tukey estimates 142 Unicode 10 38 Unicode command syntax files 278 unknown measurement level 102 user missing values 74 428 Index value labels 73 83 89 96 321 applying to multiple variables 101 copying 101 in Data Editor 89 in merged data files 171 in outline pane 321 in pivot tables 321 inserting line breaks 74 saving in Excel files 39 using for data entry 83 Van der Waerden estimates 142 variable attributes 76 77 copying and pasting 76 77 custom 77 variable information 300 variable labels 73 312 321 in dialog boxes 3 312 in merged data files 171 in outline pane 321 in pivot tables 321 inserting line breaks 74 variable lists 304 reordering target lists 304 variable names 69 312 generated by OMS 395 in dialog boxes 3 312 mixed case variable names 69 portable files 39 rules 69 truncating long variable names in earlier releases 39 wrapping long variable names in output
133. 11 Old and New Values dialog box lbs Recode into Different Variables Old and New Values E FOId Value New Value O vae owe System missing O system missing O Copy old value s O System or user missing les Vere O Range Lowest thru 24999 gt 1 25000 thru 49999 gt 2 50000 thru 74999 gt 3 ane 75000 thru Highest gt 4 O Range LOVVEST through value Range value through HIGHEST Lo Output variables are strings Width O All other values A Convert numeric strings to numbers 5 gt Automatic Recode The Automatic Recode dialog box allows you to convert string and numeric values into consecutive integers When category codes are not sequential the resulting empty cells reduce performance and increase memory requirements for many procedures Additionally some procedures cannot use string variables and some require consecutive integer values for factor levels 139 Data Transformations Figure 8 12 Automatic Recode dialog box H Automatic Recode Variable gt New Name E Employee Code id a gender gt gender2 Date of Birth bdate di Educational Level yea dll Employment Category e 8 Current Salary salary E Beginning Salary salb E Months since Hire jobti E Previous Experience New Name dl Minority Classification ia Recode Starting from 9 Lowest value Highest value E Use the same recoding schem
134. 219 Viewer PEO isses ma aalsa aone bce a a A da cg 220 To Print Output and ChartS oococococcc eens 220 Print PrevieW 2 2 2 cette teens 220 Page Attributes Headers and FOOterS o oo ooocooococooro ene ne 221 Page Attributes Options ooooooocooooco teens 223 Saving OUtPUt sc conan a A ta eee es ee 224 To Save a Viewer Document o 224 11 Pivot tables 225 Manipulating a pivottable 2 0 00 ccc ete 225 Activating a pivottable 0 0c ccc nee eee 225 PIVOtING a table bs diva pate eg t hades a oa a oa ta doi a cee aed 225 Changing display order of elements within a dimension 020 0e0 eee 226 Moving rows and columns within a dimension element 2202000ee eee 226 Transposing rows and columns 00 0 cece ete eee ee 226 Grouping rows or columns 227 Ungrouping rows or columns 00 0 cece eee eee ete eee 227 Rotating row or column labels 1 0 0 0 c ccc ce eee e teen ene 227 Undoing Changes is npe vies oi beens war ee bal aa cabernet ea bow da bee Ven dil bs 228 xi Working With layerS is oseaan cat aaa aae a aa AE a e aiaa aa BEE e d a A a AAT A aaa 228 Creating and displaying layers n n nananana anane 228 Goto layer category exercise ala enia bee e 230 Showing and hiding teMS o oooooooooonr een eee nent eee eee 231 Hiding rows and columns inatable 00 00 c cece eee ees 231 Showing hidden rows and columns in
135. 6 O Nested group dddd2 cece 05 cccc2 Column Widths daaa3 Minimum width for column labels 5 Table Caption a Text for footnote a Maximum width for column labels b Teatre state h Minimum width for row labels Maximum width for row labels To change general table properties Click the General tab gt Select the options that you want gt Click OK or Apply Set rows to display Note This feature only applies to legacy tables By default tables with many rows are displayed in sections of 100 rows To control the number of rows displayed in a table gt Select Display table by rows gt Click Set Rows to Display 235 Pivot tables or From the View menu of an activated pivot table choose Display table by rows and Set Rows to Display Figure 11 9 Set Rows to Display dialog qP_ Set Rows to Display Rows to Display Widow Orphan Tolerance ES ceca ren Rows to display Controls the maximum number of rows to display at one time Navigation controls allow you move to different sections of the table The minimum value is 10 The default is 100 Widow orphan tolerance Controls the maximum number of rows of the inner most row dimension of the table to split across displayed views of the table For example if there are six categories in each group of the inner most row dimension specifying a value of six would prevent any group from splitting across di
136. 66 Production jobs rules 368 running 277 running command syntax with toolbar buttons 339 syntax rules 265 Unicode command syntax files 278 syntax converter 413 syntax editor 269 auto completion 272 bookmarks 270 274 breakpoints 270 273 277 color coding 272 command spans 270 commenting or uncommenting text 275 formatting syntax 276 indenting syntax 276 line numbers 270 multiple views panes 270 options 332 SYSTAT files 10 opening 10 T4253H smoothing 162 tab delimited files 10 11 27 39 41 opening 10 reading variable names 11 saving 39 writing variable names 41 table breaks 248 table chart 249 table subtypes 381 vs labels 382 TableLooks 232 233 applying 232 creating 233 Index tables 248 alignment 242 background color 241 cell properties 241 242 controlling table breaks 248 converting TABLES command syntax to CTABLES 413 fonts 241 margins 242 TABLES converting TABLES command syntax to CTABLES 413 target lists 304 templates 76 77 287 322 charts 287 in charts 322 using an external data file as a template 107 variable definition 76 77 temporary active file 59 temporary directory 327 setting location in local mode 327 SPSSTMPDIR environment variable 327 temporary disk space 58 59 text 27 205 206 209 217 adding a text file to the Viewer 206 adding to Viewer 205 data files 27 exporting output as text 209 217 383 TIFF files 219 exporting charts 2
137. 71 Add VariableS ee ee een nee etn teen nee ene 171 Add Variables Rename 173 Merging More Than Two Data Sources 0 000 ccc eee eee eens 173 Aggregate Data 1 0 ttt ttt eens 173 Aggregate Data Aggregate FuncCti0N ococccccccooc eee 176 Aggregate Data Variable Name and Label 0 0 0 0c cece eee aee 176 Split Pil sida in en RAG cea eect hd a ha eye lee see ae 177 Select CaSe circa chad obs oad O48 w AEE a s Cedar e duet ate er ne aaa ohare oe 178 Select Cases luisana iaa a dow wows a et a wi Grane doa dears ae 180 Select Cases Random Sample 00 0 cece ete eee 181 Select Cases Range 00 c cette ete eens 181 Weight Cases ea 2 a cgcten a eaten oltre Mabe a ae edie 182 Restructuring Data 1 o 183 To Restructure Data 184 Restructure Data Wizard Select Type 0 0 0c cece eee eee 184 Restructure Data Wizard Variables to Cases Number of Variable Groups 188 Restructure Data Wizard Variables to Cases Select Variables 189 Restructure Data Wizard Variables to Cases Create Index Variables 191 Restructure Data Wizard Variables to Cases Create One Index Variable 193 Restructure Data Wizard Variables to Cases Create Multiple Index Variables 194 Restructure Data Wizard Variables to Cases Options 0 0 0 00 eee eee 195 Restructure Data Wizard Cases to Vari
138. 9 219 exporting charts 209 219 Excel files 10 12 39 336 adding menu item to send data to Excel 336 opening 10 12 saving 39 saving value labels instead of values 39 Excel format exporting output 209 213 383 excluding output from Viewer with OMS 388 EXECUTE command pasted from dialog boxes 278 export data 39 exporting models 253 exporting charts 209 219 368 automated production 368 exporting data 336 adding menu items to export data 336 exporting output 209 214 217 Excel format 209 213 383 HTML 211 HTML format 209 OMS 377 PDF format 209 216 383 PowerPoint format 209 text format 383 Word format 209 212 383 extension bundles creating extension bundles 304 installing extension bundles 306 viewing installed extension bundles 309 extension commands custom dialogs 364 fast pivot tables 325 file information 38 file locations controlling default file locations 327 file transformations 184 aggregating data 173 merging data files 168 171 restructuring data 184 sorting cases 165 split file processing 177 transposing variables and cases 167 weighting cases 182 files 206 adding a text file to the Viewer 206 opening 10 filtered cases 88 in Data Editor 88 find and replace Viewer documents 206 fixed format 27 fonts 89 205 241 in Data Editor 89 in the outline pane 205 footers 221 footnotes 236 243 246 charts 287 markers 236 renumbering 245 fr
139. BASE IV To Add Items to Menus gt From the menus choose View gt Menu Editor gt In the Menu Editor dialog box double click the menu or click the plus sign icon to which you want to add a new item gt Select the menu item above which you want the new item to appear gt Click Insert Item to insert a new menu item gt Enter the text for the new item On Windows operating systems an ampersand 4 before a letter specifies that letter should be used as the underlined mnemonic key Select the file type for the new item script file command syntax file or external application gt Click Browse to select a file to attach to the menu item Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 336 337 Customizing Menus and Toolbars Figure 18 1 Menu Editor dialog box id Menu Editor Apply to rFile Type i Application i amp Production Job Send D ata As T Custom Dialog amp Builder Install Custom amp Dialog syntax l Extension Bundles Script i anguage End of amp Utilties Menu Help Filename _ Samples English CreateData sps Browse Ca crt Cren You can also add entirely new menus and separators between menu items Optionally you can automatically send the contents of the Data Editor to another application when you select that application on the menu Customizing Toolbars You can customize toolbars and create new toolbars Toolbars can contain
140. Compatible with SPSS 12 and earlier customize Variable View O Long period Mersenne Twister CE Reading External Data Assign a scale measurement level if a variable has at least unique values Rounding and Truncation of Numeric Values Number of fuzz bits used in RND and TRUNC e El Transformation and Merge Options Each time the program executes a command it reads the data file Some data transformations such as Compute and Recode and file transformations such as Add Variables and Add Cases do not require a separate pass of the data and execution of these commands can be delayed until the program reads the data to execute another command such as a statistical or charting procedure m For large data files where reading the data can take some time you may want to select Calculate values before used to delay execution and save processing time When this option is selected the results of transformations you make using dialog boxes such as Compute Variable will not appear immediately in the Data Editor new variables created by transformations will be displayed without any data values and data values in the Data Editor cannot be changed while there are pending transformations Any command that reads the data such as a statistical 317 Options or charting procedure will execute the pending transformations and update the data displayed in the Data Editor Alternatively you can use Run Pending Transforms on
141. Controls the language used in the output Does not apply to simple text output The list of available languages depends on the currently installed language files Note This does not affect the user interface language Depending on the language you may also need to use Unicode character encoding for characters to render to properly Note Custom scripts that rely on language specific text strings in the output may not run correctly when you change the output language For more information see the topic Script options on p 329 Notification Controls the manner in which the program notifies you that 1t has finished ruming a procedure and that the results are available in the Viewer User Interface This controls the language used in menus dialogs and other user interface features Note This does not affect the output language Viewer Options Viewer output display options affect only new output produced after you change the settings Output already displayed in the Viewer is not affected by changes in these settings 315 Options Figure 17 2 Options dialog box Viewer tab A Initial Output State Item Icon Item Contents are initially 9 Shown O Hidden Justification 9 Align left O Center O Align right pText Output Font Size WMonospeced os Y B z F Display commands in the log Initial Output State Controls which items are automatically displayed or
142. Creating Localized Versions of Custom Dialogs You can create localized versions of custom dialogs for any of the languages supported by IBM SPSS Statistics You can localize any string that appears in a custom dialog and you can localize the optional help file 366 Chapter 19 gt To Localize Dialog Strings Make a copy of the properties file associated with the dialog The properties file contains all of the localizable strings associated with the dialog By default it is located in the ext lib lt Dialog Name gt folder of the SPSS Statistics installation directory for Windows and Linux and under the Library Application Support IB M SPSS Statistics 20 CustomDialogs lt Dialog Name gt folder for Mac The copy should reside in that same folder and not in a sub folder If you have specified alternate locations for installed dialogs using the SPSS_CDIALOGS_PATH environment variable then the copy should reside in the lt Dialog Name gt folder at the appropriate alternate location For more information see the topic Managing Custom Dialogs on p 351 Rename the copy to lt Dialog Name gt _ lt language identifier gt properties using the language identifiers in the table below For example if the dialog name is mydialog and you want to create a Japanese version of the dialog then the localized properties file should be named mydialog_ja properties Localized properties files must be manually added to any custom dialog package
143. Data Transformations Specify Result of Extracting Component from Date Time Variable Figure 8 29 Get part of a date time variable step 2 f Date and Time Wizard Step 2 of 2 Input variable BirthDateTime Unit Extracted Time portion Result Variable Output Format BirthTime Variable Label Birth Hour and Minute Pee Create the variable now Paste the syntax into the syntax window gt Enter a name for Result Variable This cannot be the name of an existing variable gt If you re extracting the date or time part of a date time variable then you must select a format from the Output Format list In cases where the output format is not required the Output Format list will be disabled Optionally you can m Assign a descriptive variable label to the new variable Time Series Data Transformations Several data transformations that are useful in time series analysis are provided m Generate date variables to establish periodicity and to distinguish between historical validation and forecasting periods m Create new time series variables as functions of existing time series variables m Replace system and user missing values with estimates based on one of several methods A time series is obtained by measuring a variable or set of variables regularly over a period of time Time series data transformations assume a data file structure in which each case row represents a set of obser
144. Educational Level yea e a dl Employment Category By E Beginning Salary salb Months since Hire jobti 8 Previous Experience dl Minority Classification Assign Rank 1 to IM Display summary tables Smallest value Largest value ox easte eset cence Hee To Rank Cases gt From the menus choose Transform gt Rank Cases Select one or more variables to rank You can rank only numeric variables 142 Chapter 8 Optionally you can rank cases in ascending or descending order and organize ranks into subgroups Rank Cases Types You can select multiple ranking methods A separate ranking variable is created for each method Ranking methods include simple ranks Savage scores fractional ranks and percentiles You can also create rankings based on proportion estimates and normal scores Rank Simple rank The value of the new variable equals its rank Savage score The new variable contains Savage scores based on an exponential distribution Fractional rank The value of the new variable equals rank divided by the sum of the weights of the nonmissing cases Fractional rank as percent Each rank is divided by the number of cases with valid values and multiplied by 100 Sum of case weights The value of the new variable equals the sum of case weights The new variable is a constant for all cases in the same group Ntiles Ranks are based on
145. Entire cell E If value labels are displayed for the selected variable column the label text is searched not the underlying data value and you cannot replace the label text Variable View Find is only available for the Name Label Values Missing and custom variable attribute columns Replace is only available for the Label Values and custom attribute columns In the Values value labels column the search string can match either the data value or a value label Note Replacing the data value will delete any previous value label associated with that value Case selection status in the Data Editor If you have selected a subset of cases but have not discarded unselected cases unselected cases are marked in the Data Editor with a diagonal line slash through the row number 89 Data Editor Figure 5 14 Filtered cases in the Data Editor ES demo sav DataSet2 Data Editor QuE File Edit view Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help 13 empcat 1 marital address income inccat Unmarried 13 00 Under 25 Unmarried 17 00 Under 25 Married 14 00 Under 25 Married 15 00 Under 25 Married 17 00 Under 25 Married 14 00 Under 25 Unmarried 19 00 Under 25 Unmarried 14 00 Under 25 Married 17 00 Under 25 Married 19 00 Under 25 Married 24 00 Under 25 Married 14 00 Under 25 41 Data View A Variable View lt MA SPSS Processor is ready 0 Ol oOo lololol
146. Excel xIs Pivot table rows columns and cells are exported as Excel rows columns and cells with all formatting attributes intact for example cell borders font styles and background colors Text output is exported with all font attributes intact Each line in the text output is a row in the Excel file with the entire contents of the line contained in a single cell Charts tree diagrams and model views are included in PNG format HTML htm Pivot tables are exported as HTML tables Text output is exported as preformatted HTML Charts tree diagrams and model views are embedded by reference and you should export charts in a suitable format for inclusion in HTML documents for example PNG and JPEG Portable Document Format pdf All output is exported as it appears in Print Preview with all formatting attributes intact PowerPoint file ppt Pivot tables are exported as Word tables and are embedded on separate slides in the PowerPoint file with one slide for each pivot table All formatting attributes of the pivot table are retained for example cell borders font styles and background colors Charts tree diagrams and model views are exported in TIFF format Text output is not included Export to PowerPoint is available only on Windows operating systems Text txt Text output formats include plain text UTF 8 and UTF 16 Pivot tables can be exported in tab separated or space separated format All text output i
147. I Ssstats_group s BARCHART oo 66 So 66 ES Starget_list ES target_list is the value of the Identifier property for the target list control and stats_group is the value of the Identifier property for the item group control The following table shows one way to specify the Syntax properties of the item group and the check boxes contained within it in order to generate the desired result The Syntax property of the target list would be set to ThisValue as described in the previous example Syntax property of item group STATISTICS ThisValue Checked Syntax property of mean check box MEAN Checked Syntax property of stddev check box STDDEV Checked Syntax property of min check box MINIMUM Checked Syntax property of max check box MAXIMUM At run time S stats_group will be replaced by the current value of the Syntax property for the item group control Specifically 3sThisValue will be replaced by a blank separated list of the values of the Checked or Unchecked Syntax property of each check box depending on its state checked or unchecked Since we only specified values for the Checked Syntax property only checked boxes will contribute to 3 ThisValue For example if the user checks the mean and standard deviation boxes the run time value of the Syntax property for the item group will be STATISTICS MEAN STDDEV If no boxes are checked then the Syntax property for the i
148. ID Numeric CALLWAIT Numeric OWNTY Numeric Width for variable wicth string fields 255 Z Minimize string widths based on observed values lt Beck seat gt Loman canes ro 26 Chapter 3 Sorting Cases If you are in distributed mode connected to a remote server available with IBM SPSS Statistics Server you can sort the data before reading it into IBM SPSS Statistics Figure 3 11 Database Wizard sorting cases Database Wizard Distributed Mode y Sort Cases You can sort the data before it is read into SPSS or press Next to get the data without sorting Sort before retrieval by Direction Sorting is available only when connected to SPSS Server Any variables not given names on the previous panel do not appear in this variable list but will have names generated automatically Finish Cancel Help You can also sort data after reading it into SPSS Statistics but presorting may save time for large data sources Results The Results step displays the SQL Select statement for your query m You can edit the SQL Select statement before you run the query but if you click the Back button to make changes in previous steps the changes to the Select statement will be lost To save the query for future use use the Save query to file section
149. If your command files use production mode syntax rules and don t contain periods at the end of each command you need to include the command line switch b or b when you run SyntaxConverter exe as in syntaxconverter exe b myfiles oldfile sps myfiles newfile sps SyntaxConverter Script Windows Only On Windows you can also run the syntax converter with the script SyntaxConverter wwd located in the Samples directory of the installation directory From the menus choose Utilities gt Run Script Navigate to the Samples directory and select SyntaxConverter wwd This will open a simple dialog box where you can specify the names and locations of the old and new command syntax files Appendix Notices This information was developed for products and services offered worldwide IBM may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non IBM product program or service IBM may have patents or pending
150. LE COUNTER DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE INTEGER DOUBLE INTEGER INTEGER IM Auto Join Tables 20 Chapter 3 Establishing relationships To create a relationship drag a field from any table onto the field to which you want to join it The Database Wizard will draw a join line between the two fields indicating their relationship These fields must be of the same data type Auto Join Tables Attempts to automatically join tables based on primary foreign keys or matching field names and data type Join Type If outer joins are supported by your driver you can specify inner joins left outer joins or right outer joins m Inner joins An inner join includes only rows where the related fields are equal In this example all rows with matching ID values in the two tables will be included Outer joins In addition to one to one matching with inner joins you can also use outer joins to merge tables with a one to many matching scheme For example you could match a table in which there are only a few records representing data values and associated descriptive labels with values in a table containing hundreds or thousands of records representing survey respondents A left outer join includes all records from the table on the left and from the table on the right includes only those records in which the related fields are equal In a right outer join the join imports all records from the t
151. LES commands incorrectly under some circumstances including TABLES commands that contain m Parenthesized variable names with the initial letters sta or lab in the TABLES subcommand if the variable is parenthesized by itself for example var by statvar by labvar These will be interpreted as the STATISTICS and LABELS keywords E SORT subcommands that use the abbreviations A or D to indicate ascending or descending sort order These will be interpreted as variable names The utility program cannot convert TABLES commands that contain m Syntax errors E OBSERVATION subcommands that refer to a range of variables using the TO keyword for example var01 TO var05 O Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 413 414 Appendix A m String literals broken into segments separated by plus signs for example TITLE My Title Macro calls that in the absence of macro expansion would be invalid TABLES syntax Since the converter does not expand the macro calls it treats them as if they were simply part of the standard TABLES syntax The utility program will not convert TABLES commands contained in macros All macros are unaffected by the conversion process IGRAPH Limitations IGRAPH changed significantly in release 16 Because of these changes some subcommands and keywords in IGRAPH syntax created before that release may not be honored See the IGRAPH section in the Command Syntax Reference for the complet
152. M SPSS Statistics menu choose Help gt Tutorial Chapter Getting Help Help is provided in many different forms Help menu The Help menu in most windows provides access to the main Help system plus tutorials and technical reference material m Topics Provides access to the Contents Index and Search tabs which you can use to find specific Help topics m Tutorial Illustrated step by step instructions on how to use many of the basic features You don t have to view the whole tutorial from start to finish You can choose the topics you want to view skip around and view topics in any order and use the index or table of contents to find specific topics m Case Studies Hands on examples of how to create various types of statistical analyses and how to interpret the results The sample data files used in the examples are also provided so that you can work through the examples to see exactly how the results were produced You can choose the specific procedure s that you want to learn about from the table of contents or search for relevant topics in the index m Statistics Coach A wizard like approach to guide you through the process of finding the procedure that you want to use After you make a series of selections the Statistics Coach opens the dialog box for the statistical reporting or charting procedure that meets your selected criteria Command Syntax Reference Detailed command syntax reference information is a
153. Model XML File model xml Browse Transformation XML File transformations xml Browse Saved Merged XML File merged_model xml Browse Hemme gt Select the model XML file gt Select the transformation XML file gt Enter a path and name for the new merged model XML file or use Browse to select the location and name Note You cannot merge model ZIP archives for models that contain splits separate model information for each split group or ensemble models with transformation XML files Utilities Chapter This chapter describes the functions found on the Utilities menu and the ability to reorder target variable lists m For information on the Scoring Wizard see Scoring data with predictive models m For information on merging model and transformation XML files see Merging model and transformation XML files Variable information The Variables dialog box displays variable definition information for the currently selected variable including m Variable label m Data format m User missing values m Value labels m Measurement level Figure 16 1 Variables dialog box Es Variables Variable IM E Age in years age E Y 94 Marital status mar Y Years at current a Y Y Household income M di income category i T E Price of primary v F dll Primary vehicle pri E E Level of education F E Years with curren Fi E Retired retire
154. NIX ssd01 SAS v6 file format for UNIX Sun HP IBM SAS v6 for Alpha OSF ssd04 SAS v6 file format for Alpha OSF DEC UNIX SAS Transport xpt SAS transport file Stata Version 8 Intercooled dta Stata Version 8 SE dta Stata Version 7 Intercooled dta Stata Version 7 SE dta Stata Version 6 dta Stata Versions 4 5 dta Saving File Options For spreadsheet tab delimited files and comma delimited files you can write variable names to the first row of the file Saving Data Files in Excel Format You can save your data in one of three Microsoft Excel file formats Excel 2 1 Excel 97 and Excel 2007 m Excel 2 1 and Excel 97 are limited to 256 columns so only the first 256 variables are included m Excel 2007 is limited to 16 000 columns so only the first 16 000 variables are included m Excel 2 1 is limited to 16 384 rows so only the first 16 384 cases are included a Excel 97 and Excel 2007 also have limits on the number of rows per sheet but workbooks can have multiple sheets and multiple sheets are created if the single sheet maximum is exceeded 42 Chapter 3 Variable Types The following table shows the variable type matching between the original data in IBMO SPSS Statistics and the exported data in Excel SPSS Statistics Variable Type Excel Data Format Numeric 0 00 0 00 Comma 0 00 4 440 00 Dollar S 0_ Date d mmm yyyy Time hh mm ss Str
155. OME 8 demo INCCAT lt il gt a demo CAR 8 demo CARCAT m Aggregated Variables a demo ED Summaries of Variable s 8 demo EMPLOY 8 demo RETIRE E demo EMPCAT 8 demo GENDER 8 demo RESIDE lt mo ai gt lt uu gt Number of cases Aggregation is available only when connected to SPSS Server Finish Cancel Help You can also aggregate data after reading it into SPSS Statistics but preaggregating may save time for large data sources To create aggregated data select one or more break variables that define how cases are grouped Select one or more aggregated variables Select an aggregate function for each aggregate variable Optionally create a variable that contains the number of cases in each break group Note If you use SPSS Statistics random sampling aggregation is not available Defining Variables Variable names and labels The complete database field column name is used as the variable label Unless you modify the variable name the Database Wizard assigns variable names to each column from the database in one of two ways m Ifthe name ofthe database field forms a valid unique variable name the name is used as the variable name m Ifthe name of the database field does not form a valid unique variable name a new unique name is automatically generated Click any cell to edit the variable name 25 Data Files Converting strings to numeric values Select the
156. Recode to Numeric box for a string variable if you want to automatically convert it to a numeric variable String values are converted to consecutive integer values based on alphabetical order of the original values The original values are retained as value labels for the new variables Width for variable width string fields This option controls the width of variable width string values By default the width is 255 bytes and only the first 255 bytes typically 255 characters in single byte languages will be read The width can be up to 32 767 bytes Although you probably don t want to truncate string values you also don t want to specify an unnecessarily large value which will cause processing to be inefficient Minimize string widths based on observed values Automatically set the width of each string variable to the longest observed value Figure 3 10 Database Wizard defining variables E Database Wizard E Define Variables Edit variable names and properties Names will be automatically generated if left blank To convert a string variable to numeric using the original values as value labels check Recode to Numeric Result Variable Name Numeric Numeric MARITAL Numeric ADDRESS Numeric INCOME Numeric INCCAT Numeric CAR Numeric CARCAT Numeric ED Numeric EMPLOY Numeric RETIRE Numeric EMPCAT Numeric GENDER String RESIDE Numeric J WIRELESS Numeric O MULTLINE Numeric VOICE Numeric PAGER Numeric INTERNET Numeric CALL
157. Restructure Data Wizard Options Step 6 EH Restructure Data Wizard Step 6 of 7 Variables to Cases Options Inthis step you can set options that will be applied to the restructured data file Handling of Variables not Selected Drop variable s from the new data file Keep and treat as fixed variable s System Missing or Blank Values in all Transposed Variables Create a case in the new file O Discard the data Case Count Variable 7 Count the number of new cases created by the case in the current data Drop unselected variables In the Select Variables step step 3 you selected variable groups to be restructured variables to be copied and an identification variable from the current data The data from the selected variables will appear in the new file If there are other variables in the current data you can choose to discard or keep them Keep missing data The wizard checks each potential new row for null values A null value is a system missing or blank value You can choose to keep or discard rows that contain only null values Create a count variable The wizard can create a count variable in the new file It contains the number of new rows generated by a row in the current data A count variable may be useful if you choose to discard null values from the new file because that makes it possible to generate a different number of new rows for a given row in the current data
158. S options on p 383 Specify an output destination m File All selected output is routed to a single file m Based on object names Output is routed to multiple destination files based on object names A separate file is created for each output object with a filename based on either table subtype names or table labels Enter the destination folder name m New dataset For SPSS Statistics data file format output you can route the output to a dataset The dataset is available for subsequent use in the same session but is not saved unless you explicitly save it as a file prior to the end of the session This option is available only for SPSS Statistics data file format output Dataset names must conform to variable naming rules For more information see the topic Variable names in Chapter 5 on p 69 379 Output Management System gt Optionally m Exclude the selected output from the Viewer If you select Exclude from Viewer the output types in the OMS request will not be displayed in the Viewer window If multiple active OMS requests include the same output types the display of those output types in the Viewer is determined by the most recent OMS request that contains those output types For more information see the topic Excluding output display from the viewer on p 388 m Assign an ID string to the request All requests are automatically assigned an ID value and you can override the system default ID string with a descriptive
159. SPSS Statistics format Excel Opens Excel files Lotus 1 2 3 Opens data files saved in 1 2 3 format for release 3 0 2 0 or 1A of Lotus SYLK Opens data files saved in SYLK symbolic link format a format used by some spreadsheet applications dBASE Opens dBASE format files for either dBASE IV dBASE II or IN PLUS or dBASE II Each case is a record Variable and value labels and missing value specifications are lost when you save a file in this format SAS SAS versions 6 9 and SAS transport files Using command syntax you can also read value labels from a SAS format catalog file Stata Stata versions 4 8 Opening File Options Read variable names For spreadsheets you can read variable names from the first row of the file or the first row of the defined range The values are converted as necessary to create valid variable names including converting spaces to underscores Worksheet Excel 95 or later files can contain multiple worksheets By default the Data Editor reads the first worksheet To read a different worksheet select the worksheet from the drop down list Range For spreadsheet data files you can also read a range of cells Use the same method for specifying cell ranges as you would with the spreadsheet application 12 Chapter 3 Reading Excel 95 or Later Files The following rules apply to reading Excel 95 or later files Data type and width Each column is a variable The data type and width for ea
160. Select the first desired cell and then use Shift click to include a contiguous group of cells or Ctrl click Command click on Mac to select additional cells one at a time To select an entire row or column gt Click a row or column label Click the row or column label again Note that this is a separate single click and not part of a double click Note The above method is not available for legacy tables or Click a row or column label gt From the menus choose Edit gt Select gt Data and Label Cells or 248 Chapter 11 gt gt Right click the category label for the row or column From the context menu choose Select gt Data and Label Cells Notes m The visual highlight that indicates a selected row or column may span noncontiguous areas of the table m For legacy tables you can Ctrl Alt click the row or column label to select the row or column Printing pivot tables Several factors can affect the way that printed pivot tables look and these factors can be controlled by changing pivot table attributes m For multidimensional pivot tables tables with layers you can either print all layers or print only the top visible layer For more information see the topic Table properties printing on p 239 m For long or wide pivot tables you can automatically resize the table to fit the page or control the location of table breaks and page breaks For more information see the topic Table pr
161. Swaps the Rows and Columns in the output Inputs Pivot Table OutputDoc Item Index Dim objPivotManager As ISpssPivotMgr Set objPivotManager objPivotTable PivotManager obj PivotManager TransposeRowsWithColumns End Sub 410 Chapter 22 Following is the converted script Sub Main Purpose Swaps the Rows and Columns in the currently active pivot table Effects Swaps the Rows and Columns in the output Dim objOutputItem As ISpssItem Dim objPivotTable as PivotTable Set objOutputItem scriptContext GetOutputItem Set objPivotTable objOutputItem ActivateTable Dim objPivotManager As ISpssPivotMgr Set objPivotManager objPivotTable PivotManager obj PivotManager TransposeRowsWithColumns objOutputItem Deactivate End Sub m Notice that nothing in the converted script indicates which object the script is to be applied to The association between an output item and an autoscript is set from the Scripts tab of the Options dialog and maintained across sessions E scriptContext GetOutputItem gets the output item an ISpssItem object that triggered the autoscript m The object returned by scriptContext GetOutputItem is not activated If your script requires an activated object you 1l need to activate it as done in this example with the ActivateTable method When you re finished with any table manipulations call the Deactivate method For version 16 0 there is no distinction between scripts tha
162. TH take precedence over the default location Extension bundles will be installed to the first writable location Note that Mac users may also utilize the SPSS _ EXTENSIONS PATH environment variable For multiple locations separate each with a semicolon on Windows and a colon on Linux and Mac The specified locations must exist on the target machine After setting SPSS_EXTENSIONS PATH you will need to restart SPSS Statistics for the changes to take effect If the extension bundle contains a custom dialog and you don t have write permission to the SPSS Statistics installation directory for Windows and Linux then you will also need to set the SPSS_CDIALOGS_PATH environment variable The rules for SPSS_CDIALOGS_PATH are the same as for SPSS EXTENSIONS PATH If you don t know whether the extension bundles you are installing contain a custom dialog and you don t have write access to the default location then it is best to specify an alternate location in SPSS_CDIALOGS_PATH To create the SPSS EXTENSIONS PATH or SPSS_CDIALOGS_PATH environment variable on Windows from the Control Panel Windows XP gt Select System gt Select the Advanced tab and click Environment Variables gt Inthe User variables section click New enter the name of the environment variable for instance SPSS EXTENSIONS PATH in the Variable name field and the desired path s in the Variable value field Windows Vista or Windows 7 gt Select User Accounts
163. The Chart Editor provides various methods for manipulating charts Menus Many actions that you can perform in the Chart Editor are done with the menus especially when you are adding an item to the chart For example you use the menus to add a fit line to a scatterplot After adding an item to the chart you often use the Properties dialog box to specify options for the added item Properties Dialog Box Options for the chart and its chart elements can be found in the Properties dialog box To view the Properties dialog box you can gt Double click a chart element or gt Select a chart element and then from the menus choose Edit gt Properties Additionally the Properties dialog box automatically appears when you add an item to the chart 286 Chapter 14 Figure 14 6 Properties dialog box Fill amp Border tab Pro pe rties 46 184 72 A Border Pattern E 46 184 72 rBorder Style Weight Style End Caps CaO fo E cua i The Properties dialog box has tabs that allow you to set the options and make other changes to a chart The tabs that you see in the Properties dialog box are based on your current selection Some tabs include a preview to give you an idea of how the changes will affect the selection when you apply them However the chart itself does not reflect your changes until you click Apply Yo
164. The value labels indicate that the variable is a dichotomy with values of 0 and 1 representing No and Yes respectively All five variables in the list are coded the same way and the value of 1 the code for Yes is the counted value for the multiple dichotomy set Categories A multiple category set consists of multiple variables all coded the same way often with many possible response categories For example a survey item states Name up to three nationalities that best describe your ethnic heritage There may be hundreds of possible responses but for coding purposes the list is limited to the 40 most common nationalities with everything else relegated to an other category In the data file the three choices become three variables each with 41 categories 40 coded nationalities and one other category In the sample data file ethmult and mltcars are multiple category sets Category Label Source For multiple dichotomies you can control how sets are labeled m Variable labels Uses the defined variable labels or variable names for variables without defined variable labels as the set category labels For example if all of the variables in the set have the same value label or no defined value labels for the counted value for example Yes then you should use the variable labels as the set category labels 107 Data preparation m Labels of counted values Uses the defined value labels of the counted valu
165. There are a number of different types of windows in IBM SPSS Statistics Data Editor The Data Editor displays the contents of the data file You can create new data files or modify existing data files with the Data Editor If you have more than one data file open there is a separate Data Editor window for each data file Viewer All statistical results tables and charts are displayed in the Viewer You can edit the output and save it for later use A Viewer window opens automatically the first time you run a procedure that generates output Pivot Table Editor Output that is displayed in pivot tables can be modified in many ways with the Pivot Table Editor You can edit text swap data in rows and columns add color create multidimensional tables and selectively hide and show results Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 1 2 Chapter 1 Chart Editor You can modify high resolution charts and plots in chart windows You can change the colors select different type fonts or sizes switch the horizontal and vertical axes rotate 3 D scatterplots and even change the chart type Text Output Editor Text output that is not displayed in pivot tables can be modified with the Text Output Editor You can edit the output and change font characteristics type style color size Syntax Editor You can paste your dialog box choices into a syntax window where your selections appear in the form of command syntax You can then edit the
166. To save a Unicode data file in a format that can be read by earlier releases open the file in code page mode and re save it The file will be saved in the encoding based on the current locale Some data loss may occur if the file contains characters not recognized by the current locale For information on switching between Unicode mode and code page mode see General Options on p 312 Saving Data Files in External Formats gt Make the Data Editor the active window click anywhere in the window to make it active From the menus choose File gt Save As Select a file type from the drop down list Enter a filename for the new data file To write variable names to the first row of a spreadsheet or tab delimited data file Click Write variable names to spreadsheet in the Save Data As dialog box To save value labels instead of data values in Excel files Click Save value labels where defined instead of data values in the Save Data As dialog box To save value labels to a SAS syntax file active only when a SAS file type is selected Click Save value labels into a sas file in the Save Data As dialog box For information on exporting data to database tables see Exporting to a Database on p 45 For information on exporting data for use in IBM SPSS Data Collection applications see Exporting to IBM SPSS Data Collection on p 57 Saving Data Data File Types You can save data in the following formats SPSS Stati
167. Uninstall The menu item for the custom dialog will be removed the next time you start SPSS Statistics Saving to a Custom Dialog Package File You can save the specifications for a custom dialog to an external file allowing you to distribute the dialog to other users or save specifications for a dialog that is not yet installed Specifications are saved to a custom dialog package spd file From the menus in the Custom Dialog Builder choose File gt Save Opening a Custom Dialog Package File You can open a custom dialog package file containing the specifications for a custom dialog allowing you to modify the dialog and re save it or install it From the menus in the Custom Dialog Builder choose File gt Open Manually Copying an Installed Custom Dialog By default the specifications for an installed custom dialog are stored in the ext lib lt Dialog Name gt folder of the installation directory for Windows and Linux For Mac specifications are stored under the Library Application Support IBM SPSS Statistics lt version gt CustomDialogs lt Dialog 353 Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs Name gt folder where lt version gt is the two digit SPSS Statistics version for example 20 You can copy this folder to the same relative location in another instance of SPSS Statistics and 1t will be recognized as an installed dialog the next time that instance is launched If you have specified alternate locations for inst
168. Web Report File This output file format is designed for use with Predictive Enterprise Services It is essentially the same as the SPSS Statistics Viewer format except that tree diagrams are saved as static images Word RTF Pivot tables are exported as Word tables with all formatting attributes intact for example cell borders font styles and background colors Text output is exported as formatted RTF Charts tree diagrams and model views are included in PNG format Graphics Images For HTML and Output XML formats you can include charts tree diagrams and model views as image files A separate image file is created for each chart and or tree m For HTML document format standard lt IMG SRC filename gt tags are included in the HTML document for each image file m For Output XML document format the XML file contains a chart element with an ImageFile attribute of the general form lt chart imageFile filepath filename gt for each image file m Image files are saved in a separate subdirectory folder The subdirectory name is the name of the destination file without any extension and with _files appended to the end For example if the destination file is julydata htm the images subdirectory will be named julydata_files Format The available image formats are PNG JPG EMF BMP and VML m EMF enhanced metafile format is available only on Windows operating systems m VML image format is available only for HTML document fo
169. You can use existing scripts as autoscripts by associating them with a selected object in the Viewer for instance a frequency table In the Viewer select an object to associate with an autoscript multiple Viewer objects can trigger the same autoscript but each object can only be associated with a single autoscript From the menus choose Utilities gt Associate AutoScript Figure 22 2 Associating an autoscript HE Output2 Document2 Viewer QU File Edit View Data Transform Insert Format Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help SHARA B E 600 BS o FE variables H ari 5 OMS Control Panel E OMS Identifiers jE Output a Log H Data File Comments El Frequencies Title Define Variable Sets 2 Notes C Use Variable Sets Active Dataset Employment Category LE Statistics Lj Employment Category g Ey Associate Create Edit AutoScript Run Script ed zj E y ha Bee KAI Production Job Associate AutoScript g SPSS Processor is ready F E 131 W 551 pt If the selected object does not have an associated autoscript the Select Autoscript dialog opens Browse for the script you want and select it Click Apply If the selected object is already associated with an autoscript you are prompted to verify that you want to change the association Clicking OK opens the Select Autoscript di
170. You cannot create such variable names in the dialog boxes and you should generally avoid them Command syntax is case insensitive and three or four letter abbreviations can be used for many command specifications You can use as many lines as you want to specify a single command You can add space or break lines at almost any point where a single blank is allowed such as around slashes parentheses arithmetic operators or between variable names For example FREQUENCIES VARIABLES JOBCAT GENDER PERCENTILES 25 50 75 BARCHART and freq var jobcat gender percent 25 50 75 bar are both acceptable alternatives that generate the same results INCLUDE Files For command files run via the INCLUDE command batch mode syntax rules apply The following rules apply to command specifications in batch mode m All commands in the command file must begin in column 1 You can use plus or minus signs in the first column if you want to indent the command specification to make the command file more readable m Ifmultiple lines are used for a command column 1 of each continuation line must be blank Command terminators are optional m A line cannot exceed 256 characters any additional characters are truncated Unless you have existing command files that already use the INCLUDE command you should probably use the INSERT command instead since it can accommodate command files that conform
171. a The Chart Editor features Simple intuitive user interface You can quickly select and edit parts of the chart using menus context menus and toolbars You can also enter text directly on a chart m Wide range of formatting and statistical options You can choose from a full range of styles and statistical options m Powerful exploratory tools You can explore your data in various ways such as by labeling reordering and rotating it You can change chart types and the roles of variables in the chart You can also add distribution curves and fit interpolation and reference lines m Flexible templates for consistent look and behavior You can create customized templates and use them to easily create charts with the look and options that you want For example if you always want a specific orientation for axis labels you can specify the orientation in a template and apply the template to other charts How to View the Chart Editor Create a chart in IBM SPSS Statistics or open a Viewer file with charts Double click a chart in the Viewer The chart is displayed in the Chart Editor 285 Overview of the chart facility Figure 14 5 Chart displayed in the Chart Editor Chart Editor Que File Edit View Options Elements Help Gender Ml Female 60 000 E male 40 000 Mean Current Salary Clerical Custodial Manager Employment Category H 274 5 W4 342 75 points Chart Editor Fundamentals
172. able Both The variable will be used as both input and output None The variable has no role assignment Partition The variable will be used to partition the data into separate samples for training testing and validation Split Included for round trip compatibility with IBM SPSS Modeler Variables with this role are not used as split file variables in IBM SPSS Statistics 76 Chapter 5 m By default all variables are assigned the Input role This includes data from external file formats and data files from versions of SPSS Statistics prior to version 18 m Role assignment only affects dialogs that support role assignment It has no effect on command syntax To assign roles gt Select the role from the list in the Role cell for the variable Column width You can specify a number of characters for the column width Column widths can also be changed in Data View by clicking and dragging the column borders Column width for proportional fonts is based on average character width Depending on the characters used in the value more or fewer characters may be displayed in the specified width Column width affect only the display of values in the Data Editor Changing the column width does not change the defined width of a variable Variable alignment Alignment controls the display of data values and or value labels in Data View The default alignment is right for numeric variables and left for string variab
173. able on the right and from the table on the left imports only those records in which the related fields are equal Limiting Retrieved Cases The Limit Retrieved Cases step allows you to specify the criteria to select subsets of cases rows Limiting cases generally consists of filling the criteria grid with criteria Criteria consist of two expressions and some relation between them The expressions return a value of true false or missing for each case m If the result is true the case is selected m Ifthe result is false or missing the case is not selected Most criteria use one or more of the six relational operators lt gt lt gt and lt gt E Expressions can include field names constants arithmetic operators numeric and other functions and logical variables You can use fields that you do not plan to import as variables 21 Data Files Figure 3 6 Database Wizard limiting retrieved cases fa Database Wizard E Limit Retrieved Cases Limit the cases that are retrieved by specifying selection criteria Tip Fields and Functions can be added to an expression by dragging and dropping into a cell See help for how to express date and time values Fields Criteria Connector Expressiont______ Retatiom Expression2 Functions ASCll strexpr Y Randomly Sample Cases Sampling Method Sample Size CHAR asciicode Retrieve cases and randomly select Approximate percentage
174. ables Select Variables 196 Restructure Data Wizard Cases to Variables SortData oo o 198 Restructure Data Wizard Cases to Variables Options o oooooooooo 199 Restructure Data Wizard Finish 0 0 0 ccc ccc ee eee eee 200 10 Working with Output 202 VIQWOD oai dictate da d Ew dad o A A a ate n 202 Showing and Hiding ResultS ooocococcccocococo eae 203 Moving Deleting and Copying Output 00 00 cece eee 203 Changing Initial Alignment 0 0 000 cette eee 204 Changing Alignment of Output Items 0 00 0 0 00 tee 204 Viewer Outline 0 0 0 ett n eee eee 204 Adding Items to the Viewer nananana 205 Finding and Replacing Information in the Viewer 00000 cece cece ee eeee 206 Copying Output into Other Applications 0 00 00 ccs 208 Export Output 0 0 teen e tenets 209 HIML Options s 04 iii io o ddd ede ee ee ad 211 Word RTF Options 0 aaa e a eet ete 212 Excel OptONS s ssi cote nts bowl a a A baG Med a ihe IA aiai bau Pesala wes 213 PowerPoint OptlonSs oc sae ee bet ne ele had baad te ak pees de ba Meee cadens be 214 PDF OPUONS i nonoa sates Seuree land DAE at eaten eevee 216 TeXtODtons erasa tiaia web cows gadon daiat aa bah does Vale ed nad ek weet are eae 217 Graphics Only Options 20 0 0 ccc ttt eee eae 218 Graphics Format Options n onanan annaa
175. ails Figure 12 10 Component Model Details view Component Model Details Model Accuracy Method Predictors gt Model Sizes Synapses The table displays information on component models listed by row By default component models are sorted in ascending model number order You can sort the rows in ascending or descending order by the values of any column Model A number representing the sequential order in which the component model was created Accuracy Overall accuracy formatted as a percentage Method The modeling method Predictors The number of predictors used in the component model Model Size Model size depends on the modeling method for trees it is the number of nodes in the tree for linear models it is the number of coefficients for neural networks it is the number of synapses Records The weighted number of input records in the training sample 263 Models Automatic Data Preparation Figure 12 11 Automatic Data Preparation view Automatic Data Preparation Target Total sales Role Actions Taken Merge categories to maximize Age category Predictor association with target Merge categories to maximize Primary keyword set Predictor association with target 9 Change measurement level from Promotion Predictor continuous to ordinal Merge categories to maximize association with target Secondary keyword set Predictor If the original field name is X then the transfor
176. ains at least one negative value Continuous 318 Chapter 17 Variable contains no valid values less than Continuous 10 000 Variable has N or more valid unique values Continuous Variable has no valid values less than 10 Continuous Variable has less than N valid unique values Nominal N is the user specified cut off value The default is 24 Rounding and Truncation of Numeric Values For the RND and TRUNC functions this setting controls the default threshold for rounding up values that are very close to a rounding boundary The setting is specified as a number of bits and is set to 6 at install time which should be sufficient for most applications Setting the number of bits to 0 produces the same results as in release 10 Setting the number of bits to 10 produces the same results as in releases 11 and 12 m For the RND function this setting specifies the number of least significant bits by which the value to be rounded may fall short of the threshold for rounding up but still be rounded up For example when rounding a value between 1 0 and 2 0 to the nearest integer this setting specifies how much the value can fall short of 1 5 the threshold for rounding up to 2 0 and still be rounded up to 2 0 m For the TRUNC function this setting specifies the number of least significant bits by which the value to be truncated may fall short of the nearest rounding boundary and be rounded up before truncating For
177. al column labels Gender Cumulative Frequency Percent Valid Percent Percent Valid Female 216 45 6 45 6 45 6 Male 258 54 4 54 4 100 0 Employment Category Cumulative Frequency Percent Valid Percent Percent Walid Clerical 363 76 6 76 6 76 6 Custodial Manager ss temp sav DataSet3 Data Editor File Edit View Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help Liles 1 Command_ Subtype_ Frequencies Frequencies Frequencies Frequencies 5 Frequencies 6 Frequencies Frequencies Data View Frequencies Label_ Gender Gender Gender Employment Categor Employment Categor Employment Categor Employment Categor Warl Variable View Visible 9 of 9 Va War2 Female Male Total Clerical Custodial Manager Total Frequency Percent ValidPercent CumulativePercent w m The second table contributes additional cases rows to the data file but contributes no new variables because the column labels are exactly the same so there are no large patches of missing data m Although the values for Command_ and Subtype_are the same the Label_ value identifies the source table for each group of cases because the two frequency tables have different titles Example Multiple Tables with Different Column Labels A new variable is created in the data file for each unique column label in the tables that are routed to the data file This process results in blocks of miss
178. allation directory The utility is designed to run from a command prompt and must be run from its installed location The form of the command line is installextbundles statssrv download no yes source lt folder gt lt filename gt statssrv Specifies that you are running the utility on a SPSS Statistics Server You should also install the same extension bundles on client machines that connect to the server download nolyes Specifies whether the utility has permission to access the internet in order to download any R packages required by the specified extension bundles The default is no If you keep the default or do not have internet access then you will need to manually install any required R packages For more information see the topic Required R packages on p 308 309 Utilities source lt folder gt lt filename gt Specifies the extension bundles to install You can specify the path to a folder containing extension bundles or you can specify a list of filenames of extension bundles If you specify a folder all extension bundles files of type spe found in the folder will be installed Separate multiple filenames with one or more spaces Enclose paths with double quotes if they contain spaces Note When ruming installextbundles sh on SPSS Statistics Server for UNIX the Bash shell must be present on the server machine Viewing installed extension bundles To view details for the extension bundles install
179. alled dialogs using the SPSS_CDIALOGS PATH environment variable then copy the lt Dialog Name gt folder from the appropriate alternate location If alternate locations for installed dialogs have been defined for the instance of SPSS Statistics you are copying to then you can copy to any one of the specified locations and the dialog will be recognized as an installed dialog the next time that instance is launched Control Types The tools palette provides the controls that can be added to a custom dialog Source List A list of source variables from the active dataset For more information see the topic Source List on p 354 Target List A target for variables transferred from the source list For more information see the topic Target List on p 354 Check Box A single check box For more information see the topic Check Box on p 356 Combo Box A combo box for creating drop down lists For more information see the topic Combo Box and List Box Controls on p 356 List Box A list box for creating single selection or multiple selection lists For more information see the topic Combo Box and List Box Controls on p 356 Text control A text box that accepts arbitrary text as input For more information see the topic Text Control on p 358 Number control A text box that is restricted to numeric values as input For more information see the topic Number Control on p 358 Static Text control A control for displaying stati
180. alog Optionally you can configure an existing script as an autoscript from the Scripts tab in the Options dialog box The autoscript can be applied to a selected set of output types or specified as the base autoscript that is applied to all new Viewer items For more information see the topic Script options in Chapter 17 on p 329 Scripting with the Python Programming Language IBM SPSS Statistics provides two separate interfaces for programming with the Python language on Windows Linux and Mac OS Use of these interfaces requires the IBM SPSS Statistics Integration Plug In for Python which is included with IBM SPSS Statistics Essentials for Python For information see How to Get Integration Plug Ins available from Core 406 Chapter 22 System gt Frequently Asked Questions in the Help system For help getting started with the Python programming language see the Python tutorial available at http docs python org tut tut html Python Scripts Python scripts make use of the interface exposed by the Python SpssClient module They operate on user interface and output objects and can also run command syntax For instance you would use a Python script to customize a pivot table m Python scripts are run from Utilities gt Run Script from the Python editor launched from SPSS Statistics accessed from File gt Open gt Script or from an external Python process such as a Python IDE or the Python interpreter m Pyth
181. alues are preserved Dictionary information from the original variable including defined value labels and user missing value assignments is applied to the new variable Note Custom variable attributes are not included m A variable label is automatically generated for the new variable that describes the shift operation that created the variable To Create a New Variable with Shifted Values gt From the menus choose Transform gt Shift Values Select the variable to use as the source of values for the new variable Enter a name for the new variable gt Select the shift method lag or lead and the number of cases to shift gt Click Change gt Repeat for each new variable you want to create Recoding Values You can modify data values by recoding them This is particularly useful for collapsing or combining categories You can recode the values within existing variables or you can create new variables based on the recoded values of existing variables Recode into Same Variables The Recode into Same Variables dialog box allows you to reassign the values of existing variables or collapse ranges of existing values into new values For example you could collapse salaries into salary range categories You can recode numeric and string variables If you select multiple variables they must all be the same type You cannot recode numeric and string variables together 134 Chapter 8 Figure 8 8 Recode into Sa
182. alues codes for example 99 Not applicable Assignment of measurement level nominal ordinal or scale All of these variable properties and others can be assigned in Variable View in the Data Editor There are also several utilities that can assist you in this process Define Variable Properties can help you define descriptive value labels and missing values This is particularly useful for categorical data with numeric codes used for category values For more information see the topic Defining Variable Properties on p 96 m Set Measurement Level for Unknown identifies variables fields that do not have a defined measurement level and provides the ability to set the measurement level for those variables This is important for procedures in which measurement level can affect the results or determines which features are available For more information see the topic Setting measurement level for variables with unknown measurement level on p 102 m Copy Data Properties provides the ability to use an existing IBM SPSSO Statistics data file as a template for file and variable properties in the current data file This is particularly useful if you frequently use external format data files that contain similar content such as monthly reports in Excel format For more information see the topic Copying Data Properties on p 107 O Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 95 96 Chapter 7 Defining Variable Properties Define V
183. ample LOOP END LOOP In both cases the command will be colored red by default until the required END statement is added Note You can navigate to the next or previous syntactical error by choosing Next Error or Previous error from the Validation Errors submenu of the Tools menu From the Syntax Editor tab in the Options dialog box you can change default colors and text styles and you can turn color coding off or on You can also turn color coding of commands subcommands keywords and keyword values off or on by choosing Tools gt Color Coding from the menus You can turn color coding of syntactical errors off or on by choosing Tools gt Validation Choices made on the Tools menu override settings in the Options dialog box but do not persist across sessions Note Color coding of command syntax within macros is not supported Breakpoints gt gt Breakpoints allow you to stop execution of command syntax at specified points within the syntax window and continue execution when ready m Breakpoints are set at the level of a command and stop execution prior to running the command m Breakpoints cannot occur within LOOP END LOOP DO IF END IF DO REPEAT END REPEAT INPUT PROGRAM END INPUT PROGRAM and MATRIX END MATRIX blocks They can however be set at the beginning of such blocks and will stop execution prior to running the block Breakpoints cannot be set on lines containing non IBM SPSS Statistics command syntax
184. an select a specific date format such as dd mm yyyy mm dd yy and yyyyddd m For numeric custom format you can select one of five custom currency formats CCA through CCE For more information see the topic Currency options in Chapter 17 on p 319 m An asterisk is displayed in the Value column if the specified width is less than the width of the scanned values or the displayed values for preexisting defined value labels or missing values categories m A period is displayed if the scanned values or the displayed values for preexisting defined value labels or missing values categories are invalid for the selected display format type For example an internal numeric value of less than 86 400 is invalid for a date format variable Assigning the Measurement Level When you click Suggest for the measurement level in the Define Variable Properties main dialog box the current variable is evaluated based on the scanned cases and defined value labels and a measurement level is suggested in the Suggest Measurement Level dialog box that opens The Explanation area provides a brief description of the criteria used to provide the suggested measurement level 100 Chapter 7 Figure 7 3 Suggest Measurement Level dialog box E Define Variable Properties Suggest Measurement Level Wariable ovnpe Current Measurement Level Scale Suggested Level Ordinal or Nominal Ordinal Nominal Explanation oynpc has only
185. analyses without deleting those cases from the data file Sequential count of matching cases in each group Creates a variable with a sequential value from 1 to n for cases in each matching group The sequence is based on the current order of cases in each group which is either the original file order or the order determined by any specified sort variables Move matching cases to the top Sorts the data file so that all groups of matching cases are at the top of the data file making 1t easy to visually inspect the matching cases in the Data Editor Display frequencies for created variables Frequency tables containing counts for each value of the created variables For example for the primary indicator variable the table would show the number of cases with a value 0 for that variable which indicates the number of duplicates and the number of cases with a value of 1 for that variable which indicates the number of unique and primary cases Missing Values For numeric variables the system missing value is treated like any other value cases with the system missing value for an identifier variable are treated as having matching values for that variable For string variables cases with no value for an identifier variable are treated as having matching values for that variable 117 Data preparation Visual Binning Visual Binning is designed to assist you in the process of creating new variables based on grouping contiguous values of exis
186. ancel the run Unicode Syntax Files In Unicode mode the default format for saving command syntax files created or modified during the session is also Unicode UTF 8 Unicode format command syntax files cannot be read by versions of IBM SPSS Statistics prior to 16 0 For more information on Unicode mode see General options on p 312 To save a syntax file in a format compatible with earlier releases From the syntax window menus choose File gt Save As In the Save As dialog from the Encoding drop down list choose Local Encoding The local encoding is determined by the current locale Multiple Execute Commands Syntax pasted from dialog boxes or copied from the log or the journal may contain EXECUTE commands When you run commands from a syntax window EXECUTE commands are generally unnecessary and may slow performance particularly with larger data files because each EXECUTE command reads the entire data file For more information see the EXECUTE command in the Command Syntax Reference available from the Help menu in any IBM SPSSO Statistics window Lag Functions One notable exception is transformation commands that contain lag functions In a series of transformation commands without any intervening EXECUTE commands or other commands that read the data lag functions are calculated after all other transformations regardless of command order For example COMPUTE lagvar LAG varl COMPUTE varl var1
187. anes arranged with one above the other gt From the menus choose Window gt Split Actions in the navigation and error panes such as clicking on an error act on the pane where the cursor is positioned You can remove the splitter by double clicking it or choosing Window gt Remove Split Terminology Commands The basic unit of syntax is the command Each command begins with the command name which consists of one two or three words for example DESCRIPTIVES SORT CASES or ADD VALUE LABELS Subcommands Most commands contain subcommands Subcommands provide for additional specifications and begin with a forward slash followed by the name of the subcommand Keywords Keywords are fixed terms that are typically used within a subcommand to specify options available for the subcommand Keyword Values Keywords can have values such as a fixed term that specifies an option or a numeric value Example CODEBOOK gender jobcat salary VARINFO VALUELABELS MISSING OPTIONS VARORDER MEASURE The name of the command is CODEBOOK VARINFO and OPTIONS are subcommands VALUELABELS MISSING and VARORDER are keywords MEASURE is a keyword value associated with VARORDER 272 Chapter 13 Auto Completion The Syntax Editor provides assistance in the form of auto completion of commands subcommands keywords and keyword values By default you are prompted with a context sensitive list of available terms
188. appear and all cases in the active dataset will be exported 50 Chapter 3 Figure 3 25 Export to Database Wizard selecting cases to export E Export to Database Wizard Select cases to export J Export all cases or use an existing filter condition to export a subset of cases mAhich cases do you want to export All cases A E a O Filtered cases dd dd rtitrss EEE SE F ji For information on defining a filter condition for case selection see Select Cases on p 178 Matching Cases to Records When adding fields columns to an existing table or replacing the values of existing fields you need to make sure that each case row in the active dataset is correctly matched to the corresponding record in the database m In the database the field or set of fields that uniquely identifies each record is often designated as the primary key m You need to identify which variable s correspond to the primary key field s or other fields that uniquely identify each record m The fields don t have to be the primary key in the database but the field value or combination of field values must be unique for each case 51 Data Files To match variables with fields in the database that uniquely identify each record gt Drag and drop the variable s onto the corresponding database fields or gt Select a variable from the list of v
189. are closed To add a server Get the server connection information from your administrator Click Add to open the Server Login Settings dialog box Enter the connection information and optional settings and then click OK To edit a server Get the revised connection information from your administrator Click Edit to open the Server Login Settings dialog box Enter the changes and click OK To search for available servers Note The ability to search for available servers is available only if you are licensed to use the Statistics Adapter and your site is running IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services 3 5 or later Click Search to open the Search for Servers dialog box If you are not logged on to a IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository you will be prompted for connection information Select one or more available servers and click OK The servers will now appear in the Server Login dialog box To connect to one of the servers follow the instructions To switch to another server Searching for Available Servers Use the Search for Servers dialog box to select one or more servers that are available on your network This dialog box appears when you click Search on the Server Login dialog box Figure 4 2 Search for Servers dialog box y Search for Servers E Server Name Description Port 10 11 40 216 Server on Linux 3353 2 10 11 10 201 Server on Solaris 3353
190. are saved as Stata variable names Any characters other than letters numbers and underscores are converted to underscores IBM SPSS Statistics variable names that contain multibyte characters for example Japanese or Chinese characters are converted to variable names of the general form Vnnn where nnn is an integer value For versions 5 6 and Intercooled versions 7 8 the first 80 bytes of string values are saved For Stata SE 7 8 the first 244 bytes of string values are saved For versions 5 6 and Intercooled versions 7 8 only the first 2 047 variables are saved For Stata SE 7 8 only the first 32 767 variables are saved SPSS Statistics Variable Stata Variable Type Stata Data Format Type Numeric Numeric g Comma Numeric 8 Dot Numeric 8 Scientific Notation Numeric g Date Datetime Numeric Dm Y Time DTime Numeric g number of seconds 44 Chapter 3 SPSS Statistics Variable Stata Variable Type Type Wkday Numeric Month Numeric Dollar Numeric Custom Currency Numeric String String Stata Data Format g 1 7 g 1 12 g g s Date Adate Edate SDate Jdate Qyr Moyr Wkyr Saving Subsets of Variables Figure 3 21 Save Data As Variables dialog box E Save Data As Variables Name Label Order age Age in years 1 marital Marital status 2 address Years atc 3 income Household 4 inccat Income cat 5 6 7 8 9 A o oO oa car Price of pri carcat Primary ve
191. ariable Properties is designed to assist you in the process of assigning attributes to variables including creating descriptive value labels for categorical nominal ordinal variables Define Variable Properties m Scans the actual data values and lists all unique data values for each selected variable m Identifies unlabeled values and provides an auto label feature m Provides the ability to copy defined value labels and other attributes from another variable to the selected variable or from the selected variable to multiple additional variables Note To use Define Variable Properties without first scanning cases enter O for the number of cases to scan To Define Variable Properties gt From the menus choose Data gt Define Variable Properties Figure 7 1 Initial dialog box for selecting variables to define E Define Variable Properties Use this facility to label variable values and set other properties after a scanning the data Select the variables to scan They should be categorical nominal or ordinal for best results You can change the measurement level setting in the next panel Variables Yariables to Scan da Gender gender a L Owns TY ownty amp Number of people in amp Owns VCR ownver E Wireless service oe Owns stereo CD playe 8E Multiple lines multline L Owns PDA ownpda E Yoice mail voice Le E Owns computer own Paging service pag amp Owns fax machine o
192. ariable attributes can be displayed and edited in the Data Editor in Variable View 79 Data Editor Figure 5 7 Custom variable attributes displayed in Variable View E Untitled3 Data Editor ogg File Edit Yiew Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help Janset ermal DerivedFrom Formula Single select Dd Single select gl Computed value Array mean Income Income2 Income3 al Computed value Array max Incomet Income2 Income3 Custom variable attribute names are enclosed in square brackets Attribute names that begin with a dollar sign are reserved and cannot be modified A blank cell indicates that the attribute does not exist for that variable the text Empty displayed in a cell indicates that the attribute exists for that variable but no value has been assigned to the attribute for that variable Once you enter text in the cell the attribute exists for that variable with the value you enter m The text Array displayed in a cell indicates that this is an attribute array an attribute that contains multiple values Click the button in the cell to display the list of values To Display and Edit Custom Variable Attributes gt In Variable View from the menus choose View gt Customize Variable View Select check the custom variable attributes you want to display The custom variable attributes are the ones enclosed in square brackets 80 Chapter 5
193. ariables select the corresponding field in the database table and click Connect To delete a connection line Select the connection line and press the Delete key Figure 3 26 Export to Database Wizard matching cases to records E Export to Database Wizard Match cases to records y Which variables and fields should be used to match cases in the dataset with records in the table or view Only the records that match will be changed To indicate that a variable in the dataset corresponds to a field in the table or view select the variable and the field and then click the Connect button A line will be drawn to connect the variable to the field Alternatively you may drag the variable to the field and drop it To remove a line select it and press the Delete key SPSS Statistics SurveySubset Table SurveySubset D E Wireless pouble Mutine peteger 9 voce aa Pager double Internet integer CallerD datetime E SurveyDate varchar da Comments E Wireless Recoded Recod Right click on a variable for more information Connect Note The variable names and database field names may not be identical since database field names may contain characters not allowed in IBM SPSS Statistics variable names but if the active dataset was created from the database table you are modifying either the variable names or the variable labels will usually be at least similar to the databa
194. as you type Pressing Enter or Tab will insert the currently highlighted item in the list at the position of the cursor You can display the list on demand by pressing Ctrl Spacebar and you can close the list by pressing the Esc key The Auto Complete menu item on the Tools menu toggles the automatic display of the auto complete list on or off You can also enable or disable automatic display of the list from the Syntax Editor tab in the Options dialog box Toggling the Auto Complete menu item overrides the setting on the Options dialog but does not persist across sessions Note The auto completion list will close if a space is entered For commands consisting of multiple words such as ADD FILES select the desired command before entering any spaces Color Coding The Syntax Editor color codes recognized elements of command syntax such as commands and subcommands as well as various syntactical errors like unmatched quotes or parentheses Unrecognized text is not color coded Commands By default recognized commands are colored blue and in bold text If however there is a recognized syntactical error within the command such as a missing parenthesis the command name is colored red and in bold text by default Note Abbreviations of command names such as FREQ for FREQUENCIES are not colored but such abbreviations are valid Subcommands Recognized subcommands are colored green by default If however the subcommand is missing a r
195. ases or change the unit of analysis by grouping cases together A wide range of file transformation capabilities is available including the ability to Sort data You can sort cases based on the value of one or more variables Transpose cases and variables The IBM SPSS Statistics data file format reads rows as cases and columns as variables For data files in which this order is reversed you can switch the rows and columns and read the data in the correct format Merge files You can merge two or more data files You can combine files with the same variables but different cases or the same cases but different variables Select subsets of cases You can restrict your analysis to a subset of cases or perform simultaneous analyses on different subsets Aggregate data You can change the unit of analysis by aggregating cases based on the value of one or more grouping variables Weight data You can weight cases for analysis based on the value of a weight variable Restructure data You can restructure data to create a single case record from multiple cases or create multiple cases from a single case Sort Cases This dialog box sorts cases rows of the active dataset based on the values of one or more sorting variables You can sort cases in ascending or descending order m Ifyou select multiple sort variables cases are sorted by each variable within categories of the preceding variable on the Sort list For example if you sele
196. ases but different variables To Merge Files gt From the menus choose Data gt Merge Files gt Select Add Cases or Add Variables Figure 9 3 Selecting files to merge E Add Cases to region1 sav DataSet1 Select a dataset from the list of open datasets or from a file to merge with the active dataset O An open dataset An external SPSS Statistics data file Non SPSS Statistics data files must be opened in SPSS Statistics before they can be used as part of a merge ENE Add Cases Add Cases merges the active dataset with a second dataset or external IBM SPSS Statistics data file that contains the same variables columns but different cases rows For example you might record the same information for customers in two different sales regions and maintain the data for each region in separate files The second dataset can be an external SPSS Statistics data file or a dataset available in the current session 169 gt File Handling and File Transformations Figure 9 4 Add Cases dialog box E Add Cases From region2 sav DataSet2 Unpaired Variables Variables in New Active Dataset datebrth ownrent sex brthdate gt sex F Indicate case source as variable Active dataset region2 sav DataSet2 Cow eeste eset cence He Unpaired Variables Variables to be excluded from the new merged data file Variables from the active dataset ar
197. at For space separated format you can also control m Column Width Autofit does not wrap any column contents and each column is as wide as the widest label or value in that column Custom sets a maximum column width that is applied to all columns in the table and values that exceed that width wrap onto the next line in that column m Row Column Border Character Controls the characters used to create row and column borders To suppress display of row and column borders enter blank spaces for the values Layers in pivot tables By default inclusion or exclusion of pivot table layers is controlled by the table properties for each pivot table You can override this setting and include all layers or exclude all but the currently visible layer For more information see the topic Table properties printing in Chapter 11 on p 239 Include footnotes and captions Controls the inclusion or exclusion of all pivot table footnotes and captions Views of Models By default inclusion or exclusion of model views is controlled by the model properties for each model You can override this setting and include all views or exclude all but the currently visible view For more information see the topic Model properties in Chapter 12 on p 252 Note all model views including tables are exported as graphics To Set Text Export Options Select Text as the export format gt Click Change Options 218 Chapter 10 Figure 10 9 Text Opti
198. at attempt to match the original split as closely as possible using alternate predictors If no surrogate splits are specified or all surrogate split variables are missing the biggest child node is used m Logistic Regression models For covariates in logistic regression models if a mean value of the predictor was included as part of the saved model then this mean value is used in place of the missing value in the scoring computation and scoring proceeds If the predictor is categorical for example a factor in a logistic regression model or if the mean value is not available then the system missing value is returned Use System Missing Return the system missing value when scoring a case with a missing value Selecting scoring functions The scoring functions are the types of scores available for the selected model For example predicted value of the target probability of the predicted value or probability of a selected target value 296 Chapter 15 Figure 15 3 Scoring Wizard Select Scoring Functions wy Scoring Wizard Model Name propensity_scores Model Type BLR Select Scoring Functions Each selected function will create a new field in the dataset Function Field Names Fi Probablity of Selected Category Probabilty_of_responding Scoring function The scoring functions available are dependent on the model One or more of the following will be available in the list
199. at you simply never want to see without routing any other output to some external file and format To suppress the display of certain output objects without routing other output to an external file Create an OMS request that identifies the unwanted output Select Exclude from Viewer gt For the output destination select File but leave the File field blank Click Add The selected output will be excluded from the Viewer while all other output will be displayed in the Viewer in the normal fashion Note This setting has no effect on OMS output saved to external formats or files including the Viewer SPV and SPW formats It also has no effect on output saved to SPV format in a batch job executed with the Batch Facility available with IBM SPSS Statistics Server Routing output to IBM SPSS Statistics data files A data file in IBM SPSS Statistics format consists of variables in the columns and cases in the rows which is essentially the format in which pivot tables are converted to data files Columns in the table are variables in the data file Valid variable names are constructed from the column labels m Row labels in the table become variables with generic variable names Varl Var2 Var3 and so on in the data file The values of these variables are the row labels in the table 389 Output Management System m Three table identifier variables are automatically included in the data file Command _ Subtyp
200. ata file is sorted by the source variable For example if you limit the scan to the first 100 cases of a data file with 1000 cases and the data file is sorted in ascending order of age of respondent instead of four percentile age bins each containing 25 of the cases you may find that the first three bins each contain only about 3 3 of the cases and the last bin contains 90 of the cases Copying Binned Categories When creating binned categories for one or more variables you can copy the binning specifications from another variable to the currently selected variable or from the selected variable to multiple other variables 123 Data preparation Figure 7 18 Copying bins to or from the current variable E Copy Bins from Current a Select the variables to be binned like the current variable Variables Owns YCR ownver Owns stereo CD player owned Owns PDA ownpda Owns computer owenpc Owns fax machine ownfax conv J concer nep To Copy Binning Specifications gt Define binned categories for at least one variable but do not click OK or Paste Select click a variable in the Scanned Variable List for which you have defined binned categories Click To Other Variables Select the variables for which you want to create new variables with the same binned categories gt Click Copy or Select click a variable in the Scanned Variable List to which you want to copy defined b
201. ata only with a different filename so the original data are not affected You can change the file permissions back to read write by choosing Mark File Read Write from the File menu Virtual Active File The virtual active file enables you to work with large data files without requiring equally large or larger amounts of temporary disk space For most analysis and charting procedures the original data source is reread each time you run a different procedure Procedures that modify the data require a certain amount of temporary disk space to keep track of the changes and some actions always require enough disk space for at least one entire copy of the data file Figure 3 32 Temporary disk space requirements COMPUTE v REGODE v4 SORT CASES BY Action GET FILE v1 5 sav REGRESSION or FREQUENGIES SAVE ZPRED CACHE 1112 13 14 15 16 1 Virtual 21 22 23 24 25 Active 31 32 33 34 35 36 3 31 32 33 34 35 36 3 File 4i 42 43 44 45 46 4 41 42 43 44 45 46 4 51 52 59 54 55 56 5 51 52 59 54 55 56 5 61 62 63 Joa os 666 Lot e2 es 64 65 6 12 Data Stored in 21 22 23 Temporary 31 32 33 Disk 43 Space 51 52 53 s 55 61 6 gt Tea Lee Testes 59 Data Files Actions that don t require any temporary disk space include m Reading IBM SPSS Statistics data files Merging t
202. atable 0 0 00 cece cece eens 231 Hiding and showing dimension labels 000 0c eect eee eens 231 Hiding and showing table titles ooococcccococococoro eee 231 TableLo0KS cocina a na a a ida aci 232 To apply a TableLo0k ooooocococcco teens 232 To edit or create a TableLook 1 cc etn e eee eens 233 Table properties dai i gcc aa agaia ede a ASS iaaa ee Pe a eee 233 To change pivot table properties 0 0 ee ene teen eens 233 Table properties general 0 ee eee eee nent ene e eens 233 Table properties footnotes o ooooocooooo een e ene n eens 236 Table properties cell formats 0 cc ccc cee teen e eens 237 Table properties borders 0 0 0 ccc ce eee nen ene e eens 239 Table properties printinG oooocoooooro eee eee nen tenn e eens 239 Cell properties sic coca resnie bodanie daa ed eed dale ad 241 Font and background oosa caase ccc een eet n tent n ee a 241 Format valle 2 sic areicck i See ty aarti a Sogo Aubin bi aka aod ee ena eg die aowoy eee dew A eae a deh 242 Alignment and margins 0 ccc cece teen nee n nnn nee 242 Footnotes and captions 00 0 tenets 243 Adding footnotes and captions ooococococcc ete 243 To hide or show a caption 0 0 ccc o 244 To hide or show a footnote ina table 1 ce tenes 244 Footnote marker o 244 Renumbering footnotes 0 00 ccc tenet eens 245 Editing footnotes in
203. ataset are included Numeric variables include all numeric formats except date and time formats 356 Chapter 19 Check Box The Check Box control is a simple check box that can generate different command syntax for the checked versus the unchecked state The Check Box control has the following properties Identifier The unique identifier for the control This is the identifier to use when referencing the control in the syntax template Title The label that is displayed with the check box For multi line titles use n to specify line breaks ToolTip Optional ToolTip text that appears when the user hovers over the control Mnemonic Key An optional character in the title to use as a keyboard shortcut to the control The character appears underlined in the title The shortcut is activated by pressing Alt mnemonic key The Mnemonic Key property is not supported on Mac Default Value The default state of the check box checked or unchecked Checked Unchecked Syntax Specifies the command syntax that is generated when the control is checked and when it is unchecked To include the command syntax in the syntax template use the value of the Identifier property The generated syntax whether from the Checked Syntax or Unchecked Syntax property will be inserted at the specified position s of the identifier For example if the identifier is checkbox1 then at run time instances of checkbox1 in the syntax template will be replace
204. ates that some type of case filtering is currently in effect and not all cases in the data file are included in the analysis Weight status The message Weight on indicates that a weight variable is being used to weight cases for analysis Split File status The message Split File on indicates that the data file has been split into separate groups for analysis based on the values of one or more grouping variables Dialog boxes Most menu selections open dialog boxes You use dialog boxes to select variables and options for analysis Dialog boxes for statistical procedures and charts typically have two basic components Source variable list A list of variables in the active dataset Only variable types that are allowed by the selected procedure are displayed in the source list Use of short string and long string variables is restricted in many procedures Target variable list s One or more lists indicating the variables that you have chosen for the analysis such as dependent and independent variable lists Variable names and variable labels in dialog box lists You can display either variable names or variable labels in dialog box lists and you can control the sort order of variables in source variable lists To control the default display attributes of variables in source lists choose Options on the Edit menu For more information see the topic General options in Chapter 17 on p 312 4 Chapter 1 You can also change the
205. atically printed on a new page regardless of the widow orphan setting m Include continuation text for tables that don t fit on a single page You can display continuation text at the bottom of each page and at the top of each page If neither option is selected the continuation text will not be displayed Figure 11 16 Table Properties dialog box Printing tab Y Print all layers El Print each layer on separate page E Rescale wide table to fit page E Rescale long table to fit page Widow Orphan lines Continuation text Position of Continuation Text E At bottom of table at end of caption E Attop of table at end of title Sample dddd cece ddddi group dddd2 eccet cccc2 coco ccco2 Table Title bbbb bbbb2 abea 2124 aboa abed 6365 abea abe 5853 abea aaaal dddd3 Table Caption ecco a Text for footnote a b Text for footnote b 11 42 abed 20 abed 89 45 abed 30 0 abed To control pivot table printing properties gt Click the Printing tab Select the printing options that you want gt Click OK or Apply 241 Pivot tables Cell properties Cell properties are applied to a selected cell You can change the font value format alignment margins and colors Cell properties override table properties therefore if you change table properties you do not change any individually applied cell proper
206. ator Recently Used File List This controls the number of recently used files that appear on the File menu Script options Use the Scripts tab to specify the default script language and any autoscripts you want to use You can use scripts to automate many functions including customizing pivot tables 330 Chapter 17 Figure 17 10 Options dialog box Scripts tab mts matas Met eo saxea Default script language Basc Select the language to use when new scripts are created rAutoscripts M Enable autoscripting Base Autoscript The base script is applied to all objects before any other autoscripts are applied Autoscript for Individual Objects Command Identifiers Objects and Scripts Identifiers Objects Script Language Autocorrelations Table Basic Case Processing Summar Basic Model Description Table Notes Partial Autocorrelations Ta Warnings Scripts applied To apply an autoscript to an object first select a command in the Command Identifiers list Then enter or select a script in the Objects and Scripts grid Note Legacy Sax Basic users must manually convert any custom autoscripts The autoscripts installed with pre 16 0 versions are available as a set of separate script files located in the Samples subdirectory of the directory where IBM SPSS Statistics is installed By default no output items are associated with autoscripts You must manually associate all autoscri
207. ault m Reading databases with the Database Wizard m Reading text files with the Text Wizard The Text Wizard provides an optional setting to automatically cache the data By default this option is selected You can turn it off by deselecting Cache data locally For the Database Wizard you can paste the generated command syntax and delete the CACHE command Creating a Data Cache Although the virtual active file can vastly reduce the amount of temporary disk space required the absence of a temporary copy of the active file means that the original data source has to be reread for each procedure For large data files read from an external source creating a temporary copy of the data may improve performance For example for data tables read from a database source the SQL query that reads the information from the database must be reexecuted for any command or 60 Chapter 3 procedure that needs to read the data Since virtually all statistical analysis procedures and charting procedures need to read the data the SQL query is reexecuted for each procedure you run which can result in a significant increase in processing time 1f you run a large number of procedures If you have sufficient disk space on the computer performing the analysis either your local computer or a remote server you can eliminate multiple SQL queries and improve processing time by creating a data cache of the active file The data cache is a temporary copy of the
208. ax file and forward slashes are acceptable in commands that include file specifications for example GET FILE GET DATA SAVE on all operating systems m The silent keyword suppresses any user prompts in the production job and the symbo1 switch inserts the quoted data file name and location wherever the runtime symbol datafile appears in the command syntax files included in the production job Converting Production Facility files Production Facility job files spp created in releases prior to 16 0 will not run in release 16 0 or later For Windows and Macintosh Production Facility job files created in earlier releases you can use prodconvert located in the installation directory to convert those files to new production job files spj Run prodconvert from a command window using the following specifications installpath prodconvert filepath filename spp where installpath is the location of the folder in which IBM SPSS Statistics is installed and filepath is the folder t the original production job file is located A new file with the same name but with the extension spj is created in the same folder as the original file Note If the path contains spaces enclose each path and file specification in double quotes On Macintosh operating systems use forward slashes instead of back slashes Limitations m WMF and EMF chart formats are not supported PNG format is used in place of these formats m The export options Outp
209. bels and for other areas of the table Control the width and color of the lines that form the borders of each area of the table To change pivot table properties gt Activate the pivot table gt From the menus choose Format gt Table Properties Select a tab General Footnotes Cell Formats Borders or Printing Select the options that you want gt Click OK or Apply The new properties are applied to the selected pivot table To apply new table properties to a TableLook instead of just the selected table edit the TableLook Format menu TableLooks Table properties general Several properties apply to the table as a whole You can m Show or hide empty rows and columns An empty row or column has nothing in any of the data cells 234 Chapter 11 Control the default number of rows to display in long tables To display all the rows in a table regardless of how long it is deselect uncheck Display table by rows Note This feature only applies to legacy tables m Control the placement of row labels which can be in the upper left corner or nested m Control maximum and minimum column width expressed in points Figure 11 8 Table Properties dialog box General tab Table Properties General Sample Y Hide empty rows and columns Table Title E Display tables by rows bbbb dddd ccoo 2322 Row Dimension Labels ccco2 O in Corner dddd1 cocol lo 3 1 3
210. ber of colors currently displayed on your computer monitor EMF and TIFF Chart Export Options Image size Percentage of original chart size up to 200 percent Note EMF enhanced metafile format is available only on Windows operating systems EPS Chart Export Options Image size You can specify the size as a percentage of the original image size up to 200 percent or you can specify an image width in pixels with height determined by the width value and the aspect ratio The exported image is always proportional to the original Include TIFF preview image Saves a preview with the EPS image in TIFF format for display in applications that cannot display EPS images on screen 220 Chapter 10 Fonts Controls the treatment of fonts in EPS images m Use font references If the fonts that are used in the chart are available on the output device the fonts are used Otherwise the output device uses alternate fonts m Replace fonts with curves Turns fonts into PostScript curve data The text itself is no longer editable as text in applications that can edit EPS graphics This option is useful if the fonts that are used in the chart are not available on the output device Viewer Printing There are two options for printing the contents of the Viewer window All visible output Prints only items that are currently displayed in the contents pane Hidden items items with a closed book icon in the outline pane or hidden in collap
211. ble Subtype Identifiers Identifiers Case Processing Summary Cox Regression Chi Square Tests CSCoxReg Directional Measures CSDescriptives Mantel Haenszel Common Odds Ratio Est CSGLM Notes CSLogistic a CSOrdinal Output File Summary CSPlan Risk Estimate CSSelect Symmetric Measures CSTabulate Tests of Conditional Independence CTables Tests of Homogeneity of the Odds Ratio Curve Fit Warnings DATAFILE ATTRIBUTE Datafile Attribute Zero Order and Partial Gammas DATASET ACTIVATE Dataset Activate Dataset Close Dataset Copy DATASET DECLARE Dataset Declare DATASET DISPLAY Dataset Display DATASET NAME Dataset Name DELETE YARIABLES Delete Variables Detect Anomaly Discriminant To use the oms identifiers dialog box gt From the menus choose Utilities gt OMS Identifiers gt Select one or more command or subtype identifiers Use Ctrl click to select multiple identifiers in each list 400 Chapter 21 gt Click Paste Commands and or Paste Subtypes m The list of available subtypes is based on the currently selected command s If multiple commands are selected the list of available subtypes is the union of all subtypes that are available for any of the selected commands If no commands are selected all subtypes are listed m The identifiers are pasted into the designated command syntax window at the current cursor location If there are no open command syntax windows a new syntax window is automatically opened
212. ble by variable exclusion of missing values consider the following figures which show a bar chart for each of the two options Figure 14 7 Listwise exclusion of missing values 400 Beginning Qo Salary Current o Salary Number of cases N w o o o o o o Missing Clerical Custodial Manager Employment Category 289 Overview of the chart facility Figure 14 8 Variable by variable exclusion of missing values 400 inni a Beginning Salary Current g Salary Number of cases N w o o o o o o Missing Clerical Custodial Manager Employment Category The data include some system missing blank values in the variables for Current Salary and Employment Category In some other cases the value 0 was entered and defined as missing For both charts the option Display groups defined by missing values is selected which adds the category Missing to the other displayed job categories In each chart the values of the summary function Number of cases are displayed in the bar labels In both charts 26 cases have a system missing value for the job category and 13 cases have the user missing value 0 In the listwise chart the number of cases is the same for both variables in each bar cluster because whenever a value was missing the case was excluded for all variables In the variable by variable chart the number of nonmissing cases for each variable in a category is plotted without regard to miss
213. bles When creating new fields adding fields to an existing database table creating a new table replacing a table you can specify field names data type and width where applicable Field name The default field names are the same as the IBM SPSSO Statistics variable names You can change the field names to any names allowed by the database format For example many databases allow characters in field names that aren t allowed in variable names including spaces Therefore a variable name like CallWaiting could be changed to the field name Call Waiting Type The export wizard makes initial data type assignments based on the standard ODBC data types or data types allowed by the selected database format that most closely matches the defined SPSS Statistics data format but databases can make type distinctions that have no direct equivalent in SPSS Statistics and vice versa For example most numeric values in SPSS Statistics are stored as double precision floating point values whereas database numeric data types include float double integer real and so on In addition many databases don t have equivalents to SPSS Statistics time formats You can change the data type to any type available in the drop down list As a general rule the basic data type string or numeric for the variable should match the basic data type of the database field If there is a data type mismatch that cannot be resolved by the database an error results and no
214. bove the scripting facility does not use a global procedures file although the pre 16 0 version of Global sbs renamed Global wwd is installed for backwards compatibility To migrate a pre 16 0 version of a script that called functions in the global procedures file add the statement Uses lt install dir gt Samples Global wwd to the declarations section of the script where lt install dir gt is the directory where SPSS Statistics is installed Uses is a special comment recognized by the Basic script processor If you re not sure if a script uses the 409 Seripting Facility global procedures file you should add the Uses statement You can also use Include instead of Uses Legacy Autoscripts Prior to version 16 0 the scripting facility included a single autoscript file containing all autoscripts For version 16 0 and above there is no single autoscript file Each autoscript is now stored in a separate file and can be applied to one or more output items in contrast to pre 16 0 versions where each autoscript was specific to a particular output item Some of the autoscripts installed with pre 16 0 versions are available as a set of separate script files located in the Samples subdirectory of the directory where SPSS Statistics is installed They are identified by a filename ending in Autoscript with a file type of wwd By default they are not associated with any output items The association is done from the Scripts tab of
215. btract two date format variables gt Select Calculate the number of time units between two dates on the screen of the Date and Time Wizard labeled Do Calculations on Dates 153 Data Transformations Select Date Format Variables to Subtract Figure 8 24 Subtract dates step 2 EX Date and Time Wizard Step 2 of 3 Calculate the number of time units between two date or datetime variables The result will be an integer variable Any fractional part of a unit will be discarded The result will be a duration variable Only duration variables are shown in the variables list below Variables Date1 amp Current date and time e Date of next release NextRel amp Date of initial product li minus Dete2 Date of last upgrade LastUp Unit Result Treatment Truncate to integer Round to integer Retain fractional part For month and year units the result is based on average unit length unless truncation is used TIME is the current date and time EEN Select the variables to subtract Select the unit for the result from the drop down list Select how the result should be calculated Result Treatment Result Treatment The following options are available for how the result is calculated m Truncate to integer Any fractional portion of the result is ignored For example subtracting 10 28 2006 from 10 21 2007 returns a result of 0 for years and 11 for months m Round
216. by selecting it and pressing Delete The end user is responsible for downloading any required Python modules and copying them to the extensions directory under the SPSS Statistics installation directory or to an alternate location specified by their SPSS_EXTENSIONS_PATH environment variable Translation Catalogues Folder You can include a folder containing translation catalogues This allows you to provide localized messages and localized output from Python or R programs that implement an extension command included in the extension bundle Browse to the lang folder containing the desired translation catalogues and select that folder For information on localizing output from Python and R programs see the topics on the Python Integration Plug in and the R Integration Plug in in the Help system Note Localization of custom dialogs requires a different mechanism For more information see the topic Creating Localized Versions of Custom Dialogs in Chapter 19 on p 365 Installing extension bundles gt To install an extension bundle From the menus choose Utilities gt Extension Bundles gt Install Extension Bundle Select the desired extension bundle Extension bundles have a file type of spe If the extension bundle contains any extension commands you will need to restart IBM SPSS Statistics to use those commands To view details for the currently installed extension bundles choose Utilities gt Extension Bundles gt View Instal
217. by the user are included in the chart These missing categories also act as break variables in calculating the statistic The missing category or categories are displayed on the category axis or in the legend adding for example an extra bar or a slice to a pie chart If there are no missing values the missing categories are not displayed If you select this option and want to suppress display after the chart is drawn open the chart in the Chart Editor and choose Properties from the Edit menu Use the Categories tab to move the categories that you want to suppress to the Excluded list Note however that the statistics are not recalculated if you hide the missing categories Therefore something like a percent statistic will still take the missing categories into account Note This control does not affect system missing values These are always excluded from the chart Summary Statistics and Case Values You can choose one of the following alternatives for exclusion of cases having missing values m Exclude listwise to obtain a consistent base for the chart If any of the variables in the chart has a missing value for a given case the whole case is excluded from the chart m Exclude variable by variable to maximize the use of the data If a selected variable has any missing values the cases having those missing values are excluded when the variable is analyzed To see the difference between listwise and varia
218. c text For more information see the topic Static Text Control on p 359 Item Group A container for grouping a set of controls such as a set of check boxes For more information see the topic Item Group on p 359 Radio Group A group of radio buttons For more information see the topic Radio Group on p 360 Check Box Group A container for a set of controls that are enabled or disabled as a group by a single check box For more information see the topic Check Box Group on p 361 File Browser A control for browsing the file system to open or save a file For more information see the topic File Browser on p 362 Sub dialog Button A button for launching a sub dialog For more information see the topic Sub dialog Button on p 363 354 Chapter 19 Source List The Source Variable List control displays the list of variables from the active dataset that are available to the end user of the dialog You can display all variables from the active dataset the default or you can filter the list based on type and measurement level for instance numeric variables that have a measurement level of scale Use of a Source List control implies the use of one or more Target List controls The Source List control has the following properties Identifier The unique identifier for the control Title An optional title that appears above the control For multi line titles use n to specify line breaks ToolTip Optional ToolTip tex
219. called the Viewer In this window you can easily navigate to the output that you want to see You can also manipulate the output and create a document that contains precisely the output that you want Viewer Results are displayed in the Viewer You can use the Viewer to m Browse results m Show or hide selected tables and charts m Change the display order of results by moving selected items m Move items between the Viewer and other applications Figure 10 1 Viewer fe viewertut spv Viewer Qu Output El Frequencies Title Notes LE Statistics LEJ Marital status 2 Log Frequencies Title 2 Notes LE Statistics Crosstabs Title mA Notes LEJ Case Processi Statistics 6400 0 Marital status N Valid Missing Marital status Valid Unmarried Married Total 3224 3176 6400 50 4 49 6 100 0 50 4 49 6 100 0 File Edit View Data Transform Insert Format Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 The Viewer is divided into two panes m The left pane contains an outline view of the contents m The right pane contains statistical tables charts and text output You can click an item in the outline to go directly to the corresponding table or chart You can click and drag the right border of the outline pane to change the width of the outline pane 202 203 Working with Output Showing and Hiding Results In the Viewer you ca
220. can also control the default display and order of attributes in Variable View For more information see the topic Changing the default variable view in Chapter 17 on p 318 To customize Variable View gt In Variable View from the menus choose View gt Customize Variable View Select check the variable attributes you want to display gt Use the up and down arrow buttons to change the display order of the attributes Figure 5 10 Customize Variable View dialog box E Customize Variable View Reorder and select attributes to display in the Variable View Type Width Decimals Label Values Missing Columns Align Measure Role AnswerFormat DerivedFrom Formula IIR RRR Restore Defaults Apply the default display and order settings Spell checking variable and value labels To check the spelling of variable labels and value labels gt Select the Variable View tab in the Data Editor window 82 Chapter 5 v Right click on the Labels or Values column and from the context menu choose Spelling or gt In Variable View from the menus choose Utilities gt Spelling or Inthe Value Labels dialog box click Spelling This limits the spell checking to the value labels for a particular variable Spell checking is limited to variable labels and value labels in Variable View of the Data Editor String data values To check the spelling of string data values Select
221. can be transferred to it and you can constrain which types of variables can be transferred to the control for instance only numeric variables with a measurement level of nominal or ordinal The Target List control has the following properties Identifier The unique identifier for the control This is the identifier to use when referencing the control in the syntax template Title An optional title that appears above the control For multi line titles use n to specify line breaks ToolTip Optional ToolTip text that appears when the user hovers over the control The specified text only appears when hovering over the title area of the control Hovering over one of the listed variables will display the variable name and label Target list type Specifies whether multiple variables or only a single variable can be transferred to the control 355 Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs Mnemonic Key An optional character in the title to use as a keyboard shortcut to the control The character appears underlined in the title The shortcut is activated by pressing Alt mnemonic key The Mnemonic Key property is not supported on Mac Required for execution Specifies whether a value is required in this control in order for execution to proceed If True is specified the OK and Paste buttons will be disabled until a value is specified for this control If False is specified the absence of a value in this control has no effect on the state
222. category in 8 Price of primary ve Sample dill Primary vehicle pric Based on time or case range E Level of education Years with current a Retired retire Use filter variable demon 3 Job satisfaction job E Number of people in Wireless service p Output E Multiple lines multline Fitter out unselected cases Voice mail voice Copy selected cases to a new dataset Paging service pag z Internet internet Caller ID callie Delete unselected cases Current Status Do not filter cases C esse ese cance Hee All cases Turns case filtering off and uses all cases If condition is satisfied Use a conditional expression to select cases If the result of the conditional expression is true the case is selected If the result is false or missing the case is not selected Random sample of cases Selects a random sample based on an approximate percentage or an exact number of cases Based on time or case range Selects cases based on a range of case numbers or a range of dates times Use filter variable Use the selected numeric variable from the data file as the filter variable Cases with any value other than 0 or missing for the filter variable are selected Output This section controls the treatment of unselected cases You can choose one of the following alternatives for the treatment of unselected cases m Filter out unselected cases
223. ce of Imputed Data By default cells containing imputed data will have a different background color than cells containing nonimputed data The distinctive appearance of the imputed data should make it easy for you to scroll through a dataset and locate those cells You can change the default cell background color the font and make the imputed data display in bold type Analysis Output This group controls the type of Viewer output produced whenever a multiply imputed dataset is analyzed By default output will be produced for the original pre imputation dataset and for each of the imputed datasets In addition for those procedures that support pooling of imputed data final pooled results will be generated When univariate pooling is performed pooling diagnostics will also display However you can suppress any output you do not want to see 335 Options To Set Multiple Imputation Options From the menus choose Edit gt Options Click the Multiple Imputation tab Chapter Customizing Menus and Toolbars Menu Editor You can use the Menu Editor to customize your menus With the Menu Editor you can m Add menu items that run customized scripts m Add menu items that run command syntax files m Add menu items that launch other applications and automatically send data to other applications You can send data to other applications in the following formats IBM SPSS Statistics Excel Lotus 1 2 3 tab delimited and d
224. cept 36 Quanvert 36 421 remote servers 64 restructuring 184 saving 38 39 saving output as IBM SPSS Statistics data files 377 saving subsets of variables 44 text 27 transposing 167 DATA LIST 58 versus GET DATA command 58 data transformations 316 computing variables 125 conditional transformations 127 delaying execution 316 functions 128 ranking cases 141 recoding values 133 134 136 138 string variables 127 time series 159 161 data types 71 73 86 319 changing 86 custom currency 71 319 defining 71 display formats 73 input formats 73 Data View 67 databases 13 14 17 19 20 22 24 26 adding new fields to a table 52 appending records cases to a table 53 conditional expressions 20 converting strings to numeric variables 24 creating a new table 55 creating relationships 19 defining variables 24 Microsoft Access 14 parameter queries 20 22 Prompt for Value 22 random sampling 20 reading 13 14 17 replacing a table 55 replacing values in existing fields 51 saving 45 saving queries 26 selecting a data source 14 selecting data fields 17 specifying criteria 20 SQL syntax 26 table joins 19 updating 45 verifying results 26 Where clause 20 datasets renaming 93 date format variables 71 73 316 add or subtract from date time variables 143 create date time variable from set of variables 143 create date time variable from string 143 extract part of date time variab
225. cess to local data files in distributed analysis mode even if they are in shared folders Distributed analysis mode is not the same as accessing data files that reside on another computer on your network You can access data files on other network devices in local analysis mode or in distributed analysis mode In local mode you access other devices from your local computer In distributed mode you access other network devices from the remote server 65 Distributed Analysis Mode If you re not sure if you re using local analysis mode or distributed analysis mode look at the title bar in the dialog box for accessing data files If the title of the dialog box contains the word Remote as in Open Remote File or if the text Remote Server server name appears at the top of the dialog box you re using distributed analysis mode Note This situation affects only dialog boxes for accessing data files for example Open Data Save Data Open Database and Apply Data Dictionary For all other file types for example Viewer files syntax files and script files the local view is always used Availability of Procedures in Distributed Analysis Mode In distributed analysis mode procedures are available for use only if they are installed on both your local version and the version on the remote server If you have optional components installed locally that are not available on the remote server and you switch from your local computer to a r
226. ch matching group m For each sort variable you can sort in ascending or descending order m Ifyou select multiple sort variables cases are sorted by each variable within categories of the preceding variable in the list For example if you select date as the first sorting variable and amount as the second sorting variable cases will be sorted by amount within each date m Use the up and down arrow buttons to the right of the list to change the sort order of the variables m The sort order determines the first and last case within each matching group which determines the value of the optional primary indicator variable For example if you want to filter out all but the most recent case in each matching group you could sort cases within the group in ascending order of a date variable which would make the most recent date the last date in the group Indicator of primary cases Creates a variable with a value of 1 for all unique cases and the case identified as the primary case in each group of matching cases and a value of 0 for the nonprimary duplicates in each group m The primary case can be either the last or first case in each matching group as determined by the sort order within the matching group If you don t specify any sort variables the original file order determines the order of cases within each group m You can use the indicator variable as a filter variable to exclude nonprimary duplicates from reports and
227. ch variable are determined by the data type and width in the Excel file If the column contains more than one data type for example date and numeric the data type is set to string and all values are read as valid string values Blank cells For numeric variables blank cells are converted to the system missing value indicated by a period For string variables a blank is a valid string value and blank cells are treated as valid string values Variable names If you read the first row of the Excel file or the first row of the specified range as variable names values that don t conform to variable naming rules are converted to valid variable names and the original names are used as variable labels If you do not read variable names from the Excel file default variable names are assigned Reading Older Excel Files and Other Spreadsheets The following rules apply to reading Excel files prior to Excel 95 and other spreadsheet data Data type and width The data type and width for each variable are determined by the column width and data type of the first data cell in the column Values of other types are converted to the system missing value If the first data cell in the column is blank the global default data type for the spreadsheet usually numeric is used Blank cells For numeric variables blank cells are converted to the system missing value indicated by a period For string variables a blank is a valid string value and blan
228. choice takes you to the Define Dates dialog box used to create date time variables that consist of a set of sequential dates This feature is typically used to associate dates with time series data Note Tasks are disabled when the dataset lacks the types of variables required to accomplish the task For instance if the dataset contains no string variables then the task to create a date time variable from a string does not apply and is disabled Dates and Times in IBM SPSS Statistics Variables that represent dates and times in IBM SPSS Statistics have a variable type of numeric with display formats that correspond to the specific date time formats These variables are generally referred to as date time variables Date time variables that actually represent dates are distinguished from those that represent a time duration that is independent of any date such as 20 hours 10 minutes and 15 seconds The latter are referred to as duration variables and the former as date or date time variables For a complete list of display formats see Date and Time in the Universals section of the Command Syntax Reference Date and date time variables Date variables have a format representing a date such as mm dd yyyy Date time variables have a format representing a date and time such as dd mmm yyyy hh mm ss Internally date and date time variables are stored as the number of seconds from October 14 1582 Date and date time variables are so
229. command syntax to use special features that are not available through dialog boxes You can save these commands in a file for use in subsequent sessions Figure 1 1 Data Editor and Viewer E tedata sav Data Editor Jog File Edit View Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help 18 id 19 travel sales96 sales95 A division 1 2 3 00 2 2 570 000 270 000 2 1 3 00 2 2 402 000 187 500 3 1 3 00 1 2 267 400 144 000 4 1 300 1 25052 AND KARANA E fq Output1 Viewer QuE File Edit View Data Transform Insert Format Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help OLAP Cubes 1996 Sales F East Consumer Products 18 548 100 289 814 Business Products 22 633 950 404 178 Total 41 182 050 343 184 Central Consumer Products 24 006 600 311 774 Business Products 33 338 200 396 883 OLAP Cubes E OLAP Cubes Title Notes LE Case Processi LE OLAP Cubes Total 57 344 800 356 179 West Consumer Products 12 776 400 336 221 Business Products 33 735 000 475 141 Total 46 511 400 426 710 Total Consumer Products 55 331 100 309 112 Business Products 89 707 150 425 152 Total 145 038 250 371 893 Designated window versus active window If you have more than one open Viewer window output is routed to the designated Viewer window If you have more than one open Syntax Editor window command syntax is pasted into the designated Syntax E
230. cs session name for the dataset that will be used to export data This information is primarily useful if you have multiple open data sources Data sources opened using the graphical user interface for example the Database Wizard are automatically assigned names such as DataSet DataSet2 etc A data source opened using command syntax will have a dataset name only if one is explicitly assigned m Table The name of the table to be modified or created Cases to Export Either all cases are exported or cases selected by a previously defined filter condition are exported For more information see the topic Selecting Cases to Export on p 49 m Action Indicates how the database will be modified for example create a new table add fields or records to an existing table m User Missing Values User missing values can be exported as valid values or treated the same as system missing for numeric variables and converted to blank spaces for string variables This setting is controlled in the panel in which you select the variables to export 57 Data Files Exporting to IBM SPSS Data Collection The Export to IBMO SPSS Data Collection dialog box creates IBM SPSS Statistics data files and Data Collection metadata files that you can use to read the data into Data Collection applications This is particularly useful when roundtripping data between SPSS Statistics and Data Collection applications To export data for use in Data Colle
231. ct gender as the first sorting variable and minority as the second sorting variable cases will be sorted by minority classification within each gender category m The sort sequence is based on the locale defined order and is not necessarily the same as the numerical order of the character codes The default locale is the operating system locale You can control the locale with the Language setting on the General tab of the Options dialog box Edit menu O Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 165 166 Chapter 9 Figure 9 1 Sort Cases dialog box ta Sort Cases Employee Code id amp Date of Birth bdate di Educational Level years educ ll Employment Category jobcat Current Salary salary Beginning Salary salbegin Months since Hire jobtime Previous Experience months prevexp Y da Gender gender Ascending Sort Order Ascending Descending Save Sorted Data E Save file with sorted data To Sort Cases gt From the menus choose Data gt Sort Cases Select one or more sorting variables ok Paste Reset Cancel Help gt If you want to save the sorted data directly to a file check Save file with sorted data and click File to specify where you want to save the file Sort Variables You can sort the variables in the active dataset based on the values of any of the variable attributes e g variable name data type measurement
232. ction applications gt From the menus in the Data Editor window that contains the data you want to export choose File gt Export to Data Collection gt Click Data File to specify the name and location of the SPSS Statistics data file gt Click Metadata File to specify the name and location of the Data Collection metadata file For new variables and datasets not created from Data Collection data sources SPSS Statistics variable attributes are mapped to Data Collection metadata attributes in the metadata file according to the methods described in the SAV DSC documentation in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library Tf the active dataset was created from a Data Collection data source m The new metadata file is created by merging the original metadata attributes with metadata attributes for any new variables plus any changes to original variables that might affect their metadata attributes for example addition of or changes to value labels m For original variables read from the Data Collection data source any metadata attributes not recognized by SPSS Statistics are preserved in their original state For example SPSS Statistics converts grid variables to regular SPSS Statistics variables but the metadata that defines these grid variables is preserved when you save the new metadata file m fany Data Collection variables were automatically renamed to conform to SPSS Statistics variable naming rules the metadata fil
233. d as the number of seconds from October 14 1582 Create Time Series The Create Time Series dialog box allows you to create new variables based on functions of existing numeric time series variables These transformed values are useful in many time series analysis procedures Default new variable names are the first six characters of the existing variable used to create it followed by an underscore and a sequential number For example for the variable price the new variable name would be price_1 The new variables retain any defined value labels from the original variables Available functions for creating time series variables include differences moving averages running medians lag and lead functions Figure 8 31 Create Time Series dialog box Es Create Time Series Variable gt New name Le Name and Function En Function Difference Order Current Periodicity None 162 Chapter 8 To Create New Time Series Variables gt From the menus choose Transform gt Create Time Series Select the time series function that you want to use to transform the original variable s Select the variable s from which you want to create new time series variables Only numeric variables can be used Optionally you can m Enter variable names to override the default new variable names m Change the function for a selected variable Time Series Transformation Functions Di
234. d by the value of the Checked Syntax property when the box is checked and the Unchecked Syntax property when the box is unchecked m You can specify any valid command syntax and you can use n for line breaks Combo Box and List Box Controls The Combo Box control allows you to create a drop down list that can generate command syntax specific to the selected list item It is limited to single selection The List Box control allows you to display a list of items that support single or multiple selection and generate command syntax specific to the selected item s The Combo Box and List Box controls have the following properties Identifier The unique identifier for the control This is the identifier to use when referencing the control in the syntax template Title An optional title that appears above the control For multi line titles use n to specify line breaks ToolTip Optional ToolTip text that appears when the user hovers over the control List Items Click the ellipsis button to open the List Item Properties dialog box which allows you to specify the list items of the control You can also open the List Item Properties dialog by double clicking the Combo Box or List Box control on the canvas Mnemonic Key An optional character in the title to use as a keyboard shortcut to the control The character appears underlined in the title The shortcut is activated by pressing Alt mnemonic key The Mnemonic Key property is not su
235. d in the combo box For a list box specifies whether the list item is selected by default m Syntax Specifies the command syntax that is generated when the list item is selected m You can specify any valid command syntax and you can use n for line breaks Note You can add a new list item in the blank line at the bottom of the existing list Entering any of the properties other than the identifier will generate a unique identifier which you can keep or modify You can delete a list item by clicking on the dentifier cell for the item and pressing delete Values based on the contents of a target list control Specifies that the list items are dynamically populated with values associated with the variables in a selected target list control Select an existing target list control as the source of the list items or enter the value of the Identifier property for a target list control into the text area of the Target List combo box The latter approach allows you to enter the Identifier for a target list control that you plan to add later m Variable Names Populate the list items with the names of the variables in the specified target list control m Value Labels Populate the list items with the union of the value labels associated with the variables in the specified target list control You can choose whether the command syntax generated by the associated combo box or list box control contains the selected value label or its associated value
236. d not respond For example this might be the results of a test mailing to a small group of customers or information on responses to a similar campaign in the past Note For some model types there is no target outcome of interest Clustering models for example do not have a target and some nearest neighbor models do not have a target gt Apply that model to a different dataset for which the outcome of interest is not known to obtain predicted outcomes For more information see the topic Scoring Wizard on p 291 The following table lists the procedures that support the export of model specifications to a model file The Option column indicates the add on option that contains the procedure Procedure name Command name Option Discriminant DISCRIMINANT Statistics Base Linear Regression REGRESSION Statistics Base Automatic Linear Models LINEAR Statistics Base TwoStep Cluster TWOSTEP CLUSTER Statistics Base Nearest Neighbor KNN Statistics Base Cox Regression COXREG Advanced Statistics Generalized Linear Models GENLIN Advanced Statistics Generalized Estimating Equations GENLIN Advanced Statistics Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 290 291 Scoring data with predictive models Naive Bayes Scoring Wizard Procedure name Command nam
237. d number of decimal places displayed This option is ignored for string variables Alignment This affects only alignment left right center in Data View in the Data Editor Data Editor Column Width This affects only column width in Data View in the Data Editor Copying Dataset File Properties You can apply selected global dataset properties from the source data file to the active dataset This is not available if the active dataset is the source data file 112 Chapter 7 Figure 7 12 Copy Data Properties Wizard Step 4 E Copy Data Properties Step 4 of 5 Copy Data Properties Choose Dataset Properties to Copy Select the dataset properties to be copied to the active dataset ae For some properties you can choose to replace the existing values or to merge them with source properties as far as possible When merging the active dataset has priority Multiple Response Sets and Variable Sets that would be invalid in the active dataset will be ignored rDataset Properties to Copy o 8 O Replace Merge Or A 0 i ra Set Cree Multiple Response Sets Applies multiple response set definitions from the source data file to the active dataset Multiple response sets that contain no variables in the active dataset are ignored unless those variables will be created based on specifications in step 2 Selecting Source and Target Variables in the Copy Data Properties Wizard m Replace
238. d on the number of scanned cases For example if you scanned only the first 100 cases in the data file then the list reflects only the unique values present in those cases If the data file has already been sorted by the variable for which you want to assign value labels the list may display far fewer unique values than are actually present in the data Count The number of times each value occurs in the scanned cases Missing Values defined as representing missing data You can change the missing values designation of the category by clicking the check box A check indicates that the category is defined as a user missing category If a variable already has a range of values defined as user missing for example 90 99 you cannot add or delete missing values categories for that variable with Define Variable Properties You can use Variable View in the Data Editor to modify the missing values categories for variables with missing values ranges For more information see the topic Missing values in Chapter 5 on p 74 m Changed Indicates that you have added or changed a value label Note If you specified 0 for the number of cases to scan in the initial dialog box the Value Label grid will initially be blank except for any preexisting value labels and or defined missing values categories for the selected variable In addition the Suggest button for the measurement level will be disabled Measurement Level Value labels are primarily useful f
239. d that uses it is executed 146 Chapter 8 Create a Date Time Variable from a String To create a date time variable from a string variable gt Select Create a date time variable from a string containing a date or time on the introduction screen of the Date and Time Wizard Select String Variable to Convert to Date Time Variable Figure 8 17 Create date time variable from string variable step 1 A Date and Time Wizard Step 1 of 2 y Create a Date Time Variable from a String Variable Select the string variable holding the date or time to convert Select the appropriate pattern and press Next If no pattern fits the string the wizard cannot convert this variable Variables Sample Values a StartDateStr 10 28 2002 da EndDatestr 10 29 2002 01 01 1996 Patterns dd mmm yyyy dd mmm yy dd mm yyyy Select the string variable to convert in the Variables list Note that the list displays only string variables gt Select the pattern from the Patterns list that matches how dates are represented by the string variable The Sample Values list displays actual values of the selected variable in the data file Values of the string variable that do not fit the selected pattern result in a value of system missing for the new variable 147 Data Transformations Specify Result of Converting String Variable to Date Time Variable Figure 8 18 Create date time variable from string variable step 2 EN Date and Tim
240. daries of the data file For numeric variables blank cells are converted to the system missing value For string variables a blank is considered a valid value Variable View Figure 5 2 Variable View demo sav Data Editor Edu File Edit View Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help Numeric Age in years None Numeric Marital status 0 Unmar Numeric Years at curre None Numeric Household inc None Numeric Income catego 1 00 Une Numeric Price of primar None Numeric Primary vehicl 1 00 Ect Numeric Level of educat 1 Did no Numeric Years with curr None Numeric Retired io No Numeric Years with curn t Less t Numeric 4 Job satisfactio 1 Highly String Gender if Female Numeric A Number of peo None Numeric Wireless servi 110 No Numeric Multiple lines i No SPSS Processor is ready Variable View contains descriptions of the attributes of each variable in the data file In Variable View m Rows are variables m Columns are variable attributes You can add or delete variables and modify attributes of variables including the following attributes Variable name Data type Number of digits or characters Number of decimal places Descriptive variable and value labels User defined missing values Column width Measurement level All of these attributes are saved when you save the data file 69 Data Editor
241. dates and times are represented This choice leads to a screen that provides a brief overview of date time variables in IBM SPSS Statistics By clicking on the Help button it also provides a link to more detailed information m Create a date time variable from a string containing a date or time Use this option to create a date time variable from a string variable For example you have a string variable representing dates in the form mm dd yyyy and want to create a date time variable from this Create a date time variable from variables holding parts of dates or times This choice allows you to construct a date time variable from a set of existing variables For example you have a variable that represents the month as an integer a second that represents the day of the month and a third that represents the year You can combine these three variables into a single date time variable Calculate with dates and times Use this option to add or subtract values from date time variables For example you can calculate the duration of a process by subtracting a variable representing the start time of the process from another variable representing the end time of the process 145 Data Transformations m Extract a part of a date or time variable This option allows you to extract part of a date time variable such as the day of the month from a date time variable which has the form mm dd yyyy Assign periodicity to a dataset This
242. ded Help File Specifies the path to an optional help file for the sub dialog This is the file that will be launched when the user clicks the Help button on the sub dialog and may be the same help file specified for the main dialog Help files must be in HTML format See the description of the Help File property for Dialog Properties for more information Syntax Click the ellipsis button to open the Syntax Template For more information see the topic Building the Syntax Template on p 348 Custom Dialogs for Extension Commands Extension commands are user defined IBM SPSS Statistics commands that are implemented in either the Python programming language or R Once deployed to an instance of SPSS Statistics an extension command is run in the same manner as any built in SPSS Statistics command You can use the Custom Dialog Builder to create dialogs for extension commands and you can install custom dialogs for extension commands created by other users Creating Custom Dialogs for Extension Commands Whether an extension command was written by you or another user you can create a custom dialog for it The syntax template for the dialog should generate the command syntax for the extension command If the custom dialog is only for your use install the dialog Assuming the extension command is already deployed on your system you will be able to run the command from the installed dialog 365 Creating and Managing Custom Dial
243. dentifier is the same as the underlying command name Npar Tests Table subtypes Table subtypes are the different types of pivot tables that can be produced Some subtypes are produced by only one command other subtypes can be produced by multiple commands although the tables may not look similar Although table subtype names are generally descriptive there can be many names to choose from particularly if you have selected a large number of commands also two subtypes may have very similar names To find command identifiers and table subtypes When in doubt you can find command identifiers and table subtype names in the Viewer window Run the procedure to generate some output in the Viewer Right click the item in the outline pane of the Viewer Choose Copy OMS Command Identifier or Copy OMS Table Subtype Paste the copied command identifier or table subtype name into any text editor such as a Syntax Editor window As an alternative to table subtype names you can select tables based on the text that is displayed in the outline pane of the Viewer You can also select other object types based on their labels Labels are useful for differentiating between multiple tables of the same type in which the outline text reflects some attribute of the particular output object such as the variable names or labels There are however a number of factors that can affect the label text m Ifsplit file processing is on split file group identif
244. dependent predictor variables The procedure provides validation tools for exploratory and confirmatory classification analysis Direct Marketing allows organizations to ensure their marketing programs are as effective as possible through techniques specifically designed for direct marketing Exact Tests calculates exact p values for statistical tests when small or very unevenly distributed samples could make the usual tests inaccurate This option is available only on Windows operating systems Forecasting performs comprehensive forecasting and time series analyses with multiple curve fitting models smoothing models and methods for estimating autoregressive functions Missing Values describes patterns of missing data estimates means and other statistics and imputes values for missing observations Neural Networks can be used to make business decisions by forecasting demand for a product as a function of price and other variables or by categorizing customers based on buying habits and demographic characteristics Neural networks are non linear data modeling tools They can be used to model complex relationships between inputs and outputs or to find patterns in data Regression provides techniques for analyzing data that do not fit traditional linear statistical models It includes procedures for probit analysis logistic regression weight estimation two stage least squares regression and general nonlinear regression Amos analysi
245. der is the number of cases after the current case from which the value is obtained The number of cases with the system missing value at the end of the series is equal to the order value Smoothing New series values based on a compound data smoother The smoother starts with a running median of 4 which is centered by a running median of 2 It then resmoothes these values by applying a running median of 5 a running median of 3 and hanning running weighted averages Residuals are computed by subtracting the smoothed series from the original series This whole process is then repeated on the computed residuals Finally the smoothed residuals are computed by subtracting the smoothed values obtained the first time through the process This is sometimes referred to as T4253H smoothing Replace Missing Values Missing observations can be problematic in analysis and some time series measures cannot be computed if there are missing values in the series Sometimes the value for a particular observation is simply not known In addition missing data can result from any of the following m Each degree of differencing reduces the length of a series by 1 m Each degree of seasonal differencing reduces the length of a series by one season m Ifyou create new series that contain forecasts beyond the end of the existing series by clicking a Save button and making suitable choices the original series and the generated residual series will have missing da
246. descriptions of functions that use a Value setting Scoring the active dataset On the final step of the wizard you can score the active dataset or paste the generated command syntax to a syntax window You can then modify and or save the generated command syntax 298 Chapter 15 Figure 15 4 Scoring Wizard Finish wy Scoring Wizard Finish Score the active dataset Paste the syntax into the Syntax Editor Merging model and transformation XML files Some predictive models are built with data that have been modified or transformed in various ways In order to apply those models to other datasets in a meaningful way the same transformations must also be performed on the dataset being scored or the transformations must also be reflected in the model file Including transformations in the model file is a two step process gt Save the transformations in a transformation XML file This can only be done using TMS BEGIN and TMS END in command syntax gt Combine the model file XML file or ZIP archive and the transformation XML file in a new merged model XML file To combine a model file and a transformation XML file in a new merged model file gt From the menus choose Utilities gt Merge Model XML 299 Scoring data with predictive models Figure 15 5 Merge Model XML dialog s Merge XML E Merge a model XML file and a transformation XML file into a single XML file rimput XML Files
247. ding for all additional values found in the selected variables resulting in a single common autorecoding scheme for all selected variables 141 Data Transformations To Recode String or Numeric Values into Consecutive Integers gt From the menus choose Transform gt Automatic Recode gt Select one or more variables to recode gt For each selected variable enter a name for the new variable and click New Name Rank Cases The Rank Cases dialog box allows you to create new variables containing ranks normal and Savage scores and percentile values for numeric variables New variable names and descriptive variable labels are automatically generated based on the original variable name and the selected measure s A summary table lists the original variables the new variables and the variable labels Note The automatically generated new variable names are limited to a maximum length of 8 bytes Optionally you can m Rank cases in ascending or descending order m Organize rankings into subgroups by selecting one or more grouping variables for the By list Ranks are computed within each group Groups are defined by the combination of values of the grouping variables For example if you select gender and minority as grouping variables ranks are computed for each combination of gender and minority Figure 8 13 Rank Cases dialog box Es Rank Cases Employee Code id Variable s Date of Birth hdate dl
248. ding the Syntax Template 2 2 20 naana cece cece tet eee 348 Previewing a Custom Dialog 0 000 cece eee 350 Managing Custom Dialogs oooooccccccco ett 351 Control Type Siei cing Phos bad See ead alee PRN dee Dek hed Hee de dt waned awe aie te 353 SOU Sri as Ree tae iras wh bein an vader ieee dis 354 Target llar aro boas a CMa esac ed adie a eaten 354 Filtering Variable Lists 0 0 ete tenes 355 XV CHECK A IN E E Mtn aiden ie Ea ween ton 356 Combo Box and List Box Controls 000 cect eee 356 Text Control 2 etn aaa a ne a 358 Number Control is iisas te ee bead aa eared a o e 358 Static Text Contr ici ccs ese crap irradia drenan ed 309 item Group a eb Bled ewe Rte keh eee Fatwa E ace ee Re 359 Radio Groups ita eb od by want dae hak Sadat a beh anand oe beeline ead bs 360 Check Box Group pcia mamei eect EEE eee eae 361 File Browser boris bh Fh eee ea Hale gt aod aa Gell wate dane 362 Sub dialog Button 2 0 0 teen eens 363 Custom Dialogs for Extension Commands 00 0c eee eee eens 364 Creating Localized Versions of Custom Dialogs 000 c cece eee eee ees 365 20 Production jobs 368 MEA O ON 369 Output ooi eaa a a a a dd nas Ea ae REE 369 ETIVIE ODHONS 20h 200 a A a daa Dada ni 370 PowerPoint options s an asuaan anana 370 PDF OPTIONS oieta ddiaa webcam ee bona ieaie aa aa daan ada e 371 TOLOSA ae 371 Production jobs with OUTPUT commands ssas anaa
249. ditor window The designated windows are indicated by a plus sign in the icon in the title bar You can change the designated windows at any time The designated window should not be confused with the active window which is the currently selected window If you have overlapping windows the active window appears in the foreground If you open a window that window automatically becomes the active window and the designated window Changing the designated window gt Make the window that you want to designate the active window click anywhere in the window 3 Overview Click the Designate Window button on the toolbar the plus sign icon or gt From the menus choose Utilities gt Designate Window Note For Data Editor windows the active Data Editor window determines the dataset that is used in subsequent calculations or analyses There is no designated Data Editor window For more information see the topic Basic Handling of Multiple Data Sources in Chapter 6 on p 91 Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of each IBM SPSS Statistics window provides the following information Command status For each procedure or command that you run a case counter indicates the number of cases processed so far For statistical procedures that require iterative processing the number of iterations is displayed Filter status If you have selected a random sample or a subset of cases for analysis the message Filter on indic
250. e Data Variable Name and Label MEAN income Label Average income fi Li Split File Split File splits the data file into separate groups for analysis based on the values of one or more grouping variables If you select multiple grouping variables cases are grouped by each variable within categories of the preceding variable on the Groups Based On list For example if you select gender as the first grouping variable and minority as the second grouping variable cases will be grouped by minority classification within each gender category m You can specify up to eight grouping variables m Each eight bytes of a long string variable string variables longer than eight bytes counts as a variable toward the limit of eight grouping variables m Cases should be sorted by values of the grouping variables and in the same order that variables are listed in the Groups Based On list If the data file isn t already sorted select Sort the file by grouping variables Figure 9 10 Split File dialog box E Split File E Employee Code id Analyze all cases do not create groups SE Date of Birth bdate Compare groups al Educational Level yea di Employment Category E Current Salary salary Sroups Based on Beginning Salary salb da Gender gender 8 Months since Hire jobti Ly E Previous Experience dl Minority Classification Sort the file by grouping variables File is already sorted Organi
251. e Option Generalized Linear Mixed Models GENLINMIXED Advanced Statistics Complex Samples General Linear Model CSGLM Complex Samples Complex Samples Logistic Regression CSLOGISTIC Complex Samples Complex Samples Ordinal Regression CSORDINAL Complex Samples Complex Samples Cox Regression CSCOXREG Complex Samples Logistic Regression LOGISTIC REGRESSION Regression Multinomial Logistic Regression OMREG Regression Decision Tree TREE Decision Tree Multilayer Perception MLP Neural Networks Radial Basis Function RBF Neural Networks Anomaly Detection DETECTANOMALY Data Preparation AIVEBAYES SPSS Statistics Server You can use the Scoring Wizard to apply a model created with one dataset to another dataset and generate scores such as the predicted value and or predicted probability of an outcome of interest To score a dataset with a predictive model gt Open the dataset that you want to score Utilities gt Scoring Wizard gt Open the Scoring Wizard From the menus choose 292 Chapter 15 Figure 15 1 Scoring Wizard Select a Scoring Model wy Scoring Wizard Select a Scoring Model Model Details Ensemble Method none Application Target Response_recoded Split Predictor Income Education Gender Married Region Age Reside Select a model XML file or ZIP archive Use the Browse button to navigate to a different location to select a model file Match fields in the active dataset to
252. e Wizard Step 2 of 2 E Create a Date Time Variable from a String Variable Complete or edit the specifications for new variable Input Variable Input Format StariDateStr mmiddiyyyy Result Variable Output Format StariDate dd mmm yyyy dd mmm yy Variable Label Process Start Date i Create the variable now Paste the syntax into the syntax window Beck gt lemon cance He gt Enter a name for the Result Variable This cannot be the name of an existing variable Optionally you can m Select a date time format for the new variable from the Output Format list m Assign a descriptive variable label to the new variable Create a Date Time Variable from a Set of Variables To merge a set of existing variables into a single date time variable gt Select Create a date time variable from variables holding parts of dates or times on the introduction screen of the Date and Time Wizard 148 Chapter 8 Select Variables to Merge into Single Date Time Variable Figure 8 19 Create date time variable from variable set step 1 E Date and Time Wizard Step 1 of 2 n IX You can create a datetime or duration variable from numeric variables containing parts of the information such as years months and hours The parts other than seconds should not already be datetime or duration variables Select the appropriate variables below and press Next Variables Year process Stort Date 1str
253. e byte languages per line lines will automatically wrap at 80 characters Comments are displayed in the same font as text output to accurately reflect how they will appear when displayed in the Viewer A date stamp the current date in parentheses is automatically appended to the end of the list of comments whenever you add or modify comments This may lead to some ambiguity concerning the dates associated with comments if you modify an existing comment or insert a new comment between existing comments Variable sets You can restrict the variables that are displayed in the Data Editor and in dialog box variable lists by defining and using variable sets This is particularly useful for data files with a large number of variables Small variable sets make it easier to find and select the variables for your analysis Defining variable sets Define Variable Sets creates subsets of variables to display in the Data Editor and in dialog box variable lists Defined variable sets are saved with IBM SPSS Statistics data files 302 Chapter 16 Figure 16 2 Define Variable Sets dialog box id Define Variable Sets Ada set Demographics MA Variables in Set E Years at current ad lt 8 Age in years age E Household income i L Marital status marital Price of primary ve al Income category in tho dl Primary vehicle pric E Level of education ed E Years with current a Gender gender Retired retire
254. e converted to blank spaces strings cannot be system missing Selecting a Data Source In the first panel of the Export to Database Wizard you select the data source to which you want to export data 47 Data Files Figure 3 22 Export to Database Wizard selecting a data source E Export to Database Wizard Welcome to the Export to Database Wizard The Export to Database Wizard helps you export data from the active SPSS Statistics dataset to a database To start select a data source ODBC Data Sources Q dBASE Files ES Excel Files ES MS A Databas You can export data to any database source for which you have the appropriate ODBC driver Note Exporting data to OLE DB data sources is not supported If you do not have any ODBC data sources configured or if you want to add a new data source click Add ODBC Data Source m On Linux operating systems this button is not available ODBC data sources are specified in odbc ini and the ODBCINI environment variables must be set to the location of that file For more information see the documentation for your database drivers m n distributed analysis mode available with IBM SPSS Statistics Server this button is not available To add data sources in distributed analysis mode see your system administrator An ODBC data source consists of two essential pieces of information the driver that will be used to access the data and the location of
255. e dialog does not validate the existence of the specified file Browser Type Specifies whether the browse dialog is used to select a file Locate File or to select a folder Locate Folder File Filter Click the ellipsis button to open the File Filter dialog box which allows you to specify the available file types for the open or save dialog By default all file types are allowed Note You can also open the File Filter dialog by double clicking the File Browser control on the canvas File System Type In distributed analysis mode this specifies whether the open or save dialog browses the file system on which SPSS Statistics Server is running or the file system of your local computer Select Server to browse the file system of the server or Client to browse the file system of your local computer The property has no effect in local analysis mode Required for execution Specifies whether a value is required in this control in order for execution to proceed If True is specified the OK and Paste buttons will be disabled until a value is specified for this control If False is specified the absence of a value in this control has no effect on the state of the OK and Paste buttons The default is False Syntax Specifies command syntax that is generated by this control at run time and can be inserted in the syntax template 363 Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs You can specify any valid command syntax and you can use n for
256. e displayed and new variables based on the selected source variables are automatically created in the active dataset Apply properties from a single source variable to selected active dataset variables of the same type Variable properties from a single selected variable in the source list can be applied to one or more selected variables in the active dataset list Only variables of the same type numeric or string as the selected variable in the source list are displayed in the active dataset list For string variables only strings of the same defined length as the source variable are displayed This option is not available if the active dataset contains no variables Note You cannot create new variables in the active dataset with this option 110 Chapter 7 Apply dataset properties only no variable selection Only file properties for example documents file label weight will be applied to the active dataset No variable properties will be applied This option is not available if the active dataset is also the source data file Choosing Variable Properties to Copy You can copy selected variable properties from the source variables to the target variables Undefined empty properties in the source variables do not overwrite defined properties in the target variables Figure 7 11 Copy Data Properties Wizard Step 3 E Copy Data Properties Step 3 of 5 Copy Data Properties Choose Variable Properties to Copy Select th
257. e file format for exported charts For more information see the topic Graphics Format Options on p 219 To Set HTML Export Options gt Select HTML as the export format gt Click Change Options 212 Chapter 10 Figure 10 4 HTML Export Output Options Export Output HTML Options rLayers in Pivot Tables Honor Print Layer setting set in Table Properties on a per table basis Export all layers Export visible layer only Y Include footnotes and captions views of Models Honor print setting set in Model Viewer Properties for each model Export all views Export visible view only ESPECIA Word RTF Options gt gt The following options are available for exporting output in Word format Layers in pivot tables By default inclusion or exclusion of pivot table layers is controlled by the table properties for each pivot table You can override this setting and include all layers or exclude all but the currently visible layer For more information see the topic Table properties printing in Chapter 11 on p 239 Wide Pivot Tables Controls the treatment of tables that are too wide for the defined document width By default the table is wrapped to fit The table is divided into sections and row labels are repeated for each section of the table Alternatively you can shrink wide tables or make no changes to wide tables and allow them to extend beyond the defined document widt
258. e for all variables E Treat blank string values as user missing Template F Apply template from 7 Save template as Tw The new variable s created by Automatic Recode retain any defined variable and value labels from the old variable For any values without a defined value label the original value is used as the label for the recoded value A table displays the old and new values and value labels String values are recoded in alphabetical order with uppercase letters preceding their lowercase counterparts Missing values are recoded into missing values higher than any nonmissing values with their order preserved For example if the original variable has 10 nonmissing values the lowest missing value would be recoded to 11 and the value 11 would be a missing value for the new variable Use the same recoding scheme for all variables This option allows you to apply a single autorecoding scheme to all the selected variables yielding a consistent coding scheme for all the new variables If you select this option the following rules and limitations apply All variables must be of the same type numeric or string All observed values for all selected variables are used to create a sorted order of values to recode into sequential integers User missing values for the new variables are based on the first variable in the list with defined user missing values All other values from other original variables e
259. e identified with an asterisk Variables from the other dataset are identified with a plus sign By default this list contains m Variables from either data file that do not match a variable name in the other file You can create pairs from unpaired variables and include them in the new merged file m Variables defined as numeric data in one file and string data in the other file Numeric variables cannot be merged with string variables m String variables of unequal width The defined width of a string variable must be the same in both data files Variables in New Active Dataset Variables to be included in the new merged data file By default all of the variables that match both the name and the data type numeric or string are included on the list m You can remove variables from the list if you do not want them to be included in the merged file m Any unpaired variables included in the merged file will contain missing data for cases from the file that does not contain that variable Indicate case source as variable Indicates the source data file for each case This variable has a value of 0 for cases from the active dataset and a value of 1 for cases from the external data file To Merge Data Files with the Same Variables and Different Cases Open at least one of the data files that you want to merge If you have multiple datasets open make one of the datasets that you want to merge the active dataset The cases fro
260. e maps the converted names back to the original Data Collection variable names The presence or absence of value labels can affect the metadata attributes of variables and consequently the way those variables are read by Data Collection applications If value labels have been defined for any nonmissing values of a variable they should be defined for all nonmissing values of that variable otherwise the unlabeled values will be dropped when the data file is read by Data Collection This feature is only available with SPSS Statistics installed on Microsoft Windows operating systems and is only available in local analysis mode This feature is not available in distributed analysis mode using SPSS Statistics Server 58 Chapter 3 To write Data Collection metadata files you must have the following items installed m NET framework To obtain the most recent version of the NET framework go to http www microsoft com net IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter Developer Kit For information on obtaining a compatible version of SPSS Survey Reporter Developer Kit go to www ibm com support http www ibm com support Protecting Original Data To prevent the accidental modification or deletion of your original data you can mark the file as read only gt From the Data Editor menus choose File gt Mark File Read Only If you make subsequent modifications to the data and then try to save the data file you can save the d
261. e menus in the syntax window choose Run gt All Note The cache setting is not persistent across sessions Each time you start a new session the value is reset to the default of 20 Chapter Distributed Analysis Mode Distributed analysis mode allows you to use a computer other than your local or desktop computer for memory intensive work Because remote servers that are used for distributed analysis are typically more powerful and faster than your local computer distributed analysis mode can significantly reduce computer processing time Distributed analysis with a remote server can be useful if your work involves m Large data files particularly data read from database sources m Memory intensive tasks Any task that takes a long time in local analysis mode may be a good candidate for distributed analysis Distributed analysis affects only data related tasks such as reading data transforming data computing new variables and calculating statistics Distributed analysis has no effect on tasks related to editing output such as manipulating pivot tables or modifying charts Note Distributed analysis is available only if you have both a local version and access to a licensed server version of the software that is installed on a remote server Server Login The Server Login dialog box allows you to select the computer that processes commands and runs procedures You can select your local computer or a remote server Figure 4
262. e number of data values the number of variables for each case is determined by the line with the greatest number of data values Cases with fewer data values are assigned missing values for the additional variables A specific number of variables represents a case The specified number of variables for each case tells the Text Wizard where to stop reading one case and start reading the next Multiple cases can be contained on the same line and cases can start in the middle of one line and be continued on the next line The Text Wizard determines the end of each case based on the number of values read regardless of the number of lines Each case must contain data 31 Data Files values or missing values indicated by delimiters for all variables or the data file will be read incorrectly How many cases do you want to import You can import all cases in the data file the first n cases n is a number you specify or a random sample of a specified percentage Since the random sampling routine makes an independent pseudo random decision for each case the percentage of cases selected can only approximate the specified percentage The more cases there are in the data file the closer the percentage of cases selected is to the specified percentage Text Wizard Step 3 Fixed Width Files Figure 3 16 Text Wizard Step 3 for fixed width files E Text Import Wizard Fixed Width Step 3 of 6 The first case of data begins on which l
263. e revision history The conversion utility program may generate additional syntax that it stores in the INLINETEMPLATE keyword within the GGRAPH syntax This keyword is created only by the conversion program Its syntax is not intended to be user editable Using the Conversion Utility Program The conversion utility program SyntaxConverter exe can be found in the installation directory It is designed to run from a command prompt The general form of the command is syntaxconverter exe path inputfilename sps path outputfilename sps You must run this command from the installation directory If any directory names contain spaces enclose the entire path and filename in quotation marks as in syntaxconverter exe myfiles oldfile sps new files newfile sps Interactive versus Production Mode Command Syntax Rules The conversion utility program can convert command files that use interactive or production mode syntax rules Interactive The interactive syntax rules are m Each command begins on a new line m Each command ends with a period Production mode The Production Facility and commands in files accessed via the INCLUDE command in a different command file use production mode syntax rules m Each command must begin in the first column of a new line 415 TABLES and IGRAPH Command Syntax Converter Continuation lines must be indented at least one space m The period at the end of the command is optional
264. e the file For data files you should open the data file in code page mode and then resave it if you want to read the file with earlier versions m When code page data files are read in Unicode mode the defined width of all string variables is tripled To automatically set the width of each string variable to the longest observed value for that variable select Minimize string widths based on observed values in the Open Data dialog box Output No scientific notation for small numbers in tables Suppresses the display of scientific notation for small decimal values in output Very small decimal values will be displayed as 0 or 0 000 Apply locale s digit grouping format to numeric values Applies the current locale s digit grouping format to numeric values in pivot tables and charts as well as in the Data Editor For example in a French locale with this setting enabled the value 34419 57 will be displayed as 34 419 57 The grouping format does not apply to trees Model Viewer items numeric values with the DOT or COMMA format or numeric values with a DOLLAR or custom currency format It does however apply to the display of the days value for numeric values with a DTIME format for example to the value of ddd in the format ddd hh mm Measurement System The measurement system used points inches or centimeters for specifying attributes such as pivot table cell margins cell widths and space between tables for printing Language
265. e variable from variable set step 2 a Date and Time Wizard Step 2 of 2 Ey You can name and label the result variable and assign an appropriate format Result Variable Output Format BirthDate Variable Label Birth Date Create the variable now O Paste the syntax into the syntax window ES Enter a name for the Result Variable This cannot be the name of an existing variable Select a date time format from the Output Format list Optionally you can m Assign a descriptive variable label to the new variable Add or Subtract Values from Date Time Variables To add or subtract values from date time variables gt Select Calculate with dates and times on the introduction screen of the Date and Time Wizard 150 Chapter 8 Select Type of Calculation to Perform with Date Time Variables Figure 8 21 Add or subtract values from date time variables step 1 E Date and Time Wizard Step 1 of 3 Do Calculations on Dates Choose one of the following tasks and press Next Add or subtract a duration from a date e g add a month to an age or add a time variable to a datetime variable Calculate the number of time units between two dates e g calculate an age in years from a birthdate and another date m Add or subtract a duration from a date Use this option to add to or subtract from a date format variable You can add or subtract durations that are fixed values s
266. e variable properties to be copied to the active dataset s For value labels you can choose to replace the existing values or to merge them with active dataset properties as far as possible When merging the active dataset has priority Empty properties in source variables will never replace target variable properties For any variables being created all properties will be copied Variable Properties to Copy for Existing Selected Variables W Value Labels O Replace Merge 7 Custom Attributes o E IM Missing Values Variable label Y Measurement Level IM Role Y Formats IM Alignment IM Data Editor Column Width 0 cs Fi ret Value Labels Value labels are descriptive labels associated with data values Value labels are often used when numeric data values are used to represent non numeric categories for example codes of 1 and 2 for Male and Female You can replace or merge value labels in the target variables m Replace deletes any defined value labels for the target variable and replaces them with the defined value labels from the source variable m Merge merges the defined value labels from the source variable with any existing defined value label for the target variable If the same value has a defined value label in both the source and target variables the value label in the target variable is unchanged Custom Attributes User defined custom variable attributes For more information see the topic
267. e_ and Label_ All three are string variables The first two variables correspond to the command and subtype identifiers For more information see the topic Command identifiers and table subtypes on p 381 Label_ contains the table title text m Rows in the table become cases in the data file Example Single two dimensional table In the simplest case a single two dimensional table the table columns become variables and the rows become cases in the data file Figure 21 7 Single two dimensional table Report Beginning Gender Current Salary Salary Female Mean 26 031 92 13 091 97 Median 24 300 00 12 375 00 Minimum 15 750 9 000 Maximum 58 125 30 000 Male Mean 41 441 78 20 301 40 E temp sav DataSet1 Data Editor uy Edit View Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help Visible 7 of Variables E War2 CurrentSalary BeginningSal Report Mean 26 031 92 13 091 97 Report Median 24 300 00 12 375 00 Report Minimum 15 750 9 000 Report Maximum 58 125 30 000 Report Mean 41 441 78 20 301 40 Median 32 850 00 15 750 00 Minimurn 19 650 9 000 Maximum 135 000 79 980 Mean 34 419 57 17 016 09 Variable View m The first three variables identify the source table by command subtype and label m The two elements that defined the rows in the table values of the variable Gender and statistical measures are assigned the generic variable na
268. each variable to see if the data values vary within a case group If they do the wizard restructures the values into a variable group in the new file If they don t the wizard copies the values into the new file When determining if a variable varies within a group user missing values are treated like valid values but system missing values are not If the group contains one valid or use missing value plus the system missing value then 198 Chapter 9 it is treated as a variable that does not vary within the group and the wizard copies the values into the new file Restructure Data Wizard Cases to Variables Sort Data Note The wizard presents this step if you choose to restructure case groups into columns In this step decide whether to sort the current file before restructuring it Each time the wizard encounters a new combination of identification values a new row is created so it is important that the data are sorted by the variables that identify case groups Figure 9 33 Restructure Data Wizard Sorting Data Step 3 EH Restructure Data Wizard Step 3 of 5 Cases to Variables Sorting Data The variables that you used to identify case groups in the current file need to be sorted before the file can be restructured If you are not sure about your data select Yes Sort the current data 22 1 32 1006 ii Yes data will be sorted by the Identifier and Index variables 1 1 7 joa 2 1 1 oos
269. easurements on one variable 7 For example the variable may be width If it is recorded in three separate measurements each one representing a different point in time w1 w2 and w3 then the data are arranged in a group of variables If there is more than one variable in the file often it is also recorded in a variable group for example height recorded in h1 h2 and h3 How many variable groups do you want to restructure o One for example w1 w2 and w3 O More than one for example w1 w2 w3 and h1 h2 h3 etc m One The wizard will create a single restructured variable in the new file from one variable group in the current file m More than one The wizard will create multiple restructured variables in the new file The number that you specify affects the next step in which the wizard automatically creates the specified number of new variables Restructure Data Wizard Variables to Cases Select Variables Note The wizard presents this step if you choose to restructure variable groups into rows In this step provide information about how the variables in the current file should be used in the new file You can also create a variable that identifies the rows in the new file 190 Chapter 9 Figure 9 23 Restructure Data Wizard Select Variables Step 3 EH Restructure Data Wizard Step 3 of 7 Variables to Cases Select Variables For each variable group you have in the current da
270. ect another weight variable or turn off weighting If you save a weighted data file weighting information is saved with the data file You can turn off weighting at any time even after the file has been saved in weighted form Weights in Crosstabs The Crosstabs procedure has several options for handling case weights Weights in scatterplots and histograms Scatterplots and histograms have an option for turning case weights on and off but this does not affect cases with a zero negative or missing value for the weight variable These cases remain excluded from the chart even if you turn weighting off from within the chart To Weight Cases gt From the menus choose Data gt Weight Cases gt Select Weight cases by Select a frequency variable The values of the frequency variable are used as case weights For example a case with a value of 3 for the frequency variable will represent three cases in the weighted data file Restructuring Data Use the Restructure Data Wizard to restructure your data for the procedure that you want to use The wizard replaces the current file with a new restructured file The wizard can m Restructure selected variables into cases m Restructure selected cases into variables m Transpose all data 184 Chapter 9 To Restructure Data gt From the menus choose Data gt Restructure Select the type of restructuring that you want to do gt Select the data to restructure
271. ect the database by entering the directory location and database name or by clicking the button to browse to a database A user name and password may also be required Click OK after entering all necessary information You can make sure the specified database is available by clicking the Test Connection button gt Enter a name for the database connection information This name will be displayed in the list of available OLE DB data sources Figure 3 3 Save OLE DB Connection Information As dialog box Es Save OLE DB Connection Information As Name SQL survey data Click OK This takes you back to the first screen of the Database Wizard where you can select the saved name from the list of OLE DB data sources and continue to the next step of the wizard Deleting OLE DB Data Sources To delete data source names from the list of OLE DB data sources delete the UDL file with the name of the data source in drive Documents and Settings user login Local Settings Application Data SPSS UDL Selecting Data Fields The Select Data step controls which tables and fields are read Database fields columns are read as variables If a table has any field s selected all of its fields will be visible in the following Database Wizard windows but only fields that are selected in this step will be imported as variables This enables you to create table joins and to specify criteria by using fields that you are not importing
272. ected from the source list If you want to change the order of variables on a target list but you don t want to deselect all of the variables and reselect them in the new order you can move variables up and down on the target list using the Ctrl key Macintosh Command key with the up and down arrow keys You can move multiple variables simultaneously if they are contiguous grouped together You cannot move noncontiguous groups of variables Working with extension bundles Extension bundles provide the ability to package custom components such as custom dialogs and extension commands so they can be easily installed by end users For example if you have created a custom dialog for an extension command and wish to share this with other users then yov ll want to create an extension bundle that contains the custom dialog package spd file and the files associated with the extension command the XML file that specifies the syntax of the extension command and the implementation code file s written in Python or R The extension bundle is then what you share with other users Creating extension bundles v v v y How to create an extension bundle From the menus choose Utilities gt Extension Bundles gt Create Extension Bundle Enter values for all fields on the Required tab Enter values for any fields on the Optional tab that are needed for your extension bundle Specify a target file for the extension bundle Click Save t
273. ected sets and the order of selected sets have no effect on the display order of variables in the Data Editor or in dialog box variable lists m Although the defined variable sets are saved with IBM SPSS Statistics data files the list of currently selected sets is reset to the default built in sets each time you open the data file The list of available variable sets includes any variable sets defined for the active dataset plus two built in sets m ALLVARIABLES This set contains all variables in the data file including new variables created during a session m NEWVARIABLES This set contains only new variables created during the session Note Even if you save the data file after creating new variables the new variables are still included in the NEWVARIABLES set until you close and reopen the data file At least one variable set must be selected If ALLVARIABLES is selected any other selected sets will not have any visible effect since this set contains all variables To select variable sets to display From the menus choose Utilities gt Use Variable Sets Select the defined variable sets that contain the variables that you want to appear in the Data Editor and in dialog box variable lists 304 Chapter 16 To display all variables From the menus choose Utilities gt Show All Variables Reordering target variable lists Variables appear on dialog box target lists in the order in which they are sel
274. ed and hidden in new output results TableLook for new pivot tables Custom currency formats To change options settings gt From the menus choose Edit gt Options gt Click the tabs for the settings that you want to change Change the settings gt Click OK or Apply Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 311 Chapter 17 312 Chapter 17 General options Figure 17 1 Options dialog box General tab 9 Display labels Display names No scientific notation for small numbers in tables Apply locale s digit grouping format to numeric values Alphabetical File Measurement level To save time some dialogs allow the use of predefined field roles to automatically assign variables fields to lists in dialogs 9 Use predefined roles Use custom assignments Windows Notification Y Scroll to new out Open syntax window at startup E j Sound None System beep Sound Character Encoding for Data and Syntax Locale s writing system Open only one dataset at a time Unicode universal character set User Interface Character encoding cannot be changed when any non empty datasets are open Language Variable Lists These settings control the display of variables in dialog box lists You can display variable names or variable labels Names or labels can be displayed in alphabetical or file order or grouped by measurement level Display order affec
275. ed on your machine gt From the menus choose Utilities gt Extension Bundles gt View Installed Extension Bundles Click on the highlighted text in the Summary column for the desired extension bundle The Extension Bundle Details dialog box displays the information provided by the author of the extension bundle In addition to required information such as Summary Description and Version the author may have included URL s to locations of relevance such as the author s home page An extension bundle may or may not include a Readme file Components The Components group lists the custom dialog if any and the names of any extension commands included in the extension bundle Extension commands included with the bundle can be run from the syntax editor in the same manner as built in IBM SPSS Statistics commands Help for an extension command may be available by running CommandName HELP in the syntax editor Help for a custom dialog is available if the dialog contains a Help button Note Installing an extension bundle that contains a custom dialog requires a restart of SPSS Statistics in order to see the entry for the dialog in the Components group Dependencies The Dependencies group lists add ons that are required to run the components included in the extension bundle m Integration Plug Ins for Python and R The components for an extension bundle may require the Integration Plug In for Python and or the Integration Plug
276. ee diagrams and model views are exported as separate files in the selected graphics format and are embedded by reference Image file names use the HTML file name as the root name followed by a sequential integer starting with 0 Output XML XML that conforms to the spss output schema PDF Output is exported as it would appear in Print Preview with all formatting attributes intact The PDF file includes bookmarks that correspond to the entries in the Viewer outline pane SPSS Statistics Data File This format is a binary file format All output object types other than tables are excluded Each column of a table becomes a variable in the data file To use a data file that is created with OMS in the same session you must end the active OMS request before you can open the data file For more information see the topic Routing output to IBM SPSS Statistics data files on p 388 Text Space separated text Output is written as text with tabular output aligned with spaces for fixed pitch fonts Charts tree diagrams and model views are excluded 385 Output Management System Tabbed Text Tab delimited text For output that is displayed as pivot tables in the Viewer tabs delimit table column elements Text block lines are written as is no attempt is made to divide them with tabs at useful places Charts tree diagrams and model views are excluded Viewer File This is the same format used when you save the contents of a Viewer window
277. ee the topic Printing a model on p 253 Copying model views From the Edit menu within the Model Viewer you can copy the currently displayed main view or the currently display auxiliary view Only one model view is copied You can paste the model view into the output Viewer where the individual model view is subsequently rendered as a visualization that can be edited in the Graphboard Editor Pasting into the output Viewer allows you to display multiple model views simultaneously You can also paste into other applications where the view may appear as an image or a table depending on the target application 253 Models Printing a model Printing from the Model Viewer You can print a single model view within the Model Viewer itself gt Activate the model in the Model Viewer For more information see the topic Interacting with a model on p 251 gt From the menus choose View gt Edit Mode if available gt On the General toolbar palette in the main or auxiliary view depending on which one you want to print click the print icon If this palette is not displayed choose Palettes gt General from the View menu Note If your Model Viewer does not support a print icon then choose File gt Print Printing from the output Viewer When you print from the output Viewer the number of views that are printed for a specific model depend on the model s properties The model can be set to print only the displayed view or al
278. eefield format 27 functions 128 missing value treatment 128 GET DATA 58 versus DATA LIST command 58 versus GET CAPTURE command 58 GGRAPH converting IGRAPH to GGRAPH 413 grid lines 246 pivot tables 246 group labels 227 grouping rows or columns 227 grouping variables 184 creating 184 headers 221 Help button 4 Help windows 8 hiding 203 231 337 captions 244 dimension labels 231 footnotes 244 procedure results 203 rows and columns 231 titles 231 toolbars 337 hiding excluding output from the Viewer with OMS 388 hiding variables Data Editor 302 dialog lists 302 HTML 209 211 exporting output 209 211 IBM SPSS Data Collection data 36 saving 57 IBM SPSS Statistics data file format routing output to a data file 383 388 icons in dialog boxes 5 IGRAPH converting IGRAPH to GGRAPH 413 import data 10 13 imputations finding in Data Editor 86 inner join 19 input formats 73 423 inserting group labels 227 journal file 327 JPEG files 209 219 exporting charts 209 219 justification 204 314 output 204 314 keyed table 171 labels 227 deleting 227 inserting group labels 227 vs subtype names in OMS 382 LAG function 162 lag function 132 language changing output language 312 changing user interface language 312 layers 220 228 230 233 239 creating 228 displaying 228 230 in pivot tables 228 printing 220 233 239 lead function 132 162 l
279. egacy tables 250 legal notices 416 level of measurement 70 99 defining 70 line breaks variable and value labels 74 local encoding 278 logging in to a server 61 Lotus 1 2 3 files 10 39 336 adding menu item to send data to Lotus 336 opening 10 saving 39 measurement level 70 99 default measurement level 316 defining 70 icons in dialog boxes 5 unknown measurement level 102 measurement system 312 memory 312 menus 336 customizing 336 merging data files dictionary information 171 files with different cases 168 files with different variables 171 renaming variables 171 metafiles 209 exporting charts 209 Microsoft Access 14 Index missing values 74 287 charts 287 defining 74 in functions 128 replacing in time series data 163 scoring models 293 string variables 74 model viewer split models 263 Model Viewer 251 models 251 activating 251 copying 252 exporting 253 interacting 251 merging model and transformation files 298 Model Viewer 251 models supported for export and scoring 290 printing 253 properties 252 scoring 291 moving rows and columns 226 Multiple Imputation options 334 multiple open data files 91 312 suppressing 93 multiple response sets defining 104 multiple categories 104 multiple dichotomies 104 multiple views panes Data Editor 89 syntax editor 270 new features version 20 1 nominal 70 measurement level 70 99 normal scores in Rank Case
280. egories Separator Cache Data GD close Display Data File Information External File A Display Data File Information Working File Export fs Export to Database Export to PASVY Data Collection TA Mark File Read Onl To Change Toolbar Images Select the tool for which you want to change the image on the toolbar display gt Click Change Image Select the image file that you want to use for the tool The following image formats are supported BMP PNG GIF JPG m Images should be square Images that are not square are clipped to a square area m Images are automatically scaled to fit For optimal display use 16x16 pixel images for small toolbar images or 32x32 pixel images for large toolbar images Create New Tool Use the Create New Tool dialog box to create custom tools to launch other applications run command syntax files and run script files 341 Figure 18 5 Create New Tool dialog box Description Label Create Data rAction O Application Send data lt None Syntax Script Language Filename CreateData sps Customizing Menus and Toolbars Chapter Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs The Custom Dialog Builder allows you to create and manage custom dialogs for generating command syntax Using the Custom Dialog Builder you can m Create your own version of a dialog for a built in IBMO SPSS Statistics procedure For example you can create a dial
281. els sc tester dann is a a ead enw dw cage tada Ber 73 Inserting line breaks in labels 0 cece cette ees 74 Missing ValU S o 74 Oe ee ee 75 Column Width 76 Variable alignment eri auaina tak dee ee ee vas barbed eee ek ee bead ded 76 Applying variable definition attributes to multiple variables oooo oooooo ooo 76 Custom Variable Attributes 2 0 0 0 ttt tenes 77 Customizing Variable View nnana anaana 81 Spell checking seters es sie dae aaeh a aam a doe ache Pal el kid aa Vaa Ea a oar 81 vii A O A 82 To enter numeric data asiaa taea i hoea a aad a iraa aa E Ad a E A A ete eens 82 To enter non numeric data 1 0 0 0 tte ae 83 To use value labels for data entry oooococcccccoc eee 83 Data value restrictions inthe data editor 0000s cee eee 83 Editing data 83 Replacing or modifying data values 00 0 0 c cece 84 Cutting copying and pasting data values 0 0 00 cece eee eee 84 Inserting NEW CASES ooo 85 Inserting new variables n nnana 0 0 ccc ttt teens 85 To change data type 86 Finding cases variables or imputations 0 0 0 0 cece ee eee een eens 86 Finding and replacing data and attribute values 0 0000 c eee eee eee 88 Case selection status inthe Data Editor 0 0 00 cece eee 88 Data Editor display options 2 2 0 0 0 0 c cette eee eee 89 Data Editor printing 2 0 0 0 cece nee e tent e eee eee 90
282. emote server the affected procedures will be removed from the menus and the corresponding command syntax will result in errors Switching back to local mode will restore all affected procedures Absolute versus Relative Path Specifications In distributed analysis mode relative path specifications for data files and command syntax files are relative to the current server not relative to your local computer A relative path specification such as mydocs mydata sav does not point to a directory and file on your local drive it points to a directory and file on the remote server s hard drive Windows UNC Path Specifications If you are using a Windows server version you can use universal naming convention UNC specifications when accessing data and syntax files with command syntax The general form of a UNC specification is servername sharename path filename m Servername is the name of the computer that contains the data file m Sharename is the folder directory on that computer that is designated as a shared folder Path is any additional folder subdirectory path below the shared folder m Filename is the name of the data file An example is as follows GET FILE hqdev001 public july sales sav If the computer does not have a name assigned to it you can use its IP address as in GET FILE 204 125 125 53 public july sales sav Even with UNC path specifications you can access data and syntax files only from devices a
283. emote servers for use in distributed analysis mode Contact your system administrator for a list of available servers port numbers for the servers and additional connection information Do not use the Secure Socket Layer unless instructed to do so by your administrator Server Name A server name can be an alphanumeric name that is assigned to a computer for example NetworkServer or a unique IP address that is assigned to a computer for example 202 123 456 78 Port Number The port number is the port that the server software uses for communications Description You can enter an optional description to display in the servers list Connect with Secure Socket Layer Secure Socket Layer SSL encrypts requests for distributed analysis when they are sent to the remote server Before you use SSL check with your administrator For this option to be enabled SSL must be configured on your desktop computer and the server User prompts A production job prompts you for values whenever you run a production job that contains defined runtime symbols You can replace or modify the default values that are displayed Those values are then substituted for the runtime symbols in all command syntax files associated with the production job Background job status The background job status tab displays the status of production jobs that have been submitted to run in the background on a remote server Server name Displays the name of the curre
284. en click the Data tab m For time formats you can use colons periods or spaces as delimiters between hours minutes and seconds Times are displayed with colons as delimiters Internally times are stored as a number of seconds that represents a time interval For example 10 00 00 is stored internally as 36000 which is 60 seconds per minute x 60 minutes per hour x 10 hours Variable labels You can assign descriptive variable labels up to 256 characters 128 characters in double byte languages Variable labels can contain spaces and reserved characters that are not allowed in variable names To specify variable labels gt Make the Data Editor the active window gt Double click a variable name at the top of the column in Data View or click the Variable View tab gt In the Label cell for the variable enter the descriptive variable label Value labels You can assign descriptive value labels for each value of a variable This process is particularly useful if your data file uses numeric codes to represent non numeric categories for example codes of 1 and 2 for male and female m Value labels can be up to 120 bytes 74 Chapter 5 Figure 5 4 Value Labels dialog box E Value Labels gt Value Labels Label F Female M Male To specify value labels gt gt gt gt Click the button in the Values cell for the variable that you want to
285. ent M Embed fonts rLayers in Pivot Tables Honor Print Layer setting set in Table Properties on a per table basis O Export all layers Export visible layer only views of Models o Honor print setting set in Model Viewer Properties for each model Export all views Export visible view only 651 Coe C 217 Working with Output Other Settings That Affect PDF Output Page Setup Page Attributes Page size orientation margins content and display of page headers and footers and printed chart size in PDF documents are controlled by page setup and page attribute options Table Properties TableLooks Scaling of wide and or long tables and printing of table layers are controlled by table properties for each table These properties can also be saved in TableLooks For more information see the topic Table properties printing in Chapter 11 on p 239 Default Current Printer The resolution DPI of the PDF document is the current resolution setting for the default or currently selected printer which can be changed using Page Setup The maximum resolution is 1200 DPI If the printer setting is higher the PDF document resolution will be 1200 DPI Note High resolution documents may yield poor results when printed on lower resolution printers Text Options The following options are available for text export Pivot Table Format Pivot tables can be exported in tab separated or space separated form
286. eproduce randomized results generated in previous releases based on a specified seed value use this random number generator m Mersenne Twister A newer random number generator that is more reliable for simulation purposes If reproducing randomized results from version 12 or earlier is not an issue use this random number generator Assigning Measurement Level For data read from external file formats older IBM SPSS Statistics data files prior to release 8 0 and new fields created in a session measurement level for numeric fields is determined by a set of rules including the number of unique values You can specify the minimum number of data values for a numeric variable used to classify the variable as continuous scale or nominal Variables with fewer than the specified number of unique values are Classified as nominal There are numerous other conditions that are evaluated prior to applying the minimum number of data values rule when determining to apply the continuous scale or nominal measurement level Conditions are evaluated in the order listed in the table below The measurement level for the first condition that matches the data is applied Condition Measurement Level Format is dollar or custom currency Continuous Format is date or time excluding Month and Continuous Wkday All values of a variable are missing Nominal Variable contains at least one non integer Continuous value Variable cont
287. equired equals sign or an invalid equals sign follows it the subcommand name is colored red by default Keywords Recognized keywords are colored maroon by default If however the keyword is missing a required equals sign or an invalid equals sign follows it the keyword is colored red by default Keyword values Recognized keyword values are colored orange by default User specified values of keywords such as integers real numbers and quoted strings are not color coded Comments Text within a comment is colored gray by default Quotes Quotes and text within quotes are colored black by default Syntactical Errors Text associated with the following syntactical errors is colored red by default m Unmatched Parentheses Brackets and Quotes Unmatched parentheses and brackets within comments and quoted strings are not detected Unmatched single or double quotes within quoted strings are syntactically valid Certain commands contain blocks of text that are not command syntax such as BEGIN DATA END DATA BEGIN GPL END GPL and BEGIN PROGRAM END PROGRAM Unmatched values are not detected within such blocks 273 Working with Command Syntax m Long lines Long lines are lines containing more than 251 characters m End statements Several commands require either an END statement prior to the command terminator for example BEGIN DATA END DATA or require a matching END command at some point later in the command stream for ex
288. er bared ete date laica 6 Finding out MOF oleada a en ad Ge bed ee aa ee de ai 7 2 Getting Help 8 Getting Help on Output Terms 2 2 0 0c eens 9 3 Data Files 10 Opening Data Files oc pack aed add eh a goaia a ee Geek das Eee ed Monae Bae ee 10 To Open Data Files ss siias israel dee bie Bd dae ta eed ome eae ty 10 Data File TYP S sii i004 sade a eed ed ded a a ace aes 11 Opening File Options 2000020 ae daa e dnd a da ed 11 Reading Excel 95 or Later Files 2 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 12 Reading Older Excel Files and Other Spreadsheets 200 0 ee eeeeeeaee 12 Reading dBASE FileS ooocococccocc eet eeeeaee 12 Reading Stata Files ssa asira sacma adaa a aeaa a ee 13 Reading Database FileS ooocococccoccoco tte 13 Text Wi atd eoi edad a dada dee Ea a da ad wd aie Bae a 27 Reading IBM SPSS Data Collection Data n n nannaa naaa 36 File Informati n 23 054 gaa aiiai vea a a aaa 38 Saving Data FIGS sce cased ee ed an d akataa wee ta a edo eee daa 38 To Save Modified Data FileS oooocococccncooor eee 38 Saving Data Files in External Formats 00 000 cece eee eee eee 39 vi Saving Data Files in Excel Format o oooocococococ eee eae 41 Saving Data Files in SAS Format 0 0000 cece cece eee eae 42 Saving Data Files in Stata Format 0 0 0 cc cece eee eee 43 Saving Subsets of Variables 1 0 0 0 0 0 cece cece eens 44 Exporting to a Da
289. erating systems you can only select one table Specify any relationships between your tables Optionally m Specify any selection criteria for your data m Add a prompt for user input to create a parameter query m Save your constructed query before running it 14 Chapter 3 To Edit Saved Database Queries gt From the menus choose gt gt File gt Open Database gt Edit Query Select the query file spg that you want to edit Follow the instructions for creating a new query To Read Database Files with Saved Queries gt From the menus choose File gt Open Database gt Run Query Select the query file spg that you want to run If necessary depending on the database file enter a login name and password If the query has an embedded prompt enter other information if necessary for example the quarter for which you want to retrieve sales figures Selecting a Data Source Use the first screen of the Database Wizard to select the type of data source to read ODBC Data Sources If you do not have any ODBC data sources configured or if you want to add a new data source click Add ODBC Data Source m On Linux operating systems this button is not available ODBC data sources are specified in odbc ini and the ODBCINI environment variables must be set to the location of that file For more information see the documentation for your database drivers m n distributed analysis mode
290. es m Create a new dataset containing only the aggregated variables Saves aggregated data to a new dataset in the current session The dataset includes the break variables that define the aggregated cases and all aggregate variables defined by aggregate functions The active dataset is unaffected m Write a new data file containing only the aggregated variables Saves aggregated data to an external data file The file includes the break variables that define the aggregated cases and all aggregate variables defined by aggregate functions The active dataset is unaffected Sorting Options for Large Data Files For very large data files it may be more efficient to aggregate presorted data File is already sorted on break variable s If the data have already been sorted by values of the break variables this option enables the procedure to run more quickly and use less memory Use this option with caution m Data must by sorted by values of the break variables in the same order as the break variables specified for the Aggregate Data procedure m Ifyou are adding variables to the active dataset select this option only if the data are sorted by ascending values of the break variables Sort file before aggregating In very rare instances with large data files you may find it necessary to sort the data file by values of the break variables prior to aggregating This option is not recommended unless you encounter memory or performance problem
291. es and ranges cannot be selected for string variables because neither concept applies to string variables Old values must be the same data type numeric or string as the original variable Ranges include their endpoints and any user missing values that fall within the range m Value Individual old value to be recoded into a new value The value must be the same data type numeric or string as the variable s being recoded m System missing Values assigned by the program when values in your data are undefined according to the format type you have specified when a numeric field is blank or when a value resulting from a transformation command is undefined Numeric system missing values are displayed as periods String variables cannot have system missing values since any character is legal in a string variable m System or user missing Observations with values that either have been defined as user missing values or are unknown and have been assigned the system missing value which is indicated with a period m Range Inclusive range of values Not available for string variables Any user missing values within the range are included All other values Any remaining values not included in one of the specifications on the Old New list This appears as ELSE on the Old New list New Value The single value into which each old value or range of values is recoded New values can be numeric or string m Value Value into which one or mo
292. es are pasted in Word RTF format tables that are too wide for the document width will either be wrapped scaled down to fit the document width or left unchanged File locations options Options on the File Locations tab control the default location that the application will use for opening and saving files at the start of each session the location of the journal file the location of the temporary folder and the number of files that appear in the recently used file list 328 Chapter 17 Figure 17 9 Options dialog box Flle Locations tab Optio A lo vaa Fic Sot eo O Startup Folders for Open and Save Dialogs Specified folder Data files C ProjectiCidata Browse Other files C ProjectX other Browse O Last folder used Session Journal Fi Record syntax in Journal O Append O Overwrite Journal file C Documents and Settings doneiliMy Documentsistatistics jnl Browse Temporary folder C Temp Browse Number of Recently Used Files to List b E Startup Folders for Open and Save Dialog Boxes m Specified folder The specified folder is used as the default location at the start of each session You can specify different default locations for data and other non data files m Last folder used The last folder used to either open or save files in the previous session is used as the default at the start of the next session This applies to both data and other non data files
293. es as set category labels Select this option only if all variables have a defined value label for the counted value and the value label for the counted value is different for each variable m Use variable label as set label If you select Label of counted values you can also use the variable label for the first variable in the set with a defined variable label as the set label If none of the variables in the set have defined variable labels the name of the first variable in the set is used as the set label Copying Data Properties The Copy Data Properties Wizard provides the ability to use an external IBM SPSS Statistics data file as a template for defining file and variable properties in the active dataset You can also use variables in the active dataset as templates for other variables in the active dataset You can m Copy selected file properties from an external data file or open dataset to the active dataset File properties include documents file labels multiple response sets variable sets and weighting m Copy selected variable properties from an external data file or open dataset to matching variables in the active dataset Variable properties include value labels missing values level of measurement variable labels print and write formats alignment and column width in the Data Editor m Copy selected variable properties from one variable in either an external data file open dataset or the active dataset to many
294. es in the first 250 rows If more than one format e g numeric date string is encountered in the first 250 rows the default format is set to string Text Wizard Formatting Options Formatting options for reading variables with the Text Wizard include Do not import Omit the selected variable s from the imported data file Numeric Valid values include numbers a leading plus or minus sign and a decimal indicator 35 Data Files String Valid values include virtually any keyboard characters and embedded blanks For delimited files you can specify the number of characters in the value up to a maximum of 32 767 By default the Text Wizard sets the number of characters to the longest string value encountered for the selected variable s in the first 250 rows of the file For fixed width files the number of characters in string values is defined by the placement of variable break lines in step 4 Date Time Valid values include dates of the general format dd mm yyyy mm dd yyyy dd mm yyyy yyyy mm dd hh mm ss and a variety of other date and time formats Months can be represented in digits Roman numerals or three letter abbreviations or they can be fully spelled out Select a date format from the list Dollar Valid values are numbers with an optional leading dollar sign and optional commas as thousands separators Comma Valid values include numbers that use a period as a decimal indicator and commas as thousands separator
295. es will be copied to the matching variables or that should be created in the active dataset if they do not already exist Source Dataset Variables Matching Active Dataset S Age in years age E g Marital status marital L oC Years at current ad L S Household income i dl Income category in Price of primary ve all Primary vehicle pric E Level of education 8 Meare with current Selected variables 29 Matching variables 3 Variables to be created 26 lt Becr es gt rnisn_ canes ree Apply properties from selected source dataset variables to matching active dataset variables Variable properties are copied from one or more selected source variables to matching variables in the active dataset Variables match if both the variable name and type string or numeric are the same For string variables the defined length must also be the same By default only matching variables are displayed in the two variable lists m Create matching variables in the active dataset if they do not already exist This updates the source list to display all variables in the source data file If you select source variables that do not exist in the active dataset based on variable name new variables will be created in the active dataset with the variable names and properties from the source data file If the active dataset contains no variables a blank new dataset all variables in the source data file ar
296. ession clustering tree and neural network models Once a model has been built the model specifications can be saved in a file that contains all of the information necessary to reconstruct the model You can then use that model file to generate predictive scores in other datasets Vote Some procedures produce a model XML file and some procedures produce a ZIP archive file Example The direct marketing division of a company uses results from a test mailing to assign propensity scores to the rest of their contact database using various demographic characteristics to identify contacts most likely to respond and make a purchase Scoring is treated as a transformation of the data The model is expressed internally as a set of numeric transformations to be applied to a given set of fields variables the predictors specified in the model 1n order to obtain a predicted result In this sense the process of scoring data with a given model is inherently the same as applying any function such as a square root function to a set of data The scoring process consists of two basic steps gt Build the model and save the model file You build the model using a dataset for which the outcome of interest often referred to as the target is known For example if you want to build a model that will predict who is likely to respond to a direct mail campaign you need to start with a dataset that already contains information on who responded and who di
297. et in the Cell Properties dialog and apply to all footnotes You cannot change these settings for individual footnotes For more information see the topic Font and background on p 241 Data cell widths Set Data Cell Width is used to set all data cells to the same width Figure 11 20 Set Data Cell Width dialog box Set Data Cell Width Width for all data cells s pt 50 es Lx To set the width for all data cells gt From the menus choose Format gt Set Data Cell Widths gt Enter a value for the cell width Changing column width Click and drag the column border Displaying hidden borders in a pivot table For tables without many visible borders you can display the hidden borders This can simplify tasks like changing column widths gt From the View menu choose Gridlines 247 Pivot tables Figure 11 21 Gridlines displayed for hidden borders PPP ace Total Count Expected Count within Owns PDA Gender meme Female male Total Count Expected Count within Owns PDA Count Expected Count within Owns PDA Count Expected Count within Owns PDA Count Expected Count within Owns PDA Count Expected Count within Owns PDA Count Expected Count within Owns PDA Selecting rows columns and cells in a pivot table You can select an entire row or column or a specified set of data and label cells To select multiple cells gt
298. etter or one of the characters or Subsequent characters can be any combination of letters numbers nonpunctuation characters and a period In code page mode sixty four bytes typically means 64 characters in single byte languages for example English French German Spanish Italian Hebrew Russian Greek Arabic and Thai and 32 characters in double byte languages for example Japanese Chinese and Korean Many string characters that only take one byte in code page mode take two or more bytes in Unicode mode For example is one byte in code page format but is two bytes in Unicode format so r sum is six bytes in a code page file and eight bytes in Unicode mode Note Letters include any nonpunctuation characters used in writing ordinary words in the languages supported in the platform s character set Variable names cannot contain spaces A character in the first position of a variable name defines a scratch variable You can only create scratch variables with command syntax You cannot specify a as the first character of a variable in dialog boxes that create new variables A sign in the first position indicates that the variable is a system variable The sign is not allowed as the initial character of a user defined variable The period the underscore and the characters and can be used within variable names For example A I is a valid variable name 70 Chapter 5 Variable names end
299. even if they are in shared folders File Access in Local and Distributed Analysis Mode The view of data folders directories and drives for both your local computer and the network is based on the computer that you are currently using to process commands and run procedures which is not necessarily the computer in front of you Local analysis mode When you use your local computer as your server the view of data files folders and drives in the file access dialog box for opening data files is similar to what you see in other applications or in Windows Explorer You can see all of the data files and folders on your computer and any files and folders on mounted network drives Distributed analysis mode When you use another computer as a remote server to run commands and procedures the view of data files folders and drives represents the view from the remote server computer Although you may see familiar folder names such as Program Files and drives such as C these items are not the folders and drives on your computer they are the folders and drives on the remote server In distributed analysis mode you will not have access to data files on your local computer unless you specify the drive as a shared device or specify the folders containing your data files as shared folders If the server is running a different operating system for example you are running Windows and the server is running UNIX you probably won t have ac
300. ews are virtual or dynamic tables defined by queries These can include joins of multiple tables and or fields derived from calculations based on the values of other fields Synonyms A synonym is an alias for a table or view typically defined in a query System tables System tables define database properties In some cases standard database tables may be classified as system tables and will only be displayed if you select this option Access to real system tables is often restricted to database administrators Note For OLE DB data sources available only on Windows operating systems you can select fields only from a single table Multiple table joins are not supported for OLE DB data sources Creating a Relationship between Tables The Specify Relationships step allows you to define the relationships between the tables for ODBC data sources If fields from more than one table are selected you must define at least one join Figure 3 5 Database Wizard specifying relationships E Database Wizard Xi Specify Relationships In order to retrieve data from multiple tables you must specify how to join them To indicate a join first select the type of join that you want Then drag a field from one table over the corresponding field in the other table Alternatively you can select the two fields and press the Join button Age DOUBLE iti DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE COUNTER DOUBLE INTEGER DOUBLE i INTEGER DOUBLE DOUBLE VARCHAR DOUB
301. example pivot table chart text output Select the alignment option you want Changing Alignment of Output Items In the outline or contents pane select the items that you want to align gt From the menus choose Format gt Align Left or Format gt Center or Format gt Align Right Viewer Outline The outline pane provides a table of contents of the Viewer document You can use the outline pane to navigate through your results and control the display Most actions in the outline pane have a corresponding effect on the contents pane m Selecting an item in the outline pane displays the corresponding item in the contents pane m Moving an item in the outline pane moves the corresponding item in the contents pane m Collapsing the outline view hides the results from all items in the collapsed levels Controlling the outline display To control the outline display you can m Expand and collapse the outline view m Change the outline level for selected items m Change the size of items in the outline display m Change the font that is used in the outline display To Collapse and Expand the Outline View gt Click the box to the left of the outline item that you want to collapse or expand or gt Click the item in the outline 205 Working with Output gt From the menus choose View gt Collapse or View gt Expand To Change the Outline Level Click the item in the outline pane Click the le
302. explicitly saved prior to the end of the session Dataset names must conform to variable naming rules For more information see the topic Variable names in Chapter 5 on p 69 Saving predictors to a new dataset based on importance You can save predictors to a new dataset based on the information in the predictor importance chart gt Activate the model in the Model Viewer For more information see the topic Interacting with a model on p 251 gt From the menus choose Generate gt Field Selection Predictor Importance Figure 12 2 Field selection based on importance Generate Field Selection Mode O include Exclude Top number of fields Importance greater than CS ee Top number of variables Includes or excludes the most important predictors up to the specified number Importance greater than Includes or excludes all predictors with relative importance greater than the specified value gt After you click OK the New Dataset dialog appears 255 Models Figure 12 3 Field selection New Dataset Field Selection New Dataset A new dataset will be created for the fields requested Dataset name myModelingFields Cox east cancer new Dataset name Specify a valid dataset name Datasets are available for subsequent use in the same session but are not saved as files unless explicitly saved prior to the end of the session Dataset names must conform to variable naming
303. fference Nonseasonal difference between successive values in the series The order is the number of previous values used to calculate the difference Because one observation is lost for each order of difference system missing values appear at the beginning of the series For example if the difference order is 2 the first two cases will have the system missing value for the new variable Seasonal difference Difference between series values a constant span apart The span is based on the currently defined periodicity To compute seasonal differences you must have defined date variables Data menu Define Dates that include a periodic component such as months of the year The order is the number of seasonal periods used to compute the difference The number of cases with the system missing value at the beginning of the series is equal to the periodicity multiplied by the order For example if the current periodicity is 12 and the order is 2 the first 24 cases will have the system missing value for the new variable Centered moving average Average of a span of series values surrounding and including the current value The span is the number of series values used to compute the average If the span is even the moving average is computed by averaging each pair of uncentered means The number of cases with the system missing value at the beginning and at the end of the series for a span of n is equal to n 2 for even span values and n 1
304. field or type directly in the Expression field m You can paste functions or commonly used system variables by selecting a group from the Function group list and double clicking the function or variable in the Functions and Special Variables list or select the function or variable and click the arrow adjacent to the Function group list Fill in any parameters indicated by question marks only applies to functions The function group labeled All provides a listing of all available functions and system variables A brief description of the currently selected function or variable is displayed in a reserved area in the dialog box m String constants must be enclosed in quotation marks or apostrophes m If values contain decimals a period must be used as the decimal indicator m For new string variables you must also select Type 8 Label to specify the data type 127 Data Transformations Compute Variable If Cases The If Cases dialog box allows you to apply data transformations to selected subsets of cases using conditional expressions A conditional expression returns a value of true false or missing for each case Figure 8 2 Compute Variable If Cases dialog box a Compute Variable If Cases y Age in years age A O Include all cases Call waiting callwait 9 Include if case satisfies condition Caller ID calla ada amp Gender gender gt Jl Household income i Household income i Function gr
305. fields used in the model For more information see the topic Matching model fields to dataset fields on p 293 Select the scoring functions you want to use For more information see the topic Selecting scoring functions on p 295 Select a Scoring Model The model file can be an XML file or a ZIP archive that contains model PMML The list only displays files with a zip or xml extension the file extensions are not displayed in the list You can use any model file created by IBM SPSS Statistics You can also use some model files created by other applications such as IBM SPSS Modeler but some model files created by other applications cannot be read by SPSS Statistics including any models that have multiple target fields variables Model Details This area displays basic information about the selected model such as model type target if any and predictors used to build the model Since the model file has to be read to obtain this information there may be a delay before this information is displayed for the selected model If the XML file or ZIP archive is not recognized as a model that SPSS Statistics can read a message indicating that the file cannot be read is displayed 293 Scoring data with predictive models Matching model fields to dataset fields In order to score the active dataset the dataset must contain fields variables that correspond to all the predictors in the model If the model also contains split fie
306. file that do not exist in the active dataset are added to the active dataset All documents are then sorted by date Custom Attributes Custom data file attributes typically created with the DATAFILE ATTRIBUTE command in command syntax Replace deletes any existing custom data file attributes in the active dataset replacing them with the data file attributes from the source data file Merge combines data file attributes from the source and active dataset Unique attribute names in the source file that do not exist in the active dataset are added to the active dataset If the same attribute name exists in both data files the named attribute in the active dataset 1s unchanged Weight Specification Weights cases by the current weight variable in the source data file 1f there is a matching variable in the active dataset This overrides any weighting currently in effect in the active dataset File Label Descriptive label applied to a data file with the FILE LABEL command 114 Chapter 7 Results Figure 7 13 Copy Data Properties Wizard Step 5 Es Copy Data Properties Step 5 of 5 Finish Variables to which properties will be applied 3 Wariables to be copied 26 Dataset properties to be copied 1 9 Execute the command Paste the command into a syntax window ees i or The last step in the Copy Data Properties Wizard provides information on the number of variables for which variable properties
307. files you create for the dialog A custom dialog package file is simply a ZIP file that can be opened and modified with an application such as WinZip on Windows Open the new properties file with a text editor that supports UTF 8 such as Notepad on Windows or the TextEdit application on Mac Modify the values associated with any properties that need to be localized but do not modify the names of the properties Properties associated with a specific control are prefixed with the identifier for the control For example the ToolTip property for a control with the identifier options_button is options_button_tooltip LABEL Title properties are simply named lt identifier gt _LABEL as in options_button_LABEL When the dialog is launched SPSS Statistics will search for a properties file whose language identifier matches the current language as specified by the Language drop down on the General tab in the Options dialog box If no such properties file is found the default file lt Dialog Name gt properties will be used To Localize the Help File Make a copy of the help file associated with the dialog and localize the text for the desired language The copy must reside in the same folder as the help file and not in a sub folder The help file should reside in the ext lib lt Dialog Name gt folder of the SPSS Statistics installation directory for Windows and Linux and under the Library Application Support IBM SPSS Statistics 20 CustomDialogs lt Dia
308. ft arrow on the Outlining toolbar to promote the item move the item to the left or Click the right arrow on the Outlining toolbar to demote the item move the item to the right or gt From the menus choose Edit gt Outline gt Promote or Edit gt Outline gt Demote Changing the outline level is particularly useful after you move items in the outline level Moving items can change the outline level of the items and you can use the left and right arrow buttons on the Outlining toolbar to restore the original outline level To Change the Size of Outline Items gt From the menus choose View gt Outline Size Select the outline size Small Medium or Large To Change the Font in the Outline gt From the menus choose View gt Outline Font gt Select a font Adding Items to the Viewer In the Viewer you can add items such as titles new text charts or material from other applications To Add a Title or Text Text items that are not connected to a table or chart can be added to the Viewer Click the table chart or other object that will precede the title or text 206 Chapter 10 gt From the menus choose Insert gt New Title or Insert gt New Text gt Double click the new object gt Enter the text To Add a Text File gt In the outline pane or contents pane of the Viewer click the table chart or other object that will precede the text gt From the menus
309. g alphanumeric String variables cannot be used in calculations Figure 8 3 Type and Label dialog box E Compute Variable Type and Label rLabel Label Average monthly expense O Use expression as label rType Numeric String EE Functions Many types of functions are supported including Arithmetic functions Statistical functions String functions Date and time functions Distribution functions Random variable functions Missing value functions Scoring functions For more information and a detailed description of each function type functions on the Index tab of the Help system Missing Values in Functions Functions and simple arithmetic expressions treat missing values in different ways In the expression varl var2 var3 3 the result is missing if a case has a missing value for any of the three variables In the expression MEAN var1 var2 var3 the result is missing only if the case has missing values for all three variables 129 Data Transformations For statistical functions you can specify the minimum number of arguments that must have nonmissing values To do so type a period and the minimum number after the function name as in MEAN 2 varl var2 var3 Random Number Generators The Random Number Generators dialog box allows you to select the random number generator and set the starting sequence value so you can reproduce a sequence
310. gt For cases from the menus choose Edit gt Go to Case Enter an integer value that represents the current row number in Data View Note The current row number for a particular case can change due to sorting and other actions Variables gt For variables from the menus choose Edit gt Go to Variable Enter the variable name or select the variable from the drop down list Figure 5 11 Go To dialog box E Go To Big Go to variable 87 Data Editor Imputations gt From the menus choose Edit gt Go to Imputation gt Select the imputation or Original data from the drop down list Figure 5 12 Go To dialog box Alternatively you can select the imputation from the drop down list in the edit bar in Data View of the Data Editor Figure 5 13 Data Editor with imputation markings ON we Untitled5 telcolmputed Data Editor I ole File Edit View Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help 11032 Imputation_ 10 Visible 32 of 32 Variables 1 E Original data Imputation tenure marital 11 Variable View Processor is ready Relative case position is preserved when selecting imputations For example if there are 1000 cases in the original dataset case 1034 the 34th case in the first imputation displays at the top of the grid If you select imputation 2 in the dropdown case 2034 the 34th case in imputat
311. gt In Variable View from the menus choose Data gt New Custom Attribute gt Drag and drop the variables to which you want to assign the new attribute to the Selected Variables list gt Enter a name for the attribute Attribute names must follow the same rules as variable names For more information see the topic Variable names on p 69 gt Enter an optional value for the attribute If you select multiple variables the value is assigned to all selected variables You can leave this blank and then enter values for each variable in Variable View Figure 5 6 New Custom Attribute dialog box E New Custom Attribute Select variable s for the new custom attribute Variables Selected variables E Age S Avalncome Gender E Income1 E Income2 E Income3 e OwnHome amp MortgageType E Maxincome Attribute name Formula Attribute value Mean Income1 Income2 Income3 EA Display attribute in the Data Editor Cra Display attribute in the Data Editor Displays the attribute in Variable View of the Data Editor For information on controlling the display of custom attributes see Displaying and Editing Custom Variable Attributes below Display Defined List of Attributes Displays a list of custom attributes already defined for the dataset Attribute names that begin with a dollar sign are reserved attributes that cannot be modified Displaying and Editing Custom Variable Attributes Custom v
312. h Include footnotes and captions Controls the inclusion or exclusion of all pivot table footnotes and captions Views of Models By default inclusion or exclusion of model views is controlled by the model properties for each model You can override this setting and include all views or exclude all but the currently visible view For more information see the topic Model properties in Chapter 12 on p 252 Note all model views including tables are exported as graphics Page Setup for Export This opens a dialog where you can define the page size and margins for the exported document The document width used to determine wrapping and shrinking behavior is the page width minus the left and right margins To Set Word Export Options Select Word RTF as the export format Click Change Options 213 Working with Output Figure 10 5 Word Export Output Options Export Output Word RTF Options rLayers in Pivot Tables Honor Print Layer setting set in Table Properties on a per table basis Export all layers Export visible layer only Wide Pivot Tables Wrap table to fit within page margins Shrink width to fit within page margins Do not adjust width Fi Include footnotes and captions views of Models Honor print setting set in Model Viewer Properties for each model Export all views Export visible view only ESC Excel Options The following options are available for expor
313. he Variable to be Transposed list All of the variables in the group must be of the same type numeric or string You can include the same variable more than once in the variable group variables are copied rather than moved from the source variable list its values are repeated in the new file To Specify Multiple Restructured Variables Select the first target variable that you want to define from the Target Variable drop down list Put the variables that make up the variable group that you want to transform into the Variable to be Transposed list All of the variables in the group must be of the same type numeric or string 191 File Handling and File Transformations You can include the same variable more than once in the variable group A variable is copied rather than moved from the source variable list and its values are repeated in the new file Select the next target variable that you want to define and repeat the variable selection process for all available target variables m Although you can include the same variable more than once in the same target variable group you cannot include the same variable in more than one target variable group m Each target variable group list must contain the same number of variables Variables that are listed more than once are included in the count m The number of target variable groups is determined by the number of variable groups that you specified in the previous step You
314. he action you want for the tool open a file run a command syntax file or run a script Click Browse to select a file or application to associate with the tool New tools are displayed in the User Defined category which also contains user defined menu items 339 Customizing Menus and Toolbars Toolbar Properties Use Toolbar Properties to select the window types in which you want the selected toolbar to appear This dialog box is also used for creating names for new toolbars Figure 18 3 Toolbar Properties dialog box E Toolbar Properties Toolbar Name My Toolbar Display on the following windows gt IM Data Editor T Viewer E syntax Eat conca Lren To Set Toolbar Properties gt From the menus choose View gt Toolbars gt Customize gt For existing toolbars click Edit and then click Properties in the Edit Toolbar dialog box gt For new toolbars click New Tool gt Select the window types in which you want the toolbar to appear For new toolbars also enter a toolbar name Edit Toolbar Use the Edit Toolbar dialog box to customize existing toolbars and create new toolbars Toolbars can contain any of the available tools including tools for all menu actions They can also contain custom tools that launch other applications run command syntax files or run script files 340 Chapter 18 Figure 18 4 Customize Toolbar dialog box LE Edit Toolbar E Cat
315. he model Date Numeric fields with display formats that include the date but not the time in the active dataset match the date type in the model This includes Date dd mm yyyy Adate mm dd yyyy Edate dd mm yyyy Sdate yyyy mm dd and Jdate dddyyyy m Time Numeric fields with display formats that include the time but not the date in the active dataset match the time data type in the model This includes Time hh mm ss and Dtime dd hh mm ss Timestamp Numeric fields with a display format that includes both the date and the time in the active dataset match the timestamp data type in the model This corresponds to the Datetime format dd mm yyyy hh mm ss in the active dataset Note In addition to field name and type you should make sure that the actual data values in the dataset being scored are recorded in the same fashion as the data values in the dataset used to build the model For example if the model was built with an Incomefield that has income divided into four categories and IncomeCategory in the active dataset has income divided into six categories or four different categories those fields don t really match each other and the resulting scores will not be reliable Missing Values This group of options controls the treatment of missing values encountered during the scoring process for the predictor variables defined in the model A missing value in the context of scoring refers to one of the following m A p
316. he model properties for each model You can override this setting and include all views or exclude all but the currently visible view For more information see the topic Model properties in Chapter 12 on p 252 Note all model views including tables are exported as graphics Page Setup for Export This opens a dialog where you can define the page size and margins for the exported document The document width used to determine wrapping and shrinking behavior is the page width minus the left and right margins To Set PowerPoint Export Options Select PowerPoint as the export format Click Change Options Figure 10 7 Powerpoint Export Options dialog E Export Output PowerPoint Options rLayers in Pivot Tables Honor Print Layer setting set in Table Properties on a per table basis Export all layers Export visible layer only Wide Pivot Tables rap table to fit within page margins Shrink width to fit within page margins Do not adjust width Y Include footnotes and captions E Use Viewer outline entries as slide titles rWiews of Models Honor print setting set in Model Viewer Properties for each model Export all views Export visible view only eese seu Et ESC 216 Chapter 10 Note Export to PowerPoint is available only on Windows operating systems PDF Options The following options are available for PDF Embed bookmarks This option includes bookmarks in
317. he viewer outline 00000 c eee eee eee 400 22 Scripting Facility 402 A O O A ORLA aa iets 403 Creating Autoscripts 2 0 0 tenet eens 404 Associating Existing Scripts with Viewer Objects 0 0000 cece eee eee eee 405 Scripting with the Python Programming Language 2 0 cece cece eee eee aee 405 Running Python Scripts and Python programs 00 000 cece eee eee eee 406 Script Editor for the Python Programming Language 0 0 ee eee eeeees 408 Scripting IN BASIC dic ete hrena a eee dee ate a eee Gaia nw eae ac 408 Compatibility with Versions Prior to 16 0 0 0c cece eee eee eee 408 The scriptContext Object 0 nananana 411 Startup SCMpPtS 2 tias a ta a Aa ia dak ds 412 Appendices A TABLES and IGRAPH Command Syntax Converter 413 B Notices 416 Index 419 xvii Chapter Overview What s new in version 20 Maps The Graphboard Template Chooser now includes templates for creating different types of map visualizations such as choropleth maps color maps maps with mini charts and overlay maps IBM SPSSO Statistics ships with several map files but you can use the Map Conversion Utility to covert your existing map shapefiles for use with the Graphboard Template Chooser Faster rendering of pivot tables Pivot tables now render much faster than in previous versions while retaining full support for pivoting and editing If you used fas
318. his setting and include all layers or exclude all but the currently visible layer For more information see the topic Table properties printing in Chapter 11 on p 239 214 Chapter 10 Include footnotes and captions Controls the inclusion or exclusion of all pivot table footnotes and captions Views of Models By default inclusion or exclusion of model views is controlled by the model properties for each model You can override this setting and include all views or exclude all but the currently visible view For more information see the topic Model properties in Chapter 12 on p 252 Note all model views including tables are exported as graphics To Set Excel Export Options Select Excel as the export format gt Click Change Options Figure 10 6 Excel Export Output Options Export Output Excel Options rWhat Do You Want to Do rLayers in Pivot Tables Create a workbook Honor Print Layer setting set in Table Properties on a per table basis If you specify the name of an existing workbook it will ae Export all layers be completely overwritten Create a worketeet Export visible layer only If you specify the name of an existing worksheet it will Fi Include footnotes and captions be completely overwritten Modify an existing worksheet Honor print setting set in Model Viewer Properties for each Only non graphic items will be exported model rViews of Models Export all views L
319. hon programs Both Python scripts and Python programs can be run from within IBM SPSS Statistics or from an external Python process such as a Python IDE or the Python interpreter Python Scripts Python Script Run from SPSS Statistics You can run a Python script from Utilities gt Run Script or from the Python script editor which is launched when opening a Python file py from File gt Open gt Script Scripts run from the Python editor that is launched from SPSS Statistics operate on the SPSS Statistics client that launched the editor This allows you to debug your Python code from a Python editor 407 Seripting Facility Python Script Run from an External Python Process You can run a Python script from any external Python process such as a Python IDE that is not launched from SPSS Statistics or the Python interpreter The script will attempt to connect to an existing SPSS Statistics client If more than one client is found a connection is made to the most recently launched one If an existing client is not found the Python script starts up a new instance of the SPSS Statistics client By default the Data Editor and Viewer are invisible for the new client You can choose to make them visible or work in invisible mode with datasets and output documents Python Programs Python Program Run from Command Syntax You can run a Python program by embedding Python code within a BEGIN PROGRAM END PROGRAM block in command syntax The comma
320. hs Utilities Run Add ons Window Help 2H8 6 Orb A DP E FREQUENCIES WARIABLES gender inccat ORDER ANALYSIS Processoris ready in 8Col1 Copying Syntax from the Output Log You can build a syntax file by copying command syntax from the log that appears in the Viewer To use this method you must select Display commands in the log in the Viewer settings Edit menu Options Viewer tab before running the analysis Each command will then appear in the Viewer along with the output from the analysis In the syntax window you can run the pasted syntax edit it and save it in a syntax file 268 Chapter 13 Figure 13 2 Command syntax in the log viewer QuE File Edit View Data Transform Insert Format Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help GET FILE Zpubsispssidatajobsidemo saw DATASET NAME DataSet2 WINDOW FRONT n Income category in thousan FREQUENCIES Primary vehicle price catego VARIABLES inccat carcat FORMAT NOTABLE BARCHART FREQ ORDER ANALYSIS Income category in thousands gt o e ov 3 o w pa mL Under 25 25 49 50 74 75 Income category in thousands v T EE E I gt Double click to edit Log Processoris ready H 160 W 652 pt To Copy Syntax from the Output Log gt Before running the analysis from the menus choose Edit gt Options gt On the Viewer tab select Display commands in the log
321. iable in a new field place it in the Source of values column in the grid Use the arrow keys or drag and drop Click on the new field name type or width to edit it Match cases to records SPSS Statistics SurveySubset Table SurveySubset Wireless Source of values Table fields Multtline E Voice E Pager Internet CalleriD B SurveyDate Sa Comments ecodedWireless ecodedWireless Right click on a variable for more IM Show existing fields information User Missing Values Export as valid values O Export numeric user missing values as nulls and export string user missing values as blank spaces eee tert gt rin cant re For information on field names and data types see the section on creating database fields from IBM SPSS Statistics variables in Exporting to a Database on p 45 Show existing fields Select this option to display a list of existing fields You cannot use this panel in the Export to Database Wizard to replace existing fields but it may be helpful to know what fields are already present in the table If you want to replace the values of existing fields see Replacing Values in Existing Fields on p 51 Appending New Records Cases To append new records cases to a database table In the Choose how to export the data panel of the Export to Database Wizard select Append new records to an existing table gt
322. iables in the active dataset For more information see the topic Adding New Fields on p 52 This option is not available for Excel files Append new records to an existing table Adds new records rows to an existing table containing the values from cases in the active dataset For more information see the topic Appending New Records Cases on p 53 Drop an existing table and create a new table of the same name Deletes the specified table and creates a new table of the same name that contains selected variables from the active dataset All information from the original table including definitions of field properties for example primary keys data types is lost For more information see the topic Creating a New Table or Replacing a Table on p 55 Create a new table Creates a new table in the database containing data from selected variables in the active dataset The name can be any value that is allowed as a table name by the data source The name cannot duplicate the name of an existing table or view in the database For more information see the topic Creating a New Table or Replacing a Table on p 55 49 Data Files Selecting a Table When modifying or replacing a table in the database you need to select the table to modify or replace This panel in the Export to Database Wizard displays a list of tables and views in the selected database Figure 3 24 Export to Database Wizard selecting a table or view EH Export to
323. iables that contain the values of existing variables from preceding or subsequent cases Name Name for the new variable This must be a name that does not already exist in the active dataset Get value from earlier case lag Get the value from a previous case in the active dataset For example with the default number of cases value of 1 each case for the new variable has the value of the original variable from the case that immediately precedes it Get value from following case lead Get the value from a subsequent case in the active dataset For example with the default number of cases value of 1 each case for the new variable has the value of the original variable from the next case 133 Data Transformations Number of cases to shift Get the value from the nth preceding or subsequent case where n is the value specified The value must be a non negative integer m If split file processing is on the scope of the shift is limited to each split group A shift value cannot be obtained from a case in a preceding or subsequent split group Filter status is ignored The value of the result variable is set to system missing for the first or last n cases in the dataset or split group where n is the value specified for Number of cases to shift For example using the Lag method with a value of 1 would set the result variable to system missing for the first case in the dataset or first case in each split group m User missing v
324. ication may be appended to the label m Labels that include information about variables or values are affected by your current output label options settings Edit menu Options Output Labels tab m Labels are affected by the current output language setting Edit menu Options General tab To specify labels to use to identify output objects In the Output Management System Control Panel select one or more output types and then select one or more commands Click Labels 383 Output Management System Figure 21 3 OMS Labels dialog box E OMS Labels Label E Selected Labels m Tip You can copy a label from the Viewer by right clicking on a table and choosing Copy OMS Label from the popup menu Ei cone faro Enter the label exactly as 1t appears in the outline pane of the Viewer window You can also right click the item in the outline choose Copy OMS Label and paste the copied label into the Label text field Click Add gt Repeat the process for each label that you want to include gt Click Continue Wildcards You can use an asterisk as the last character of the label string as a wildcard character All labels that begin with the specified string except for the asterisk will be selected This process works only when the asterisk is the last character because asterisks can appear as valid characters inside a label OMS options You can use the OMS Option
325. ick the ellipsis button to open the Custom Dialog Builder for the sub dialog You can also open the builder by double clicking on the Sub dialog button 364 Chapter 19 Mnemonic Key An optional character in the title to use as a keyboard shortcut to the control The character appears underlined in the title The shortcut is activated by pressing Alt mnemonic key The Mnemonic Key property is not supported on Mac Note The Sub dialog Button control cannot be added to a sub dialog Dialog Properties for a Sub dialog To view and set properties for a sub dialog Open the sub dialog by double clicking on the button for the sub dialog in the main dialog or single click the sub dialog button and click the ellipsis button for the Sub dialog property In the sub dialog click on the canvas in an area outside of any controls With no controls on the canvas the properties for a sub dialog are always visible Sub dialog Name The unique identifier for the sub dialog The Sub dialog Name property is required Note If you specify the Sub dialog Name as an identifier in the Syntax Template as in My Sub dialog Name it will be replaced at run time with a blank separated list of the syntax generated by each control in the sub dialog in the order in which they appear top to bottom and left to right Title Specifies the text to be displayed in the title bar of the sub dialog box The Title property is optional but recommen
326. iew displays some visualization for the model O Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 251 252 Chapter 12 The specific visualizations that are displayed depend on the procedure that created the model For information about working with specific models refer to the documentation for the procedure that created the model Model view tables Tables displayed in the Model Viewer are not pivot tables You cannot manipulate these tables as you can manipulate pivot tables Setting model properties Within the Model Viewer you can set specific properties for the model For more information see the topic Model properties on p 252 Copying model views You can also copy individual model views within the Model Viewer For more information see the topic Copying model views on p 252 Model properties Depending on your Model Viewer choose File gt Properties or File gt Print View Each model has associated properties that let you specify which views are printed from the output Viewer By default only the view that is visible in the output Viewer is printed This is always a main view and only one main view You can also specify that all available model views are printed These include all the main views and all the auxiliary views except for auxiliary views based on selection in the main view these are not printed Note that you can also print individual model views within the Model Viewer itself For more information s
327. iewer the active window click anywhere in the window gt From the menus choose File gt Export Enter a filename or prefix for charts and select an export format 210 Chapter 10 Figure 10 3 Export Output dialog box ic Export Output rObjects to Export Oal O al visible O Selected Document Type Options HTM htm Layers in Pivot Tables Honor Print Layer setting set in Table Include Footnotes and Caption Yes a An HTML file will be created that contains text output and links to separate graphics files Multiple graphics file formats are available Views of Models Honor print setting set in Model View File Name results demo_data htm Browse Graphics Type Options JPEG file No options available Objects to Export You can export all objects in the Viewer all visible objects or only selected objects Document Type The available options are m Word RTF doc Pivot tables are exported as Word tables with all formatting attributes intact for example cell borders font styles and background colors Text output is exported as formatted RTF Charts tree diagrams and model views are included in PNG format Note Microsoft Word may not display extremely wide tables properly m Excel xls Pivot table rows columns and cells are exported as Excel rows columns and cells with all formatting attribute
328. ile 297 Scoring data with predictive models Cumulative Hazard The estimated cumulative hazard function The value indicates the probability of observing the event at or before the specified time given the values of the predictors m Nearest neighbor The ID of the nearest neighbor The ID is the value of the case labels variable if supplied and otherwise the case number Applies only to nearest neighbor models m Kth nearest neighbor The ID of the Ath nearest neighbor Enter an integer for the value of k in the Value column The ID is the value of the case labels variable if supplied and otherwise the case number Applies only to nearest neighbor models m Distance to nearest neighbor The distance to the nearest neighbor Depending on the model either Euclidean or City Block distance will be used Applies only to nearest neighbor models Distance to kth nearest neigbor The distance to the Ath nearest neighbor Enter an integer for the value of k in the Value column Depending on the model either Euclidean or City Block distance will be used Applies only to nearest neighbor models Field Name Each selected scoring function saves a new field variable in the active dataset You can use the default names or enter new names If fields with those names already exist in the active dataset they will be replaced For information on field naming rules see Variable names Value See the descriptions of the scoring functions for
329. ine number How many lines represent a case h E pHow many cases do you want to import All of the cases The first Cases Oa percentage of the cases Data preview D 10 20 30 40 50 60 570 000 270 000 402 000 25 300 257 400 144 000 262 800 158 400 1 324 210 000 321 000 135 000 360 000 187 500 262 800 117 000 334 800 153 000 288 000 162 000 H P r UN Or FF OW This step provides information about cases A case is similar to a record in a database For example each respondent to questionnaire is a case The first case of data begins on which line number Indicates the first line of the data file that contains data values If the top line s of the data file contain descriptive labels or other text that does not represent data values this will not be line 1 How many lines represent a case Controls how the Text Wizard determines where each case ends and the next one begins Each variable is defined by its line number within the case and its column location You need to specify the number of lines for each case to read the data correctly 32 Chapter 3 How many cases do you want to import You can import all cases in the data file the first n cases n is a number you specify or a random sample of a specified percentage Since the random sampling routine makes an independent pseudo random decision for each case the percentage of cases selected can only app
330. ing General Saving Data Files in SAS Format Special handling is given to various aspects of your data when saved as a SAS file These cases include m Certain characters that are allowed in IBM SPSS Statistics variable names are not valid in SAS such as and These illegal characters are replaced with an underscore when the data are exported m SPSS Statistics variable names that contain multibyte characters for example Japanese or Chinese characters are converted to variables names of the general form Vnnn where nnn 1s an integer value m SPSS Statistics variable labels containing more than 40 characters are truncated when exported to a SAS v6 file m Where they exist SPSS Statistics variable labels are mapped to the SAS variable labels If no variable label exists in the SPSS Statistics data the variable name is mapped to the SAS variable label m SAS allows only one value for system missing whereas SPSS Statistics allows numerous user missing values in addition to system missing As a result all user missing values in SPSS Statistics are mapped to a single system missing value in the SAS file m SAS 6 8 data files are saved in the current SPSS Statistics locale encoding regardless of current mode Unicode or code page In Unicode mode SAS 9 files are saved in UTF 8 format In code page mode SAS 9 files are saved in the current locale encoding m A maximum of 32 767 variables can be saved to SAS 6 8 Save Val
331. ing table in the Select a table or view panel select the database table gt Drag and drop variables into the Variables to save column gt Optionally you can designate variables fields that define the primary key change field names and change the data type Figure 3 30 Export to Database Wizard selecting variables for a new table Export to Database Wizard E Select variables to store in new table gt B To save a variable in a field place it in the Yariable to Save column Use the arrow buttons or drag and drop Click on the new field name type or width to edit Check the box next to a field to designate it as a primary key Field SurveyResponses Table SurveySubset Bown Ty OwnTY Variable to save Q Field name Type width Bown ver Ownver D D counter Bown CD Player OwnCDPlayer 4 Wireless Wireless L Ah Own PDA OwnPDA 4 Voice O Voice Own Pc ownPc Multline C Mutine double own Fax OwnFax Pager O Pager double Brews News 4 Internet C Internet double Response Response 4 CalleriD Caller D double CallWYaiting O Call Waiting double El gt m Right click on a variable for more information User Missing Values Export as valid values O Export numeric user missing values as nulls and export string user missing values as blank spaces lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Help Primary key To designate variables as the primary key in
332. ing values if the tables contain different column labels 392 Chapter 21 Figure 21 10 Two tables with different column labels Table 1 e TE Tons Gender Salary Current Salary Female Mean 13 091 97 26 031 92 Median 12 375 00 24 300 00 Male Mean 20 301 40 41 441 78 Months Gender Education level since Hire Female Mean 12 37 80 38 Median 12 00 81 00 Male Mean 14 43 81 72 E temp sav DataSet5 Data Editor BAX Fie Edit View Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help 11 Command_ Means Beginning Educational Monthssince Levelyears Female Mean 26032 13092 0 Female Median 24300 12375 0 Male Mean 41442 20301 4 Male Median 32850 15750 0 Total Mean 34420 17016 1 Total Median 28875 15000 0 Female Mean Median Mean Median Mean Median m The first table has columns labeled Beginning Salary and Current Salary which are not present in the second table resulting in missing values for those variables for cases from the second table m Conversely the second table has columns labeled Education level and Months since Hire which are not present in the first table resulting in missing values for those variables for cases from the first table m Mismatched variables like the variables in this example can occur even with tables of the same subtype In this example both tables are the same subtype Example Data files not created from
333. ing values in other variables Templates A chart template allows you to apply the attributes of one chart to another When you open a chart in the Chart Editor you can save it as a template You can then apply that template by specifying it at creation or later by applying it in the Chart Editor Default Template This is the template specified by the Options You can access these by choosing Options from the Edit menu in the Data Editor and then clicking the Charts tab The default template is applied first which means that the other templates can override it Template Files Click Add to specify one or more templates with the standard file selection dialog box These are applied in the order in which they appear Therefore templates at the end of the list can override templates at the beginning of the list Chart Size and Panels Chart Size Specify a percentage greater than 100 to enlarge the chart or less than 100 to shrink it The percentage is relative to the default chart size Panels When there are many panel columns select Wrap Panels to allow panels to wrap across rows rather than being forced to fit in a specific row Unless this option is selected the panels are shrunk to force them to fit in a row Chapter Scoring data with predictive models The process of applying a predictive model to a set of data is referred to as scoring the data IBMO SPSS Statistics has procedures for building predictive models such as regr
334. ing with a period should be avoided since the period may be interpreted as a command terminator You can only create variables that end with a period in command syntax You cannot create variables that end with a period in dialog boxes that create new variables Variable names ending in underscores should be avoided since such names may conflict with names of variables automatically created by commands and procedures Reserved keywords cannot be used as variable names Reserved keywords are ALL AND BY EQ GE GT LE LT NE NOT OR TO and WITH Variable names can be defined with any mixture of uppercase and lowercase characters and case is preserved for display purposes When long variable names need to wrap onto multiple lines in output lines are broken at underscores periods and points where content changes from lower case to upper case Variable measurement level You can specify the level of measurement as scale numeric data on an interval or ratio scale ordinal or nominal Nominal and ordinal data can be either string alphanumeric or numeric Nominal A variable can be treated as nominal when its values represent categories with no intrinsic ranking for example the department of the company in which an employee works Examples of nominal variables include region zip code and religious affiliation Ordinal A variable can be treated as ordinal when its values represent categories with some intrinsic ranking for exam
335. inned categories gt Click From Another Variable Select the variable with the defined binned categories that you want to copy gt Click Copy If you have specified value labels for the variable from which you are copying the binning specifications those are also copied Note Once you click OK in the Visual Binning main dialog box to create new binned variables or close the dialog box in any other way you cannot use Visual Binning to copy those binned categories to other variables User Missing Values in Visual Binning Values defined as user missing values identified as codes for missing data for the source variable are not included in the binned categories for the new variable User missing values for the source variables are copied as user missing values for the new variable and any defined value labels for missing value codes are also copied 124 Chapter 7 If a missing value code conflicts with one of the binned category values for the new variable the missing value code for the new variable is recoded to a nonconflicting value by adding 100 to the highest binned category value For example if a value of 1 is defined as user missing for the source variable and the new variable will have six binned categories any cases with a value of 1 for the source variable will have a value of 106 for the new variable and 106 will be defined as user missing If the user missing value for the source variable had a defined
336. ion 2 would display at the top of the grid If you select Original data in the dropdown case 34 would display at the top of the grid Column position is also preserved when navigating between imputations so that it is easy to compare values between imputations 88 Chapter 5 Finding and replacing data and attribute values To find and or replace data values in Data View or attribute values in Variable View Click a cell in the column you want to search Finding and replacing values is restricted to a single column gt From the menus choose Edit gt Find or Edit gt Replace Data View m You cannot search up in Data View The search direction is always down m For dates and times the formatted values as displayed in Data View are searched For example a date displayed as 10 28 2007 will not be found by a search for a date of 10 28 2007 m For other numeric variables Contains Begins with and Ends with search formatted values For example with the Begins with option a search value of 123 for a Dollar format variable will find both 123 00 and 123 40 but not 1 234 With the Entire cell option the search value can be formatted or unformatted simple F numeric format but only exact numeric values to the precision displayed in the Data Editor are matched m The numeric system missing value is represented by a single period To find system missing values enter a single period as the search value and select
337. ion information Do not use the Secure Socket Layer unless instructed to do so by your administrator Server Name A server name can be an alphanumeric name that is assigned to a computer for example NetworkServer or a unique IP address that is assigned to a computer for example 202 123 456 78 Port Number The port number is the port that the server software uses for communications Description You can enter an optional description to display in the servers list Connect with Secure Socket Layer Secure Socket Layer SSL encrypts requests for distributed analysis when they are sent to the remote server Before you use SSL check with your administrator For this option to be enabled SSL must be configured on your desktop computer and the server To Select Switch or Add Servers gt From the menus choose File gt Switch Server To select a default server gt In the server list select the box next to the server that you want to use Enter the user ID domain name and password that were provided by your administrator Note You are automatically connected to the default server when you start a new session To switch to another server gt Select the server from the list 63 gt Distributed Analysis Mode Enter your user ID domain name and password if necessary Note When you switch servers during a session all open windows are closed You will be prompted to save changes before the windows
338. ion information is printed m Grid lines are printed if they are currently displayed in the selected view Value labels are printed in Data View if they are currently displayed Otherwise the actual data values are printed Use the View menu in the Data Editor window to display or hide grid lines and toggle between the display of data values and value labels To print Data Editor contents gt Make the Data Editor the active window Click the tab for the view that you want to print gt From the menus choose File gt Print Chapter Working with Multiple Data Sources Starting with version 14 0 multiple data sources can be open at the same time making it easier to m Switch back and forth between data sources Compare the contents of different data sources Copy and paste data between data sources Create multiple subsets of cases and or variables for analysis Merge multiple data sources from various data formats for example spreadsheet database text data without saving each data source first Basic Handling of Multiple Data Sources Figure 6 1 Two data sources open at same time DataSet1 demo sav Data Editor Se File Edit view Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help 11 age 55 age marital address income inccat car a 55 1 12 72 00 3 00 36 20 2 56 0 29 153 00 4 00 76 90 _ E DataSet2 survey_sample sav Data Editor Se ll Eile Edit View Data Transform
339. ion of the table To undo the most recent change gt From the menus choose Edit gt Undo To undo all changes gt From the menus choose Edit gt Restore Note Edit gt Restore is not available for legacy tables Working with layers You can display a separate two dimensional table for each category or combination of categories The table can be thought of as stacked in layers with only the top layer visible Creating and displaying layers To create layers gt Activate the pivot table gt If pivoting trays are not already on from the Pivot Table menu choose Pivot gt Pivoting Trays gt Drag an element from the row or column dimension into the layer dimension 229 Pivot tables Figure 11 3 Moving categories into layers Pivoting Trays y Internet i Gender COLUMN EJ Statistics E Owns PDA Moving elements to the layer dimension creates a multidimensional table but only a single two dimensional slice is displayed The visible table is the table for the top layer For example if a yes no categorical variable is in the layer dimension then the multidimensional table has two layers one for the yes category and one for the no category Figure 11 4 Categories in separate layers Internet Yes Female male Total Expected Count within Owns PDA Expected Count within Owns PDA Count Expected Count within Owns PDA Changing the displayed layer
340. irst and last case in each group Otherwise the original file order is used Automatically filter duplicate cases so that they won t be included in reports charts or calculations of statistics Figure 7 14 Identify Duplicate Cases dialog box E Identify Duplicate Cases Define matching cases by gender Household ID ID_house Ka amp Person ID ID_person Sort within matching groups by E S Interview date int_date Ascending Sort o Ascending Descending a Number of matching and sorting variables 3 rYariables to Create Iv Indicator of primary cases 1 unique or primary O duplicate Last case in each group is primar z ea gues Name PrimaryLast First case in each group is primary E Fitter by indicator values Sequential count of matching case in each Name MatchSequence group O nonmatching case F Move matching cases to the top of the file Display frequencies for created variables Ca etc Define matching cases by Cases are considered duplicates if their values match for al selected variables If you want to identify only cases that are a 100 match in all respects select all of the variables 116 Chapter 7 Sort within matching groups by Cases are automatically sorted by the variables that define matching cases You can select additional sorting variables that will determine the sequential order of cases in ea
341. is is primarily useful if you want to include two variables with the same name that contain different information in the two files Merging More Than Two Data Sources Using command syntax you can merge up to 50 datasets and or data files For more information see the MATCH FILES command in the Command Syntax Reference available from the Help menu Aggregate Data Aggregate Data aggregates groups of cases in the active dataset into single cases and creates a new aggregated file or creates new variables in the active dataset that contain aggregated data Cases are aggregated based on the value of zero or more break grouping variables If no break variables are specified then the entire dataset is a single break group m Ifyou create a new aggregated data file the new data file contains one case for each group defined by the break variables For example if there is one break variable with two values the new data file will contain only two cases If no break variable is specified the new data file will contain one case m Ifyou add aggregate variables to the active dataset the data file itself is not aggregated Each case with the same value s of the break variable s receives the same values for the new aggregate variables For example if gender is the only break variable all males would receive the same value for a new aggregate variable that represents average age If no break 174 Chapter 9 variable is specified all ca
342. ispsstdatajobsdelimit txt 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 1 2 3 2 2 570000 270000 3 2 1 3 2 2 402000 25300 3 3 1 1 2 257400 144000 1 4 1 3 1 2 262800 158400 1 5 1 3 2 2 1324 210000 3 This step provides information about variables A variable is similar to a field in a database For example each item in a questionnaire is a variable How are your variables arranged To read your data properly the Text Wizard needs to know how to determine where the data value for one variable ends and the data value for the next variable begins The arrangement of variables defines the method used to differentiate one variable from the next Delimited Spaces commas tabs or other characters are used to separate variables The variables are recorded in the same order for each case but not necessarily in the same column locations m Fixed width Each variable is recorded in the same column location on the same record line for each case in the data file No delimiter is required between variables In fact in many text data files generated by computer programs data values may appear to run together without even spaces separating them The column location determines which variable is being read Are variable names included at the top of your file If the first row of the data file contains descriptive labels for each variable you can use these labels as variable names Values that don t conform to variable naming rules are converted to va
343. ive matches Restrict the search criteria in pivot tables to matches of the entire cell contents Hidden Items and Pivot Table Layers Layers beneath the currently visible layer of a multidimensional pivot table are not considered hidden and will be included in the search area even when hidden items are not included in the search Hidden items include hidden items in the contents pane items with closed book icons in the outline pane or included within collapsed blocks of the outline pane and rows and columns in pivot tables either hidden by default for example empty rows and columns are hidden by default or manually hidden by editing the table and selectively hiding specific rows or columns Hidden items are only included in the search if you explicitly select Include hidden items In both cases the hidden or nonvisible element that contains the search text or value is displayed when it is found but the item is returned to its original state afterward 208 Chapter 10 Lightweight Tables Find and Replace will find the specified value in lightweight tables but will not replace it since lightweight tables cannot be edited Ifthe specified value is found in lightweight tables during the Replace operation an alert will warn you that the value was found but not replaced in lightweight non editable tables For more information on lightweight tables see Pivot table options Copying Output into Other Applications Output object
344. ivoting Trays The element labels are dispalyed in the pivoting trays Figure 21 6 Dimension element names displayed in table and pivoting trays Table without Dimension Element Labels Displayed a er E Current Salary Salary Median 24 300 00 12 375 00 Male Mean 41 441 78 20 301 40 Median 28 975 00 15 000 00 Table with Dimension Element Labels Displayed ender _ Statistics Sebel gol ets Female Mean 26 031 92 13 091 49 Median Mean Median E Pivoting Trays EJ Variables EJ Statistics 388 Chapter 21 Logging You can record OMS activity in a log in XML or text format m The log tracks all new OMS requests for the session but does not include OMS requests that were already active before you requested a log m The current log file ends if you specify a new log file or if you deselect uncheck Log OMS activity To specify OMS logging Click Logging in the Output Management System Control Panel Excluding output display from the viewer The Exclude from Viewer check box affects all output that is selected in the OMS request by suppressing the display of that output in the Viewer window This process is often useful for production jobs that generate a lot of output and when you don t need the results in the form of a Viewer document spv file You can also use this functionality to suppress the display of particular output objects th
345. k cells are treated as valid string values Variable names If you do not read variable names from the spreadsheet the column letters A B C are used for variable names for Excel and Lotus files For SYLK files and Excel files saved in R1C1 display format the software uses the column number preceded by the letter C for variable names C C2 C3 Reading dBASE Files Database files are logically very similar to IBM SPSS Statistics data files The following general rules apply to dBASE files m Field names are converted to valid variable names m Colons used in dBASE field names are translated to underscores m Records marked for deletion but not actually purged are included The software creates a new string variable D_R which contains an asterisk for cases marked for deletion 13 Data Files Reading Stata Files The following general rules apply to Stata data files m Variable names Stata variable names are converted to IBM SPSS Statistics variable names in case sensitive form Stata variable names that are identical except for case are converted to valid variable names by appending an underscore and a sequential letter _4 B C _Z AA AB and so forth Variable labels Stata variable labels are converted to SPSS Statistics variable labels Value labels Stata value labels are converted to SPSS Statistics value labels except for Stata value labels assigned to extended missing value
346. l menu item that allows you to select the format or it may automatically display a list of available formats Copying and Pasting Multiple Output Objects The following limitations apply when pasting multiple output objects into other applications m RTF format In most applications pivot tables are pasted as tables that can be edited in that application Charts trees and model views are pasted as images Metafile and image formats All the selected output objects are pasted as a single object in the other application m BIFF format Charts trees and model views are excluded You can also use Export Output to export multiple output objects to other applications formats 209 Working with Output Copy Special When copying and pasting large amounts of output particularly very large pivot tables you can improve the speed of the operation by using Edit gt Copy Special to limit the number of formats copied to the clipboard You can also save the selected formats as the default set of formats to copy to the clipboard This setting persists across sessions Export Output Export Output saves Viewer output in HTML text Word RTF Excel PowerPoint requires PowerPoint 97 or later and PDF formats Charts can also be exported in a number of different graphics formats Note Export to PowerPoint is available only on Windows operating systems and is not available in the Student Version To Export Output gt Make the V
347. l of the available model views For more information see the topic Model properties on p 252 Exporting a model By default when you export models from the output Viewer inclusion or exclusion of model views is controlled by the model properties for each model For more information about model properties see Model properties on p 252 On export you can override this setting and include all model views or only the currently visible model view In the Export Output dialog box click Change Options in the Document group For more information about exporting and this dialog box see Export Output on p 209 Note that all model views including tables are exported as graphics Also note that auxiliary views based on selections in the main view are never exported Saving fields used in the model to a new dataset You can save fields used in the model to a new dataset gt Activate the model in the Model Viewer For more information see the topic Interacting with a model on p 251 gt From the menus choose Generate gt Field Selection Model input and target 254 Chapter 12 Figure 12 1 Field selection based on fields in modell Field Selection New Dataset A new dataset will be created for the fields requested Dataset name myModelingFields Cox gost cancer nov Dataset name Specify a valid dataset name Datasets are available for subsequent use in the same session but are not saved as files unless
348. l restructure the variable group into a single variable width and create a single numeric index The new data are shown in the following table 193 File Handling and File Transformations Figure 9 26 New restructured data with one index subject 6 70 4 30 5 70 7 10 5 90 5 60 NO Rol no a om wj N wj N Index starts with 1 and increments for each variable in the group It restarts each time a new row is encountered in the original file We can now use index in procedures that require a grouping variable Example of Two Indices for Variables to Cases When a variable group records more than one factor you can create more than one index however the current data must be arranged so that the levels of the first factor are a primary index within which the levels of subsequent factors cycle In the current data there is one variable group width and two factors 4 and B The data are arranged so that levels of factor B cycle within levels of factor A Figure 9 27 Current data for two indices subject 6 70 We ll restructure the variable group into a single variable width and create two indices The new data are shown in the following table Figure 9 28 New restructured data with two indices subject index_a index_b width 5 50 6 40 5 80 5 90 7 40 7 10 5 60 6 70 nol po pol n ao N eji N e N
349. lable in the Student Version Detailed command syntax reference information is available in two forms integrated into the overall Help system and as a separate document in PDF form in the Command Syntax Reference also available from the Help menu IBM SPSS Statistics Options The following options are available as add on enhancements to the full not Student Version IBM SPSS Statistics Core system Statistics Base gives you a wide range of statistical procedures for basic analyses and reports including counts crosstabs and descriptive statistics OLAP Cubes and codebook reports It also provides a wide variety of dimension reduction classification and segmentation techniques such as factor analysis cluster analysis nearest neighbor analysis and discriminant function analysis Additionally SPSS Statistics Base offers a broad range of algorithms for comparing means and predictive techniques such as t test analysis of variance linear regression and ordinal regression Advanced Statistics focuses on techniques often used in sophisticated experimental and biomedical research It includes procedures for general linear models GLM linear mixed models variance components analysis loglinear analysis ordinal regression actuarial life tables Kaplan Meier survival analysis and basic and extended Cox regression Bootstrapping is a method for deriving robust estimates of standard errors and confidence intervals for estimates such as the mea
350. lds then the dataset must also contain fields that correspond to all the split fields in the model m By default any fields in the active dataset that have the same name and type as fields in the model are automatically matched m Use the drop down list to match dataset fields to model fields The data type for each field must be the same in both the model and the dataset in order to match fields m You cannot continue with the wizard or score the active dataset unless all predictors and split fields if present in the model are matched with fields in the active dataset Figure 15 2 Scoring Wizard Match Model Fields wy Scoring Wizard Model Name propensity_scores Model Type Binary Logistic Regression Match Model Fields to the Dataset Dataset Fields Model Fields Role Measure Type Predictor Nominal Numeric Predictor Nominal Numeric Predictor Nominal Numeric Predictor Nominal Numeric Predictor Nominal Numeric Predictor Continuous Numeric Predictor Continuous Numeric Missing Values 9 Use value substitution Use system missing Dataset Fields The drop down list contains the names of all the fields in the active dataset Fields that do not match the data type of the corresponding model field cannot be selected Model Fields The fields used in the model Role The displayed role can be one of the following m Predictor The field is used as a predictor i
351. le 143 Index date formats two digit years 316 date variables defining for time series data 160 dBASE files 10 12 39 reading 10 12 saving 39 default file locations 327 defining variables 69 71 73 74 76 77 96 applying a data dictionary 107 copying and pasting attributes 76 77 data types 71 missing values 74 templates 76 77 value labels 73 96 variable labels 73 deleting multiple EXECUTES in syntax files 278 deleting output 203 designated window 2 dialog boxes 5 301 302 312 controls 4 defining variable sets 301 displaying variable labels 3 312 displaying variable names 3 312 reordering target lists 304 selecting variables 5 using variable sets 302 variable display order 312 variable icons 5 variable information 5 variables 3 dictionary 38 difference function 162 disk space 58 59 temporary 58 59 display formats 73 display order 226 distributed mode 61 62 64 65 373 available procedures 65 data file access 64 relative paths 65 DOLLAR format 71 73 DOT format 71 73 duplicate cases records finding and filtering 114 editing data 83 84 ensemble viewer 255 automatic data preparation 263 component model accuracy 260 component model details 262 model summary 257 predictor frequency 259 predictor importance 258 entering data 82 83 non numeric 83 numeric 82 422 Index using value labels 83 environment variables 327 SPSSTMPDIR 327 EPS files 20
352. le For example if one file contains information on individual family members such as sex age education and the other file contains overall family information such as total income family size location you can use the file of family data as a table lookup file and apply the common family data to each individual family member in the merged data file 173 File Handling and File Transformations To Merge Files with the Same Cases but Different Variables gt Open at least one of the data files that you want to merge If you have multiple datasets open make one of the datasets that you want to merge the active dataset gt From the menus choose Data gt Merge Files gt Add Variables Select the dataset or external SPSS Statistics data file to merge with the active dataset To Select Key Variables Select the variables from the external file variables on the Excluded Variables list gt Select Match cases on key variables in sorted files gt Add the variables to the Key Variables list The key variables must exist in both the active dataset and the other dataset Both datasets must be sorted by ascending order of the key variables and the order of variables on the Key Variables list must be the same as their sort sequence Add Variables Rename You can rename variables from either the active dataset or the other dataset before moving them to the list of variables to be included in the merged data file Th
353. lect Cases Random Sample dialog box EN Select Cases Random Sample Sample Size of all cases O Exactly cases from the first cases Erice ones tea Approximately Generates a random sample of approximately the specified percentage of cases Since this routine makes an independent pseudo random decision for each case the percentage of cases selected can only approximate the specified percentage The more cases there are in the data file the closer the percentage of cases selected is to the specified percentage Exactly A user specified number of cases You must also specify the number of cases from which to generate the sample This second number should be less than or equal to the total number of cases in the data file Ifthe number exceeds the total number of cases in the data file the sample will contain proportionally fewer cases than the requested number Select Cases Range This dialog box selects cases based on a range of case numbers or a range of dates or times m Case ranges are based on row number as displayed in the Data Editor m Date and time ranges are available only for time series data with defined date variables Data menu Define Dates 182 Chapter 9 Figure 9 14 Select Cases Range dialog box for range of cases no defined date variables EN Select Cases Range First Case Last Case Observation centre conca nep _ Figure 9 15 Select Cases Range dial
354. led Extension Bundles You can also install extension bundles with a command line utility that allows you to install multiple bundles at once For more information see the topic Batch installation of extension bundles on p 308 Installing extension bundles in distributed mode If you work in distributed mode then you will need to install the extension bundle on the associated SPSS Statistics Server using the command line utility If the extension bundle contains a custom dialog then you must also install the extension bundle on your local machine from the menus as described above If you don t know whether the extension bundle contains a custom 307 Utilities dialog then it is best to install the extension bundle on your local machine in addition to the SPSS Statistics Server machine For information on using the command line utility see Batch installation of extension bundles on p 308 Installation locations for extension bundles For Windows and Linux and by default installing an extension bundle requires write permission to the IBM SPSS Statistics installation directory for Mac extension bundles are installed to a general user writable location If you do not have write permission to the required location or would like to store extension bundles elsewhere you can specify one or more alternate locations by defining the SPSS_EXTENSIONS PATH environment variable When present the paths specified in SPSS EXTENSIONS PA
355. legacy tableS oooooccccccococo eens 245 Data cell Widths 2 2 0 5 cd ai 246 Changing column width 0 00 00 c cette tetas 246 Displaying hidden borders in a pivottable 0 000 c cece eee eee 246 Selecting rows columns and cells ina pivottable 2 0 0 0 000 c cece eee eee 247 Printing pivottables 0 0 cieni anaa ea a a a t eens 248 Controlling table breaks for wide and long tables 000002 c ee eee eee 248 Creating a chart from a pivottable 00 0 0 c cette 249 Legacy tables 250 xii 12 Models 251 Interacting With a model 0 0 0 ttt 251 Working with the Model Viewer 2 000 c cece eet 251 Printing a Model seian ied sb eee a BS dae wai a Oe 253 Exporting amodel wcisceaetosdcdosteided and sa bea eh be 253 Saving fields used in the model to a new dataset 00 00 c eee eee eee 253 Saving predictors to a new dataset based on importance 00000 eee eee aee 254 Models for Ensembles 00000 c cece e teen eee 255 Model Summary ooo 257 Predictor IMportanCe 2 4 oss ce0 kaeti anade gese de wale yh eae wae ware dares 258 Predictor Frequency o ooooooc o 259 Component Model Accuracy 00 0c cect eee eens 260 Component Model Details 0 000 cect eae 262 Automatic Data Preparation 00 0 ccc eee eee 263 Split Model Viewer 2 0 0 0 00 cc cece tenet eee 263 13 Working with Comma
356. les This setting affects only the display in Data View Applying variable definition attributes to multiple variables After you have defined variable definition attributes for a variable you can copy one or more attributes and apply them to one or more variables Basic copy and paste operations are used to apply variable definition attributes You can m Copy a single attribute for example value labels and paste it to the same attribute cell s for one or more variables Copy all attributes from one variable and paste them to one or more other variables Create multiple new variables with all the attributes of a copied variable Applying variable definition attributes to other variables To Apply Individual Attributes from a Defined Variable gt In Variable View select the attribute cell that you want to apply to other variables gt From the menus choose Edit gt Copy Select the attribute cell s to which you want to apply the attribute You can select multiple target variables 77 Data Editor From the menus choose Edit gt Paste If you paste the attribute to blank rows new variables are created with default attributes for all attributes except the selected attribute To apply all attributes from a defined variable In Variable View select the row number for the variable with the attributes that you want to use The entire row is highlighted From the menus choose Edit gt Copy Select the r
357. level including custom variable attributes m Values can be sorted in ascending or descending order m You can save the original pre sorted variable order in a custom variable attribute m Sorting by values of custom variable attributes is limited to custom variable attributes that are currently visible in Variable View For more information on custom variable attributes see Custom Variable Attributes To Sort Variables In Variable View of the Data Editor gt Right click on the attribute column heading and from the context menu choose Sort Ascending or Sort Descending or 167 File Handling and File Transformations gt From the menus in Variable View or Data View choose Data gt Sort Variables Select the attribute you want to use to sort variables Select the sort order ascending or descending Figure 9 2 Sort Variables dialog Es Sort Variables Wariable View Columns Sort Order Ascending Descending Fi Save the current pre sorted variable order in a new attribute Atrioute nome 50 eo 4 eren Ce m The list of variable attributes matches the attribute column names displayed in Variable View of the Data Editor m You can save the original pre sorted variable order in a custom variable attribute For each variable the value of the attribute is an integer value indicating its position prior to sorting so by sorting variables based on the
358. lid variable names 30 Chapter 3 Text Wizard Step 3 Delimited Files Figure 3 15 Text Wizard Step 3 for delimited files EN Text Import Wizard Delimited Step 3 of 6 The first case of data begins on which line number How are your cases represented 9 Each line represents a case gt O A specific number of variables represents a case How many cases do you want to import All of the cases O The first cases A random percentage of the cases approximate y pData preview D 1 2 3 2 2 570000 270000 3 2 1 3 2 2 402000 25300 3 3 1 1 2 257400 144000 1 4 1 3 1 2 262800 158400 1 This step provides information about cases A case is similar to a record in a database For example each respondent to a questionnaire is a case The first case of data begins on which line number Indicates the first line of the data file that contains data values Ifthe top line s of the data file contain descriptive labels or other text that does not represent data values this will not be line 1 How are your cases represented Controls how the Text Wizard determines where each case ends and the next one begins m Each line represents a case Each line contains only one case It is fairly common for each case to be contained on a single line row even though this can be a very long line for data files with a large number of variables If not all lines contain the sam
359. line breaks m The value ThisValue specifies the run time value of the text box which is the file path specified manually or populated by the browse dialog This is the default m Ifthe Syntax property includes 3 ThisValue and the run time value of the text box is empty then the file browser control does not generate any command syntax File Type Filter Figure 19 4 File Filter dialog box File Filter IM All File Types 4 F Data File sav Complex Sample Plan csplan csaplan Other Name C cancel o The File Filter dialog box allows you to specify the file types displayed in the Files of type and Save as type drop down lists for open and save dialogs accessed from a File System Browser control By default all file types are allowed To specify file types not explicitly listed in the dialog box Select Other gt Enter a name for the file type gt Enter a file type using the form suffix for example xls You can specify multiple file types each separated by a semicolon Sub dialog Button The Sub dialog Button control specifies a button for launching a sub dialog and provides access to the Dialog Builder for the sub dialog The Sub dialog Button has the following properties Identifier The unique identifier for the control Title The text that is displayed in the button ToolTip Optional ToolTip text that appears when the user hovers over the control Sub dialog Cl
360. ll Formats tab Table Properties Text su lalala Table Title Alignment Bees Eis l Background Color i Color 255 255 255 coco2 885 abod 83 65 abed Alternate Row Color My 5 Ta mon at o m eooo eoa area foon fare Table Caption minner Margins in points a Text for footnote a hf il b Text for footnote b To change cell formats gt Select the Cell Formats tab v Select an Area from the drop down list or click an area of the sample v Select characteristics for the area Your selections are reflected in the sample gt Click OK or Apply Alternating row colors To apply a different background and or text color to alternate rows in the Data area of the table gt Select Data from the Area drop down list v Select check Alternate row color in the Background Color group v Select the colors to use for the alternate row background and text Alternate row colors affect only the Data area of the table They do not affect row or column label areas 239 Table properties borders Pivot tables For each border location in a table you can select a line style and a color If you select None as the style there will be no line at the selected location Figure 11 15 Table Properties dialog box Borders tab HE Table Properties Border Titlelayer separator Left inner frame Right inner frame Top inner frame B
361. log Name gt folder for Mac If you have specified alternate locations for installed dialogs using the SPSS_CDIALOGS_PATH environment variable then the copy should reside in the lt Dialog Name gt folder at the appropriate alternate location For more information see the topic Managing Custom Dialogs on p 351 Rename the copy to lt Help File gt _ lt language identifier gt using the language identifiers in the table below For example if the help file is myhelp htm and you want to create a German version of the file then the localized help file should be named myhelp_de htm Localized help files must be manually added to any custom dialog package files you create for the dialog A custom dialog package file is simply a ZIP file that can be opened and modified with an application such as WinZip on Windows 367 Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs If there are supplementary files such as image files that also need to be localized you will need to manually modify the appropriate paths in the main help file to point to the localized versions which should be stored along with the original versions When the dialog is launched SPSS Statistics will search for a help file whose language identifier matches the current language as specified by the Language drop down on the General tab in the Options dialog box If no such help file is found the help file specified for the dialog the file specified in the Help File property of Dialog Pro
362. ls it is the number of coefficients for neural networks it is the number of Synapses Records The weighted number of input records in the training sample Chapter 13 Working with Command Syntax The powerful command language allows you to save and automate many common tasks It also provides some functionality not found in the menus and dialog boxes Most commands are accessible from the menus and dialog boxes However some commands and options are available only by using the command language The command language also allows you to save your jobs in a syntax file so that you can repeat your analysis at a later date or run it in an automated job with the a production job A syntax file is simply a text file that contains commands While it is possible to open a syntax window and type in commands it is often easier if you let the software help you build your syntax file using one of the following methods m Pasting command syntax from dialog boxes m Copying syntax from the output log m Copying syntax from the journal file Detailed command syntax reference information is available in two forms integrated into the overall Help system and as a separate PDF file called the Command Syntax Reference also available from the Help menu Context sensitive Help for the current command in a syntax window is available by pressing the F1 key Syntax Rules When you run commands from a command syntax window during a session you are r
363. lt cell text 474 number 474 gt lt category gt lt category text Percent gt lt cell text 100 0 number 100 decimals 1 gt lt category gt lt category text Valid Percent gt lt cell text 100 0 number 100 decimals 1 gt lt category gt lt dimension gt lt category gt lt group gt lt dimension gt lt pivotTable gt lt command gt lt outputTree gt As you may notice a simple small table produces a substantial amount of XML That s partly because the XML contains some information that is not readily apparent in the original table some information that might not even be available in the original table and a certain amount of redundancy m The table contents as they are or would be displayed in a pivot table in the Viewer are contained in text attributes An example is as follows lt command text Frequencies command Frequencies gt m Text attributes can be affected by both output language and settings that affect the display of variable names labels and values value labels In this example the text attribute value will differ depending on the output language whereas the command attribute value remains the same regardless of output language Wherever variables or values of variables are used in row or column labels the XML will contain a text attribute and one or more additional attribute values An example is as follows lt dimension axis row text Gender label
364. lti line content use n to specify line breaks Item Group The Item Group control is a container for other controls allowing you to group and control the syntax generated from multiple controls For example you have a set of check boxes that specify optional settings for a subcommand but only want to generate the syntax for the subcommand if at least one box is checked This is accomplished by using an Item Group control as a container for the check box controls The following types of controls can be contained in an Item Group check box combo box text control number control static text radio group and file browser The Item Group control has the following properties Identifier The unique identifier for the control This is the identifier to use when referencing the control in the syntax template Title An optional title for the group For multi line titles use n to specify line breaks Required for execution True specifies that the OK and Paste buttons will be disabled until at least one control in the group has a value The default is False For example the group consists of a set of check boxes If Required for execution is set to True and all of the boxes are unchecked then OK and Paste will be disabled 360 Chapter 19 Syntax Specifies command syntax that is generated by this control at run time and can be inserted in the syntax template m You can specify any valid command syntax and you can use n for line b
365. lude both table types in the same data file in a meaningful fashion you need to change the column dimension for one of the table types Because both table types use the element name Statistics for the statistics dimension we can put the statistics from the Frequencies statistics table in the columns simply by specifying Statistics in quotation marks in the list of dimension names in the OMS Options dialog box 394 Chapter 21 Figure 21 12 OMS Options dialog box fam SPS Dab Fe Graphics Images Aa Include images Format JPG X Size 100 o Include imagemaps r Table Pivots O None All dimensions in a single row O List of positions List O List of dimension names Figure 21 13 Combining different table types in a data file by pivoting dimension elements Default Frequencies Statistics Table Valid Missing 474 0 47 MRNA 474 0 34 419 57 Beginning Salary 79 980 135 000 Months since Hire Previous Experience File Edit View Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons 1 Command _ Frequencies 17016 9 000 79 980 2 Current Salary 474 34420 15 750 135 000 TE 3 Months since Hire 81 11 63 98 474 95 86 0 476 o 395 Output Management System Some of the variables will have missing values because the table structures still
366. lue must be the same data type numeric or string as the variable s being recoded m System missing Values assigned by the program when values in your data are undefined according to the format type you have specified when a numeric field is blank or when a value resulting from a transformation command is undefined Numeric system missing values are displayed as periods String variables cannot have system missing values since any character is legal in a string variable m System or user missing Observations with values that either have been defined as user missing values or are unknown and have been assigned the system missing value which is indicated with a period 135 Data Transformations m Range Inclusive range of values Not available for string variables Any user missing values within the range are included All other values Any remaining values not included in one of the specifications on the Old New list This appears as ELSE on the Old New list New Value The single value into which each old value or range of values is recoded You can enter a value or assign the system missing value m Value Value into which one or more old values will be recoded The value must be the same data type numeric or string as the old value m System missing Recodes specified old values into the system missing value The system missing value is not used in calculations and cases with the system missing value are excluded f
367. lues and you can specify multiple delimiters 28 Chapter 3 To Read Text Data Files gt From the menus choose File gt Read Text Data Select the text file in the Open Data dialog box Follow the steps in the Text Wizard to define how to read the data file Text Wizard Step 1 Figure 3 13 Text Wizard Step 1 628 840 1 81 28 5 Welcome to the text import wizard 630 2400 0 73 40 33 This wizard will help you read data from your text file and specify information about the variables Does your text file match a predefined format Owe O No ID Job_category Region Division Travel Current_sales Previo 1 2 3 2 2 570000 270000 3 2 1 3 2 2 402000 25300 3 3 1 1 2 257400 144000 1 4 1 3 1 2 262800 158400 1 5 1 3 2 2 1324 210000 3 6 1 3 2 2 321000 135000 2 7 1 3 2 2 360000 187500 3 eS The text file is displayed in a preview window You can apply a predefined format previously saved from the Text Wizard or follow the steps in the Text Wizard to specify how the data should be read 29 Data Files Text Wizard Step 2 Figure 3 14 Text Wizard Step 2 EN Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 6 How are your variables arranged Delimited Variables are delimited by a specific character i e comma tab Fixed width Variables are aligned in fixed width columns r re variable names included at the top of your file O Yes No Text file Zpubs
368. ly the subtypes available for at least one of the selected procedures Output Types Command Identifiers Table Subtypes for Selected Commands Output Destinations Conjoint Analysis Case Processing Summary None Constrained Non E Chi Square Tests O File C idataresults x Browse Based on object names Correspondence Cox Regression Descriptive Statistics E Bro Directional Measures Create Mantel Haenszel Common Odds Ratid New dataset Crosstabs E Exclude from Viewer You can use the control panel to start and stop the routing of output to various destinations m Each OMS request remains active until explicitly ended or until the end of the session m A destination file that is specified on an OMS request is unavailable to other procedures and other applications until the OMS request is ended Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 377 378 Chapter 21 m While an OMS request is active the specified destination files are stored in memory RAM so active OMS requests that write a large amount of output to external files may consume a large amount of memory Multiple OMS requests are independent of each other The same output can be routed to different locations in different formats based on the specifications in different OMS requests m The order of the output objects in any particular destination is the order in which they were created which is determined by the order and operation
369. m the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non IBM products Questions on the capabilities of non IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations To illustrate them as completely as possible the examples include the names of individuals companies brands and products All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental If you are viewing this information softcopy the photographs and color illustrations may not appear Trademarks IBM the IBM logo ibm com and SPSS are trademarks of IBM Corporation registered in many jurisdictions worldwide A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at http www ibm com legal copytrade shtml Adobe the Adobe logo PostScript and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Intel Intel logo Intel Inside Intel Inside logo Intel Centrino Intel Centrino logo Celeron Intel Xeon Intel SpeedStep Itanium and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States other countrie
370. m this file will appear first in the new merged data file From the menus choose Data gt Merge Files gt Add Cases 170 Chapter 9 Select the dataset or external SPSS Statistics data file to merge with the active dataset gt Remove any variables that you do not want from the Variables in New Active Dataset list gt Add any variable pairs from the Unpaired Variables list that represent the same information recorded under different variable names in the two files For example date of birth might have the variable name brthdate in one file and datebrth in the other file To Select a Pair of Unpaired Variables Click one of the variables on the Unpaired Variables list gt Ctrl click the other variable on the list Press the Ctrl key and click the left mouse button at the same time Click Pair to move the variable pair to the Variables in New Active Dataset list The variable name from the active dataset is used as the variable name in the merged file Figure 9 5 Selecting pairs of variables with Ctrl click E Add Cases From region2 sav DataSet2 Unpaired Variables Variables in New Active Dataset Unpaired Variables owenrent sex sex lt Active regior F Indicate case source as variable wurceD1 Active dataset region2 sav DataSet2 Lor J easte eset cence He 171 File Handling and File Transformations Add Cases Rename You can re
371. me gender variable true gt lt group text Valid gt lt group hide true text Dummy gt lt category text Female label Female string f varName gender gt lt dimension axis column text Statistics gt lt category text Frequency gt lt cell text 216 number 216 gt lt category gt lt category text Percent gt lt cell text 45 6 number 45 569620253165 decimals 1 gt lt category gt lt category text Valid Percent gt lt cell text 45 6 number 45 569620253165 decimals 1 gt lt category gt lt category text Cumulative Percent gt lt cell text 45 6 number 45 569620253165 decimals 1 gt lt category gt lt dimension gt lt category gt lt category text Male label Male string m varName gender gt lt dimension axis column text Statistics gt lt category text Frequency gt lt cell text 258 number 258 gt lt category gt lt category text Percent gt lt cell text 54 4 number 54 430379746835 decimals 1 gt lt category gt lt category text Valid Percent gt lt cell text 54 4 number 54 430379746835 decimals 1 gt lt category gt lt category text Cumulative Percent gt lt cell text 100 0 number 100 decimals 1 gt lt category gt lt dimension gt lt category gt lt group gt lt category text Total gt 398 Chapter 21 lt dimension axis column text Statistics gt lt category text Frequency gt
372. me Variables dialog box Es Recode into Same Variables Numeric Variables S Employee Code id Current Salary salary Gender gender Date of Birth bdate dll Educational Level yea di Employment Category 8 Beginning Salary salb 8 Months since Hire jobti ola ana New Values 8 Previous Experience dl Minority Classification To Recode Values of a Variable gt From the menus choose Transform gt Recode into Same Variables Select the variables you want to recode If you select multiple variables they must be the same type numeric or string gt Click Old and New Values and specify how to recode values Optionally you can define a subset of cases to recode The If Cases dialog box for doing this is the same as the one described for Count Occurrences Recode into Same Variables Old and New Values You can define values to recode in this dialog box All value specifications must be the same data type numeric or string as the variables selected in the main dialog box Old Value The value s to be recoded You can recode single values ranges of values and missing values System missing values and ranges cannot be selected for string variables because neither concept applies to string variables Ranges include their endpoints and any user missing values that fall within the range m Value Individual old value to be recoded into a new value The va
373. med field name is X_transformed The original field is excluded from the analysis and the transformed field is included instead This view shows information about which fields were excluded and how transformed fields were derived in the automatic data preparation ADP step For each field that was transformed or excluded the table lists the field name its role in the analysis and the action taken by the ADP step Fields are sorted by ascending alphabetical order of field names The action Trim outliers if shown indicates that values of continuous predictors that lie beyond a cutoff value 3 standard deviations from the mean have been set to the cutoff value Split Model Viewer The Split Model Viewer lists the models for each split and provides summaries about the split models 264 Chapter 12 Figure 12 12 Split model viewer Split Groups a Accuracy Model Size Synapses Records Did not complete high school 68 3 High school degree Some college College degree Post undergraduate degree Models could not be built for one or more split groups Split The column heading shows the field s used to create splits and the cells are the split values Double click on any split to open a Model Viewer for the model built for that split Accuracy Overall accuracy formatted as a percentage Model Size Model size depends on the modeling method for trees it is the number of nodes in the tree for linear mode
374. mes Varl and Var2 These variables are both string variables m The column labels from the table are used to create valid variable names In this case those variable names are based on the variable labels of the three scale variables that are summarized in the table If the variables didn t have defined variable labels or you chose to display variable names instead of variable labels as the column labels in the table the variable names in the new data file would be the same as in the source data file 390 Chapter 21 Example Tables with layers In addition to rows and columns a table can also contain a third dimension the layer dimension Figure 21 8 Table with layers Minority Classification Yes Female Male 40 47 Employment Clerical Category Custo Manac Layer 1 Layer Minority Classification No AS Female Mae Employment Clerical Category Custodial Manager E temp sav DataSet2 Data Editor BAX File Edit view Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help 1 Command_ CTables Visible vard Var2 Var3 Var4 Female Male Employment Category Clerical Minority Classification 2 Employment Category Clerical Minority Classification Employment Category Custodial Minority Classification Employment Category Custodial Minority Classification 5 Employment Category Manager Minority Classification l Employment Category Manager Minority Cla
375. metimes referred to as date format variables Both two and four digit year specifications are recognized By default two digit years represent a range beginning 69 years prior to the current date and ending 30 years after the current date This range is determined by your Options settings and is configurable from the Edit menu choose Options and click the Data tab m Dashes periods commas slashes or blanks can be used as delimiters in day month year formats Months can be represented in digits Roman numerals or three character abbreviations and they can be fully spelled out Three letter abbreviations and fully spelled out month names must be in English month names in other languages are not recognized Duration variables Duration variables have a format representing a time duration such as hh mm They are stored internally as seconds without reference to a particular date m In time specifications applies to date time and duration variables colons can be used as delimiters between hours minutes and seconds Hours and minutes are required but seconds are optional A period is required to separate seconds from fractional seconds Hours can be of unlimited magnitude but the maximum value for minutes is 59 and for seconds is 59 999 Current date and time The system variable TIME holds the current date and time It represents the number of seconds from October 14 1582 to the date and time when the transformation comman
376. multiple tables If any tables do not have the same number of row elements as the other tables no data file will be created The number of rows doesn t have to be the same the number of row elements that become variables in the data file must be the same For example a two variable crosstabulation and a three variable crosstabulation contain different numbers of row elements because the layer variable is actually nested within the row variable in the default three variable crosstabulation display 393 Output Management System Figure 21 11 Tables with different numbers of row elements Employment Category Gender Crosstabulation Employment Clerical Category Custodial Manager Total Female Employment Clerical 166 Category Custodial 0 Manager 10 Minority Classification No Total Employment Clerical Category Custodial Manager Total Controlling column elements to control variables in the data file In the Options dialog box of the Output Management System Control Panel you can specify which dimension elements should be in the columns and therefore will be used to create variables in the generated data file This process is equivalent to pivoting the table in the Viewer For example the Frequencies procedure produces a descriptive statistics table with statistics in the rows while the Descriptives procedure produces a descriptive statistics table with statistics in the columns To inc
377. n median proportion odds ratio correlation coefficient or regression coefficient Categories performs optimal scaling procedures including correspondence analysis Complex Samples allows survey market health and public opinion researchers as well as social scientists who use sample survey methodology to incorporate their complex sample designs into data analysis Conjoint provides a realistic way to measure how individual product attributes affect consumer and citizen preferences With Conjoint you can easily measure the trade off effect of each product attribute in the context of a set of product attributes as consumers do when making purchasing decisions Custom Tables creates a variety of presentation quality tabular reports including complex stub and banner tables and displays of multiple response data Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 iii Data Preparation provides a quick visual snapshot of your data It provides the ability to apply validation rules that identify invalid data values You can create rules that flag out of range values missing values or blank values You can also save variables that record individual rule violations and the total number of rule violations per case A limited set of predefined rules that you can copy or modify is provided Decision Trees creates a tree based classification model It classifies cases into groups or predicts values of a dependent target variable based on values of in
378. n 86 400 are converted to the system missing value Inserting new cases Entering data in a cell in a blank row automatically creates a new case The Data Editor inserts the system missing value for all other variables for that case If there are any blank rows between the new case and the existing cases the blank rows become new cases with the system missing value for all variables You can also insert new cases between existing cases To insert new cases between existing cases gt In Data View select any cell in the case row below the position where you want to insert the new case gt From the menus choose Edit gt Insert Cases A new row is inserted for the case and all variables receive the system missing value Inserting new variables Entering data in an empty column in Data View or in an empty row in Variable View automatically creates a new variable with a default variable name the prefix var and a sequential number and a default data format type numeric The Data Editor inserts the system missing value for all cases for the new variable If there are any empty columns in Data View or empty rows in Variable View between the new variable and the existing variables these rows or columns also become new variables with the system missing value for all cases You can also insert new variables between existing variables To insert new variables between existing variables Select any cell in the variable to the right of
379. n Printed Items gt Make the Viewer the active window click anywhere in the window 224 Chapter 10 gt From the menus choose File gt Page Attributes gt Click the Options tab Change the settings and click OK Saving Output The contents of the Viewer can be saved to a Viewer document The saved document includes both panes of the Viewer window the outline and the contents To Save a Viewer Document gt From the Viewer window menus choose File gt Save gt Enter the name of the document and then click Save Optionally you can lock files to prevent editing in IBM SPSS Smartreader a separate product for working with Viewer documents Ifa Viewer document is locked you can manipulate pivot tables swap rows and columns change the displayed layer etc but you cannot edit any output or save any changes to the Viewer document in SPSS Smartreader This setting has no effect on Viewer documents opened in IBM SPSSO Statistics To save results in external formats for example HTML or text use Export on the File menu Chapter Pivot tables Many results are presented in tables that can be pivoted interactively That is you can rearrange the rows columns and layers Note If you require tables that are compatible with IBM SPSSO Statistics releases prior to 20 then it is recommended to render them as legacy tables For more information see the topic Legacy tables on p 250 Manipula
380. n Variable In Out In Out 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 OXML table structure Row Variable Yes No Total Output XML OXML is XML that conforms to the spss output schema For a detailed description of the schema see the Output Schema section of the Help system 396 Chapter 21 OMS command and subtype identifiers are used as values of the command and subType attributes in OXML An example is as follows lt command text Frequencies command Frequencies gt lt pivotTable text Gender label Gender subType Frequencies gt m OMS command and subType attribute values are not affected by output language or display settings for variable names labels or values value labels m XML is case sensitive A subType attribute value of frequencies is not the same as a subType attribute value of Frequencies m All information that is displayed in a table is contained in attribute values in OXML At the individual cell level OXML consists of empty elements that contain attributes but no content other than the content that is contained in attribute values m Table structure in OXML is represented row by row elements that represent columns are nested within the rows and individual cells are nested within the column elements lt pivotTable gt lt dimension axis row gt lt dimension axis column gt lt category gt lt cell text number decimals gt
381. n also generate command syntax by pasting dialog box selections into a syntax window For more information see the topic Working with Command Syntax in Chapter 13 on p 265 If you include multiple command syntax files the files are concatenated together in the order they appear in the list and run as a single job Syntax format Controls the form of the syntax rules used for the job m Interactive Each command must end with a period Periods can appear anywhere within the command and commands can continue on multiple lines but a period as the last nonblank character on a line is interpreted as the end of the command Continuation lines and new commands can start anywhere on a new line These are the interactive rules in effect when you select and run commands in a syntax window m Batch Each command must start at the beginning of a new line no blank spaces before the start of the command and continuation lines must be indented at least one space If you want to indent new commands you can use a plus sign dash or period as the first character at the start of the line and then indent the actual command The period at the end of the command is optional This setting is compatible with the syntax rules for command files included with the INCLUDE command Note Do not use the Batch option if your syntax files contain GGRAPH command syntax that includes GPL statements GPL statements will only run under interactive rules Error Pr
382. n be read by other versions of SPSS Statistics and versions on other operating systems Variable names are limited to eight bytes and are automatically converted to unique eight byte names if necessary In most cases saving data in portable format is no longer necessary since SPSS Statistics data files should be platform operating system independent You cannot save data files in portable file in Unicode mode For more information see the topic General options in Chapter 17 on p 312 Tab delimited dat Text files with values separated by tabs Vote Tab characters embedded in string values are preserved as tab characters in the tab delimited file No distinction is made between tab characters embedded in values and tab characters that separate values Comma delimited csv Text files with values separated by commas or semicolons If the current SPSS Statistics decimal indicator is a period values are separated by commas If the current decimal indicator is a comma values are separated by semicolons Fixed ASCII dat Text file in fixed format using the default write formats for all variables There are no tabs or spaces between variable fields Excel 2007 xIsx Microsoft Excel 2007 XLS X format workbook The maximum number of variables is 16 000 any additional variables beyond the first 16 000 are dropped If the dataset contains more than one million cases multiple sheets are created in the workbook Excel 97 through 2003
383. n functions including arithmetic functions statistical functions distribution functions and string functions Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 125 126 Chapter 8 Figure 8 1 Compute Variable dialog box E Compute Variable E Target Variable Numeric Expression sunt amp Age in years age Call waiting callwait Caller ID callid Gender gender my Household income i E Household income i al Income category in Internet internet Job satisfaction job jobstart 8E Level of education Marital status marital L Multiple lines muttline SUM numexpr numexpr Numeric Returns the sum of its arguments that have valid nonmissing values This function requires two or more arguments which must be numeric You can specify a minimum number of Owns computer o valid arguments for this function to be evaluated E Owns fax machine Qiens PNA faxwnndal E cl Function group All Arithmetic CDF amp Noncentral CDF Conversion Current Date Time Date Arithmetic 8 Newspaper subscri Number of people in if contionat case selection condition To Compute Variables gt From the menus choose Transform gt Compute Variable Type the name of a single target variable It can be an existing variable or a new variable to be added to the active dataset gt To build an expression either paste components into the Expression
384. n selectively show and hide individual tables or results from an entire procedure This process is useful when you want to shorten the amount of visible output in the contents pane To Hide Tables and Charts gt Double click the item s book icon in the outline pane of the Viewer or gt Click the item to select it gt From the menus choose View gt Hide or gt Click the closed book Hide icon on the Outlining toolbar The open book Show icon becomes the active icon indicating that the item is now hidden To Hide Procedure Results Click the box to the left of the procedure name in the outline pane This hides all results from the procedure and collapses the outline view Moving Deleting and Copying Output You can rearrange the results by copying moving or deleting an item or a group of items To Move Output in the Viewer Select the items in the outline or contents pane gt Drag and drop the selected items into a different location To Delete Output in the Viewer Select the items in the outline or contents pane gt Press the Delete key or gt From the menus choose Edit gt Delete 204 Chapter 10 Changing Initial Alignment By default all results are initially left aligned To change the initial alignment of new output items gt From the menus choose Edit gt Options gt Click the Viewer tab gt Inthe Initial Output State group select the item type for
385. n the model That is values of the predictors are used to predict values of the target outcome of interest 294 Chapter 15 m Split The values of the split fields are used to define subgroups which are each scored separately There is a separate subgroup for each unique combination of split field values Note splits are only available for some models m Record ID Record case identifier Measure Measurement level for the field as defined in the model For models in which measurement level can affect the scores the measurement level as defined in the model is used not the measurement level as defined in the active dataset For more information on measurement level see Variable measurement level Type Data type as defined in the model The data type in the active dataset must match the data type in the model Data type can be one of the following m String Fields with a data type of string in the active dataset match the data type of string in the model m Numeric Numeric fields with display formats other than date or time formats in the active dataset match the numeric data type in the model This includes F numeric Dollar Dot Comma E scientific notation and custom currency formats Fields with Wkday day of week and Month month of year formats are also considered numeric not dates For some model types date and time fields in the active dataset are also considered a match for the numeric data type in t
386. n to specify line breaks Checkbox Title An optional label that is displayed with the controlling check box Supports n to specify line breaks ToolTip Optional ToolTip text that appears when the user hovers over the control Mnemonic Key An optional character in the title to use as a keyboard shortcut to the control The character appears underlined in the title The shortcut is activated by pressing Alt mnemonic key The Mnemonic Key property is not supported on Mac Default Value The default state of the controlling check box checked or unchecked Checked Unchecked Syntax Specifies the command syntax that is generated when the control is checked and when it is unchecked To include the command syntax in the syntax template use the value of the Identifier property The generated syntax whether from the Checked Syntax or Unchecked Syntax property will be inserted at the specified position s of the identifier For example if the identifier is checkboxgroup then at run time instances of checkboxgroup1 in the syntax template will be replaced by the value of the Checked Syntax property when the box is checked and the Unchecked Syntax property when the box is unchecked m You can specify any valid command syntax and you can use n for line breaks 362 Chapter 19 m You can include identifiers for any controls contained in the check box group At run time the identifiers are replaced with the syntax generated by the con
387. na aeaa 371 Runtime valtas cacon eE engin ter aha ea a aeaa a dt aA AO eT aA od AS 372 RUMODIONS cioc6n Far i aaeei a dde ao ii 372 Server logih assine anei naa at a a li A a AA Sah dida be 373 Adding and Editing Server Login Settings 00 0 0 cece eee eee 373 US r Prompts lt a ia ie SRR ear rea Ales dete an 373 Background job status 0 0 0 oo 373 Running production jobs from a command line 0c e ee eee eee 374 Converting Production Facility files 0 0 20 0 0 00 cece cette eee 375 21 Output Management System 377 Output object types 2 0 tent t ete 379 Command identifiers and table subtypes 0 00 0 0c c cece eee eee 381 Label tc dai ia a ais 382 OMS Options etico daa A baie Pw ae E mek ae 383 Logging areont A AA 388 Excluding output display from the viewer 000 cece eee eee eee eee 388 xvi Routing output to IBM SPSS Statistics data files 0 0 0 0 0000 cece eee 388 Example Single two dimensional table 0 00000 cece eens 389 Example Tables with layers 0 0 00 cece cece eee eee ae 390 Data files created from multiple tables 0 0 000 ce cece eee eee 390 Controlling column elements to control variables in the data file 393 Variable names in OMS generated data fileS ooooooocococcococo o 395 OXML table structure 2 2 oo 395 OMS TIENES semira eaaa A ida 399 Copying OMS identifiers from t
388. name variables from either the active dataset or the other dataset before moving them from the unpaired list to the list of variables to be included in the merged data file Renaming variables enables you to m Use the variable name from the other dataset rather than the name from the active dataset for variable pairs m Include two variables with the same name but of unmatched types or different string widths For example to include both the numeric variable sex from the active dataset and the string variable sex from the other dataset one of them must be renamed first Add Cases Dictionary Information Any existing dictionary information variable and value labels user missing values display formats in the active dataset is applied to the merged data file m fany dictionary information for a variable is undefined in the active dataset dictionary information from the other dataset is used m Ifthe active dataset contains any defined value labels or user missing values for a variable any additional value labels or user missing values for that variable in the other dataset are ignored Merging More Than Two Data Sources Using command syntax you can merge up to 50 datasets and or data files For more information see the ADD FILES command in the Command Syntax Reference available from the Help menu Add Variables Add Variables merges the active dataset with another open dataset or external IBM SPSS Statistics data file
389. nd folders that are designated as shared When you use distributed analysis mode this situation includes data and syntax files on your local computer 66 Chapter 4 UNIX Absolute Path Specifications For UNIX server versions there is no equivalent to the UNC path and all directory paths must be absolute paths that start at the root of the server relative paths are not allowed For example if the data file is located in bin data and the current directory is also bin data GET FILE sales sav is not valid you must specify the entire path as in GET FILE bin sales sav INSERT FILE bin salesjob sps Chapter Data Editor The Data Editor provides a convenient spreadsheet like method for creating and editing data files The Data Editor window opens automatically when you start a session The Data Editor provides two views of your data Data View This view displays the actual data values or defined value labels m Variable View This view displays variable definition information including defined variable and value labels data type for example string date or numeric measurement level nominal ordinal or scale and user defined missing values In both views you can add change and delete information that is contained in the data file Data View Figure 5 1 Data View demo sav Data Editor Sve File Edit View Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help
390. nd Syntax 265 Syntax Rules naci enda tenet tenet eens 265 Pasting Syntax from Dialog Boxes 00 0 ett eee 266 To Paste Syntax from Dialog Boxes 0000 e cece eee eee 267 Copying Syntax from the OutputLOY ooocococcccocco eee 267 To Copy Syntax from the Output Log s 1 0 cece eee ee 268 Using the Syntax Editor 2 2 2 tte teeta 269 Syntax Editor Window 2 2 2 tte 269 TERMINGIOGY 2 034 4 eet ood sew ds bbe bs aaron 271 Auto Completion 00 0 cece ent e teen tenes 272 Color Goding wis sen Seale Bice atk tee et eon te bod bakin gd teed ve bade ge ws ad 272 Breakpoints cocoa date Seiad a a weds eR bine eae ae ee ae eee ees 273 A SA cs SoA dee aa aua etek da d oe Me ee Rahs WE a See oa oO heels 274 Commenting or Uncommenting Text 0 000 ccc eee eens 275 Formatting SYNTAX sss ii bas eda ns a a BA dad oe ic ea dae baw oak be 276 Running Command Syntax seassa 00 tte teens 211 Unicode Syntax Files 2 2 0 ect ete A E a E GEN Ea 278 Multiple Execute Commands 00 0c eect tte tee 278 xiii 14 Overview of the chart facility 280 Building and editing a chart 1 02 2 0 0 cece cette ttt eens 280 Building Charts 2 2 2 0 ccc teens 280 Editing Charts cvs buin raed Gora Bah a Gave i a ee a Fae ees 284 Chart definition options 00 0 0 cette nee eee 287 Adding and Editing Titles and Footnotes 00 00 c cece eee eee 287 Setting General Option
391. nd syntax can be run from the SPSS Statistics client or from the SPSS Statistics Batch Facility a separate executable provided with SPSS Statistics Server Python Program Run from an External Python Process You can run a Python program from any external Python process such as a Python IDE or the Python interpreter In this mode the Python program starts up a new instance of the SPSS Statistics processor without an associated instance of the SPSS Statistics client You can use this mode to debug your Python programs using the Python IDE of your choice Invoking Python Scripts from Python Programs and Vice Versa Python Script Run from Python Program You can run a Python script from a Python program by importing the Python module containing the script and calling the function in the module that implements the script You can also call Python script methods directly from within a Python program These features are not available when running a Python program from an external Python process or when running a Python program from the SPSS Statistics Batch Facility available with SPSS Statistics Server Python Autoscript Triggered from Python Program A Python script specified as an autoscript will be triggered when a Python program executes the procedure containing the output item associated with the autoscript For example you associate an autoscript with the Descriptive Statistics table generated by the Descriptives procedure You then run a Py
392. nected to the remote server You can disconnect and retrieve the results later Note Running a production job on a remote server requires access to a server running SPSS Statistics Server Creating and running production jobs To create and run a production job From the menus in any window choose Utilities gt Production Job Click New to create a new production job or Select a production job to run or modify from the list Click Browse to change the directory location for the files that will appear in the list Note Production Facility job files spp created in releases prior to 16 0 will not run in release 16 0 or later A conversion utility is available to convert Windows and Macintosh Production Facility job files to production jobs spj For more information see the topic Converting Production Facility files on p 375 Specify one or more command syntax files to include in the job Click the button with the plus sign icon to select command syntax files Select the output file name location and format Click Run to run the production job interactively or in the background on a server Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 368 369 Production jobs Syntax files Output Production jobs use command syntax files to tell IBM SPSS Statistics what to do A command syntax file is a simple text file containing command syntax You can use the syntax editor or any text editor to create the file You ca
393. ng To select the random number generator and or set the initialization value gt From the menus choose Transform gt Random Number Generators 130 Chapter 8 Count Occurrences of Values within Cases This dialog box creates a variable that counts the occurrences of the same value s in a list of variables for each case For example a survey might contain a list of magazines with yes no check boxes to indicate which magazines each respondent reads You could count the number of yes responses for each respondent to create a new variable that contains the total number of magazines read Figure 8 5 Count Occurrences of Values within Cases dialog box E Count Occurrences of Values within Cases Target Variable Target Label Numeric Variables E people rdigest L tvguide To Count Occurrences of Values within Cases gt From the menus choose Transform gt Count Values within Cases Enter a target variable name gt Select two or more variables of the same type numeric or string Click Define Values and specify which value or values should be counted Optionally you can define a subset of cases for which to count occurrences of values Count Values within Cases Values to Count The value of the target variable on the main dialog box is incremented by 1 each time one of the selected variables matches a specification in the Values to Count list here Ifa case matches several specificati
394. nned responses You can then select any SourceFile variables that you want to include By default all SourceFile variables are excluded Case Selection Tab For IBM SPSS Data Collection data sources that contain system variables you can select cases based on a number of system variable criteria You do not need to include the corresponding system variables in the list of variables to read but the necessary system variables must exist in the source data to apply the selection criteria If the necessary system variables do not exist in the source data the corresponding selection criteria are ignored Data collection status You can select respondent data test data or both You can also select cases based on any combination of the following interview status parameters Completed successfully Active in progress Timed out Stopped by script Stopped by respondent Interview system shutdown Signal terminated by a signal statement in the script Data collection finish date You can select cases based on the data collection finish date m Start Date Cases for which data collection finished on or after the specified date are included 38 Chapter 3 m End Date Cases for which data collection finished before the specified date are included This does not include cases for which data collection finished on the end date m Ifyou specify both a start date and end date this defines a range of finish dates from the start date to
395. not included in any of the binned categories For more information see the topic User Missing Values in Visual Binning on p 123 Current Variable The name and variable label 1f any for the currently selected variable that will be used as the basis for the new binned variable Binned Variable Name and optional variable label for the new binned variable m Name You must enter a name for the new variable Variable names must be unique and must follow variable naming rules For more information see the topic Variable names in Chapter 5 on p 69 m Label You can enter a descriptive variable label up to 255 characters long The default variable label is the variable label if any or variable name of the source variable with Binned appended to the end of the label Minimum and Maximum Minimum and maximum values for the currently selected variable based on the scanned cases and not including values defined as user missing Nonmissing Values The histogram displays the distribution of nonmissing values for the currently selected variable based on the scanned cases m After you define bins for the new variable vertical lines on the histogram are displayed to indicate the cutpoints that define bins m You can click and drag the cutpoint lines to different locations on the histogram changing the bin ranges m You can remove bins by dragging cutpoint lines off the histogram Note The histogram displaying nonmissing values the
396. ns Window Help 112 id 112 0 wrkstat marital childs Here x _ Data Vie AS Variable s Display frequency tables OD aaa m You cannot change the active dataset when any dialog box that accesses the data is open including all dialog boxes that display variable lists m At least one Data Editor window must be open during a session When you close the last open Data Editor window IBM SPSS Statistics automatically shuts down prompting you to save changes first Working with Multiple Datasets in Command Syntax If you use command syntax to open data sources for example GET FILE GET DATA you need to use the DATASET NAME command to name each dataset explicitly in order to have more than one data source open at the same time When working with command syntax the active dataset name is displayed on the toolbar of the syntax window All of the following actions can change the active dataset m Use the DATASET ACTIVATE command m Click anywhere in the Data Editor window of a dataset m Select a dataset name from the toolbar in the syntax window 93 Working with Multiple Data Sources Figure 6 3 Open datasets displayed on syntax window toolbar E Syntax2 Syntax Editor QuE File Edit View Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Run Add ons Window Help cas E 67 B amp F M 900 Fa By active Excel Demo v Demo GET FILE demo sav E DATASET NAME Demo GET FILE s
397. nt used for all text in new charts 323 Options m Style Cycle Preference The initial assignment of colors and patterns for new charts Cycle through colors only uses only colors to differentiate chart elements and does not use patterns Cycle through patterns only uses only line styles marker symbols or fill patterns to differentiate chart elements and does not use color m Frame Controls the display of inner and outer frames on new charts m Grid Lines Controls the display of scale and category axis grid lines on new charts Style Cycles Customizes the colors line styles marker symbols and fill patterns for new charts You can change the order of the colors and patterns that are used when a new chart is created Data Element Colors Specify the order in which colors should be used for the data elements such as bars and markers in your new chart Colors are used whenever you select a choice that includes color in the Style Cycle Preference group in the main Chart Options dialog box For example if you create a clustered bar chart with two groups and you select Cycle through colors then patterns in the main Chart Options dialog box the first two colors in the Grouped Charts list are used as the bar colors on the new chart To Change the Order in Which Colors Are Used gt Select Simple Charts and then select a color that is used for charts without categories Select Grouped Charts to change the color cycle for charts wi
398. ntly selected remote server Only jobs submitted to that server are displayed in the list To display jobs submitted to a different server click Select Server 374 Chapter 20 Job status information Includes production job name current job status and start and end time Refresh Updates the job status information Get job output Retrieves the output from the selected production job The output for each job resides on the server the job was run on so you must switch to the status for that server to select the job and retrieve the output This button is disabled if the job status is Running Cancel job Cancels the selected production job This button is only enabled if the job status is Running Remove job Removes the selected production job This removes the job from the list and removes the associated files from the remote server This button is disabled if the job status is Running Note Background job status does not reflect the status of any jobs run interactively on a remote server Running production jobs from a command line Command line switches enable you to schedule production jobs to run automatically at certain times using scheduling utilities available on your operating system The basic form of the command line argument is stats filename spj production Depending on how you invoke the production job you may need to include directory paths for the stats executable file located in the directory in which the a
399. nts between or within dimensions To move an element just drag and drop it where you want it Changing display order of elements within a dimension To change the display order of elements within a table dimension row column or layer gt If pivoting trays are not already on from the Pivot Table menu choose Pivot gt Pivoting Trays gt Drag and drop the elements within the dimension in the pivoting tray Moving rows and columns within a dimension element gt Inthe table itself not the pivoting trays click the label for the row or column you want to move gt Drag the label to the new position For legacy tables perform the addition step gt From the context menu choose Insert Before or Swap Transposing rows and columns If you just want to flip the rows and columns there s a simple alternative to using the pivoting trays gt From the menus choose Pivot gt Transpose Rows and Columns 227 Pivot tables This has the same effect as dragging all of the row elements into the column dimension and dragging all of the column elements into the row dimension Grouping rows or columns gt Select the labels for the rows or columns that you want to group together click and drag or Shift click to select multiple labels From the menus choose Edit gt Group A group label is automatically inserted Double click the group label to edit the label text Note To add rows or columns to an existing group
400. o insert command syntax generated by controls where Identifier is the value of the Identifier property for the control You can select from a list of available control identifiers by pressing Ctrl Spacebar The list contains the control identifiers followed by the items available with the syntax auto completion feature If you manually enter identifiers retain any spaces since all spaces in identifiers are significant At run time and for all controls other than check boxes and check box groups each identifier is replaced with the current value of the Syntax property of the associated control For check boxes and check box groups the identifier is replaced by the current value of the Checked Syntax or Unchecked Syntax property of the associated control depending on the current state of the control checked or unchecked For more information see the topic Control Types on p 353 Note The syntax generated at run time automatically includes a command terminator period as the very last character if one is not present Example Including Run time Values in the Syntax Template Consider a simplified version of the Frequencies dialog that only contains a source list control and a target list control and generates command syntax of the following form FREQUENCIES VARIABLES varl var2 FORMAT NOTABLI BARCHART e The syntax template to generate this might look like FREQUENCIES VARIABI LES
401. o outdent text Select the desired text or position the cursor on a single line that you want to outdent gt From the menus choose Tools gt Indent Syntax gt Outdent To automatically indent text gt Select the desired text gt From the menus choose Tools gt Indent Syntax gt Auto Indent When you automatically indent text any existing indentation is removed and replaced with the automatically generated indents Note that automatically indenting code within a BEGIN PROGRAM block may break the code if it depends on specific indentation to function such as Python code containing loops and conditional blocks Syntax formatted with the auto indent feature may not run in batch mode For example auto indenting an INPUT PROGRAM END INPUT PROGRAM LOOP END LOOP DO IF END IF or DO REPEAT END REPEAT block will cause the syntax to fail in batch mode because commands in the block will be indented and will not start in column 1 as required for batch mode You can however use the i switch in batch mode to force the Batch Facility to use interactive syntax rules For more information see the topic Syntax Rules on p 265 277 Working with Command Syntax Running Command Syntax gt Highlight the commands that you want to run in the syntax window Click the Run button the right pointing triangle on the Syntax Editor toolbar It runs the selected commands or the command where the cursor is located if there is no selec
402. o save the extension bundle to the specified location This closes the Create Extension Bundle dialog box Required fields for extension bundles Name A unique name to associate with the extension bundle It can consist of up to three words and is not case sensitive Characters are restricted to seven bit ASCII To minimize the possibility of name conflicts you may want to use a multi word name where the first word is an identifier for your organization such as a URL 305 Utilities Files Click Add to add the files associated with the extension bundle An extension bundle must at least include a custom dialog specification spd file or an XML specification file for an extension command Ifan XML specification file is included then the bundle must include at least one Python or R code file specifically a file of type py pyc pyo or R m Translation files for extension commands implemented in Python or R included in the extension bundle are added from the Translation Catalogues Folder field on the Optional tab For more information see the topic Optional fields for extension bundles on p 305 m You can add a readme file to the extension bundle Specify the filename as ReadMe txt End users will be able to access the readme file from the dialog that displays the details for the extension bundle You can include localized versions of the readme file specified as ReadMe_ lt language identifier gt txt as in ReadMe _fr txt f
403. ocation in Worksheet After last column After last row Starting in a specific cell Existing data at the specified location will be overwritten i eee PowerPoint Options The following options are available for PowerPoint Layers in pivot tables By default inclusion or exclusion of pivot table layers is controlled by the table properties for each pivot table You can override this setting and include all layers or exclude all but the currently visible layer For more information see the topic Table properties printing in Chapter 11 on p 239 215 Working with Output Wide Pivot Tables Controls the treatment of tables that are too wide for the defined document width By default the table is wrapped to fit The table is divided into sections and row labels are repeated for each section of the table Alternatively you can shrink wide tables or make no changes to wide tables and allow them to extend beyond the defined document width Include footnotes and captions Controls the inclusion or exclusion of all pivot table footnotes and captions Use Viewer outline entries as slide titles Includes a title on each slide that is created by the export Each slide contains a single item that is exported from the Viewer The title is formed from the outline entry for the item in the outline pane of the Viewer Views of Models By default inclusion or exclusion of model views is controlled by t
404. ocessing Controls the treatment of error conditions in the job Continue processing after errors Errors in the job do not automatically stop command processing The commands in the production job files are treated as part of the normal command stream and command processing continues in the normal fashion m Stop processing immediately Command processing stops when the first error in a production job file is encountered This is compatible with the behavior of command files included with the INCLUDE command These options control the name location and format of the production job results The following format options are available m Viewer file spv Results are saved in IBM SPSS Statistics Viewer format in the specified file location You can store to disk or to an IBMO SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository Storing to an IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository requires the Statistics Adapter 370 Chapter 20 Web Reports spw Results are stored to an IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository This requires the Statistics Adapter Word RTF doc Pivot tables are exported as Word tables with all formatting attributes intact for example cell borders font styles and background colors Text output is exported as formatted RTF Charts tree diagrams and model views are included in PNG format Note Microsoft Word may not display extremely wide tables properly
405. ocuments and for exporting charts only you can select the graphic format and for each graphic format you can control various optional settings To select the graphic format and options for exported charts gt Select HTML Text or None Graphics only as the document type Select the graphic file format from the drop down list Click Change Options to change the options for the selected graphic file format JPEG Chart Export Options m Image size Percentage of original chart size up to 200 percent m Convert to grayscale Converts colors to shades of gray BMP Chart Export Options m Image size Percentage of original chart size up to 200 percent Compress image to reduce file size A lossless compression technique that creates smaller files without affecting image quality PNG Chart Export Options Image size Percentage of original chart size up to 200 percent Color Depth Determines the number of colors in the exported chart A chart that is saved under any depth will have a minimum of the number of colors that are actually used and a maximum of the number of colors that are allowed by the depth For example if the chart contains three colors red white and black and you save it as 16 colors the chart will remain as three colors m Ifthe number of colors in the chart exceeds the number of colors for that depth the colors will be dithered to replicate the colors in the chart m Current screen depth is the num
406. of all cases CONCAT strexpr strexpr in PASWY Statistics in INSERT strexpr pos len new Percentage s LEFT strexpr court Exact number of cases LTRIM strexpr Y Rando e LENGTH strexpr LOCATE haystack needle LCASE strexpr Tip If you retrieve the cases and select them REPEAT strexpr count in PASWY Statistics database aggregation is REPLACE target old new unavailable RIGHT strexpr count Number of Cases 100 From First 1000 seek es gt rion cence e To build your criteria you need at least two expressions and a relation to connect the expressions To build an expression choose one of the following methods m Inan Expression cell type field names constants arithmetic operators numeric and other functions or logical variables Double click the field in the Fields list Drag the field from the Fields list to an Expression cell Choose a field from the drop down menu in any active Expression cell To choose the relational operator such as or gt put your cursor in the Relation cell and either type the operator or choose it from the drop down menu 22 Chapter 3 gt If the SQL contains WHERE clauses with expressions for case selection dates and times in expressions need to be specified in a special manner including the curly braces shown in the examples m Date literals should be specified using the general form d yyyy mm dd m Time literals should be
407. of cases selected can only approximate the specified percentage The more cases there are in the data file the closer the percentage of cases selected is to the specified percentage m Exactly Selects a random sample of the specified number of cases from the specified total number of cases If the total number of cases specified exceeds the total number of cases in the data file the sample will contain proportionally fewer cases than the requested number Note If you use random sampling aggregation available in distributed mode with SPSS Statistics Server is not available Prompt For Value You can embed a prompt in your query to create a parameter query When users run the query they will be asked to enter information based on what is specified here You might want to do this if you need to see different views of the same data For example you may want to run the same query to see sales figures for different fiscal quarters Place your cursor in any Expression cell and click Prompt For Value to create a prompt Creating a Parameter Query Use the Prompt for Value step to create a dialog box that solicits information from users each time someone runs your query This feature is useful if you want to query the same data source by using different criteria 23 Data Files Figure 3 7 Prompt for Value EN Prompt for Value Prompt String Income category 1 low 2 medium 3 high Information about data to be entered Fi Allow
408. of new cases that was created from the original case For example an index named w would have the values 1 2 and 3 How many index variables do you want to create One Use this when a variable group records the effects of a single factor treatment or condition Use this when a variable group records the effects of more than one factor treatment or condition O None Use this if index information is stored in one of the sets of variables to be transposed asa Gee 0 How many index variables should be in the new file Index variables can be used as grouping variables in procedures In most cases a single index variable is sufficient however if the variable groups in your current file reflect multiple factor levels multiple indices may be appropriate m One The wizard will create a single index variable More than one The wizard will create multiple indices and enter the number of indices that you want to create The number that you specify affects the next step in which the wizard automatically creates the specified number of indices m None Select this if you do not want to create index variables in the new file Example of One Index for Variables to Cases In the current data there is one variable group width and one factor time Width was measured three times and recorded in w w2 and w3 Figure 9 25 Current data for one index subject 7 10 5 90 560 We l
409. og box for time series data with defined date variables fF Select Cases Range First Case Last Case west ver ina ac Note If unselected cases are filtered rather than deleted subsequently sorting the dataset will turn off filtering applied by this dialog Weight Cases Weight Cases gives cases different weights by simulated replication for statistical analysis m The values of the weighting variable should indicate the number of observations represented by single cases in your data file m Cases with zero negative or missing values for the weighting variable are excluded from analysis m Fractional values are valid and some procedures such as Frequencies Crosstabs and Custom Tables will use fractional weight values However most procedures treat the weighting variable as a replication weight and will simply round fractional weights to the nearest integer Some procedures ignore the weighting variable completely and this limitation is noted in the procedure specific documentation 183 File Handling and File Transformations Figure 9 16 Weight Cases dialog box E Weight Cases O Do not weight cases Weight cases by Frequency Variable gt amp Final person level sample weight E Cigarettes smoked per day past Current Status Do not weight cases Lor easte geset cancel rie J Once you apply a weight variable it remains in effect until you sel
410. og for the Frequencies procedure that only allows the user to select the set of variables and then generates command syntax with pre set options that standardize the output m Create a user interface that generates command syntax for an extension command Extension commands are user defined SPSS Statistics commands that are implemented in either the Python programming language or R For more information see the topic Custom Dialogs for Extension Commands on p 364 m Open a file containing the specification for a custom dialog perhaps created by another user and add the dialog to your installation of SPSS Statistics optionally making your own modifications m Save the specification for a custom dialog so that other users can add it to their installations of SPSS Statistics How to Start the Custom Dialog Builder gt From the menus choose Utilities gt Custom Dialogs gt Custom Dialog Builder O Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 342 343 Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs Custom Dialog Builder Layout Tools B P source List File Edt View Window Hep 00 A Target List a Y a Check Box Variables Dependent List EP Combo Box Variablel Variable A ListBox dl variable2 amp Variables A Text control E Number control Ab Static Text Factor amp Variable CI item Group E Radio Group check Box Group File Browser 2 A a Sub dialog Button Dialog
411. ogs If you are creating a custom dialog for an extension command and wish to share it with other users you should first save the specifications for the dialog to a custom dialog package spd file You ll then want to create an extension bundle containing the custom dialog package file the XML file that specifies the syntax of the extension command and the implementation code file s written in Python or R The extension bundle is then what you share with other users For more information see the topic Working with extension bundles in Chapter 16 on p 304 Installing Extension Commands with Associated Custom Dialogs An extension command with an associated custom dialog consists of three pieces an XML file that specifies the syntax of the command one or more code files Python or R that implement the command and a custom dialog package file that contains the specifications for the custom dialog Ifthe extension command and its associated custom dialog are distributed in an extension bundle spe file then you can simply install the bundle from Utilities gt Extension Bundles gt Install Extension Bundle Otherwise you need to install the custom dialog and the extension command files separately as follows Custom Dialog Package File Install the custom dialog package file from Utilities gt Custom Dialogs gt Install Custom Dialog XML Syntax Specification File and Implementation Code For Windows and Linux the XML file specifying the syn
412. olumn dimension element each of which contains one of the variables that are used in the table You can use either positional arguments or dimension element names to specify the dimension elements that you want to put into the column dimension All dimensions in rows Creates a single row for each table For SPSS Statistics format data files this means each table is a single case and all the table elements are variables List of positions The general form of a positional argument is a letter indicating the default position of the element C for column R for row or L for layer followed by a positive integer indicating the default position within that dimension For example R1 would indicate the outermost row dimension element To specify multiple elements from multiple dimensions separate each dimension with a space for example R1 C2 m The dimension letter followed by ALL indicates all elements in that dimension in their default order For example CALL is the same as the default behavior using all column elements in their default order to create columns m CALL RALL LALL or RALL CALL LALL and so on will put all dimension elements into the columns For SPSS Statistics data file format this creates one row case per table in the data file Figure 21 5 Row and column positional arguments Previous Experience Months Beginning months since Hire Salary Date of Birth Correlations Previous Experience months
413. om Dialogs Numeric Type Specifies any limitations on what can be entered A value of Real specifies that there are no restrictions on the entered value other than it be numeric A value of Integer specifies that the value must be an integer Default Value The default value 1f any Minimum Value The minimum allowed value if any Maximum Value The maximum allowed value if any Required for execution Specifies whether a value is required in this control in order for execution to proceed If True is specified the OK and Paste buttons will be disabled until a value is specified for this control If False is specified the absence of a value in this control has no effect on the state of the OK and Paste buttons The default is False Syntax Specifies command syntax that is generated by this control at run time and can be inserted in the syntax template m You can specify any valid command syntax and you can use n for line breaks m The value 3 ThisValue specifies the run time value of the control which is the numeric value This is the default m Ifthe Syntax property includes ThisValue and the run time value of the number control 1s empty then the number control does not generate any command syntax Static Text Control The Static Text control allows you to add a block of text to your dialog and has the following properties Identifier The unique identifier for the control Title The content of the text block For mu
414. om Tables and the Chart Builder support a special kind of variable called a multiple response set Multiple response sets aren t really variables in the normal sense You can t see them in the Data Editor and other procedures don t recognize them Multiple response sets use multiple variables to record responses to questions where the respondent can give more than one answer Multiple response sets are treated like categorical variables and most of the things you can do with categorical variables you can also do with multiple response sets Multiple response sets are constructed from multiple variables in the data file A multiple response set is a special construct within a data file You can define and save multiple response sets in IBM SPSS Statistics data files but you cannot import or export multiple response sets from to other file formats You can copy multiple response sets from other SPSS Statistics data files using Copy Data Properties which is accessed from the Data menu in the Data Editor window For more information see the topic Copying Data Properties on p 107 Defining Multiple Response Sets gt To define multiple response sets From the menus choose Data gt Define Multiple Response Sets 105 Data preparation Figure 7 7 Define Multiple Response Sets dialog box E Define Multiple Response Sets pSet Definition oil Confidence in major Variables in Set amp Get news
415. om currency PARA AER RR RARA Restricted Numeric integer with leading zeros Decimal Places o m The Numeric type honors the digit grouping setting while the Restricted Numeric never uses digit grouping ox J cancel ner The available data types are as follows Numeric A variable whose values are numbers Values are displayed in standard numeric format The Data Editor accepts numeric values in standard format or in scientific notation 72 Chapter 5 Comma A numeric variable whose values are displayed with commas delimiting every three places and displayed with the period as a decimal delimiter The Data Editor accepts numeric values for comma variables with or without commas or in scientific notation Values cannot contain commas to the right of the decimal indicator Dot A numeric variable whose values are displayed with periods delimiting every three places and with the comma as a decimal delimiter The Data Editor accepts numeric values for dot variables with or without periods or in scientific notation Values cannot contain periods to the right of the decimal indicator Scientific notation A numeric variable whose values are displayed with an embedded E and a signed power of 10 exponent The Data Editor accepts numeric values for such variables with or without an exponent The exponent can be preceded by E or D with an optional sign or by the sign alone for example 123 1 23E2 1 23D2 1 23E 2 and 1 23 2
416. omous all of the variables in the set are coded the same way and the Counted Value represents the positive present checked condition For example a survey asks the question Which of the following sources do you rely on for news and provides five possible responses The respondent can indicate multiple choices by checking a box next to each choice The five responses become five variables in the data file coded 0 for No not checked and 1 for Yes checked In the multiple dichotomy set the Counted Value is 1 The sample data file survey_sample sav already has three defined multiple response sets mltnews is a multiple dichotomy set gt Select click mltnews in the Mult Response Sets list 106 Chapter 7 This displays the variables and settings used to define this multiple response set m The Variables in Set list displays the five variables used to construct the multiple response set m The Variable Coding group indicates that the variables are dichotomous m The Counted Value is 1 Select click one of the variables in the Variables in Set list Right click the variable and select Variable Information from the pop up context menu In the Variable Information window click the arrow on the Value Labels drop down list to display the entire list of defined value labels Figure 7 8 Variable information for multiple dichotomy source variable EN Variable Information Name news5 Walue Labels 0
417. omputer does not have to remain on and does not have to remain connected to the remote server You can disconnect and retrieve the results later Note Running a production job on a remote server requires access to a server running IBM SPSS Statistics Server Statistics server If you select to run the production job in the background on a remote server you must specify the server on which it will run Click Select Server to specify the server This applies only to jobs run in the background on a remote server not jobs run interactively on a remote server 373 Production jobs Server login Use the Server login dialog to add and modify remote servers and to select the server to use to run the current production job Remote servers usually require a user ID and password and a domain name may also be necessary Contact your system administrator for information about available servers a user ID and password domain names and other connection information If your site is running IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services 3 5 or later you can click Search to view a list of servers that are available on your network If you are not logged on to a IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository you will be prompted to enter connection information before you can view the list of servers Adding and Editing Server Login Settings Use the Server Login Settings dialog box to add or edit connection information for r
418. on Plug In for Python installed For information see How to Get Integration Plug Ins available from Core System gt Frequently Asked Questions in the Help system Note IBM Corp is not the owner or licensor of the Python software Any user of Python must agree to the terms of the Python license agreement located on the Python Web site IBM Corp does not make any statement about the quality of the Python program IBM Corp fully disclaims all liability associated with your use of the Python program Default Script Language The default script language determines the script editor that is launched when new scripts are created It also specifies the default language whose executable will be used to run autoscripts On Windows the default script language is Basic You can change the default language from the Scripts tab in the Options dialog For more information see the topic Script options in Chapter 17 on p 329 Sample Scripts A number of scripts are included with the software in the Samples subdirectory of the directory where IBM SPSS Statistics is installed You can use these scripts as they are or you can customize them to your needs To Create a New Script gt From the menus choose File gt New gt Script The editor associated with the default script language opens O Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 402 403 Seripting Facility To Run a Script gt From the menus choose Utilities gt Run Script
419. on pane contains a list of all recognized commands in the syntax window displayed in the order in which they occur Clicking on a command in the navigation pane positions the cursor at the start of the command Automatically open Error Tracking pane when errors are found This specifies the default for showing or hiding the error tracking pane when run time errors are found Optimize for right to left languages Check this box for the best user experience when working with right to left languages Paste syntax from dialogs Specifies the position at which syntax is inserted into the designated syntax window when pasting syntax from a dialog After last command inserts pasted syntax after the last command At cursor or selection inserts pasted syntax at the position of the cursor or ifa block of syntax is selected then the selection will be replaced by the pasted syntax 334 Chapter 17 Multiple imputations options Figure 17 12 Options dialog box Multiple Imputations tab Bloptios OTTO o o e A oe ados Fett Mero ose rMarking of Imputed Data Cell background color y Font Sensseif SB Analysis Output 9 Results for both observed and imputed data O Results for observed data only O Results for imputed data only Pooled results Diagnostic statistics Eo cercas Laso Crier The Multiple Imputations tab controls two kinds of preferences related to Multiple Imputations Appearan
420. on scripts can be run as autoscripts m Python scripts run on the machine where the SPSS Statistics client is running Complete documentation of the SPSS Statistics classes and methods available for Python scripts can be found in the Scripting Guide for IBM SPSS Statistics available under Integration Plug In for Python in the Help system once Essentials for Python has been installed Python Programs Python programs make use of the interface exposed by the Python spss module They operate on the SPSS Statistics processor and are used to control the flow of a command syntax job read from and write to the active dataset create new datasets and create custom procedures that generate their own pivot table output m Python programs are run from command syntax within BEGIN PROGRAM END PROGRAM blocks or from an external Python process such as a Python IDE or the Python interpreter Python programs cannot be run as autoscripts In distributed analysis mode available with SPSS Statistics Server Python programs execute on the computer where SPSS Statistics Server is running More information about Python programs including complete documentation of the SPSS Statistics functions and classes available for them can be found in the documentation for the Python Integration Package for IBM SPSS Statistics available under Integration Plug In for Python in the Help system once Essentials for Python has been installed Running Python Scripts and Pyt
421. ons dialog box al Export Output Text Options Ey Pivot Table Format Ouse tabs to separate columns Use spaces to separate columns Column Width Autofit O Custom Number of Characters 15 Row Border Character E Column Border Character i rLayers in Pivot Tables Honor Print Layer setting set in Table Properties on a per table basis O Export all layers O Export visible layer only IM Include footnotes and captions Views of Models Honor print setting set in Model Viewer Properties for each model O Export all views O Export visible view only Gertie reset cance ner _ Graphics Only Options The following options are available for exporting graphics only Views of Models By default inclusion or exclusion of model views is controlled by the model properties for each model You can override this setting and include all views or exclude all but the currently visible view For more information see the topic Model properties in Chapter 12 on p 252 Note all model views including tables are exported as graphics Figure 10 10 Graphics Only Options Export Output Graphics Only Options E Wiews of Models Honor print setting set in Model Viewer Properties for each model O Export all views Export visible view only Esmas reset canoa re 219 Working with Output Graphics Format Options For HTML and text d
422. ons for any variable the target variable is incremented several times for that variable Value specifications can include individual values missing or system missing values and ranges Ranges include their endpoints and any user missing values that fall within the range 131 Data Transformations Figure 8 6 Values to Count dialog box ey Count Values within Cases Values to Count E Walues to Count O System missing O System or user missing O Range through Change Remove O Range LOWEST through value O Range value through HIGHEST Count Occurrences If Cases The If Cases dialog box allows you to count occurrences of values for a selected subset of cases using conditional expressions A conditional expression returns a value of true false or missing for each case 132 Chapter 8 Figure 8 7 Count Occurrences If Cases dialog box Ls Count Occurrences If Cases y 8 economist E newsweek nreview Include if case satisfies condition O Include all cases people age_group gt 2 E rdigest time 8E tvguide E usnews 8E income_group age_group E educ_group Function group All Arithmetic CDF amp Noncentral CDF Conversion Current Date Time Date Arithmetic AL Baa Functions and Special Variables For general considerations on using the If Cases dialog box see Compute Variable If Cases on p 127 Shift Values Shift Values creates new var
423. ontaining your data files as shared folders For more information see the topic Distributed Analysis Mode in Chapter 4 on p 61 To Open Data Files gt From the menus choose File gt Open gt Data gt In the Open Data dialog box select the file that you want to open gt Click Open Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 10 11 Data Files Optionally you can Automatically set the width of each string variable to the longest observed value for that variable using Minimize string widths based on observed values This is particularly useful when reading code page data files in Unicode mode For more information see the topic General options in Chapter 17 on p 312 Read variable names from the first row of spreadsheet files Specify a range of cells to read from spreadsheet files Specify a worksheet within an Excel file to read Excel 95 or later For information on reading data from databases see Reading Database Files on p 13 For information on reading data from text data files see Text Wizard on p 27 Data File Types SPSS Statistics Opens data files saved in IBM SPSS Statistics format and also the DOS product SPSS PC SPSS PC Opens SPSS PC data files This is available only on Windows operating systems SYSTAT Opens SYSTAT data files SPSS Statistics Portable Opens data files saved in portable format Saving a file in portable format takes considerably longer than saving the file in
424. operties printing on p 239 m For tables that are too wide or too long for a single page you can control the location of table breaks between pages Use Print Preview on the File menu to see how printed pivot tables will look Controlling table breaks for wide and long tables Pivot tables that are either too wide or too long to print within the defined page size are automatically split and printed in multiple sections For wide tables multiple sections will print on the same page if there is room You can Control the row and column locations where large tables are split m Specify rows and columns that should be kept together when tables are split m Rescale large tables to fit the defined page size To specify row and column breaks for printed pivot tables Click any cell in the column to the left of where you want to insert the break or click any cell in the row above where you want to insert the break Note For legacy tables you must click a column label or row label cell From the menus choose Format gt Breakpoints gt Vertical Breakpoint or Format gt Breakpoints gt Horizontal Breakpoint 249 Pivot tables Note For legacy tables choose Format gt Break Here for both vertical and horizontal breakpoints To specify rows or columns to keep together Select the labels of the rows or columns that you want to keep together Click and drag or Shift elick to select multiple row or column labels
425. or a French version Summary A short description of the extension bundle intended to be displayed as a single line Description A more detailed description of the extension bundle than that provided for the Summary field For example you might list the major features available with the extension bundle If the extension bundle provides a wrapper for a function from an R package then that should be mentioned here Author The author of the extension bundle You may wish to include an email address Version A version identifier of the form x x x where each component of the identifier must be an integer as in 1 0 0 Zeros are implied if not provided For example a version identifier of 3 1 implies 3 1 0 The version identifier is independent of the IBM SPSS Statistics version Minimum SPSS Statistics Version The minimum version of SPSS Statistics required to run the extension bundle Optional fields for extension bundles Release Date An optional release date No formatting is provided Links An optional set of URL s to associate with the extension bundle for example the author s home page The format of this field is arbitrary so be sure to delimit multiple URL s with spaces commas or some other reasonable delimiter Categories An optional set of keywords with which to associate the extension bundle when authoring an extension bundle for posting to the SPSS community http www ibm com developerworks spssdevcentral
426. or categorical nominal and ordinal variables and some procedures treat categorical and scale variables differently so it is sometimes important to assign the correct measurement level However by default all new numeric variables are assigned the scale measurement level Thus many variables that are in fact categorical may initially be displayed as scale If you are unsure of what measurement level to assign to a variable click Suggest Role Some dialogs support the ability to pre select variables for analysis based on defined roles For more information see the topic Roles in Chapter 5 on p 75 Copy Properties You can copy value labels and other variable properties from another variable to the currently selected variable or from the currently selected variable to one or more other variables 99 Data preparation Unlabeled Values To create labels for unlabeled values automatically click Automatic Labels Variable Label and Display Format You can change the descriptive variable label and the display format m You cannot change the variable s fundamental type string or numeric m For string variables you can change only the variable label not the display format m For numeric variables you can change the numeric type such as numeric date dollar or custom currency width maximum number of digits including any decimal and or grouping indicators and number of decimal positions m For numeric date format you c
427. or eee ees 111 Results ida eed kd dhe dws cea a Pa wed a eed wea ee 114 Identifying Duplicate Cases 1 0 2 2 ett teens 114 Visual IMM its 117 To Bin VariableS o o oooooooooo o 118 Binning Variables 00d ot tha rr a ta bak a e ad 118 Automatically Generating Binned Categories 0 000 cece eee ee eee 120 Copying Binned Categories 0 0 cece teeta 122 User Missing Values in Visual Binning 0 00 cece eee eee eee eee 123 8 Data Transformations 125 Computing VarlableS ooooococcococ e nents 125 Compute Variable If Cases 0 00 0 cc ttt 127 Compute Variable Type and Label 00 00 c cece eee 127 FUNCIONS ci A Le Ree Ae ete ae ee 128 Missing Values in Functions 0 00 0c cee teeta 128 Random Number Generators 00 cc ccc ce ee ete e eens 129 Count Occurrences of Values within Cases 0 0 eet eens 130 Count Values within Cases Values to Count 0 0 0c ee ee eens 130 Count Occurrences If Cases 1 ee ada a ERE OE 131 Shift Valles 203 nie Sec 6 ag Bat Sh Sea ee hard Bees SACD ee be bee Ys Gases 132 Recoding Values 00 0 cece ect etna 133 Recode into Same Variables 0 0 0 ccc ee ee teen e eee eens 133 Recode into Same Variables Old and New Values 0 0 00 c cece eee eens 134 Recode into Different Variables 2 0 0 ccc cc ee tenet tenes 136 Recode into Different Variables Old and New Values 0 0
428. or more titles and footnotes The canvas displays some text to indicate that these were added to the chart Use the Element Properties dialog box to edit the title footnote text How to Remove a Title or Footnote gt Click the Titles Footnotes tab gt Deselect the title or footnote that you want to remove v v v y How to Edit the Title or Footnote Text When you add titles and footnotes you cannot edit their associated text directly on the chart As with other items in the Chart Builder you edit them using the Element Properties dialog box Click Element Properties if the Element Properties dialog box is not displayed In the Edit Properties Of list select a title subtitle or footnote for example Title 1 In the content box type the text associated with the title subtitle or footnote Click Apply Setting General Options gt The Chart Builder offers general options for the chart These are options that apply to the overall chart rather than a specific item on the chart General options include missing value handling templates chart size and panel wrapping Click Options 288 Chapter 14 gt gt Modify the general options Details about these follow Click Apply User Missing Values Break Variables If there are missing values for the variables used to define categories or subgroups select Include so that the category or categories of user missing values values identified as missing
429. or these procedures until all variables have a defined measurement level The Set Measurement Level for Unknown dialog allows you to define measurement level for any variables with an unknown measurement level without performing a data pass which may be time consuming for large data files 103 Data preparation Under certain conditions the measurement level for some or all numeric variables fields in a file may be unknown These conditions include m Numeric variables from Excel 95 or later files text data files or data base sources prior to the first data pass m New numeric variables created with transformation commands prior to the first data pass after creation of those variables These conditions apply primarily to reading data or creating new variables via command syntax Dialogs for reading data and creating new transformed variables automatically perform a data pass that sets the measurement level based on the default measurement level rules To set the measurement level for variables with an unknown measurement level gt In the alert dialog that appears for the procedure click Assign Manually or gt From the menus choose Data gt Set Measurement Level for Unknown Figure 7 6 Set Measurement Level for Unknown dialog L Set Measurement Level for Unknown This dialog only displays fields for which the measurement level is unknown Use Variable View in the Data Editor to change the measurement level fo
430. or use in building thin client applications that are deployed over the web Modeless Specifies whether the dialog is modal or modeless When a dialog is modal it must be closed before the user can interact with the main application windows Data Output and Syntax or with other open dialogs Modeless dialogs do not have that constraint The default is modeless Syntax The Syntax property specifies the syntax template used to create the command syntax generated by the dialog at run time Click the ellipsis button to open the Syntax Template For more information see the topic Building the Syntax Template on p 348 Required Add Ons Specifies one or more add ons such as the Integration Plug In for Python or the Integration Plug In for R that are required in order to run the command syntax generated by the dialog For example if the dialog generates command syntax for an extension command implemented in R then check the box for the Integration Plug In for R Users will be warned about required add ons that are missing when they try to install or run the dialog 346 Chapter 19 Specifying the Menu Location for a Custom Dialog Figure 19 1 Custom Dialog Builder Menu Location dialog box Custom Dialog Builder Menu Location Title Simple One Way ANOVA Image The Menu Location dialog box allows you to specify the name and location of the menu item for a custom dialog Menu items for custom dialogs do n
431. ormat A o hh mm ss hh mm ss ddd hh mm ddd hh mm ss ddd hh mm ss Variable Label Time Difference Execution e Create the variable now Paste the syntax into the syntax window Beck lemon cance He gt Enter a name for Result Variable This cannot be the name of an existing variable gt Select a duration format from the Output Format list Optionally you can m Assign a descriptive variable label to the new variable Extract Part of a Date Time Variable To extract a component such as the year from a date time variable gt Select Extract a part of a date or time variable on the introduction screen of the Date and Time Wizard 158 Chapter 8 Select Component to Extract from Date Time Variable Figure 8 28 Get part of a date time variable step 1 ate and Time Wizard Step Get part of a date or time as an ordinary numeric variable Choose a variable and the component of the date or time to extract Variables Date or Time E Le Process Start Date StartDate e Process End Date EndDate Unit to Extract Timet Tmez Format dd mmm yyyy hh mm TIME is the current date and time cs 6 Select the variable containing the date or time part to extract Select the part of the variable to extract from the drop down list You can extract information from dates that is not explicitly part of the display date such as day of the week 159
432. ort The Technical Support Web site requires a login ID and password Information on how to obtain an ID and password is provided at the URL listed above If you re a student using a student academic or grad pack version of any IBM SPSS software product please see our special online Solutions for Education http www ibm com spss rd students pages for students If you re a student using a university supplied copy of the IBM SPSS software please contact the IBM SPSS product coordinator at your university SPSS Community The SPSS community has resources for all levels of users and application developers Download utilities graphics examples new statistical modules and articles Visit the SPSS community at http www ibm com developerworks spssdevcentral Getting Help on Output Terms To see a definition for a term in pivot table output in the Viewer gt Double click the pivot table to activate it gt Right click on the term that you want explained gt Choose What s This from the context menu A definition of the term is displayed in a pop up window Figure 2 1 Activated pivot table glossary Help with right mouse button i x Owns PDA Gender Internet Crosstabulation Gender Internet Male No The number of cases that would be expected in the cell if the row E and column variables are statistically independent or unrelated to f one another 2224 2224 0 49 3 within Owns PDA Count
433. oss mai 404 seeder gh aa Baana ara Qa Gok dee Eh Ogle ebm eee eS ed Ha 321 Ghart Option Ssusse ea a eh ae oa ae a 322 Data Element Colors a a dad Ae a wee del de 323 Data Element Lines o ooooooooor eee etn ene n ee nees 323 Data Element MarkerS ooooo ooocoonc oo 324 Data Element Fills 2 0 2 0cc000 0 cece eet chee ira ew edbes 324 Pivot table options 0 ee ee eee ene nent een eens 325 File locations OptionS 0 0 o 327 GRIPE O PU OMS ios 329 Syntax editor OptionS scce tissen naaa nikai en a e a teen tent eens 332 Multiple imputations options 0 0 ee ee tenet eee e eens 334 18 Customizing Menus and Toolbars 336 Ment Editor 4 sceede ante a gad dee O84 a di dee bs 336 Customizing Toolbars 2 0 0 0 ccc tee e ete ae 337 Show Toolbars oirlo dt naa eee dad 337 To Customize Toolbars o oooooooooo eee eee nee tenn n E 338 Toolbar Properties 0 0 ccc tenet eee 339 Edit Toolbars 2 0 30 tones eat be hl ae Ma ee bot Baler a Sebald edie dus 44 339 Create New Todl ecos ia a oR lee ade Se Oem eae ema 340 19 Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs 342 Custom Dialog Builder Layout 0 00 000 ccc ete eee 343 Building a Custom Dialog 2 ct tet 344 Dialog Properties saei en nannaa cece teen eee eee 344 Specifying the Menu Location for a Custom Dialog 2 0 0 000 e cece eee 346 Laying Out Controls onthe Canvas 0 00 ccc eee teen eae 347 Buil
434. ot appear in the Menu Editor within IBM SPSS Statistics gt Double click the menu or click the plus sign icon to which you want to add the item for the new dialog You can also add items to the top level menu labelled Custom located between the Graphs and Utilities items which is only available for menu items associated with custom dialogs If you want to create custom menus or sub menus use the Menu Editor For more information see the topic Menu Editor in Chapter 18 on p 336 Note however that other users of your dialog will have to manually create the same menu or sub menu from their Menu Editor otherwise the dialog will be added to their Custom menu Note The Menu Location dialog box displays all menus including those for all add on modules Be sure to add the menu item for your custom dialog to a menu that will be available to you or end users of your dialog Select the menu item above which you want the item for the new dialog to appear Once the item is added you can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reposition it Enter a title for the menu item Titles within a given menu or sub menu must be unique Click Add 347 Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs Optionally you can m Add a separator above or below the new menu item m Specify the path to an image that will appear next to the menu item for the custom dialog The supported image types are gifand png The image cannot be larger than 16
435. otes For computer generated data files that produce a continuous stream of data values with no intervening spaces or other distinguishing characteristics it may be difficult to determine where each variable begins Such data files usually rely on a data definition file or some other written description that specifies the line and column location for each variable 34 Chapter 3 Text Wizard Step 5 Figure 3 19 Text Wizard Step 5 E Text Import Wizard Step 5 of 6 rSpecifications for variable s selected in the data preview Variable name Original Name o Data format Data preview Division Travel Current_sales Pre 570000 402000 2 262800 This steps controls the variable name and the data format that the Text Wizard will use to read each variable and which variables will be included in the final data file Variable name You can overwrite the default variable names with your own variable names If you read variable names from the data file the Text Wizard will automatically modify variable names that don t conform to variable naming rules Select a variable in the preview window and then enter a variable name Data format Select a variable in the preview window and then select a format from the drop down list Shift click to select multiple contiguous variables or Ctrl click to select multiple noncontiguous variables The default format is determined from the data valu
436. ottom inner frame Left outer frame Right outer frame Top outer frame Bottom outer frame Data area left Data area top Horizontal category border rows Horizontal dimension border rows Vertical category border rows Vertical dimension border rows To change table borders Click the Borders tab gt Borders dada dddd4 group dddd2 Table Caption bbbb er pz ea aaa i BRERA seco2 s86 abod 83 65 abed poet _abod 58 53 abed i ecce2 44 42 aboa 205 abcd 29091 a Text for footnote a b Text for footnote b Select a border location either by clicking its name in the list or by clicking a line in the Sample area Select a line style or select None Select a color Click OK or Apply Table properties printing You can control the following properties for printed pivot tables m Print all layers or only the top layer of the table and print each layer on a separate page 240 Chapter 11 Shrink a table horizontally or vertically to fit the page for printing m Control widow orphan lines by controlling the minimum number of rows and columns that will be contained in any printed section of a table if the table is too wide and or too long for the defined page size Note If a table is too long to fit on the current page because there is other output above it but it will fit within the defined page length the table is autom
437. ou choose to run all commands in a syntax window that contains breakpoints At the first breakpoint the arrow will span the region from the first command in the window to the command prior to the one containing the breakpoint At the second breakpoint the arrow will stretch from the command containing the first breakpoint to the command prior to the one containing the second breakpoint Run time Behavior with Breakpoints m When running command syntax containing breakpoints execution stops at each breakpoint Specifically the block of command syntax from a given breakpoint or beginning of the run to the next breakpoint or end of the run is submitted for execution exactly as if you had selected that syntax and chosen Run gt Selection m You can work with multiple syntax windows each with its own set of breakpoints but there is only one queue for executing command syntax Once a block of command syntax has been submitted such as the block of command syntax up to the first breakpoint no other block 278 Chapter 13 of command syntax will be executed until the previous block has completed regardless of whether the blocks are in the same or different syntax windows m With execution stopped at a breakpoint you can run command syntax in other syntax windows and inspect Data Editor or Viewer windows However modifying the contents of the syntax window containing the breakpoint or changing the cursor position in that window will c
438. oup zy Income category in All Internet internet Arithmetic E Job satisfaction job CDF amp Noncentral CDF E jobstart Conversion E Level of education Current Date Time Marital status marital Multiple lines multline 8E Newspaper subscri L Number of people in E Owens computer o E Owns fax machine 8 Owns PDA ownpda E Owns stereo CD pl E Owns TW owentw gt Owns YCR ownver E Paging service pag 8 Price of primary ve m _ 4 A Functions and Special Variables m Ifthe result of a conditional expression is true the case is included in the selected subset If the result of a conditional expression is false or missing the case is not included in the selected subset Most conditional expressions use one or more of the six relational operators lt gt lt gt and on the calculator pad Conditional expressions can include variable names constants arithmetic operators numeric and other functions logical variables and relational operators Compute Variable Type and Label By default new computed variables are numeric To compute a new string variable you must specify the data type and width Label Optional descriptive variable label up to 255 bytes long You can enter a label or use the first 110 characters of the compute expression as the label 128 Chapter 8 Type Computed variables can be numeric or strin
439. ow number s for the variable s to which you want to apply the attributes You can select multiple target variables From the menus choose Edit gt Paste Generating multiple new variables with the same attributes gt In Variable View click the row number for the variable that has the attributes that you want to use for the new variable The entire row is highlighted From the menus choose Edit gt Copy Click the empty row number beneath the last defined variable in the data file From the menus choose Edit gt Paste Variables In the Paste Variables dialog box enter the number of variables that you want to create Enter a prefix and starting number for the new variables Click OK The new variable names will consist of the specified prefix plus a sequential number starting with the specified number Custom Variable Attributes In addition to the standard variable attributes for example value labels missing values measurement level you can create your own custom variable attributes Like standard variable attributes these custom attributes are saved with IBM SPSS Statistics data files Therefore you could create a variable attribute that identifies the type of response for survey questions for example single selection multiple selection fill in the blank or the formulas used for computed variables 78 Chapter 5 Creating Custom Variable Attributes To create new custom attributes
440. perties is used Language Identifiers de German en English es Spanish fr French it Italian ja Japanese ko Korean pl Polish pt BR Brazilian Portuguese ru Russian zh_CN Simplified Chinese zh TW Traditional Chinese Note Text in custom dialogs and associated help files is not limited to the languages supported by SPSS Statistics You are free to write the dialog and help text in any language without creating language specific properties and help files All users of your dialog will then see the text in that language Chapter Production jobs gt gt Production jobs provide the ability to run IBM SPSS Statistics in an automated fashion The program runs unattended and terminates after executing the last command so you can perform other tasks while it runs or schedule the production job to run automatically at scheduled times Production jobs are useful if you often run the same set of time consuming analyses such as weekly reports You can run production jobs in two different ways Interactively The program runs unattended in a separate session on either your local computer or a remote server Your local computer must remain on and connected to the remote server if applicable until the job is complete In the background on a server The program runs in a separate session on a remote server Your local computer does not have to remain on and does not have to remain con
441. picture If the canvas already displays a chart the gallery chart replaces the axis set and graphic elements on the chart gt Drag variables from the Variables list and drop them into the axis drop zones and if available the grouping drop zone Ifan axis drop zone already displays a statistic and you want to use that statistic you do not have to drag a variable into the drop zone You need to add a variable to a 282 Chapter 14 zone only when the text in the zone is blue If the text is black the zone already contains a variable or statistic Note The measurement level of your variables is important The Chart Builder sets defaults based on the measurement level while you are building the chart Furthermore the resulting chart may also look different for different measurement levels You can temporarily change a variable s measurement level by right clicking the variable and choosing an option Figure 14 2 Chart Builder dialog box with completed drop zones Ls Chart Builder E Variables Chart preview uses example data E Employee Code id 4 Gender gender Date of Birth bdate al Educational Level yea dl Employment Category E Current Salary salary 8 Beginning Salary salb 8E Months since Hire jobti E Previous Experience dl Minority Classification Cluster on X set color E Female E Male Choose from gt If you need to change statistics or modify attribute
442. ple 181 range of cases 181 time range 181 selection methods 247 selecting rows and columns in pivot tables 247 servers 61 62 373 adding 62 373 editing 62 373 logging in 61 names 62 373 port numbers 62 373 session journal 327 Shift Values 132 showing 203 231 337 captions 244 dimension labels 231 footnotes 244 results 203 rows or columns 231 titles 231 toolbars 337 sizes 205 in outline 205 smoothing function 162 sorting variables 166 sorting cases 165 sorting variables 166 space delimited data 27 speed 59 caching data 59 spelling 81 dictionary 316 split file processing 177 split model viewer 263 splitting tables 248 controlling table breaks 248 spp files converting to spj files 375 spreadsheet files 10 12 41 opening 12 reading ranges 11 reading variable names 11 writing variable names 41 SPSSTMPDIR environment variable 327 Stata files 13 opening 10 13 reading 10 427 saving 39 Statistics Coach 6 status bar 3 string format 71 string variables 74 83 breaking up long strings in earlier releases 39 computing new string variables 127 entering data 83 in dialog boxes 3 missing values 74 recoding into consecutive integers 138 subsets of cases random sample 181 selecting 178 180 181 subtitles charts 287 subtypes 381 vs labels 382 syntax 265 277 339 368 accessing Command Syntax Reference 8 journal file 278 output log 267 pasting 2
443. ple levels of service satisfaction from highly dissatisfied to highly satisfied Examples of ordinal variables include attitude scores representing degree of satisfaction or confidence and preference rating scores Scale A variable can be treated as scale continuous when its values represent ordered categories with a meaningful metric so that distance comparisons between values are appropriate Examples of scale variables include age in years and income in thousands of dollars Note For ordinal string variables the alphabetic order of string values is assumed to reflect the true order of the categories For example for a string variable with the values of low medium high the order of the categories is interpreted as high low medium which is not the correct order In general it is more reliable to use numeric codes to represent ordinal data For new numeric variables created with transformations data from external sources and IBM SPSS Statistics data files created prior to version 8 default measurement level is determined by the conditions in the following table Conditions are evaluated in the order listed in the table The measurement level for the first condition that matches the data is applied Condition Measurement Level All values of a variable are missing Nominal Format is dollar or custom currency Continuous Format is date or time excluding Month and Continuous Wkday Variable contains at lea
444. pplication is installed and or the production job file You can run production jobs from a command line with the following switches production prompt silent Start the application in production mode The prompt and silent keywords specify whether to display the dialog box that prompts for runtime values if they are specified in the job The prompt keyword is the default and shows the dialog box The silent keyword suppresses the dialog box If you use the silent keyword you can define the runtime symbols with the symbo1 switch Otherwise the default value is used The switchserver and singleseat switches are ignored when using the production switch symbol lt values gt List of symbol value pairs used in the production job Each symbol name starts with Values that contain spaces should be enclosed in quotes Rules for including quotes or apostrophes in string literals may vary across operating systems but enclosing a string that includes single quotes or apostrophes in double quotes usually works for example a quoted value The symbols must be defined in the production job using the Runtime Values tab For more information see the topic Runtime values on p 372 background Run the production job in the background on a remote server Your local computer does not have to remain on and does not have to remain connected to the remote server You can disconnect and retrieve the results later You must also specify the serve
445. pported on Mac 357 Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs List Box Type List Box only Specifies whether the list box supports single selection only or multiple selection You can also specify that items are displayed as a list of check boxes Syntax Specifies command syntax that is generated by this control at run time and can be inserted in the syntax template m The value 3 ThisValue specifies the run time value of the control and is the default If the list items are manually defined the run time value is the value of the Syntax property for the selected list item If the list items are based on a target list control the run time value is the value of the selected list item For multiple selection list box controls the run time value is a blank separated list of the selected items For more information see the topic Specifying List Items for Combo Boxes and List Boxes on p 357 m You can specify any valid command syntax and you can use n for line breaks Specifying List Items for Combo Boxes and List Boxes The List Item Properties dialog box allows you to specify the list items of a combo box or list box control Manually defined values Allows you to explicitly specify each of the list items m Identifier A unique identifier for the list item m Name The name that appears in the list for this item The name is a required field Default For a combo box specifies whether the list item is the default item displaye
446. pts with the desired output items as described below For information on converting legacy autoscripts see Compatibility with Versions Prior to 16 0 on p 408 Default script language The default script language determines the script editor that is launched when new scripts are created It also specifies the default language whose executable will be used to run autoscripts The available scripting languages depend on your platform For Windows the available scripting languages are Basic which is installed with the Core system and the Python programming language For all other platforms scripting is available with the Python programming language 331 Options To enable scripting with the Python programming language you must have Python and the IBM SPSS Statistics Integration Plug In for Python installed For information see How to Get Integration Plug Ins available from Core System gt Frequently Asked Questions in the Help system Enable Autoscripting This check box allows you to enable or disable autoscripting By default autoscripting is enabled Base Autoscript An optional script that is applied to all new Viewer objects before any other autoscripts are applied Specify the script file to be used as the base autoscript as well as the language whose executable will be used to run the script To Apply Autoscripts to Output Items In the Command Identifiers grid select a command that generates output items to which auto
447. r If you have command syntax files that contain TABLES syntax that you want to convert to CTABLES syntax and or IGRAPH syntax that you want to convert to GGRAPH syntax a simple utility program is provided to help you get started with the conversion process There are however significant functionality differences between TABLES and CTABLES and between IGRAPH and GGRAPH It is likely that you will find that the utility program cannot convert some of your TABLES and IGRAPH syntax jobs or may generate CTABLES and GGRAPH syntax that produces tables and graphs that do not closely resemble the originals produced by the TABLES and IGRAPH commands For most tables you can edit the converted syntax to produce a table closely resembling the original The utility program is designed to m Create a new syntax file from an existing syntax file The original syntax file is not altered m Convert only TABLES and IGRAPH commands in the syntax file Other commands in the file are not altered Retain the original TABLES and IGRAPH syntax in commented form Identify the beginning and end of each conversion block with comments Identify TABLES and IGRAPH syntax commands that could not be converted Convert command syntax files that follow either interactive or production mode syntax rules This utility cannot convert commands that contain errors The following other limitations also apply TABLES Limitations The utility program may convert TAB
448. r other fields Fields with unknown Measurement Level Used for unranked categories like region or postal code They can be either numeric or string al Used for ranked categories like ratings 1 low 2 medium 3 high They should be numeric Continuous v6 E Used when distance comparisons v7 between values are appropriate like age in years or income in dollars They are always numeric corga gt Move variables fields from the source list to the appropriate measurement level destination list m Nominal A variable can be treated as nominal when its values represent categories with no intrinsic ranking for example the department of the company in which an employee works Examples of nominal variables include region zip code and religious affiliation 104 Chapter 7 m Ordinal A variable can be treated as ordinal when its values represent categories with some intrinsic ranking for example levels of service satisfaction from highly dissatisfied to highly satisfied Examples of ordinal variables include attitude scores representing degree of satisfaction or confidence and preference rating scores Continuous A variable can be treated as scale continuous when its values represent ordered categories with a meaningful metric so that distance comparisons between values are appropriate Examples of scale variables include age in years and income in thousands of dollars Multiple Response Sets Cust
449. r save the specification for the dialog to a custom dialog package spd file For more information see the topic Managing Custom Dialogs on p 351 You can preview your dialog as you re building it For more information see the topic Previewing a Custom Dialog on p 350 Properties To view and set Dialog Properties Click on the canvas in an area outside of any controls With no controls on the canvas Dialog Properties are always visible Dialog Name The Dialog Name property is required and specifies a unique name to associate with the dialog This is the name used to identify the dialog when installing or uninstalling it To minimize the possibility of name conflicts you may want to prefix the dialog name with an identifier for your organization such as a URL Menu Location Click the ellipsis button to open the Menu Location dialog box which allows you to specify the name and location of the menu item for the custom dialog Title The Title property specifies the text to be displayed in the title bar of the dialog box Help File The Help File property is optional and specifies the path to a help file for the dialog This is the file that will be launched when the user clicks the Help button on the dialog Help files must be in HTML format A copy of the specified help file is included with the specifications for the dialog when the dialog is installed or saved to a custom dialog package file The Help button on the run time
450. r than the last specified cutpoint value will be assigned the system missing value for the new variable To Delete All Labels or Delete All Defined Bins gt Right click anywhere in the grid gt From the pop up context menu select either Delete All Labels or Delete All Cutpoints Upper Endpoints Controls treatment of upper endpoint values entered in the Value column of the grid m Included lt Cases with the value specified in the Value cell are included in the binned category For example if you specify values of 25 50 and 75 cases with a value of exactly 25 will go in the first bin since this will include all cases with values less than or equal to 25 m Excluded lt Cases with the value specified in the Value cell are not included in the binned category Instead they are included in the next bin For example if you specify values of 25 50 and 75 cases with a value of exactly 25 will go in the second bin rather than the first since the first bin will contain only cases with values less than 25 Make Cutpoints Generates binned categories automatically for equal width intervals intervals with the same number of cases or intervals based on standard deviations This is not available if you scanned zero cases For more information see the topic Automatically Generating Binned Categories on p 120 Make Labels Generates descriptive labels for the sequential integer values of the new binned variable based on the values
451. r that you want to appear on each page Page Attributes Options This dialog box controls the printed chart size the space between printed output items and page numbering Printed Chart Size Controls the size of the printed chart relative to the defined page size The chart s aspect ratio width to height ratio is not affected by the printed chart size The overall printed size of a chart is limited by both its height and width When the outer borders of a chart reach the left and right borders of the page the chart size cannot increase further to fill additional page height Space hetween items Controls the space between printed items Each pivot table chart and text object is a separate item This setting does not affect the display of items in the Viewer Number pages starting with Numbers pages sequentially starting with the specified number Make Default This option uses the settings specified here as the default settings for new Viewer documents Note this makes the current settings on both the Header Footer tab and the Options tab the default settings Figure 10 13 Page Attributes dialog box Options tab iz Page Attributes HeaderiFocter _ Options Printed Chart Size O As Is Full page height Half page height 45 fs Quarter page height Space between items pts a Number pages starting with Co cone tio ae Det To Change Printed Chart Size Page Numbering and Space betwee
452. r using the server switch 375 Production jobs To run production jobs on a remote server you also need to specify the server login information server lt inet hostname port gt or server lt ssl hostname port gt The name or IP address and port number of the server Windows only user lt name gt A valid user name If a domain name is required precede the user name with the domain name and a backslash 1 Windows only password lt password gt The user s password Example stats production_jobs prodjob1 spj production silent symbol Odatafile data July_data sav m This example assumes that you are running the command line from the installation directory so no path is required for the stats executable file m This example also assumes that the production job specifies that the value for datafile should be quoted Quote Value checkbox on the Runtime Values tab so no quotes are necessary when specifying the data file on the command line Otherwise you would need to specify something like data July_data sav to include quotes with the data file specification since file specifications should be quoted in command syntax m The directory path for the location of the production job uses the Windows back slash convention On Macintosh and Linux use forward slashes The forward slashes in the quoted data file specification will work on all operating systems since this quoted string is inserted into the command synt
453. r variable results in one new variable for each unique value of product The restructured data are customer indchick indeggs 1 1 1 2 0 1 3 1 0 In this example the restructured data could be used to get frequency counts of the products that customers buy Restructure Data Wizard Finish This is the final step of the Restructure Data Wizard Decide what to do with your specifications 201 File Handling and File Transformations Figure 9 35 Restructure Data Wizard Finish EN Restructure Data Wizard Finish ix Finish What do you want to do Restructure the data now Use this when you want to replace the current file immediately O Paste the syntax generated by the wizard into a syntax window Use this when you want to save or modify the syntax before you restructure the data m Restructure now The wizard will create the new restructured file Choose this if you want to replace the current file immediately Note If original data are weighted the new data will be weighted unless the variable that is used as the weight is restructured or dropped from the new file m Paste syntax The wizard will paste the syntax it generates into a syntax window Choose this when you are not ready to replace the current file when you want to modify the syntax or when you want to save it for future use Working with Output Chapter When you run a procedure the results are displayed in a window
454. ractional ranks 142 percentiles 142 Savage scores 142 tied values 143 Rankit estimates 142 recoding values 117 133 134 136 138 remote servers 61 62 64 65 373 adding 62 373 available procedures 65 data file access 64 editing 62 373 logging in 61 relative paths 65 removing group labels 227 renaming datasets 93 reordering rows and columns 226 replacing missing values linear interpolation 164 linear trend 164 mean of nearby points 164 median of nearby points 164 series mean 164 Reset button 4 restricted numeric format 71 restructuring data 183 184 187 189 191 196 198 200 and weighted data 200 creating a single index variable for variables to cases 193 creating index variables for variables to cases 191 creating multiple index variables for variables to cases 194 example of cases to variables 187 example of one index for variables to cases 192 example of two indices for variables to cases 193 example of variables to cases 187 options for cases to variables 199 options for variables to cases 195 overview 183 selecting data for cases to variables 196 selecting data for variables to cases 189 sorting data for cases to variables 198 types of restructuring 184 variable groups for variables to cases 188 roles Data Editor 75 rotating labels 227 rows 247 selecting in pivot tables 247 running median function 162 426 Index sampling random sample 181 SAS files opening 10
455. rd variable attributes such as value labels missing values and measurement level you can create your own custom variable attributes Like standard variable attributes these custom attributes are saved with IBM SPSS Statistics data files 101 Data preparation Figure 7 4 Custom Variable Attributes Es Custom Variable Attributes Custom Attributes for Avglncome Name Value AnswerFormat Computed value DerivedFrom Array mean income 1 Income2 Income3 Name Attribute names must follow the same rules as variable names For more information see the topic Variable names in Chapter 5 on p 69 Value The value assigned to the attribute for the selected variable m Attribute names that begin with a dollar sign are reserved and cannot be modified You can view the contents of a reserved attribute by clicking on the button in the desired cell m The text Array displayed in a Value cell indicates that this is an attribute array an attribute that contains multiple values Click the button in the cell to display the list of values Copying Variable Properties The Apply Labels and Level dialog box is displayed when you click From Another Variable or To Other Variables in the Define Variable Properties main dialog box It displays all of the scanned variables that match the current variable s type numeric or string For string variables the defined width must also match 102 Chapter 7
456. re old values will be recoded The value must be the same data type numeric or string as the old value m System missing Recodes specified old values into the system missing value The system missing value is not used in calculations and cases with the system missing value are excluded from many procedures Not available for string variables m Copy old values Retains the old value If some values don t require recoding use this to include the old values Any old values that are not specified are not included in the new variable and cases with those values will be assigned the system missing value for the new variable Output variables are strings Defines the new recoded variable as a string alphanumeric variable The old variable can be numeric or string Convert numeric strings to numbers Converts string values containing numbers to numeric values Strings containing anything other than numbers and an optional sign or are assigned the system missing value Old gt New The list of specifications that will be used to recode the variable s You can add change and remove specifications from the list The list is automatically sorted based on the old value specification using the following order single values missing values ranges and all other values If you change a recode specification on the list the procedure automatically re sorts the list if necessary to maintain this order 138 Chapter 8 Figure 8
457. re related They contain data for the same variable var_1 for factor level 1 and var_2 for factor level 2 In SPSS Statistics data analysis the factor is often referred to as a repeated measure when the data are structured this way How should the data be arranged in the new file This is usually determined by the procedure that you want to use to analyze your data 187 File Handling and File Transformations m Procedures that require groups of cases Your data must be structured in case groups to do analyses that require a grouping variable Examples are univariate multivariate and variance components with General Linear Model Mixed Models and OLAP Cubes and independent samples with T Test or Nonparametric Tests If your current data structure is variable groups and you want to do these analyses select Restructure selected variables into cases Procedures that require groups of variables Your data must be structured in variable groups to analyze repeated measures Examples are repeated measures with General Linear Model time dependent covariate analysis with Cox Regression Analysis paired samples with T Test or related samples with Nonparametric Tests If your current data structure is case groups and you want to do these analyses select Restructure selected cases into variables Example of Variables to Cases In this example test scores are recorded in separate columns for each factor 4 and B Figure 9 18 Current data
458. reading 10 saving 39 SAV file format routing output to IBM SPSS Statistics data file 383 routing output to IBM SPSS Statistics data files 388 Savage scores 142 saving charts 209 219 BMP files 209 219 EMF files 209 EPS files 209 219 JPEG files 209 219 metafiles 209 PICT files 209 PNG files 219 PostScript files 219 TIFF files 219 saving files 38 39 controlling default file locations 327 data files 39 database file queries 26 IBM SPSS Statistics data files 38 saving output 209 214 217 Excel format 209 213 HTML 209 211 HTML format 209 PDF format 209 216 PowerPoint format 209 214 text format 209 217 Word format 209 212 scale 70 measurement level 70 99 scale variables binning to create categorical variables 117 scaling pivot tables 233 239 scientific notation 71 312 suppressing in output 312 scoring 291 matching dataset fields to model fields 293 merging model and transformation XML files 298 missing values 293 models supported for export and scoring 290 scoring functions 295 scripts 336 340 402 adding to menus 336 autoscripts 403 Basic 408 creating 402 default language 329 402 editing 402 languages 402 Python 405 running 402 running with toolbar buttons 340 startup scripts 412 search and replace Viewer documents 206 seasonal difference function 162 select cases 178 selecting cases 178 based on selection criteria 180 date range 181 random sam
459. reaks m You can include identifiers for any controls contained in the item group At run time the identifiers are replaced with the syntax generated by the controls m The value 3 ThisValue generates a blank separated list of the syntax generated by each control in the item group in the order in which they appear in the group top to bottom This is the default If the Syntax property includes 5ThisValue and no syntax is generated by any of the controls in the item group then the item group as a whole does not generate any command syntax Radio Group The Radio Group control is a container for a set of radio buttons each of which can contain a set of nested controls The Radio Group control has the following properties Identifier The unique identifier for the control This is the identifier to use when referencing the control in the syntax template Title An optional title for the group If omitted the group border is not displayed For multi line titles use n to specify line breaks ToolTip Optional ToolTip text that appears when the user hovers over the control Radio Buttons Click the ellipsis button to open the Radio Group Properties dialog box which allows you to specify the properties of the radio buttons as well as to add or remove buttons from the group The ability to nest controls under a given radio button is a property of the radio button and is set in the Radio Group Properties dialog box Note You can al
460. redictor contains no value For numeric fields variables this means the system missing value For string fields this means a null string 295 Scoring data with predictive models m The value has been defined as user missing in the model for the given predictor Values defined as user missing in the active dataset but not in the model are not treated as missing values in the scoring process m The predictor is categorical and the value is not one of the categories defined in the model Use Value Substitution Attempt to use value substitution when scoring cases with missing values The method for determining a value to substitute for a missing value depends on the type of predictive model m Linear Regression and Discriminant models For independent variables in linear regression and discriminant models if mean value substitution for missing values was specified when building and saving the model then this mean value is used in place of the missing value in the scoring computation and scoring proceeds If the mean value is not available then the system missing value is returned Decision Tree models For the CHAID and Exhaustive CHAID models the biggest child node is selected for a missing split variable The biggest child node is the one with the largest population among the child nodes using learning sample cases For C amp RT and QUEST models surrogate split variables if any are used first Surrogate splits are splits th
461. rical target accuracy is simply the percentage of records for which the predicted value matches the observed value For a continuous target accuracy is 1 minus the ratio of the mean absolute error in prediction the average of the absolute values of the predicted values minus the observed values to the range of predicted values the maximum predicted value minus the minimum predicted value For bagging ensembles the reference model is a standard model built on the whole training partition For boosted ensembles the reference model is the first component model The naive model represents the accuracy if no model were built and assigns all records to the modal category The naive model is not computed for continuous targets Diversity The chart displays the diversity of opinion among the component models used to build the ensemble presented in larger is more diverse format It is a measure of how much predictions vary across the base models Diversity is not available for boosted ensemble models nor is it shown for continuous targets Predictor Importance Figure 12 6 Predictor Importance view Predictor Importance Target Previously defaulted Debt to incom ratio x100 Years with curre employer Credit card debt i thousands curre address thousands education Household income i thousands 0 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 l l I l l Least Important Most Important 259 Models Typicall
462. rmat m VML image format does not create separate image files The VML code that renders the image is embedded in the HTML m VML image format does not include tree diagrams Size You can scale the image size from 10 to 200 Include Imagemaps For HTML document format this option creates image map ToolTips that display information for some chart elements such as the value of the selected point on a line chart or bar on a bar chart Table Pivots For pivot table output you can specify the dimension element s that should appear in the columns All other dimension elements appear in the rows For SPSS Statistics data file format table columns become variables and rows become cases 386 Chapter 21 m Ifyou specify multiple dimension elements for the columns they are nested in the columns in the order in which they are listed For SPSS Statistics data file format variable names are constructed by nested column elements For more information see the topic Variable names in OMS generated data files on p 395 m Ifa table doesn t contain any of the listed dimension elements all dimension elements for that table will appear in the rows m Table pivots that are specified here have no effect on tables that are displayed in the Viewer Each dimension of a table row column layer may contain zero or more elements For example a simple two dimensional crosstabulation contains a single row dimension element and a single c
463. rmation see the topic Example of Two Indices for Variables to Cases on p 193 How many levels are recorded in the current file Consider how many factor levels are recorded in the current data A level defines a group of cases that experienced identical conditions If there are multiple factors the current data must be arranged so that the levels of the first factor are a primary index within which the levels of subsequent factors cycle How many levels should be in the new file Enter the number of levels for each index The values for multiple index variables are always sequential numbers The values start at 1 and increment for each level The first index increments the slowest and the last index increments the fastest Total combined levels You cannot create more levels than exist in the current data Because the restructured data will contain one row for each combination of treatments the wizard checks the number of levels that you create It will compare the product of the levels that you create to the number of variables in your variable groups They must match Names and labels Click a cell to change the default variable name and provide a descriptive variable label for the index variables Restructure Data Wizard Variables to Cases Options Note The wizard presents this step if you choose to restructure variable groups into rows In this step specify options for the new restructured file 196 Chapter 9 Figure 9 31
464. roduct license P Current date and time STIME a a F W Duration Variable ate of last upgrade LastUp e EEE Units amp Date of next release NextRel Duration Constant Operation Addition Subtraction TIME is the current date and time gt Select a date or time variable gt Select a duration variable or enter a value for Duration Constant Variables used for durations cannot be date or date time variables They can be duration variables or simple numeric variables gt Select the unit that the duration represents from the drop down list Select Duration if using a variable and the variable is in the form of a duration such as hh mm or hh mm ss 152 Chapter 8 Specify Result of Adding or Subtracting a Duration from a Date Time Variable Figure 8 23 Add or subtract duration step 3 his Date and Time Wizard Step 3 of 3 E Enter a name for the result variable and optionally a label The format for the input datetime variable will be applied to the result variable Calculation PurDate Support Years Result Variable SupEndDate Wariable Label End date for support Create the variable now O Paste the syntax into the syntax window pin Enter a name for Result Variable This cannot be the name of an existing variable Optionally you can m Assign a descriptive variable label to the new variable Subtract Date Format Variables To su
465. rom dialogs After last commana Syntax Color Coding You can turn color coding of commands subcommands keywords keyword values and comments off or on and you can specify the font style and color for each 333 Options Error Color Coding You can turn color coding of certain syntactical errors off or on and you can specify the font style and color used Both the command name and the text within the command containing the error are color coded and you can choose different styles for each For more information see the topic Color Coding in Chapter 13 on p 272 Auto Complete Settings You can turn automatic display of the auto complete control off or on The auto complete control can always be displayed by pressing Ctrl Spacebar For more information see the topic Auto Completion in Chapter 13 on p 272 Indent size Specifies the number of spaces in an indent The setting applies to indenting selected lines of syntax as well as to automatic indentation Gutter These options specify the default behavior for showing or hiding line numbers and command spans within the Syntax Editor s gutter the region to the left of the text pane that is reserved for line numbers bookmarks breakpoints and command spans Command spans are icons that provide visual indicators of the start and end of a command Panes Display the navigation pane This specifies the default for showing or hiding the navigation pane The navigati
466. rom many procedures Not available for string variables Old gt New The list of specifications that will be used to recode the variable s You can add change and remove specifications from the list The list is automatically sorted based on the old value specification using the following order single values missing values ranges and all other values If you change a recode specification on the list the procedure automatically re sorts the list if necessary to maintain this order Figure 8 9 Old and New Values dialog box EH Recode into Same Variables Old and New Values rOld Value New Value ve 30 System missing System missing Old gt New System or user missing Lowest thru 24999 gt 1 25000 thru 49999 gt 2 50000 thru 74999 gt 3 75000 thru Highest gt 4 Range Range LOVVEST through value Range value through HIGHEST as All other values Cag et 136 Chapter 8 Recode into Different Variables The Recode into Different Variables dialog box allows you to reassign the values of existing variables or collapse ranges of existing values into new values for a new variable For example you could collapse salaries into a new variable containing salary range categories m You can recode numeric and string variables m You can recode numeric variables into string variables and vice versa m Ifyou select multiple variables they must all be
467. roperties The edited cell formats will remain intact even when you apply a new TableLook For more information see the topic Cell properties on p 241 Optionally you can reset all cells to the cell formats that are defined by the current TableLook This resets any cells that have been edited If As Displayed is selected in the TableLook Files list any edited cells are reset to the current table properties m Only table properties defined in the Table Properties dialog are saved in TableLooks TableLooks do not include individual cell modifications For more information see the topic To edit or create a TableLook on p 233 Note TableLooks created in earlier versions of IBM SPSS Statistics cannot be used in version 16 0 or later To apply a TableLook gt Activate a pivot table gt From the menus choose Format gt TableLooks Figure 11 7 TableLooks dialog box RE TableLooks TableLook lt System Default gt TableLook Files Sample Table Title xAs Displayed 4 SAs Dni Default Academic O m i AvantGarde bbbb1 bbbb2 BlueYellowContrast aaa aaaa BlueYellowContrastAlternate dddd ccce aaaal aaaa aaaal aaaaz Boxed ddddt ceccl 0 abed 212 4 abed cccc2 88 6 abed 83 65 abed Compact CompactAcademic group dddd2 ceecl 105 abed 58 53 abed CompactAcademicTimesRoman 00002 11 42 abed 205 abed CompactBoxed HU poo Contrast Table Caption ContrastAlternate
468. ropriate ways when the dialog itself is resized Controls such as source and target lists automatically expand to fill the available space below them 348 Chapter 19 Building the Syntax Template gt The syntax template specifies the command syntax that will be generated by the custom dialog A single custom dialog can generate command syntax for any number of built in IBM SPSS Statistics commands or extension commands The syntax template may consist of static text that is always generated and control identifiers that are replaced at run time with the values of the associated custom dialog controls For example command names and subcommand specifications that don t depend on user input would be static text whereas the set of variables specified in a target list would be represented with the control identifier for the target list control To Build the Syntax Template From the menus in the Custom Dialog Builder choose Edit gt Syntax Template Or click the ellipsis button in the Syntax property field in Dialog Properties For static command syntax that does not depend on user specified values enter the syntax as you would in the Syntax Editor The Syntax Template dialog box supports the auto completion and color coding features of the Syntax Editor For more information see the topic Using the Syntax Editor in Chapter 13 on p 269 Add control identifiers of the form Identifier at the locations where you want t
469. roximate the specified percentage The more cases there are in the data file the closer the percentage of cases selected is to the specified percentage Text Wizard Step 4 Delimited Files Figure 3 17 Text Wizard Step 4 for delimited files E Text Import Wizard Delimited Step 4 of 6 rYvhich delimiters appear between variables hat is the text qualifier E Tab IM Space None E Comma E Semicolon Single quote E Other Double quote Other Data preview 5 Job_category Region Division Current_sales Pre 570000 402000 2 262800 1324 321000 360000 262800 334800 N ONDARRUN NVN NNN NNN NNNSN This step displays the Text Wizard s best guess on how to read the data file and allows you to modify how the Text Wizard will read variables from the data file Which delimiters appear between variables Indicates the characters or symbols that separate data values You can select any combination of spaces commas semicolons tabs or other characters Multiple consecutive delimiters without intervening data values are treated as missing values What is the text qualifier Characters used to enclose values that contain delimiter characters For example if a comma is the delimiter values that contain commas will be read incorrectly unless there is a text qualifier enclosing the value preventing the commas in the value from being interpreted as delimiter
470. rules For more information see the topic Variable names in Chapter 5 on p 69 Models for Ensembles The model for an ensemble provides information about the component models in the ensemble and the performance of the ensemble as a whole 256 Chapter 12 Figure 12 4 Model Summary view Score new data using Ensemble Combining rule voting nl E Show All Combining rules Model Summary Target Previously defaulted Quality Worse Better wong 74 12 Y Bava 73 86 73 86 Reference 7118 25 50 75 0 100 Accuracy Diversity Worse Better lp 0 00 0 25 0 50 0 75 1 00 The main view independent toolbar allows you to choose whether to use the ensemble or a reference model for scoring If the ensemble is used for scoring you can also select the combining rule These changes do not require model re execution however these choices are saved to the model for scoring and or downstream model evaluation They also affect PMML exported from the ensemble viewer Combining Rule When scoring an ensemble this is the rule used to combine the predicted values from the base models to compute the ensemble score value m Ensemble predicted values for categorical targets can be combined using voting highest probability or highest mean probability Voting selects the category that has the highest probability most often across the base models Highest probability selects the categor
471. s 0 0 0 cece tne teens 287 15 Scoring data with predictive models 290 Scoring Wizard 291 Matching model fields to dataset fields 0 0 0 c cece eee romo 293 Selecting scoring functions 12 0 eect eee 295 Scoring the active dataset 0 20 000s ccc ttt teen eee 297 Merging model and transformation XML files 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 298 16 Utilities 300 Variable information 20 00 0 ccc tenet teens 300 Data Tile COMMENTS in ieai ai eddik ene agi e ened tae ae 301 Variable Sets cesos da rd bee deed ea eed dog 301 Defining variable sets 2 2 0 0 ccc ene n teen eee 301 Using variable sets to show and hide variables 0000 cece eee eee eee 302 Reordering target variable lists 2 2 nannan naaa 304 Working with extension bundles 0 00 0 cece eee eect eee ee 304 Creating extension bundles 0 00 cece cette ete eee 304 Installing extension bundles 00000 cece cette eens 306 Viewing installed extension bundles 0 0000 cee cece eee eee 309 17 Options 311 General options ooo 312 Viewer Options so sscesieeaisc aia acre die maige die Gane eed dead a ara ag nae owl ard alae ede 314 Data Options ooo 316 Changing the default variable view 00 00 c ccc et eee eae 318 xiv C m enc OPTIONS A da aw id ad a adds 319 To create custom currency formats 0000 c cette eee 320 Olitput label Options
472. s 176 Chapter 9 Aggregate Data Aggregate Function This dialog box specifies the function to use to calculate aggregated data values for selected variables on the Aggregate Variables list in the Aggregate Data dialog box Aggregate functions include Summary functions for numeric variables including mean median standard deviation and sum Number of cases including unweighted weighted nonmissing and missing m Percentage or fraction of values above or below a specified value m Percentage or fraction of values inside or outside of a specified range Figure 9 8 Aggregate Function dialog box s Aggregate Data Aggregate Function Summary Statistics Specific Values Number of cases Mean O First Weighted 9 Median O Last O Weighted missing Sum Minimum Unweighted Standard Deviation Maximum Unweighted missing Percentages Above Below Inside Outside Fractions Above O Below Inside Outside EC Aggregate Data Variable Name and Label Aggregate Data assigns default variable names for the aggregated variables in the new data file This dialog box enables you to change the variable name for the selected variable on the Aggregate Variables list and provide a descriptive variable label For more information see the topic Variable names in Chapter 5 on p 69 177 File Handling and File Transformations Figure 9 9 Variable Name and Label dialog box Es Aggregat
473. s Dot Valid values include numbers that use a comma as a decimal indicator and periods as thousands separators Note Values that contain invalid characters for the selected format will be treated as missing Values that contain any of the specified delimiters will be treated as multiple values Text Wizard Step 6 Figure 3 20 Text Wizard Step 6 H Text Import Wizard Step 6 of 6 You have successfully defined the format of your text file mould you like to save this file format for future use Yes O No Would you like to paste the syntax Yes Y Cache data locally O No Press the Finish button to complete the text import wizard pData preview 5 Job_category Region Division Travel Current_sales Pre 570000 402000 2 262800 1324 321000 360000 262800 42nn DO NODE WN 36 Chapter 3 This is the final step of the Text Wizard You can save your specifications in a file for use when importing similar text data files You can also paste the syntax generated by the Text Wizard into a syntax window You can then customize and or save the syntax for use in other sessions or in production jobs Cache data locally A data cache is a complete copy of the data file stored in temporary disk space Caching the data file can improve performance Reading IBM SPSS Data Collection Data gt On Microsoft Windows operating systems you can read data from IBM SPSS Da
474. s Missing values Stata extended missing values are converted to system missing values Date conversion Stata date format values are converted to SPSS Statistics DATE format d m y values Stata time series date format values weeks months quarters and so on are converted to simple numeric F format preserving the original internal integer value which is the number of weeks months quarters and so on since the start of 1960 Reading Database Files You can read data from any database format for which you have a database driver In local analysis mode the necessary drivers must be installed on your local computer In distributed analysis mode available with IBM SPSS Statistics Server the drivers must be installed on the remote server For more information see the topic Distributed Analysis Mode in Chapter 4 on p 61 Note If you are running the Windows 64 bit version of SPSS Statistics you cannot read Excel Access or dBASE database sources even though they may appear on the list of available database sources The 32 bit ODBC drivers for these products are not compatible To Read Database Files gt From the menus choose File gt Open Database gt New Query Select the data source If necessary depending on the data source select the database file and or enter a login name password and other information Select the table s and fields For OLE DB data sources available only on Windows op
475. s OK or Run Runs the procedure After you select your variables and choose any additional specifications click OK to run the procedure and close the dialog box Some dialogs have a Run button instead of the OK button Paste Generates command syntax from the dialog box selections and pastes the syntax into a syntax window You can then customize the commands with additional features that are not available from dialog boxes Reset Deselects any variables in the selected variable list s and resets all specifications in the dialog box and any subdialog boxes to the default state 5 Overview Cancel Cancels any changes that were made in the dialog box settings since the last time it was opened and closes the dialog box Within a session dialog box settings are persistent A dialog box retains your last set of specifications until you override them Help Provides context sensitive Help This control takes you to a Help window that contains information about the current dialog box Selecting variables To select a single variable simply select it in the source variable list and drag and drop it into the target variable list You can also use arrow button to move variables from the source list to the target lists If there is only one target variable list you can double click individual variables to move them from the source list to the target list You can also select multiple variables m To select multiple variables that are
476. s 142 numeric format 71 73 OK button 4 OMS 377 399 command identifiers 381 controlling table pivots 383 393 Excel format 383 excluding output from the Viewer 388 IBM SPSS Statistics data file format 383 388 output object types 379 PDF format 383 SAV file format 383 388 table subtypes 381 text format 383 using XSLT with OXML 400 variable names in SAV files 395 Word format 383 424 Index XML 383 395 online Help 8 Statistics Coach 6 opening files 10 14 27 controlling default file locations 327 data files 10 11 dBASE files 10 12 Excel files 10 12 Lotus 1 2 3 files 10 spreadsheet files 10 12 Stata files 13 SYSTAT files 10 tab delimited files 10 text data files 27 options 312 314 316 319 321 322 325 327 329 332 charts 322 currency 319 data 316 general 312 multiple imputation 334 output labels 321 pivot table look 325 scripts 329 syntax editor 332 temporary directory 327 two digit years 316 Variable View 318 Viewer 314 ordinal 70 measurement level 70 99 outer join 19 outline 204 205 changing levels 205 collapsing 204 expanding 204 in Viewer 204 output 202 204 208 209 224 314 alignment 204 314 centering 204 314 changing output language 312 copying 203 deleting 203 exporting 209 hiding 203 moving 203 pasting into other applications 208 saving 224 showing 203 Viewer 202 Output Management System OMS 377 399 outp
477. s 239 246 displaying hidden borders 246 break variables in Aggregate Data 173 breakpoints syntax editor 273 caching 59 active file 59 Cancel button 4 captions 243 244 cases 85 184 finding duplicates 114 finding in Data Editor 86 inserting new cases 85 restructuring into variables 184 selecting subsets 178 180 181 sorting 165 weighting 182 Index categorical data 99 converting interval data to discrete categories 117 cell properties 241 242 cells in pivot tables 237 244 246 formats 237 hiding 231 selecting 247 showing 231 widths 246 centered moving average function 162 centering output 204 314 Chart Builder 280 gallery 281 chart creation 280 Chart Editor 284 properties 285 chart options 322 charts 203 209 249 280 322 aspect ratio 322 Chart Builder 280 creating 280 creating from pivot tables 249 exporting 209 hiding 203 missing values 287 overview 280 size 287 templates 287 322 wrapping panels 287 collapsing categories 117 color coding syntax editor 272 colors in pivot tables 239 borders 239 column width 76 233 246 325 controlling default width 325 controlling maximum width 233 controlling width for wrapped text 233 in Data Editor 76 pivot tables 246 columns 246 247 changing width in pivot tables 246 selecting in pivot tables 247 COMMA format 71 73 comma delimited files 27 command identifiers 381 command language 265 command line
478. s a line is inserted in the text file for each graphic indicating the image filename m None Graphics Only Available export formats include EPS JPEG TIFF PNG and BMP On Windows operating systems EMF enhanced metafile format is also available Output Management System You can also automatically export all output or user specified types of output as Word Excel PDF HTML text or IBM SPSS Statistics format data files For more information see the topic Output Management System in Chapter 21 on p 377 HTML Options The following options are available for exporting output in HTML format Layers in pivot tables By default inclusion or exclusion of pivot table layers is controlled by the table properties for each pivot table You can override this setting and include all layers or exclude all but the currently visible layer For more information see the topic Table properties printing in Chapter 11 on p 239 Include footnotes and captions Controls the inclusion or exclusion of all pivot table footnotes and captions Views of Models By default inclusion or exclusion of model views is controlled by the model properties for each model You can override this setting and include all views or exclude all but the currently visible view For more information see the topic Model properties in Chapter 12 on p 252 Note all model views including tables are exported as graphics Note For HTML you can also control the imag
479. s or both Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States other countries or both Microsoft Windows Windows NT and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States other countries or both UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries This product uses WinWrap Basic Copyright 1993 2007 Polar Engineering and Consulting http www winwrap com Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies Adobe product screenshot s reprinted with permission from Adobe Systems Incorporated 418 Appendix B Microsoft product screenshot s reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation Access Microsoft 14 active file 58 59 caching 59 creating a temporary active file 59 virtual active file 58 active window 2 adding group labels 227 aggregating data 173 aggregate functions 176 variable names and labels 176 algorithms 8 alignment 76 204 314 in Data Editor 76 output 204 314 alternating row colors pivot tables 237 aspect ratio 322 attributes custom variable attributes 77 automated production 368 autoscripts 329 403 associating with viewer objects 405 Basic 411 creating 404 trigger events 403 background color 241 banding 117 basic steps 6 binning 117 Blom estimates 142 BMP files 209 219 exporting charts 209 219 bookmarks syntax editor 274 border
480. s Enter or select another cell To enter non numeric data Double click a variable name at the top of the column in Data View or click the Variable View tab Click the button in the Type cell for the variable Select the data type in the Variable Type dialog box Click OK Double click the row number or click the Data View tab vy v v v Yy Enter the data in the column for the newly defined variable To use value labels for data entry gt If value labels aren t currently displayed in Data View from the menus choose View gt Value Labels Click the cell in which you want to enter the value Choose a value label from the drop down list The value is entered and the value label is displayed in the cell Note This process works only if you have defined value labels for the variable Data value restrictions in the data editor The defined variable type and width determine the type of value that can be entered in the cell in Data View m If you type a character that is not allowed by the defined variable type the character is not entered For string variables characters beyond the defined width are not allowed m For numeric variables integer values that exceed the defined width can be entered but the Data Editor displays either scientific notation or a portion of the value followed by an ellipsis to indicate that the value is wider than the defined width To display the value in the cell change the defined
481. s between values CSV format data files exported from Excel use a double quotation mark as a text qualifier The text qualifier appears at both the beginning and the end of the value enclosing the entire value 33 Data Files Text Wizard Step 4 Fixed Width Files Figure 3 18 Text Wizard Step 4 for fixed width files EH Text Import Wizard Fixed Width Step 4 of 6 Specify where each variable begins The first column is column 0 To INSERT a variable break line click at the desired position in the ruler or data area Alternatively move to the position using the arrow keys or by typing the column number then press the Insert Break button To MOVE a variable break line drag it to the new position To DELETE a variable break line select it or type its position Then press the Delete key or the Delete Break button Column Number Insert Break Delete Break Current Variable Width g9 Coen o This step displays the Text Wizard s best guess on how to read the data file and allows you to modify how the Text Wizard will read variables from the data file Vertical lines in the preview window indicate where the Text Wizard currently thinks each variable begins in the file Insert move and delete variable break lines as necessary to separate variables If multiple lines are used for each case the data will be displayed as one line for each case with subsequent lines appended to the end of the line N
482. s blank spaces e Beas xs einn cancer C ner As a general rule the basic data type string or numeric for the variable should match the basic data type of the database field If there is a data type mismatch that cannot be resolved by the database an error results and no data is exported to the database For example if you export a string variable to a database field with a numeric data type for example double real integer an error will result if any values of the string variable contain non numeric characters The letter a in the icon next to a variable denotes a string variable You cannot modify the field name type or width The original database field attributes are preserved only the values are replaced Adding New Fields To add new fields to an existing database table gt In the Choose how to export the data panel of the Export to Database Wizard select Add new fields to an existing table gt In the Select a table or view panel select the database table gt In the Match cases to records panel match the variables that uniquely identify each case to the corresponding database field names 53 Data Files gt Drag and drop the variables that you want to add as new fields to the Source of values column Figure 3 28 Export to Database Wizard adding new fields to an existing table E Export to Database Wizard Select variables to store in new fields y To store a var
483. s can be copied and pasted into other applications such as a word processing program or a spreadsheet You can paste output in a variety of formats Depending on the target application and the selected output object s some or all of the following formats may be available Metafile WMF and EMF metafile format These formats are available only on Windows operating systems RTF rich text format Multiple selected objects text output and pivot tables can be copied and pasted in RTF format For pivot tables in most applications this means that the tables are pasted as tables that can then be edited in the other application Pivot tables that are too wide for the document width will either be wrapped scaled down to fit the document width or left unchanged depending on the pivot table options settings For more information see the topic Pivot table options in Chapter 17 on p 325 Note Microsoft Word may not display extremely wide tables properly Image JPG and PNG image formats BIFF Pivot tables and text output can be pasted into a spreadsheet in BIFF format Numbers in pivot tables retain numeric precision This format is available only on Windows operating systems Text Pivot tables and text output can be copied and pasted as text This process can be useful for applications such as e mail where the application can accept or transmit only text If the target application supports multiple available formats it may have a Paste Specia
484. s dialog box to m Specify the output format m Specify the image format for HTML and Output XML output formats m Specify what table dimension elements should go into the row dimension E Include a variable that identifies the sequential table number that is the source for each case for IBM SPSS Statistics data file format To specify OMS options Click Options in the Output Management System Control Panel 384 Chapter 21 Figure 21 4 OMS Options dialog box R OMS Options Format SPSS Statistic ics Data Fie Y rGraphics Images m Table Pivots None All dimensions in a single row List of positions List of dimension names Table Number Variable TableNumber_ es Format Excel Excel 97 2003 format Pivot table rows columns and cells are exported as Excel rows columns and cells with all formatting attributes intact for example cell borders font styles and background colors Text output is exported with all font attributes intact Each line in the text output is a row in the Excel file with the entire contents of the line contained in a single cell Charts tree diagrams and model views are included in PNG format HTML Output objects that would be pivot tables in the Viewer are converted to simple HTML tables No TableLook attributes font characteristics border styles colors etc are supported Text output objects are tagged lt PRE gt in the HTML Charts tr
485. s exported in space separated format For charts tree diagrams and model views a line is inserted in the text file for each graphic indicating the image filename Print Viewer file on completion Sends the final Viewer output file to the printer on completion of the production job This option is not available when running a production job in the background on a remote server HTML options Table Options No table options are available for HTML format All pivot tables are converted to HTML tables Image Options The available image types are EPS JPEG TIFF PNG and BMP On Windows operating systems EMF enhanced metafile format is also available You can also scale the image size from 1 to 200 PowerPoint options Table Options You can use the Viewer outline entries as slide titles Each slide contains a single output item The title is formed from the outline entry for the item in the outline pane of the Viewer 371 Production jobs Image Options You can scale the image size from 1 to 200 All images are exported to PowerPoint in TIFF format Note PowerPoint format is only available on Windows operating systems and requires PowerPoint 97 or later PDF options Embed bookmarks This option includes bookmarks in the PDF document that correspond to the Viewer outline entries Like the Viewer outline pane bookmarks can make 1t much easier to navigate documents with a large number of output objects Embed fonts
486. s intact for example cell borders font styles and background colors Text output is exported with all font attributes intact Each line in the text output is a row in the Excel file with the entire contents of the line contained in a single cell Charts tree diagrams and model views are included in PNG format m HTML htm Pivot tables are exported as HTML tables Text output is exported as preformatted HTML Charts tree diagrams and model views are embedded by reference and you should export charts in a suitable format for inclusion in HTML documents for example PNG and JPEG m Portable Document Format pdf All output is exported as it appears in Print Preview with all formatting attributes intact PowerPoint file ppt Pivot tables are exported as Word tables and are embedded on separate slides in the PowerPoint file with one slide for each pivot table All formatting attributes of the pivot table are retained for example cell borders font styles and background colors 211 Working with Output Charts tree diagrams and model views are exported in TIFF format Text output is not included Export to PowerPoint is available only on Windows operating systems m Text txt Text output formats include plain text UTF 8 and UTF 16 Pivot tables can be exported in tab separated or space separated format All text output is exported in space separated format For charts tree diagrams and model view
487. s of moment structures uses structural equation modeling to confirm and explain conceptual models that involve attitudes perceptions and other factors that drive behavior About IBM Business Analytics IBM Business Analytics software delivers complete consistent and accurate information that decision makers trust to improve business performance A comprehensive portfolio of business intelligence predictive analytics financial performance and strategy management and analytic applications provides clear immediate and actionable insights into current performance and the ability to predict future outcomes Combined with rich industry solutions proven practices and professional services organizations of every size can drive the highest productivity confidently automate decisions and deliver better results As part of this portfolio IBM SPSS Predictive Analytics software helps organizations predict future events and proactively act upon that insight to drive better business outcomes Commercial government and academic customers worldwide rely on IBM SPSS technology as a competitive advantage in attracting retaining and growing customers while reducing fraud and mitigating risk By incorporating IBM SPSS software into their daily operations organizations become predictive enterprises able to direct and automate decisions to meet business goals and achieve iv measurable competitive advantage For further information or to reach a represen
488. s of the axes or legends such as the scale range click Element Properties 283 Overview of the chart facility Figure 14 3 Element Properties dialog box X Axis1 Bar1 Y Axis1 Bar1 E Display error bars rError Bars Represent 9 Confidence intervals Bar Style In the Edit Properties Of list select the item you want to change For information about the specific properties click Help After making any changes click Apply If you need to add more variables to the chart for example for clustering or paneling click the Groups Point ID tab in the Chart Builder dialog box and select one or more options Then drag categorical variables to the new drop zones that appear on the canvas If you want to transpose the chart for example to make the bars horizontal click the Basic Elements tab and then click Transpose Click OK to create the chart The chart is displayed in the Viewer 284 Chapter 14 Figure 14 4 Bar chart displayed in Viewer window HE Output Viewer Cuy File Edit Yiew Data Transform Insert Format Analyze Graphs Utilities Add ons Window Help a fE Output S E GGraph Gender M Female 60 000 E Male 40 000 Mean Current Salary Clerical Custodial Manager Employment Category Editing Charts gt gt The Chart Editor provides a powerful easy to use environment where you can customize your charts and explore your dat
489. s than requested If there are multiple identical values at a cutpoint they will all go into the same interval so the actual percentages may not always be exactly equal Cutpoints at Mean and Selected Standard Deviations Based on Scanned Cases Generates binned categories based on the values of the mean and standard deviation of the distribution of the variable m If you don t select any of the standard deviation intervals two binned categories will be created with the mean as the cutpoint dividing the bins m You can select any combination of standard deviation intervals based on one two and or three standard deviations For example selecting all three would result in eight binned categories six bins in one standard deviation intervals and two bins for cases more than three standard deviations above and below the mean In a normal distribution 68 of the cases fall within one standard deviation of the mean 95 within two standard deviations and 99 within three standard deviations Creating binned categories based on standard deviations may result in some defined bins outside of the actual data range and even outside of the range of possible data values for example a negative salary range Note Calculations of percentiles and standard deviations are based on the scanned cases If you limit the number of cases scanned the resulting bins may not contain the proportion of cases that you wanted in those bins particularly if the d
490. scripts will be applied The Objects column in the Objects and Scripts grid displays a list of the objects associated with the selected command The Script column displays any existing script for the selected command Specify a script for any of the items shown in the Objects column Click on the corresponding Script cell Enter the path to the script or click the ellipsis button to browse for the script Specify the language whose executable will be used to run the script Note The selected language is not affected by changing the default script language Click Apply or OK To remove autoscript associations In the Objects and Scripts grid click on the cell in the Script column corresponding to the script to dissociate Delete the path to the script and then click on any other cell in the Objects and Scripts grid Click Apply or OK 332 Chapter 17 Syntax editor options Figure 17 11 Options dialog box Syntax Editor tab Syntax Color Coding Auto Complete Settings Display syntax color coding Automatically display the auto complete control me BG Ge Indent size spaces LA seon 5 E il D ome E ouir Display line numbering Values Display command spans Comments Quotes Panes Display validation color coding Display the navigation pane Commands e u T Automatically open Error Tracking pane when errors are found ERAS LJ a T Optimize for right to left languages Paste syntax f
491. se field names Replacing Values in Existing Fields To replace values of existing fields in a database gt In the Choose how to export the data panel of the Export to Database Wizard select Replace values in existing fields gt Inthe Select a table or view panel select the database table 52 Chapter 3 gt In the Match cases to records panel match the variables that uniquely identify each case to the corresponding database field names For each field for which you want to replace values drag and drop the variable that contains the new values into the Source of values column next to the corresponding database field name Figure 3 27 Export to Database Wizard replacing values of existing fields fii Export to Database Wizard Select variables to store in existing fields y To replace the values in table field with the values of a dataset variable place the variable in the cell next to the field name Use the arrow buttons or drag and drop Match cases to records ID SurveySubset ID SPSS Statistics SurveySubset E Wireless E Multline Voice 4 JRecodedWreless weess O L Pager Internet Calleri amp SurveyDate da Comments Table SurveySubset Source of values Table fields m 1 C Right click on a variable for more information User Missing Values 9 Export as valid values O Export numeric user missing values as nulls and export string user missing values a
492. sed outline layers are not printed Selection Prints only items that are currently selected in the outline and or contents panes To Print Output and Charts gt Make the Viewer the active window click anywhere in the window From the menus choose File gt Print Select the print settings that you want Click OK to print Print Preview Print Preview shows you what will print on each page for Viewer documents It is a good idea to check Print Preview before actually printing a Viewer document because Print Preview shows you items that may not be visible by looking at the contents pane of the Viewer including m Page breaks m Hidden layers of pivot tables m Breaks in wide tables m Headers and footers that are printed on each page 221 Working with Output Figure 10 11 Print Preview Araceli o rado A rg E EP wiry ar 1 eb If any output is currently selected in the Viewer the preview displays only the selected output To view a preview for all output make sure nothing is selected in the Viewer Page Attributes Headers and Footers Headers and footers are the information that is printed at the top and bottom of each page You can enter any text that you want to use as headers and footers You can also use the toolbar in the middle of the dialog box to insert Date and time Page numbers Viewer filename Outline heading labels Page titles and subtitles 222 Chapter 1
493. ses would receive the same value for a new aggregate variable that represents average age Figure 9 7 Aggregate Data dialog box E Aegregate Data Break Variable s i 8E Marital status marital Years at current ad amp Gender gender E Household income i dll Income category in ra ggregated Variables E Price of primary ve dll Primary vehicle pric Level of education Years with current Retired retire al Years with current Job satistaction job 8E Number of people in Wireless service Functio J Name 3 Label Multiple lines multline j y Voice mail voice V Number of cases Name pSave Summaries of Variable s age_mean MEAN age income_mean MEAN income income_median MEDIANCincome Add aggregated variables to active dataset Create a new dataset containing only the aggregated variables Dataset name jaggregate_data Write a new data file containing only the aggregated variables C Program Files SPSSinc PASVyStatistic Options for Wery Large Datasets E File is already sorted on break variable s E Sort file before aggregating Lox J easte Reset cancel Help Break Variable s Cases are grouped together based on the values of the break variables Each unique combination of break variable values defines a group When creating a new aggregated data file all break variables are saved in the new file with
494. small nonnegative integer values and does not have a large number of different values 4 A nominal level is one where the variable values do not have a natural ranking for example names of countries An ordinal level is one where the variable values have a natural order but differences between values are not meaningful for example importance of a pol tical position coded low medium and high A scale level is one where the differences between variable values are comparable for example age in years The suggested measurement level is based on empirical rules and is not a substitute for user judgment SPSS Statistics uses the measurement level in some cases to determine whether the variable defines categories in a table or graph or is to be summarized Ges one Co Note Values defined as representing missing values are not included in the evaluation for measurement level For example the explanation for the suggested measurement level may indicate that the suggestion is in part based on the fact that the variable contains no negative values whereas it may in fact contain negative values but those values are already defined as missing values Click Continue to accept the suggested level of measurement or Cancel to leave the measurement level unchanged Custom Variable Attributes The Attributes button in Define Variable Properties opens the Custom Variable Attributes dialog box In addition to the standa
495. so open the Radio Group Properties dialog by double clicking the Radio Group control on the canvas Syntax Specifies command syntax that is generated by this control at run time and can be inserted in the syntax template m You can specify any valid command syntax and you can use n for line breaks m The value ThisValue specifies the run time value of the radio button group which is the value of the Syntax property for the selected radio button This is the default If the Syntax property includes 3 ThisValue and no syntax is generated by the selected radio button then the radio button group does not generate any command syntax Defining Radio Buttons The Radio Button Group Properties dialog box allows you to specify a group of radio buttons Identifier A unique identifier for the radio button Name The name that appears next to the radio button The name is a required field ToolTip Optional ToolTip text that appears when the user hovers over the control Mnemonic Key An optional character in the name to use as a mnemonic The specified character must exist in the name 361 Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs Nested Group Specifies whether other controls can be nested under this radio button The default is false When the nested group property is set to true a rectangular drop zone is displayed nested and indented under the associated radio button The following controls can be nested under a radio button check
496. sorted in descending order of frequency thus the topmost predictor is the one that is used in the greatest number of component models and the bottommost one is the one that was used in the fewest The top 10 predictors are shown Predictors that appear most frequently are typically the most important This plot is not useful for methods in which the predictor set cannot vary across component models 260 Chapter 12 Component Model Accuracy Figure 12 8 Component Model Accuracy view Component Model Accuracy Ensemble Voting mr Naive Model Reference Model Accuracy Component Models The chart is a dot plot of predictive accuracy for component models Each dot represents one or more component models with the level of accuracy plotted on the y axis Hover over any dot to obtain information on the corresponding individual component model Reference lines The plot displays color coded lines for the ensemble as well as the reference model and naive models A checkmark appears next to the line corresponding to the model that will be used for scoring Interactivity The chart updates if you change the combining rule Boosted ensembles A line chart is displayed for boosted ensembles 261 Models Figure 12 9 Ensemble Accuracy view boosted ensemble Ensemble Accuracy 100 0 D gt a lt o 50 0 E Fl E o 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Component Models 262 Chapter 12 Component Model Det
497. splayed views This setting can cause the total number of rows in a displayed view to exceed the specified maximum number of rows to display Figure 11 10 Displayed rows with default tolerance Rows 1 through 10 of 24 E E vw Count Percent Income Under 25 Job Highly dissatisfied 350 29 8 category in satisfaction thousands Somewhat dissatisfied 316 26 9 Neutral Somewhat satisfied 157 13 4 Highly satisfied 101 8 6 Total 1174 Job Highly dissatisfied 5 satisfaction Somewhat dissatisfied 5 4 31 34 Neutral 542 22 7 236 Chapter 11 Figure 11 11 Tolerance set based on number of rows in inner row dimension group Rows 1 through 12 of 24 E Pl v Percent Herel in mis A 350 29 0 thousands tor 5 101 dos 25 49 Job satisfaction Table properties footnotes The properties of footnote markers include style and position in relation to text m The style of footnote markers is either numbers 1 2 3 or letters a b c m The footnote markers can be attached to text as superscripts or subscripts Figure 11 12 Table Properties dialog box Footnotes tab Table Properties Number Format Alphabetic Numeric Marker Position Superscript O Subscript Sample 12345 67 237 Pivot tables To change footnote marker properties Click the Footnotes tab Select a footnote number format gt Select
498. ssification Data View A Variable View m In the table the variable labeled Minority Classification defines the layers In the data file two additional variables are created one variable that identifies the layer element and one variable that identifies the categories of the layer element m As with the variables that are created from the row elements the variables that are created from the layer elements are string variables with generic variable names the prefix Var followed by a sequential number Data files created from multiple tables When multiple tables are routed to the same data file each table is added to the data file in a fashion that is similar to merging data files by adding cases from one data file to another data file Data menu Merge Files Add Cases m Each subsequent table will always add cases to the data file m Ifcolumn labels in the tables differ each table may also add variables to the data file with missing values for cases from other tables that don t have an identically labeled column 391 Output Management System Example Multiple Tables with the Same Column Labels Multiple tables that contain the same column labels will typically produce the most immediately useful data files data files that don t require additional manipulation For example two or more frequency tables from the Frequencies procedure will all have identical column labels Figure 21 9 Two tables with identic
499. st one non integer Continuous value 71 Data Editor Condition Measurement Level Variable contains at least one negative value Continuous Variable contains no valid values less than Continuous 10 000 Variable has N or more valid unique values Continuous Variable has no valid values less than 10 Continuous Variable has less than N valid unique values Nominal N is a user specified cut off value The default is 24 m You can change the cutoff value in the Options dialog box For more information see the topic Data Options in Chapter 17 on p 316 m The Define Variable Properties dialog box available from the Data menu can help you assign the correct measurement level For more information see the topic Assigning the Measurement Level in Chapter 7 on p 99 Variable type Variable Type specifies the data type for each variable By default all new variables are assumed to be numeric You can use Variable Type to change the data type The contents of the Variable Type dialog box depend on the selected data type For some data types there are text boxes for width and number of decimals for other data types you can simply select a format from a scrollable list of examples Figure 5 3 Variable Type dialog box a Variable Type Numeric a te Comma 5a HR RE Dot SARA ARA z ARR ARR HH Scientific notation hom Date SHAH ARR A Dollar DARE HHH RRR RRR Cust
500. stical Procedures Companion written by Marija Norusis and published by Prentice Hall are available as suggested supplemental material These publications cover statistical procedures in the SPSS Statistics Base module Advanced Statistics module and Regression module Whether you are just getting starting in data analysis or are ready for advanced applications these books will help you make best use of the capabilities found within the IBM SPSSO Statistics offering For additional information including publication contents and sample chapters please see the author s website ht1p www norusis com Contents 1 Overview 1 What s new inversion 20 oococccoco teens 1 WINDOWS oi a A A A AA A aan 1 Designated window versus active window 0 0 cece ee eee ene 2 Status Bal oasis ando maar ae 3 Dialog boxes 24 d 4 0 idee Greta A bea e A ae hae eerie 3 Variable names and variable labels in dialog box lists 00 0 c eee eee eee 3 Resizing dialog DOX S 1 ke eee eee ene ete e enn een ene 4 Dialog box Controls lt lt 2 ccs scxce ae eee ee Ade Altea Sac eel d Ak ee a eer a E wee ee 4 Selecting variables 2 0 0 0 0c cece tenet teens 5 Data type measurement level and variable liSticONS o oooooooooooooooo 5 Getting information about variables in dialog boxes oooooooooococo ences 5 Basic steps in data analysis o oooooooocoo ttt tet ee es 6 Statistics CO Mica ico a Sues adl
501. stics sav IBM SPSS Statistics format m Data files saved in SPSS Statistics format cannot be read by versions of the software prior to version 7 5 Data files saved in Unicode mode cannot be read by releases of SPSS Statistics prior to version 16 0 For more information see the topic General options in Chapter 17 on p 312 40 Chapter 3 m When using data files with variable names longer than eight bytes in version 10 x or 11 x unique eight byte versions of variable names are used but the original variable names are preserved for use in release 12 0 or later In releases prior to 10 0 the original long variable names are lost if you save the data file m When using data files with string variables longer than 255 bytes in versions prior to release 13 0 those string variables are broken up into multiple 255 byte string variables Version 7 0 sav Version 7 0 format Data files saved in version 7 0 format can be read by version 7 0 and earlier versions but do not include defined multiple response sets or Data Entry for Windows information SPSS PC sys SPSS PC format If the data file contains more than 500 variables only the first 500 will be saved For variables with more than one defined user missing value additional user missing values will be recoded into the first defined user missing value This format is available only on Windows operating systems SPSS Statistics Portable por Portable format that ca
502. t a demographic a point in time or something else In data analysis conditions of interest are often referred to as factors When you analyze factors you have a complex data structure You may have information about a variable in more than one column in your data for example a column for each level of a factor or you may have information about a case in more than one row for example a row for each level of a factor The Restructure Data Wizard helps you to restructure files with a complex data structure The structure of the current file and the structure that you want in the new file determine the choices that you make in the wizard How are the data arranged in the current file The current data may be arranged so that factors are recorded in a separate variable in groups of cases or with the variable in groups of variables m Groups of cases Does the current file have variables and conditions recorded in separate columns For example var factor 8 1 9 1 3 2 1 2 In this example the first two rows are a case group because they are related They contain data for the same factor level In IBM SPSSO Statistics data analysis the factor is often referred to as a grouping variable when the data are structured this way m Groups of columns Does the current file have variables and conditions recorded in the same column For example var_1 var_2 8 3 9 1 In this example the two columns are a variable group because they a
503. t Percent El Frequencies Clerical 766 Title Custodial 57 Notes Manager 177 K Warnings Total 100 0 Clerical Custodial Manager Log Error 1 Command name comptue The first word in the line is not recognized as an SPSS command This command not executed Warming Warnings Text newvar An undefined variable name or a scratch or system variable was specified in a variable list which accepts only standard variables Check spelling and verify the existence of this variable This command not executed Command identifiers and table subtypes Command identifiers Command identifiers are available for all statistical and charting procedures and any other commands that produce blocks of output with their own identifiable heading in the outline pane of the Viewer These identifiers are usually but not always the same or similar to the procedure names on the menus and dialog box titles which are usually but not always similar to the underlying command names For example the command identifier for the Frequencies procedure is Frequencies and the underlying command name is also the same 382 Chapter 21 Labels gt There are however some cases where the procedure name and the command identifier and or the command name are not all that similar For example all of the procedures on the Nonparametric Tests submenu from the Analyze menu use the same underlying command and the command i
504. t are run as autoscripts and scripts that aren t run as autoscripts Any script appropriately coded can be used in either context For more information see the topic The scriptContext Object on p 411 Note To trigger a script from the application creation event see Startup Scripts Script Editor For version 16 0 and above the script editor for Basic no longer supports the following pre 16 0 features m The Script Analyze Graph Utilities and Add Ons menus m The ability to paste command syntax into a script window The SPSS Statistics Basic Script Editor is a standalone application that is launched from within SPSS Statistics via File gt New gt Script File gt Open gt Script or Utilities gt Create Edit AutoScript from a Viewer window It allows you to run scripts against the instance of SPSS Statistics from which it was launched Once opened the editor will remain open after exiting SPSS Statistics but scripts that use SPSS Statistics objects will no longer run File Types For version 16 0 and above the scripting facility will continue to support running and editing scripts with a file type of sbs By default new Basic scripts created with the SPSS Statistics Basic Script Editor have a file type of wwd 411 Scripting Facility Using External COM Clients For version 16 0 and above the program identifier for instantiating SPSS Statistics from an external COM client is SPSS Application16 Application objects should
505. t if you don t enter a different value This value is displayed when the production job prompts you for information You can replace or modify the value at runtime If you don t provide a default value don t use the silent keyword when running the production job with command line switches unless you also use the symbo1 switch to specify runtime values For more information see the topic Running production jobs from a command line on p 374 User Prompt The descriptive label that is displayed when the production job prompts you to enter information For example you could use the phrase What data file do you want to use to identify a field that requires a data filename Quote Value Encloses the default value or the value entered by the user in quotes For example file specifications should be enclosed in quotes Example command syntax file with user prompt symbols GET FILE datafile check the Quote value option to quote file specifications FREQUENCIES VARIABLES varlist do not check the Quote value option Run options You can run production jobs in two different ways Interactively The program runs unattended in a separate session on either your local computer or a remote server Your local computer must remain on and connected to the remote server if applicable until the job is complete In the background on a server The program runs in a separate session on a remote server Your local c
506. t rendering of lightweight tables in version 19 you will find comparable results for pivot tables in version 20 and higher without the limitations of lightweight tables Users who require compatibility with versions prior to 20 can choose to generate legacy tables referred to as full featured tables in version 19 For more information see the topic Pivot table options in Chapter 17 on p 325 Background disconnected execution for production jobs Production jobs can be run in a separate background session on a remote server You can submit the jobs from your local computer disconnect from the remote server reconnect later and retrieve your results You don t need to keep SPSS Statistics running on your local computer You don t even need to keep your local computer turned on Progress of remote jobs can be monitored and results retrieved from the new Background Job Status tab of the production facility dialog For more information see the topic Production jobs in Chapter 20 on p 368 Ordinal Targets for Generalized linear mixed models The Generalized linear mixed models procedure now uses the information in the ordering of categories of targets with the ordinal measurement level Ordinal targets are modeled with an ordinal multinomial distribution and the target is linearly related to the factors and covariates via one of a number of cumulative link functions This feature is available in the Advanced Statistics add on option Windows
507. t that appears when the user hovers over the control The specified text only appears when hovering over the title area ofthe control Hovering over one of the listed variables will display the variable name and label Mnemonic Key An optional character in the title to use as a keyboard shortcut to the control The character appears underlined in the title The shortcut is activated by pressing Alt mnemonic key The Mnemonic Key property is not supported on Mac Variable Transfers Specifies whether variables transferred from the source list to a target list remain in the source list Copy Variables or are removed from the source list Move Variables Variable Filter Allows you to filter the set of variables displayed in the control You can filter on variable type and measurement level and you can specify that multiple response sets are included in the variable list Click the ellipsis button to open the Filter dialog You can also open the Filter dialog by double clicking the Source List control on the canvas For more information see the topic Filtering Variable Lists on p 355 Note The Source List control cannot be added to a sub dialog Target List The Target List control provides a target for variables that are transferred from the source list Use of the Target List control assumes the presence of a Source List control You can specify that only a single variable can be transferred to the control or that multiple variables
508. t the label text m Ifsplit file processing is on split file group identification may be appended to the label m Labels that include information about variables or values are affected by the settings for the display of variable names labels and values value labels in the outline pane Edit menu Options Output Labels tab m Labels are affected by the current output language setting Edit menu Options General tab To copy OMS labels gt In the outline pane right click the outline entry for the item 401 gt Choose Copy OMS Label Output Management System As with command and subtype identifiers the labels must be in quotation marks and the entire list must be enclosed in square brackets as in IF LABI ELS Employment Category Education Level Chapter Scripting Facility The scripting facility allows you to automate tasks including m Opening and saving data files m Exporting charts as graphic files in a variety of formats Customizing output in the Viewer Scripting Languages The available scripting languages depend on your platform For Windows the available scripting languages are Basic which is installed with the Core system and the Python programming language For all other platforms scripting is available with the Python programming language To enable scripting with the Python programming language you must have Python and the IBM SPSS Statistics Integrati
509. t variable For multiple locations separate each with a semicolon on Windows and a colon on Linux and Mac The specified locations must exist on the target machine After setting SPSS_CDIALOGS_PATH you will need to restart SPSS Statistics for the changes to take effect To create the SPSS_CDIALOGS_PATH environment variable on Windows from the Control Panel Windows XP Select System Select the Advanced tab and click Environment Variables In the User variables section click New enter SPSS_CDIALOGS PATH in the Variable name field and the desired path s in the Variable value field 352 Chapter 19 gt gt gt Windows Vista or Windows 7 Select User Accounts Select Change my environment variables Click New enter SPSS_CDIALOGS_PATH in the Variable name field and the desired path s in the Variable value field To view the current locations for custom dialogs run the following command syntax SHOW EXTPATHS Opening an Installed Custom Dialog You can open a custom dialog that you have already installed allowing you to modify it and or save it externally so that it can be distributed to other users From the menus in the Custom Dialog Builder choose File gt Open Installed Note If you are opening an installed dialog in order to modify it choosing File gt Install will re install it replacing the existing version Uninstalling a Custom Dialog From the menus in the Custom Dialog Builder choose File gt
510. t you should avoid this if possible because it will affect the distribution of values used in subsequent calculations in Visual Binning Note String variables and nominal numeric variables are not displayed in the source variable list Visual Binning requires numeric variables measured on either a scale or ordinal level since it assumes that the data values represent some logical order that can be used to group values in a meaningful fashion You can change the defined measurement level of a variable in Variable View in the Data Editor For more information see the topic Variable measurement level in Chapter 5 on p 70 118 Chapter 7 To Bin Variables gt From the menus in the Data Editor window choose Transform gt Visual Binning Select the numeric scale and or ordinal variables for which you want to create new categorical binned variables Select a variable in the Scanned Variable List Enter a name for the new binned variable Variable names must be unique and must follow variable naming rules For more information see the topic Variable names in Chapter 5 on p 69 Define the binning criteria for the new variable For more information see the topic Binning Variables on p 118 Click OK Binning Variables Figure 7 16 Visual Binning main dialog box 54 Visual Binning E Scanned Variable List Name Label Household income inth Current Variable Household income in thousands Binned Variable Ho
511. ta Collection products Note This feature is only available with IBM SPSS Statistics installed on Microsoft Windows operating systems To read Data Collection data sources you must have the following items installed m NET framework To obtain the most recent version of the NET framework go to http www microsoft com net IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter Developer Kit For information on obtaining a compatible version of SPSS Survey Reporter Developer Kit go to www ibm com support http www ibm com support You can read Data Collection data sources only in local analysis mode This feature is not available in distributed analysis mode using SPSS Statistics Server To read data from a Data Collection data source In any open SPSS Statistics window from the menus choose File gt Open Data Collection Data On the Connection tab of Data Link Properties specify the metadata file the case data type and the case data file Click OK In the Data Collection Data Import dialog box select the variables that you want to include and select any case selection criteria Click OK to read the data Data Link Properties Connection tab To read a IBM SPSS Data Collection data source you need to specify Metadata Location The metadata document file mdd that contains questionnaire definition information Case Data Type The format of the case data file Available formats include m Quancept Data File
512. ta for the new observations m Some transformations for example the log transformation produce missing data for certain values of the original series Missing data at the beginning or end of a series pose no particular problem they simply shorten the useful length of the series Gaps in the middle of a series embedded missing data can be a much more serious problem The extent of the problem depends on the analytical procedure you are using The Replace Missing Values dialog box allows you to create new time series variables from existing ones replacing missing values with estimates computed with one of several methods Default new variable names are the first six characters of the existing variable used to create it followed by an underscore and a sequential number For example for the variable price the new variable name would be price_1 The new variables retain any defined value labels from the original variables 164 Chapter 8 Figure 8 32 Replace Missing Values dialog box Es Replace Missing Values New Variable s demand_1 SMEAN demand E demand E income 8 month_ E price year_ Name and Method nea Span of nearby points Number O al To Replace Missing Values for Time Series Variables gt From the menus choose Transform gt Replace Missing Values Select the estimation method you want to use to replace missing values Select the variable s for
513. ta the restructured file will have one target variable In this step choose how to identify case groups in the restructured data and choose which variables belong with each target variable Optionally you can also choose variables to copy to the new file as Fixed Variables Variables in the Current File 8 score_a Case Group Identification E score_b Variables to be Transposed Target Variable Fixed Variable s COEN How should the new rows be identified You can create a variable in the new data file that identifies the row in the current data file that was used to create a group of new rows The identifier can be a sequential case number or it can be the values of the variable Use the controls in Case Group Identification to define the identification variable in the new file Click a cell to change the default variable name and provide a descriptive variable label for the identification variable What should be restructured in the new file In the previous step you told the wizard how many variable groups you want to restructure The wizard created one new variable for each group The values for the variable group will appear in that variable in the new file Use the controls in Variable to be Transposed to define the restructured variable in the new file To Specify One Restructured Variable Put the variables that make up the variable group that you want to transform into t
514. tabase 1 0 0 eect eens 45 Exporting to IBM SPSS Data Collection 0 0000s eects 57 Protecting Original Data naana ttt tenes 58 Virtual Active File seeiis enaa iaoa kaunaa amaa ts AENEA daa cd 58 Creating a Data Cache ooococccccoc 59 4 Distributed Analysis Mode 61 Server LO Mesias a bho A aoa ada aie ewe era alana a 61 Adding and Editing Server Login Settings s an asaan 00 0 e eee eee 62 To Select Switch or Add Servers o o oo oooocoooo ee eee eee 62 Searching for Available Servers 0 0 000 cece ene teens 63 Opening Data Files from a Remote Server 2 000 c cece cette eee eee 64 File Access in Local and Distributed Analysis Mode 20000 cee ee cece eeaee 64 Availability of Procedures in Distributed Analysis Mode 02 020 0c e eee eee 65 Absolute versus Relative Path Specifications 00 0 cece eee eee eee eee 65 5 Data Editor 67 Data Views circ dconaa mi bankas atleast BoE Mag GORE 67 Variable VIEW siase poaa ngaa mea aaa ed oa aiaa seed e ath te tee edie e da eee ds 68 To display or define variable attributes 00 0000 c cee 69 Variable Names eras eae Bb eee dad ar Sade waves baw ba bwe en ada 69 Variable measurement level 0 2 0 cece eee teeta 70 Varlable type e024 ot da Sn reed Shs etree PSSA Sa A eee ed 71 Variable labels iii a dea fetes aaan a ae aaa a Ea a ee AG A E E altos a i iai dey 13 Value lab
515. taes O Pivot Table Labeling Variables in labels shown as babes O Variable values in labels shown as tebes O Output label options affect only new output produced after you change the settings Output already displayed in the Viewer is not affected by changes in these settings These settings affect only pivot table output Text output is not affected by these settings 322 Chapter 17 Chart options Figure 17 7 Options dialog box Charts tab Chart Template Use current settings O Use chart template file ll None Current Settings Frame Outer M Inner Grid Lines Scale axis Category axis i Cycles Chart Template New charts can use either the settings selected here or the settings from a chart template file Click Browse to select a chart template file To create a chart template file create a chart with the attributes that you want and save it as a template choose Save Chart Template from the File menu Chart Aspect Ratio The width to height ratio of the outer frame of new charts You can specify a width to height ratio from 0 1 to 10 0 Values less than 1 make charts that are taller than they are wide Values greater than 1 make charts that are wider than they are tall A value of 1 produces a square chart Once a chart is created its aspect ratio cannot be changed Current Settings Available settings include m Font Fo
516. tative visit http www ibm com spss Technical support Technical support is available to maintenance customers Customers may contact Technical Support for assistance in using IBM Corp products or for installation help for one of the supported hardware environments To reach Technical Support see the IBM Corp web site at http www ibm com support Be prepared to identify yourself your organization and your support agreement when requesting assistance Technical Support for Students If you re a student using a student academic or grad pack version of any IBM SPSS software product please see our special online Solutions for Education http www ibm com spss rd students pages for students If you re a student using a university supplied copy of the IBM SPSS software please contact the IBM SPSS product coordinator at your university Customer Service If you have any questions concerning your shipment or account contact your local office Please have your serial number ready for identification Training Seminars IBM Corp provides both public and onsite training seminars All seminars feature hands on workshops Seminars will be offered in major cities on a regular basis For more information on these seminars go to http www ibm com software analytics spss training Additional Publications The SPSS Statistics Guide to Data Analysis SPSS Statistics Statistical Procedures Companion and SPSS Statistics Advanced Stati
517. tax of the extension command and the implementation code Python or R should be placed in the extensions directory under the SPSS Statistics installation directory For Mac the XML and code files should be placed in the Library Application Support IBM SPSS Statistics 20 extensions directory m For Windows and Linux if you do not have write permissions to the SPSS Statistics installation directory or would like to store the XML file and the implementation code elsewhere you can specify one or more alternate locations by defining the SPSS EXTENSIONS PATH environment variable When present the paths specified in SPSS EXTENSIONS PATH take precedence over the SPSS Statistics installation directory Note that Mac users may also utilize the SPSS EXTENSIONS PATH environment variable For multiple locations separate each with a semicolon on Windows and a colon on Linux and Mac To create the SPSS_EXTENSIONS PATH environment variable on Windows follow the same general steps used to create the SPSS_CDIALOGS_PATH variable See the section on Installing a Custom Dialog in Managing Custom Dialogs on p 351 To view the current locations for custom dialogs run the following command syntax SHOW EXTPATHS m For an extension command implemented in Python you can always store the associated Python module s to a location on the Python search path such as the Python site packages directory Note To use a new extension command restart SPSS Statistics
518. tem group control 359 layout rules 347 list box 356 list box list items 357 localizing dialogs and help files 365 menu location 346 modifying installed dialogs 351 number control 358 opening dialog specification files 351 preview 350 radio group 360 radio group buttons 360 saving dialog specifications 351 source list 354 static text control 359 sub dialog button 363 sub dialog properties 364 syntax template 348 target list 354 text control 358 custom tables converting TABLES command syntax to CTABLES 413 custom variable attributes 77 data analysis 6 basic steps 6 data dictionary applying from another file 107 Data Editor 67 69 76 82 86 88 90 336 alignment 76 changing data type 86 column width 76 data value restrictions 83 Data View 67 defining variables 69 display options 89 editing data 83 84 entering data 82 entering non numeric data 83 entering numeric data 82 filtered cases 88 inserting new cases 85 inserting new variables 85 moving variables 85 multiple open data files 91 312 multiple views panes 89 printing 90 roles 75 sending data to other applications 336 Variable View 68 data entry 82 data files 10 11 27 38 39 44 59 64 184 adding comments 301 dictionary information 38 file information 38 flipping 167 IBM SPSS Data Collection 36 improving performance for large files 59 multiple open data files 91 312 opening 10 11 protecting 58 Quan
519. tem group control will be empty and the generated command syntax will not contain any reference to stats_group This may or may not be desirable For example even with no boxes checked you may still want to generate the STATISTICS subcommand This can be accomplished by referencing the identifiers for the check boxes directly in the syntax template as in FR EQU ENCI ES VARIAB FORMAT NOTABLI STATISTICS BARCHART ES target_list S stats_mean S stats_stddev S stats_min CG oe stats_max Previewing a Custom Dialog You can preview the dialog that is currently open in the Custom Dialog Builder The dialog appears and functions as it would when run from the menus within IBM SPSS Statistics Source variable lists are populated with dummy variables that can be moved to target lists The Paste button pastes command syntax into the designated syntax window The OK button closes the preview If a help file is specified the Help button is enabled and will open the specified file If no help file is specified the help button is disabled when previewing and hidden when the actual dialog is run 351 Creating and Managing Custom Dialogs To preview a custom dialog From the menus in the Custom Dialog Builder choose File gt Preview Dialog Managing Custom Dialogs gt gt gt gt gt The Custom Dialog Builder allows you to manage cus
520. template will be based on the first variable in the list m Ifyou have selected multiple variables for recoding and you have also selected Use the same recoding scheme for all variables and or you have selected Apply template then the template will contain the combined autorecoding scheme for all variables Apply template from Applies a previously saved autorecode template to variables selected for recoding appending any additional values found in the variables to the end of the scheme and preserving the relationship between the original and autorecoded values stored in the saved scheme m All variables selected for recoding must be the same type numeric or string and that type must match the type defined in the template Templates do not contain any information on user missing values User missing values for the target variables are based on the first variable in the original variable list with defined user missing values All other values from other original variables except for system missing are treated as valid m Value mappings from the template are applied first All remaining values are recoded into values higher than the last value in the template with user missing values based on the first variable in the list with defined user missing values recoded into values higher than the last valid value m Ifyou have selected multiple variables for autorecoding the template is applied first followed by a common combined autoreco
521. th categories To change a category s color select a category and then select a color for that category from the palette Optionally you can Insert a new category above the selected category Move a selected category Remove a selected category Reset the sequence to the default sequence Edit a color by selecting its well and then clicking Edit Data Element Lines Specify the order in which styles should be used for the line data elements in your new chart Line styles are used whenever your chart includes line data elements and you select a choice that includes patterns in the Style Cycle Preference group in the main Chart Options dialog box For example if you create a line chart with two groups and you select Cycle through patterns only in the main Chart Options dialog box the first two styles in the Grouped Charts list are used as the line patterns on the new chart To Change the Order in Which Line Styles Are Used Select Simple Charts and then select a line style that is used for line charts without categories 324 Chapter 17 Select Grouped Charts to change the pattern cycle for line charts with categories To change a category s line style select a category and then select a line style for that category from the palette Optionally you can m Insert a new category above the selected category m Move a selected category m Remove a selected category nm Reset the sequence to the default sequence
522. that contains the same cases rows but different variables columns For example you might want to merge a data file that contains pre test results with one that contains post test results m Cases must be sorted in the same order in both datasets m fone or more key variables are used to match cases the two datasets must be sorted by ascending order of the key variable s Variable names in the second data file that duplicate variable names in the active dataset are excluded by default because Add Variables assumes that these variables contain duplicate information Indicate case source as variable Indicates the source data file for each case This variable has a value of 0 for cases from the active dataset and a value of 1 for cases from the external data file 172 Chapter 9 Figure 9 6 Add Variables dialog box E Add Variables from addvar2 sav DataSet 2 Excluded Variables New Active Dataset name lt age income datebrth sex ovynrent eduyrs famsize jobcat Y Match cases on key variables in sorted files Key Variables Both files provide cases Non active dataset is keyed table Le Active dataset is keyed table _ Indicate case source as variable Active dataset addvar2 sav DataSet2 CE e tS Excluded Variables Variables to be excluded from the new merged data file By default this list contains any variable names from the other dataset that duplicate
523. the Options dialog For more information see the topic Script options in Chapter 17 on p 329 Any custom autoscripts used in pre 16 0 versions must be manually converted and associated with one or more output items from the Scripts tab of the Options dialog The conversion process involves the following steps Extract the subroutine specifying the autoscript from the legacy Autoscript sbs file and save it as a new file with an extension of wwd or sbs The name of the file is arbitrary Change the name of the subroutine to Main and remove the parameter specification keeping track of which parameters are required by the script such as a pivot table that triggers the autoscript Use the scriptContext object always available to get the values required by the autoscript such as the output item that triggered the autoscript From the Scripts tab of the Options dialog associate the script file with the desired output object To illustrate the converted code consider the autoscript Descriptives_Table_DescriptiveStatistics_Create from the legacy Autoscript sbs file Sub Descriptives_Table _DescriptiveStatistics_Create _ objPivotTable As Object objOutputDoc As Object lnglIndex As Long Autoscript Trigger Event DescriptiveStatistics Table Creation after running Descriptives procedure Purpose Swaps the Rows and Columns in the currently active pivot table Assumptions Selected Pivot Table is already activated Effects
524. the Transform menu m With the default setting of Calculate values immediately when you paste command syntax from dialogs an EXECUTE command is pasted after each transformation command For more information see the topic Multiple Execute Commands in Chapter 13 on p 278 Display Format for New Numeric Variables Controls the default display width and number of decimal places for new numeric variables There is no default display format for new string variables If a value is too large for the specified display format first decimal places are rounded and then values are converted to scientific notation Display formats do not affect internal data values For example the value 123456 78 may be rounded to 123457 for display but the original unrounded value is used in any calculations Set Century Range for 2 Digit Years Defines the range of years for date format variables entered and or displayed with a two digit year for example 10 28 86 29 OCT 87 The automatic range setting is based on the current year beginning 69 years prior to and ending 30 years after the current year adding the current year makes a total range of 100 years For a custom range the ending year is automatically determined based on the value that you enter for the beginning year Random Number Generator Two different random number generators are available m Version 12 Compatible The random number generator used in version 12 and previous releases If you need to r
525. the database table select the box in the column identified with the key icon m All values of the primary key must be unique or an error will result m If you select a single variable as the primary key every record case must have a unique value for that variable m Ifyou select multiple variables as the primary key this defines a composite primary key and the combination of values for the selected variables must be unique for each case For information on field names and data types see the section on creating database fields from IBM SPSS Statistics variables in Exporting to a Database on p 45 56 Chapter 3 Completing the Database Export Wizard The last panel of the Export to Database Wizard provides a summary that indicates what data will be exported and how it will be exported It also gives you the option of either exporting the data or pasting the underlying command syntax to a syntax window Figure 3 31 Export to Database Wizard finish panel Export to Database Wizard Finish gt EE Your specifications are summarized below You are ready to export the data or paste the syntax Summary Dataset SurveyResponses Table UpdateTable Cases to Export Filtered Action Create new table User Missing Values Export as valid values What would you like to do Export the data O Paste the syntax Cancel Help Summary Information Dataset The IBM SPSS Statisti
526. the same type You cannot recode numeric and string variables together Figure 8 10 Recode into Different Variables dialog box ES Recode into Different Variables Numeric Variable gt Output Variable E Employee Code id salary gt salcat sa Gender gender Name Date of Birth bdate di Educational Level yea dl Employment Category Label E Beginning Salary salb Salary ranga can E Months since Hire jobti E Previous Experience change di Minority Classification Output Variable ld oriona case selection condition CK esse ese cance e To Recode Values of a Variable into a New Variable gt From the menus choose Transform gt Recode into Different Variables Select the variables you want to recode If you select multiple variables they must be the same type numeric or string gt Enter an output new variable name for each new variable and click Change gt Click Old and New Values and specify how to recode values Optionally you can define a subset of cases to recode The If Cases dialog box for doing this is the same as the one described for Count Occurrences Recode into Different Variables Old and New Values You can define values to recode in this dialog box 137 Data Transformations Old Value The value s to be recoded You can recode single values ranges of values and missing values System missing valu
527. the source of the properties 9 An external SPSS Statistics data file Bowse O The active dataset smalldemo say DataSet3 coc a unan ama Gina Select the data file with the file and or variable properties that you want to copy This can be a currently open dataset an external IBM SPSSO Statistics data file or the active dataset gt Follow the step by step instructions in the Copy Data Properties Wizard Selecting Source and Target Variables In this step you can specify the source variables containing the variable properties that you want to copy and the target variables that will receive those variable properties 109 Data preparation Figure 7 10 Copy Data Properties Wizard Step 2 E Copy Data Properties Step 2 of 5 Copy data properties Choose source and target variables Apply properties from selected source dataset variables to matching active dataset variables Fi Create matching variables in the active dataset if they do not already exist Apply properties from a single source variable to selected active dataset variables of the same type Apply dataset properties only no variable selection A variable matches if the name and basic type numeric or string and string length are the same The a particular properties to apply will be specified on the following panels Right click on a variable to see its properties Select the variables in the source list whose properti
528. this option will end the wizard and the Transpose dialog will appear m Restructure selected variables into cases Choose this when you have groups of related columns in your data and you want them to appear in groups of rows in the new data file If you choose this the wizard will display the steps for Variables to Cases m Restructure selected cases into variables Choose this when you have groups of related rows in your data and you want them to appear in groups of columns in the new data file If you choose this the wizard will display the steps for Cases to Variables m Transpose all data Choose this when you want to transpose your data All rows will become columns and all columns will become rows in the new data This choice closes the Restructure Data Wizard and opens the Transpose Data dialog box 186 Chapter 9 Deciding How to Restructure the Data A variable contains information that you want to analyze for example a measurement or a score A case is an observation for example an individual In a simple data structure each variable is a single column in your data and each case is a single row So for example if you were measuring test scores for all students in a class all score values would appear in only one column and there would be a row for each student When you analyze data you are often analyzing how a variable varies according to some condition The condition can be a specific experimental treatmen
529. thon program that executes the Descriptives procedure The Python autoscript will be executed Python Program Run from Python Script Python scripts can run command syntax which means they can run command syntax containing Python programs Limitations and Warnings m Running a Python program from the Python editor launched by SPSS Statistics will start up a new instance of the SPSS Statistics processor and will not interact with the instance of SPSS Statistics that launched the editor Python programs are not intended to be run from Utilities gt Run Script Python programs cannot be run as autoscripts The interfaces exposed by the spss module cannot be used in a Python script 408 Chapter 22 Script Editor for the Python Programming Language For the Python programming language the default editor is IDLE which is provided with Python IDLE provides an integrated development environment IDE with a limited set of features Many IDE s are available for the Python programming language For instance on Windows you may choose to use the freely available PythonWin IDE To change the script editor for the Python programming language gt Open the file clientscriptingcfg ini located in the directory where IBMO SPSS Statistics is installed Note clientscriptingcfg ini must be edited with a UTF 16 aware editor such as SciTE on Windows or the TextEdit application on Mac gt Under the section labeled Python change the value
530. ties To change cell properties gt Activate a table and select the cell s in the table gt From the Format menu or the context menu choose Cell Properties Font and background The Font and Background tab controls the font style and color and background color for the selected cells in the table Figure 11 17 Cell Properties dialog box Font and Background tab E Cell Properties Ey Preview in Preferred Size AaBbCc 123 Family Style fl em Size mE Color A Text Color 0 0 0 O O Background L 55 255 255 L E OLI 242 Chapter 11 Format value The Format Value tab controls value formats for the selected cells You can select formats for numbers dates time or currencies and you can adjust the number of decimal digits that are displayed Figure 11 18 Cell Properties dialog box Format Value tab HE Cell Properties rPreview Category SORN Decimals o Low conc ase rte Note The list of Currency formats contains Dollar format numbers with a leading dollar sign and five custom currency formats By default all custom currency formats are set to the default numeric format which contains no currency or other custom symbols For information on defining custom currency formats see Currency options Alignment and margins The Alignment and Margins tab controls horizontal and
531. ting a pivot table Options for manipulating a pivot table include Transposing rows and columns Moving rows and columns Creating multidimensional layers Grouping and ungrouping rows and columns Showing and hiding rows columns and other information Rotating row and column labels Finding definitions of terms Activating a pivot table Before you can manipulate or modify a pivot table you need to activate the table To activate a table gt Double click the table or gt Right click the table and from the context menu choose Edit Content gt From the sub menu choose either In Viewer or In Separate Window m By default activating the table by double clicking will activate all but very large tables in the Viewer window For more information see the topic Pivot table options in Chapter 17 on p 325 m Ifyou want to have more than one pivot table activated at the same time you must activate the tables in separate windows Pivoting a table gt Activate the pivot table Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 225 226 Chapter 11 gt From the menus choose Pivot gt Pivoting Trays Figure 11 1 Pivoting trays hal Pivoting Trays Ej Gender EJ Owns PDA FF Statistics A table has three dimensions rows columns and layers A dimension can contain multiple elements or none at all You can change the organization of the table by moving eleme
532. ting output in Excel format Create a worksheet or workbook or modify an existing worksheet By default a new workbook is created Ifa file with the specified name already exists it will be overwritten If you select the option to create a worksheet if a worksheet with the specified name already exists in the specified file it will be overwritten If you select the option to modify an existing worksheet you must also specify the worksheet name This is optional for creating a worksheet Worksheet names cannot exceed 31 characters and cannot contain forward or back slashes square brackets question marks or asterisks If you modify an existing worksheet charts model views and tree diagrams are not included in the exported output Location in worksheet Controls the location within the worksheet for the exported output By default exported output will be added after the last column that has any content starting in the first row without modifying any existing contents This is a good choice for adding new columns to an existing worksheet Adding exported output after the last row is a good choice for adding new rows to an existing worksheet Adding exported output starting at a specific cell location will overwrite any existing content in the area where the exported output is added Layers in pivot tables By default inclusion or exclusion of pivot table layers is controlled by the table properties for each pivot table You can override t
533. ting variables into a limited number of distinct categories You can use Visual Binning to m Create categorical variables from continuous scale variables For example you could use a scale income variable to create a new categorical variable that contains income ranges m Collapse a large number of ordinal categories into a smaller set of categories For example you could collapse a rating scale of nine down to three categories representing low medium and high In the first step you gt Select the numeric scale and or ordinal variables for which you want to create new categorical binned variables Figure 7 15 Initial dialog box for selecting variables to bin EN Visual Binning 4 Select the variables whose values will be grouped into bins Data will be scanned when you click Continue The Variables list below contains all numeric ordinal and scale variables Wariables Wariables to Bin E Age in years age E Household income in th E Marital status marital E Years at current ad al Income category in E Price of primary ve dl Primary vehicle pric 8E Level of education E Years with current Retired retire dl Years with current Job satisfaction job Limit number of cases scanned to corte cance ner _ Optionally you can limit the number of cases to scan For data files with a large number of cases limiting the number of cases scanned can save time bu
534. tion or Choose one of the items from the Run menu All Runs all commands in the syntax window honoring any breakpoints m Selection Runs the currently selected commands honoring any breakpoints This includes any partially highlighted commands If there is no selection the command where the cursor is positioned is run m To End Runs all commands starting from the first command in the current selection to the last command in the syntax window honoring any breakpoints If nothing is selected the run starts from the command where the cursor is positioned m Step Through Runs the command syntax one command at a time starting from the first command in the syntax window Step Through From Start or from the command where the cursor is positioned Step Through From Current If there is selected text the run starts from the first command in the selection After a given command has run the cursor advances to the next command and you continue the step through sequence by choosing Continue LOOP END LOOP DO IF END IF DO REPEAT END REPEAT INPUT PROGRAM END INPUT PROGRAM and MATRIX END MATRIX blocks are treated as single commands when using Step Through You can not step into one of these blocks Continue Continues a run stopped by a breakpoint or Step Through Progress Indicator The progress of a given syntax run is indicated with a downward pointing arrow in the gutter spanning the last set of commands run For instance y
535. tion bundle for Mac Note that regardless of whether you are working in distributed mode all scripts including the StartServer_ scripts must reside on the client machine m On Windows if the scripts directory contains both a Python and a Basic version of StartClient_ or StartServer_ then both versions are executed The order of execution is the Python version followed by the Basic version m If your system is configured to start up in distributed mode then at the start of each session any StartClient_ scripts are run followed by any StartServer_ scripts Note The StartServer_ scripts also run each time you switch servers but the StartClient_ scripts only run at the start of a session Example This is an example of a StartServer_ script that maps a drive letter to a shared network resource specified by a UNC identifier This allows users working in distributed mode to access data files on the network resource from the Open Remote File dialog box StartServer_ py import SpssClient SpssClient StartClient SpssClient RunSyntax r HOST COMMAND net use y myserver data SpssClient StopClient The SpssClient RunSyntax method is used to run a HOST command that calls the Windows net use command to perform the mapping When the StartServer_ script runs IBM SPSS Statistics is in distributed mode so the HOST command runs on the SPSS Statistics Server machine Appendix A TABLES and IGRAPH Command Syntax Converte
536. tom dialogs created by you or by other users You can install uninstall or modify installed dialogs and you can save specifications for a custom dialog to an external file or open a file containing the specifications for a custom dialog in order to modify it Custom dialogs must be installed before they can be used Installing a Custom Dialog You can install the dialog that is currently open in the Custom Dialog Builder or you can install a dialog from a custom dialog package spd file Re installing an existing dialog will replace the existing version To install the currently open dialog From the menus in the Custom Dialog Builder choose File gt Install To install from a custom dialog package file From the menus choose Utilities gt Custom Dialogs gt Install Custom Dialog For Windows and Linux and by default installing a dialog requires write permission to the IBM SPSS Statistics installation directory for Mac dialogs are installed to a general user writable location If you do not have write permissions to the required location or would like to store installed dialogs elsewhere you can specify one or more alternate locations by defining the SPSS_CDIALOGS_PATH environment variable When present the paths specified in SPSS_CDIALOGS PATH take precedence over the default location Custom dialogs will be installed to the first writable location Note that Mac users may also utilize the SPSS_CDIALOGS PATH environmen
537. trols m The value ThisValue can be used in either the Checked Syntax or Unchecked Syntax property It generates a blank separated list of the syntax generated by each control in the check box group in the order in which they appear in the group top to bottom m By default the Checked Syntax property has a value of ThisValue and the Unchecked Syntax property is blank File Browser The File Browser control consists of a text box for a file path and a browse button that opens a standard IBM SPSSO Statistics dialog to open or save a file The File Browser control has the following properties Identifier The unique identifier for the control This is the identifier to use when referencing the control in the syntax template Title An optional title that appears above the control For multi line titles use n to specify line breaks ToolTip Optional ToolTip text that appears when the user hovers over the control Mnemonic Key An optional character in the title to use as a keyboard shortcut to the control The character appears underlined in the title The shortcut is activated by pressing Alt mnemonic key The Mnemonic Key property is not supported on Mac File System Operation Specifies whether the dialog launched by the browse button is appropriate for opening files or for saving files A value of Open indicates that the browse dialog validates the existence of the specified file A value of Save indicates that the brows
538. ts only source variable lists Target variable lists always reflect the order in which variables were selected 313 Options Roles Some dialogs support the ability to pre select variables for analysis based on defined roles For more information see the topic Roles in Chapter 5 on p 75 m Use predefined roles By default pre select variables based on defined roles m Use custom assignments By default do not use roles to pre select variables You can also switch between predefined roles and custom assignment within the dialogs that support this functionality The setting here controls only the initial default behavior in effect for each dataset Windows Look and feel Controls the basic appearance of windows and dialog boxes If you notice any display issues after changing the look and feel try shutting down and restarting the application Open syntax window at startup Syntax windows are text file windows used to enter edit and run commands If you frequently work with command syntax select this option to automatically open a syntax window at the beginning of each session This is useful primarily for experienced users who prefer to work with command syntax instead of dialog boxes Open only one dataset at a time Closes the currently open data source each time you open a different data source using the menus and dialog boxes By default every time you use the menus and dialog boxes to open a new data source that data so
539. two groups and you select Cycle through patterns only in the main Chart Options dialog box the first two styles in the Grouped Charts list are used as the bar fill patterns on the new chart To Change the Order in Which Fill Styles Are Used Select Simple Charts and then select a fill pattern that is used for charts without categories 325 Options gt Select Grouped Charts to change the pattern cycle for charts with categories To change a category s fill pattern select a category and then select a fill pattern for that category from the palette Optionally you can m Insert a new category above the selected category m Move a selected category m Remove a selected category Reset the sequence to the default sequence Pivot table options Pivot Table options set various options for the display of pivot tables Figure 17 8 Options dialog box Pivot Tables tab TableLook None lt System Default gt Academic AvantGarde BlueYellowContrast Blue YellowContrastAlternate Boxed dddd ddddi group dddd2 cecet 105 ecoc2 11 42 dddd3 coce1 89 46 r Table Rendering Adjust for labels and data except for extremely large tables _ Render as legacy tables O Adjust for labels only Adjust for labels and data for all tables Display Blocks of Rows Default Editing Mode Rows to Display 100 Copying wide tables to the clipboard in rich text format Maximum Cells 1
540. u can make changes on more than one tab before you click Apply If you have to change the selection to modify a different element on the chart click Apply before changing the selection If you do not click Apply before changing the selection clicking Apply at a later point will apply changes only to the element or elements currently selected Depending on your selection only certain settings will be available The help for the individual tabs specifies what you need to select to view the tabs If multiple elements are selected you can change only those settings that are common to all the elements Toolbars The toolbars provide a shortcut for some of the functionality in the Properties dialog box For example instead of using the Text tab in the Properties dialog box you can use the Edit toolbar to change the font and style of the text 287 Overview of the chart facility Saving the Changes Chart modifications are saved when you close the Chart Editor The modified chart is subsequently displayed in the Viewer Chart definition options When you are defining a chart in the Chart Builder you can add titles and change options for the chart creation Adding and Editing Titles and Footnotes You can add titles and footnotes to the chart to help a viewer interpret it The Chart Builder also automatically displays error bar information in the footnotes How to Add Titles and Footnotes Click the Titles Footnotes tab Select one
541. uch as 10 days or the values from a numeric variable such as a variable that represents years Calculate the number of time units between two dates Use this option to obtain the difference between two dates as measured in a chosen unit For example you can obtain the number of years or the number of days separating two dates m Subtract two durations Use this option to obtain the difference between two variables that have formats of durations such as hh mm or hh mm ss Note Tasks are disabled when the dataset lacks the types of variables required to accomplish the task For instance if the dataset lacks two variables with formats of durations then the task to subtract two durations does not apply and is disabled Add or Subtract a Duration from a Date To add or subtract a duration from a date format variable gt Select Add or subtract a duration from a date on the screen of the Date and Time Wizard labeled Do Calculations on Dates 151 Data Transformations Select Date Time Variable and Duration to Add or Subtract Figure 8 22 Add or subtract duration step 2 A Date and Time Wizard Step 2 of 3 E Add to or subtract from a date or datetime variable Choose a date or datetime variable Then choose either a duration variable or an ordinary variable or enter a constant Set the duration units and operation choice appropriately and press Next Variables ar Date Customer ID custid Le amp Date of initial p
542. ue Labels You have the option of saving the values and value labels associated with your data file toa SAS syntax file This syntax file contains proc format andproc datasets commands that can be run in SAS to create a SAS format catalog file This feature is not supported for the SAS transport file 43 Data Files Variable Types The following table shows the variable type matching between the original data in SPSS Statistics and the exported data in SAS SPSS Statistics Variable Type SAS Variable Type SAS Data Format Numeric Numeric 12 Comma Numeric 12 Dot Numeric 12 Scientific Notation Numeric 12 Date Numeric Date for example MMDDyY 10 Date Time Numeric Timel8 Dollar Numeric 12 Custom Currency Numeric 12 String Character 8 Saving Data Files in Stata Format m Data can be written in Stata 5 8 format and in both Intercooled and SE format versions 7 and 8 only Data files that are saved in Stata 5 format can be read by Stata 4 The first 80 bytes of variable labels are saved as Stata variable labels For numeric variables the first 80 bytes of value labels are saved as Stata value labels Value labels are dropped for string variables non integer numeric values and numeric values greater than an absolute value of 2 147 483 647 For versions 7 and 8 the first 32 bytes of variable names in case sensitive form are saved as Stata variable names For earlier versions the first eight bytes of variable names
543. umber of days in a week The value displayed indicates the maximum value you can enter For hours minutes and seconds the maximum is the displayed value minus one A new numeric variable is created for each component that is used to define the date The new variable names end with an underscore A descriptive string variable date_ is also created from the components For example if you selected Weeks days hours four new variables are created week_ day_ hour_ and date_ If date variables have already been defined they are replaced when you define new date variables that will have the same names as the existing date variables To Define Dates for Time Series Data From the menus choose Data gt Define Dates Select a time interval from the Cases Are list 161 Data Transformations gt Enter the value s that define the starting date for First Case Is which determines the date assigned to the first case Date Variables versus Date Format Variables Date variables created with Define Dates should not be confused with date format variables defined in the Variable View of the Data Editor Date variables are used to establish periodicity for time series data Date format variables represent dates and or times displayed in various date time formats Date variables are simple integers representing the number of days weeks hours and so on from a user specified starting point Internally most date format variables are store
544. umeric dollar dot or comma and date formats are converted to strings if they are pasted into a string variable cell The string value is the numeric value as displayed in the cell For example for a dollar format variable the displayed dollar sign becomes part of the string value Values that exceed the defined string variable width are truncated Converting string into numeric or date String values that contain acceptable characters for the numeric or date format of the target cell are converted to the equivalent numeric or date value For example a string value of 25 12 91 is converted to a valid date if the format type of the target cell is one of the day month year formats but the value is converted to system missing if the format type of the target cell is one of the month day year formats Converting date into numeric Date and time values are converted to a number of seconds if the target cell is one of the numeric formats for example numeric dollar dot or comma Because dates are stored internally as the number of seconds since October 14 1582 converting dates to numeric values can yield some extremely large numbers For example the date 10 29 91 is converted to a numeric value of 12 908 073 600 85 Data Editor Converting numeric into date or time Numeric values are converted to dates or times if the value represents a number of seconds that can produce a valid date or time For dates numeric values that are less tha
545. unning commands in interactive mode The following rules apply to command specifications in interactive mode m Each command must start on a new line Commands can begin in any column of a command line and continue for as many lines as needed The exception is the END DATA command which must begin in the first column of the first line after the end of data m Each command should end with a period as a command terminator It is best to omit the terminator on BEGIN DATA however so that inline data are treated as one continuous specification m The command terminator must be the last nonblank character in a command In the absence of a period as the command terminator a blank line is interpreted as a command terminator Note For compatibility with other modes of command execution including command files run with INSERT or INCLUDE commands in an interactive session each line of command syntax should not exceed 256 characters Most subcommands are separated by slashes The slash before the first subcommand on a command is usually optional m Variable names must be spelled out fully Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 265 266 Chapter 13 Text included within apostrophes or quotation marks must be contained on a single line A period must be used to indicate decimals regardless of your regional or locale settings m Variable names ending in a period can cause errors in commands created by the dialog boxes
546. urce opens in a new Data Editor window and any other data sources open in other Data Editor windows remain open and available during the session until explicitly closed When you select this option it takes effect immediately but does not close any datasets that were open at the time the setting was changed This setting has no effect on data sources opened using command syntax which relies on DATASET commands to control multiple datasets For more information see the topic Working with Multiple Data Sources in Chapter 6 on p 91 Character Encoding for Data Files and Syntax Files This controls the default behavior for determining the encoding for reading and writing data files and syntax files You can change this setting only when there are no open data sources and the setting remains in effect for subsequent sessions until explicitly changed m Locale s writing system Use the current locale setting to determine the encoding for reading and writing files This is referred to as code page mode m Unicode universal character set Use Unicode encoding UTF 8 for reading and writing files This is referred to as Unicode mode 314 Chapter 17 There are a number of important implications regarding Unicode mode and Unicode files IBM SPSS Statistics data files and syntax files saved in Unicode encoding should not be used in releases of SPSS Statistics prior to 16 0 For syntax files you can specify the encoding when you sav
547. urvey_sample saw DATASET NAME Survey GET DATA TYPE XLS FILE demo xls DATASET NAME Excel_Demo Copying and Pasting Information between Datasets You can copy both data and variable definition attributes from one dataset to another dataset in basically the same way that you copy and paste information within a single data file m Copying and pasting selected data cells in Data View pastes only the data values with no variable definition attributes m Copying and pasting an entire variable in Data View by selecting the variable name at the top of the column pastes all of the data and all of the variable definition attributes for that variable m Copying and pasting variable definition attributes or entire variables in Variable View pastes the selected attributes or the entire variable definition but does not paste any data values Renaming Datasets When you open a data source through the menus and dialog boxes each data source is automatically assigned a dataset name of DataSetn where n is a sequential integer value and when you open a data source using command syntax no dataset name is assigned unless you explicitly specify one with DATASET NAME To provide more descriptive dataset names gt From the menus in the Data Editor window for the dataset whose name you want to change choose File gt Rename Dataset gt Enter a new dataset name that conforms to variable naming rules For more information see the
548. usehold income in thousands Binned Minimum Nonmissing Values Maximum huso O 9 00 179 31 349 62 519 92 690 23 860 54 1030 85 94 15 264 46 434 77 605 03 775 38 945 69 1116 00 gt Enter interval cutpoints or click Make Cutpoints for automatic intervals A cutpoint value of 10 Grid a for example defines an interval starting above the previous interval and ending at 10 Label Upper Endpoints Cases Scanned ea Included lt Missing Values Az 20000 20059300 9 Excluded lt 75 000 50 00 74 00 Copy Bins 5 HIGH 75 00 E Reverse scale Lox easte Bese cance He The Visual Binning main dialog box provides the following information for the scanned variables Scanned Variable List Displays the variables you selected in the initial dialog box You can sort the list by measurement level scale or ordinal or by variable label or name by clicking on the column headings 119 Data preparation Cases Scanned Indicates the number of cases scanned All scanned cases without user missing or system missing values for the selected variable are used to generate the distribution of values used in calculations in Visual Binning including the histogram displayed in the main dialog box and cutpoints based on percentiles or standard deviation units Missing Values Indicates the number of scanned cases with user missing or system missing values Missing values are
549. user to select value from list continue conca vet To build a prompt enter a prompt string and a default value The prompt string is displayed each time a user runs your query The string should specify the kind of information to enter If the user is not selecting from a list the string should give hints about how the input should be formatted An example is as follows Enter a Quarter Q1 Q2 Q3 Allow user to select value from list If this check box is selected you can limit the user to the values that you place here Ensure that your values are separated by returns Data type Choose the data type here Number String or Date The final result looks like this Figure 3 8 User defined prompt il Select Value for Query Income category 1 low 2 medium 3 high Aggregating Data If you are in distributed mode connected to a remote server available with IBM SPSS Statistics Server you can aggregate the data before reading it into I BM SPSS Statistics 24 Chapter 3 Figure 3 9 Database Wizard aggregating data Database Wizard Distributed Mode a Aggregate Data You can aggregate your data before retrieving it according to groups defined by break variables or press Next to retrieve the original cases The output variables can be renamed on the next panel Break Yariable s 8 demo ID 8 demo AGE amp demo MARITAL gt 8 demo ADDRESS L 8 demo INC
550. ut Document No Charts Charts Only and Nothing are not supported All output objects supported by the selected format are included 376 Chapter 20 m Remote server settings are ignored To specify remote server settings for distributed analysis you need to run the production job from a command line using command line switches to specify the server settings For more information see the topic Running production jobs from a command line on p 374 m Publish to Web settings are ignored Chapter Output Management System gt The Output Management System OMS provides the ability to automatically write selected categories of output to different output files in different formats Formats include Word Excel PDF IBM SPSS Statistics data file format sav Viewer file format spv web report format spw XML HTML and text For more information see the topic OMS options on p 383 To use the Output Management System Control Panel From the menus choose Utilities gt OMS Control Panel Figure 21 1 Output Management System Control Panel a Output Management System Control Panel Requests status ID Types Commands Subtypes Labels Tables Descriptives Descriptive Statistics Tables Regression Coefficients Tables Frequencies Frequencies New Request To add a request select one or more items from the lists below and any other desired properties and press Add Table Subtypes displays on
551. ut object types in OMS 379 OXML 400 page numbering 223 page setup 221 223 chart size 223 headers and footers 221 pane splitter Data Editor 89 syntax editor 270 Paste button 4 pasting output into other applications 208 PDF exporting output 209 216 PDF format exporting output 383 performance 59 caching data 59 pivot tables 203 208 209 220 225 228 231 233 236 237 239 246 249 325 alignment 242 alternating row colors 237 background color 241 borders 239 captions 243 244 cell formats 237 cell properties 241 242 cell widths 246 changing display order 226 changing the look 232 continuation text 239 controlling number of rows to display 234 controlling table breaks 248 creating charts from tables 249 default column width adjustment 325 default look for new tables 325 deleting group labels 227 displaying hidden borders 246 editing 225 exporting as HTML 209 fast pivot tables 325 fonts 241 footnote properties 236 footnotes 243 246 general properties 233 grid lines 246 grouping rows or columns 227 hiding 203 inserting group labels 227 layers 228 legacy tables 250 manipulating 225 margins 242 moving rows and columns 226 pasting as tables 208 pasting into other applications 208 pivoting 225 printing large tables 248 printing layers 220 properties 233 render tables faster 325 rotating labels 227 scaling to fit page 233 239 425 selecting rows
552. vailable in two forms integrated into the overall Help system and as a separate document in PDF form in the Command Syntax Reference available from the Help menu Statistical Algorithms The algorithms used for most statistical procedures are available in two forms integrated into the overall Help system and as a separate document in PDF form available on the manuals CD For links to specific algorithms in the Help system choose Algorithms from the Help menu Context sensitive Help In many places in the user interface you can get context sensitive Help Dialog box Help buttons Most dialog boxes have a Help button that takes you directly to a Help topic for that dialog box The Help topic provides general information and links to related topics Pivot table context menu Help Right click on terms in an activated pivot table in the Viewer and choose What s This from the context menu to display definitions of the terms Command syntax In a command syntax window position the cursor anywhere within a syntax block for a command and press F1 on the keyboard A complete command syntax chart for that command will be displayed Complete command syntax documentation is available from the links in the list of related topics and from the Help Contents tab Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 8 9 Getting Help Other Resources Technical Support Web site Answers to many common problems can be found at http www ibm com supp
553. value This produces wider tables but it ensures that all values will be displayed Display Blocks of Rows These settings control the display of large pivot tables in the Viewer These settings have no effect on printing large pivot tables or exporting output to external formats Note This option is only available if you select the option to render as legacy tables Display the table as blocks of rows Tables are displayed in the Viewer in sections and navigation controls allow you to view different sections of the table m Rows to display Sets the number of rows to display in each section The value must be an integer between 10 and 1000 Maximum cells Sets the maximum number of cells to display in each section The value must an integer between 1000 and 100000 Widow orphan tolerance Controls the maximum number of rows of the inner most row dimension of the table to split across displayed views of the table For example if there are six categories in each group of the inner most row dimension specifying a value of six would prevent any group from splitting across displayed views The value must be an integer and cannot be greater than the Rows to display value Several factors can affect the actual number of rows displayed including m Ifthe Maximum cells value is reached before the Rows to display value then the table is split at that point For example if Rows to display is 1000 and Maximum cells is 10000 a table with
554. value label that label will be retained as the value label for the recoded value of the new variable Note If the source variable has a defined range of user missing values of the form LO n where n is a positive number the corresponding user missing values for the new variable will be negative numbers Chapter Data Transformations In an ideal situation your raw data are perfectly suitable for the type of analysis you want to perform and any relationships between variables are either conveniently linear or neatly orthogonal Unfortunately this is rarely the case Preliminary analysis may reveal inconvenient coding schemes or coding errors or data transformations may be required in order to expose the true relationship between variables You can perform data transformations ranging from simple tasks such as collapsing categories for analysis to more advanced tasks such as creating new variables based on complex equations and conditional statements Computing Variables Use the Compute dialog box to compute values for a variable based on numeric transformations of other variables m You can compute values for numeric or string alphanumeric variables m You can create new variables or replace the values of existing variables For new variables you can also specify the variable type and label m You can compute values selectively for subsets of data based on logical conditions m You can use a large variety of built i
555. variable list display attributes within dialogs The method for changing the display attributes depends on the dialog m Ifthe dialog provides sorting and display controls above the source variable list use those controls to change the display attributes m Ifthe dialog does not contain sorting controls above the source variable list right click on any variable in the source list and select the display attributes from the context menu You can display either variable names or variable labels names are displayed for any variables without defined labels and you can sort the source list by file order alphabetical order or measurement level In dialogs with sorting controls above the source variable list the default selection of None sorts the list in file order Resizing dialog boxes You can resize dialog boxes just like windows by clicking and dragging the outside borders or comers For example if you make the dialog box wider the variable lists will also be wider Figure 1 2 Resized dialog box Es Frequencies Variable s E Age in years age E Marital status marital Years at current address address 8E Household income in thousands income E Price of primary vehicle car di Primary vehicle price category carcat 8 Level of education ed 8 Years with current employer employ T Display frequency tables Dialog box controls There are five standard controls in most dialog boxe
556. variable name and provide a descriptive variable label for the index variable Restructure Data Wizard Variables to Cases Create Multiple Index Variables Note The wizard presents this step if you choose to restructure variable groups into rows and create multiple index variables In this step specify the number of levels for each index variable You can also specify a name and a label for the new index variable 195 File Handling and File Transformations Figure 9 30 Restructure Data Wizard Create Multiple Index Variables Step 5 E Restructure Data Wizard Step 5 of 7 g Variables to Cases Create Multiple Index Variables You have chosen to have multiple index variables created in your new data file The first variable in the table is the primary index All subsequent indexes cycle within each level ofthis index In the table below enter the number of levels for each index variable You can also edit the Name and Label of each index variable Index Variable Mames Labels and Number of Levels Name Label Levels Index Values 1 index_a 2 index_b 4 gt Total number of combined levels product 4 Note that the product of the number of levels of all the index variables must equal the Total number displayed below the table This number equals the number of variables to be transposed Back Next gt Finish Cancel Help For more info
557. variable names in the active dataset Variables from the active dataset are identified with an asterisk Variables from the other dataset are identified with a plus sign If you want to include an excluded variable with a duplicate name in the merged file you can rename it and add it to the list of variables to be included New Active Dataset Variables to be included in the new merged dataset By default all unique variable names in both datasets are included on the list Key Variables If some cases in one dataset do not have matching cases in the other dataset that is some cases are missing in one dataset use key variables to identify and correctly match cases from the two datasets You can also use key variables with table lookup files m The key variables must have the same names in both datasets Both datasets must be sorted by ascending order of the key variables and the order of variables on the Key Variables list must be the same as their sort sequence m Cases that do not match on the key variables are included in the merged file but are not merged with cases from the other file Unmatched cases contain values for only the variables in the file from which they are taken variables from the other file contain the system missing value Non active or active dataset is keyed table A keyed table or table lookup file is a file in which data for each case can be applied to multiple cases in the other data fi
558. variables in the active dataset m Create new variables in the active dataset based on selected variables in an external data file or open dataset When copying data properties the following general rules apply m Ifyou use an external data file as the source data file it must be a data file in SPSS Statistics format m Ifyou use the active dataset as the source data file it must contain at least one variable You cannot use a completely blank active dataset as the source data file m Undefined empty properties in the source dataset do not overwrite defined properties in the active dataset m Variable properties are copied from the source variable only to target variables of a matching type string alphanumeric or numeric including numeric date and currency Note Copy Data Properties replaces Apply Data Dictionary formerly available on the File menu To Copy Data Properties gt From the menus in the Data Editor window choose Data gt Copy Data Properties 108 Chapter 7 Figure 7 9 Copy Data Properties Wizard Step 1 amp Copy Data Properties Step 1 of 5 E Welcome to the Copy Data Properties Wizard Copy Data Properties can copy selected variable and dataset properties from an open dataset or external SPSS Statistics data file to the active dataset a You can also copy properties from one variable to another within the active dataset Data properties are copied but not data values Choose
559. vations at a different time and the length of time between cases is uniform 160 Chapter 8 Define Dates gt gt The Define Dates dialog box allows you to generate date variables that can be used to establish the periodicity of a time series and to label output from time series analysis Figure 8 30 Define Dates dialog box Es Define Dates Cases Are First Case Is Days hours Days work hour B Periodicity at higher Weeks days hours level Weeks work days hours Week Minutes Hours minutes Day 7 Days hours minutes Hours bp 24 Seconds Minutes seconds Hours minutes seconds Current Dates None Cases Are Defines the time interval used to generate dates E Not dated removes any previously defined date variables Any variables with the following names are deleted year_ quarter_ month_ week_ day_ hour_ minute_ second_ and date Custom indicates the presence of custom date variables created with command syntax for example a four day workweek This item merely reflects the current state of the active dataset Selecting it from the list has no effect First Case Is Defines the starting date value which is assigned to the first case Sequential values based on the time interval are assigned to subsequent cases Periodicity at higher level Indicates the repetitive cyclical variation such as the number of months in a year or the n
560. vertical alignment of values and top bottom left and right margins for the selected cells Mixed horizontal alignment aligns the content of each cell according to its type For example dates are right aligned and text values are left aligned 243 Pivot tables Figure 11 19 Cell Properties dialog box Alignment and Margins tab al Cell Properties E pPreview cHorizontal Alignment OLet Ocenter Right O Mixed Decimal Offset from right Yertical Alignment O Top Center Bottom Margins Footnotes and captions You can add footnotes and captions to a table You can also hide footnotes or captions change footnote markers and renumber footnotes Adding footnotes and captions To add a caption to a table gt From the Insert menu choose Caption A footnote can be attached to any item in a table To add a footnote Click a title cell or caption within an activated pivot table gt From the Insert menu choose Footnote gt Insert the footnote text in the provided area 244 Chapter 11 To hide or show a caption gt To hide a caption Select the caption From the View menu choose Hide To show hidden captions From the View menu choose Show All To hide or show a footnote in a table gt To hide a footnote Right click the cell that contains the footnote reference and select Hide Footnotes from the context menu or Select the footnote in
561. vot table to activate it 250 Chapter 11 Select the rows columns or cells you want to display in the chart gt Right click anywhere in the selected area Choose Create Graph from the context menu and select a chart type Legacy tables You can choose to render tables as legacy tables referred to as full featured tables in release 19 which are then fully compatible with IBM SPSS Statistics releases prior to 20 Legacy tables may render slowly and are only recommended if compatibility with releases prior to 20 is required For information on how to create legacy tables see Pivot table options Chapter Models Some results are presented as models which appear in the output Viewer as a special type of visualization The visualization displayed in the output Viewer is not the only view of the model that is available A single model contains many different views You can activate the model in the Model Viewer and interact with the model directly to display the available model views You can also choose to print and export all the views in the model Interacting with a model To interact with a model you first activate it gt Double click the model or gt Right click the model and from the context menu choose Edit Content gt From the submenu choose In Separate Window Activating the model displays the model in the Model Viewer For more information see the topic Working with the Model Viewer on p 251
562. which you want to replace missing values Optionally you can m Enter variable names to override the default new variable names m Change the estimation method for a selected variable Estimation Methods for Replacing Missing Values Series mean Replaces missing values with the mean for the entire series Mean of nearby points Replaces missing values with the mean of valid surrounding values The span of nearby points is the number of valid values above and below the missing value used to compute the mean Median of nearby points Replaces missing values with the median of valid surrounding values The span of nearby points is the number of valid values above and below the missing value used to compute the median Linear interpolation Replaces missing values using a linear interpolation The last valid value before the missing value and the first valid value after the missing value are used for the interpolation If the first or last case in the series has a missing value the missing value is not replaced Linear trend at point Replaces missing values with the linear trend for that point The existing series is regressed on an index variable scaled 1 to n Missing values are replaced with their predicted values Chapter File Handling and File Transformations Data files are not always organized in the ideal form for your specific needs You may want to combine data files sort the data in a different order select a subset of c
563. width of the variable Note Changing the column width does not affect the variable width Editing data With the Data Editor you can modify data values in Data View in many ways You can m Change data values Cut copy and paste data values 84 Chapter 5 m Add and delete cases m Add and delete variables m Change the order of variables Replacing or modifying data values gt gt gt To Delete the Old Value and Enter a New Value In Data View double click the cell The cell value is displayed in the cell editor Edit the value directly in the cell or in the cell editor Press Enter or select another cell to record the new value Cutting copying and pasting data values You can cut copy and paste individual cell values or groups of values in the Data Editor You can m Move or copy a single cell value to another cell Move or copy a single cell value to a group of cells Move or copy the values for a single case row to multiple cases Move or copy the values for a single variable column to multiple variables Move or copy a group of cell values to another group of cells Data conversion for pasted values in the data editor If the defined variable types of the source and target cells are not the same the Data Editor attempts to convert the value If no conversion is possible the system missing value is inserted in the target cell Converting numeric or date into string Numeric for example n
564. wo or more SPSS Statistics data files Reading database tables with the Database Wizard Merging SPSS Statistics data files with database tables Running procedures that read data for example Frequencies Crosstabs Explore Actions that create one or more columns of data in temporary disk space include Computing new variables m Recoding existing variables m Running procedures that create or modify variables for example saving predicted values in Linear Regression Actions that create an entire copy of the data file in temporary disk space include m Reading Excel files Running procedures that sort data for example Sort Cases Split File Reading data with GET TRANSLATE or DATA LIST commands Using the Cache Data facility or the CACHE command Launching other applications from SPSS Statistics that read the data file for example AnswerTree DecisionTime Note The GET DATA command provides functionality comparable to DATA LIST without creating an entire copy of the data file in temporary disk space The SPLIT FILE command in command syntax does not sort the data file and therefore does not create a copy of the data file This command however requires sorted data for proper operation and the dialog box interface for this procedure will automatically sort the data file resulting in a complete copy of the data file Command syntax is not available with the Student Version Actions that create an entire copy of the data file by def
565. xcept for system missing are treated as valid 140 Chapter 8 Treat blank string values as user missing For string variables blank or null values are not treated as system missing This option will autorecode blank strings into a user missing value higher than the highest nonmissing value Templates You can save the autorecoding scheme in a template file and then apply it to other variables and other data files For example you may have a large number of alphanumeric product codes that you autorecode into integers every month but some months new product codes are added that change the original autorecoding scheme If you save the original scheme in a template and then apply 1t to the new data that contain the new set of codes any new codes encountered in the data are autorecoded into values higher than the last value in the template preserving the original autorecode scheme of the original product codes Save template as Saves the autorecode scheme for the selected variables in an external template file m The template contains information that maps the original nonmissing values to the recoded values m Only information for nonmissing values is saved in the template User missing value information is not retained m Ifyou have selected multiple variables for recoding but you have not selected to use the same autorecoding scheme for all variables or you are not applying an existing template as part of the autorecoding the
566. y you will want to focus your modeling efforts on the predictor fields that matter most and consider dropping or ignoring those that matter least The predictor importance chart helps you do this by indicating the relative importance of each predictor in estimating the model Since the values are relative the sum of the values for all predictors on the display is 1 0 Predictor importance does not relate to model accuracy It just relates to the importance of each predictor in making a prediction not whether or not the prediction is accurate Predictor importance is not available for all ensemble models The predictor set may vary across component models but importance can be computed for predictors used in at least one component model Predictor Frequency Figure 12 7 Predictor Frequency view Predictor Frequency Other debt in thousands Level of education Household income in thousands Years with current employer Debt to income ratio x100 e oo Models othdebt 1 Least Frequent Most Frequent Credit card debt in thousands Age in B Years at current i a The predictor set can vary across component models due to the choice of modeling method or predictor selection The Predictor Frequency plot is a dot plot that shows the distribution of predictors across component models in the ensemble Each dot represents one or more component models containing the predictor Predictors are plotted on the y axis and are
567. y that achieves the single highest probability across all base models Highest mean probability selects the category with the highest value when the category probabilities are averaged across base models m Ensemble predicted values for continuous targets can be combined using the mean or median of the predicted values from the base models 257 Models The default is taken from the specifications made during model building Changing the combining rule recomputes the model accuracy and updates all views of model accuracy The Predictor Importance chart also updates This control is disabled if the reference model is selected for scoring Show All Combining rules When selected results for all available combining rules are shown in the model quality chart The Component Model Accuracy chart is also updated to show reference lines for each voting method Model Summary Figure 12 5 Model Summary view Model Summary Target Previously defaulted Quality Worse Better Wana S 74 12 Y Kawe 73 86 ae 71 18 0 100 Accuracy Diversity Worse i Better 7 A 0 00 0 25 0 50 0 75 1 00 The Model Summary view is a snapshot at a glance summary of the ensemble quality and diversity 258 Chapter 12 Quality The chart displays the accuracy of the final model compared to a reference model and a naive model Accuracy is presented in larger is better format the best model will have the highest accuracy For a catego
568. your actual data Instead it uses randomly generated data to provide a rough sketch of how the chart will look Using the gallery is the preferred method for new users For information about using the gallery see Building a Chart from the Gallery on p 281 How to Start the Chart Builder gt From the menus choose Graphs gt Chart Builder This opens the Chart Builder dialog box Copyright IBM Corporation 1989 2011 280 281 Overview of the chart facility Figure 14 1 Chart Builder dialog box KE Chart Builder E Wariables Chart preview uses example data Marital status marital E Years at current ad E Household income i dl Income category in Drag a Gallery chart here to use it as your starting point 8 Price of primary ve al Primary vehicle pric OR E Level of education E Years with current Retired retire al Years with current No categories scale vanabie Click on the Basic Elements tab to build a chart element by element Hol ball ad IIS Building a Chart from the Gallery The easiest method for building charts is to use the gallery Following are general steps for building a chart from the gallery gt Click the Gallery tab if it is not already displayed In the Choose From list select a category of charts Each category offers several types gt Drag the picture of the desired chart onto the canvas You can also double click the
569. your syntax with an indentation style similar to syntax pasted from a dialog box m Step Through You can step through command syntax one command at a time advancing to the next command with a single click Note When working with right to left languages it is recommended to check the Optimize for right to left languages box on the Syntax Editor tab in the Options dialog box Syntax Editor Window Figure 13 3 Syntax Editor Syntax1 Syntax Editor Cl File Edit Yiew Data Transform Analyze Graphs Utilities Run Tools Add ons Window Help 288 6 EE A Do OS 2 Ws e Active DataSetl Y GET FILE examples data demo sav U FREQUENCIES VARIABLES martal O ORDER ANALYSIS Y CROSSTABS TABLES ownpda BY gender BY inccat FORMAT AVALUE TABLES CELLS COUNT EXPECTED ROW O COUNT ROUND CELL 0 0 JO MH 0 hm Command Information Text martal n undefined variable name or a scratch or system variable was specified in a variable list Frequencies which accepts only standard variables Check spelling and verify the existence of this variable This command not executed Processor is ready In4 Col 10 270 Chapter 13 The Syntax Editor window is divided into four areas The editor pane is the main part of the Syntax Editor window and is where you enter and edit command syntax The gutter is adjacent to the editor pane and displays information such as line numbers and
570. ze output by groups Current Status Analysis by groups is off COC tna genet cance oo Compare groups Split file groups are presented together for comparison purposes For pivot tables a single pivot table is created and each split file variable can be moved between table dimensions For charts a separate chart is created for each split file group and the charts are displayed together in the Viewer 178 Chapter 9 Organize output by groups All results from each procedure are displayed separately for each split file group To Split a Data File for Analysis gt From the menus choose Data gt Split File gt Select Compare groups or Organize output by groups gt Select one or more grouping variables Select Cases Select Cases provides several methods for selecting a subgroup of cases based on criteria that include variables and complex expressions You can also select a random sample of cases The criteria used to define a subgroup can include Variable values and ranges Date and time ranges Case row numbers Arithmetic expressions Logical expressions Functions 179 File Handling and File Transformations Figure 9 11 Select Cases dialog box i Select Cases p Select S Age in years age lt All cases Marital status marital If condition is satisfied 8E Years at current ad n income gt 50000 L Household income i Random sample of cases dl Income

BM SPSS Statistics 20 Core System user manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents